1 Specifications PDF

STATE OF COLORADO
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
Maintenance & Operations Branch
Property Management Section
15285 S. Golden Road, Bldg. 47
Golden, Colorado 80401
DE BEQUE + RIFLE 10-FT ADDITIONS
SAP #18942 (RIFLE)

#18609 (DE BEQUE)
SPECIFICATIONS
August 28, 2013
Table of Contents
DE BEQUE & RIFLE
10 FOOT ADDITIONS
AUGUST 28, 2013
DE BEQUE PROJECT # 18609
RIFLE PROJECT # 18942
Section
01010
01095
01200
01300
01700
01782
02300
02350
02370
02740
02751
03300
05500
06100
06640
07110
07210
07260
07272
07920
08110
08305
08360
08520
08710
08800
09260
09310
09511
09650
09900
10200
10425
10520
10800
Title
Summary of Work
Reference Standards, Codes and Definitions
Project Meetings
Submittals
Project Closeout
Operation and Maintenance Data
Earthwork for Buildings and Structures
Site Grading
Temporary Controls
Asphalt Paving
Exterior Concrete Flatwork
Cast-In-Place Concrete
Miscellaneous Metals
Rough Carpentry
Plastic Paneling
Dampproofing
Building Insulation
Vapor Retarders
Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barriers
Joint Sealants
Steel Doors, Windows and Frames
Access Doors
Sectional Overhead Doors
Aluminum Windows
Door Hardware
Glazing
Gypsum Board Assemblies
Ceramic Tile
Acoustical Panel Ceilings
Resilient Accessories
Painting
Louvers and Vents
Signs
Fire Protection Specialties
Toilet and Bath Accessories
Pages
1-4
1-6
1-2
1-4
1-2
1-6
1-10
1-6
1-2
1-6
1-4
1-24
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-6
1-4
1-8
1-6
1-6
1-4
1-8
1-6
1-10
1-10
1-12
1-8
1-4
1-4
1-10
1-6
1-4
1-4
1-6
Table of Contents
DE BEQUE & RIFLE
10 FOOT ADDITIONS
AUGUST 28, 2013
Section
11000
13122
15010
15050
15060
15160
15180
15190
15400
15412
15430
15450
15543
15600
15743
15800
15838
15890
15900
16010
16050
16060
16075
16121
16130
16140
16170
16470
16475
16515
Title
Equipment General Requirements
Metal Building Systems
General Mechanical Requirements
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Pipe and Accessories
Vibration Isolation
Pipe Insulation
Mechanical Identification
Plumbing
Emergency Plumbing Fixtures
Plumbing Specialties (Compressed Air System)
Plumbing Fixtures and Trim
Fuel-Fired Unit Heaters
Heat Generation
Packaged Terminal Air-Conditioners
Air Distribution System (Exhaust & Ceiling Fans)
HVAC Fans
Ductwork
Temperature Control (Electric)
Basic Electrical Requirements
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Grounding and Bonding
Electrical Identification
Communication Cables
Raceways and Boxes
Wiring Devices
Motor and Circuit Disconnects
Panel Boards
Overcurrent Protection Devices
Lighting
Pages
1-10
1-10
1-16
1-22
1-8
1-2
1-4
1-4
1-16
1-2
1-2
1-4
1-4
1-2
1-6
1-4
1-6
1-6
1-2
1-16
1-18
1-8
1-6
1-4
1-6
1-8
1-2
1-4
1-4
1-14
Table of Contents
DE BEQUE & RIFLE
10 FOOT ADDITIONS
AUGUST 28, 2013
Section
Date:
July 18,
2013
Date:
June 27,
2013
Date:
June 27,
2013
Title
Additional Project Information:

Design/Bid/Build Scope of Work
DE BEQUE & RIFLE 10 FOOT ADDITIONS
De Beque Project # 18609
Rifle Project # 18942
Geotechnical Engineering Study, Proposed Addition to
CDOT Vehicle Storage Facility,
4615 Old Highway 6, De Beque, Colorado
Project No. 13-1-277
Geotechnical Engineering Study, Proposed Addition to
CDOT Vehicle Storage Facility,
360 7th Street, Rifle, Colorado
Pages
By:
CDOT
By:
Kumar +
Associates
By:
Kumar +
Associates
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 -
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Provisions of The General Conditions of the Contract (Design/Bid/Build) and Division 1

General Requirements and applicable provisions elsewhere in the contract documents apply
to this Section.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A.
The Project Information and Contacts are:

1.
Project Title:
DE BEQUE & RIFLE 10-FT ADDITIONS

De Beque Project Number 18609
Rifle Project Number 18942
2.
Project Location:
Colorado Department of Transportation

DE BEQUE:
4615 State Highway 6, De Beque, CO 81630
RIFLE:
360 South 7th Street, Rifle, CO 81650
3.
Owner: (Denver)

15285 South Golden Road, Building 47
Golden, CO 80401
4.
CDOT Project Manager:
Anne Feeser- Olesen

15285 S. Golden Road # 47
Golden, CO 80401
(P) 303-512-5522; (F) 303-512-5550; (C) 303-548-6819
e-mail: anne.feeser@state.co.us
5.
CDOT Architect:
Chris Jahn, AIA

15285 S. Golden Road, # 47
Golden, CO 80401
(P) 303-512-5518; (F) 303-512-5550; (C) 303-325-6121
e-mail: christopher.jahn@state.co.us
6.
Contracted Engineer,
Civil, Structural
Richard Weingardt Consultants, Inc.

9725 East Hampden Ave., Suite 200
Denver, CO 80231
(P); 303-671-7033
e-mail: jdavis@weingardt.com
Structural:
Tom Fast / John Davis, P.E.
Civil:
David Hargrove, P.E.
7.
Contracted Engineer,
Mechanical,
Electrical
MEP Engineers
6402 South Troy Circle
Centennial, CO 80111
(P) 303-936-1633
Email: kevin@mep-eng.com
Electrical:
Anna Lisa Conners / Kevin Przytarski
Mechanical:
Chris Geipel
Plumbing:
David Hartman

SUMMARY OF WORK
01010 - 1
B.
The Work consists of the Architectural, Civil, Structural, Mechanical, Plumbing, and Electrical
work as shown on the Drawings, specified in the Specifications and as otherwise amended
by Addendum prior to bidding. Bidding General Contractors to verify tie-ins to Gas, Electrical
and Water prior to submitting bids.
5. Work includes all labor, material, equipment, means and methods to perform the
construction of all infrastructure, site work and buildings as shown on the Drawings.
C.
Geotechnical Report: Reference

Geotechnical Engineering Study, Proposed Addition to CDOT
Vehicle Storage Facility,
4615 Old Highway 6, De Beque, Colorado
Prepared by : Kumar + Associates, June 27, 2013
Geotechnical Engineering Study, Proposed Addition to CDOT
Vehicle Storage Facility,
360 7th Street, Rifle, Colorado
Prepared by : Kumar + Associates, June 27, 2013
D.
Submittal Log is provided as part of the Project Documents. Submittals are due from the
Contractor to the Owner on the specific dates indicated. This log delineates due dates based
on the Notice to Proceed date of the project. Failure to meet these deadlines will have an
effect on Contractors overall rating as part of the Contract Management System
requirements.
1.3
CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES

A.
General: The Contractor shall have limited use of the premises during the construction
period. The existing maintenance facility on site needs to continue to function during
construction. Coordinate with owner before disrupting utilities to occupied structures.
B.
Limit use of premises to areas indicated or directed. Do not disturb portions of the area and
site beyond the areas indicated or directed.
C.
Allow for Owner occupancy and use.
D.
Keep driveways and entrances clear. Unless directed, do not use these areas for parking or
material storage. Schedule deliveries to minimize on-site storage of materials and
equipment.
E.
Work currently underway at the Site. The Contractor shall be made aware if construction
work is planned or is currently underway at the site.
F.
Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy and use the site during construction.
Cooperate with the Owner to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Do not interfere
with the Owner's operations.
G.
Owner Provided Utilities: The Owner shall make available the following utilities for use by the
Contractor during construction.
1. Existing electrical; coordinate with electrical company.
H.
Contractor Provided Utilities: The Contractor shall provide for the following temporary service
utilities during construction:

SUMMARY OF WORK
01010 - 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
Telephone
Toilets
Water
Electrical Power
I.
On-Site Storage: On-Site storage will need to be arranged with CDOT at pre-construction
meeting.
J.
Contractor Provided Permits and Fees: The Contractor shall provide for all permits and fees
which may include, but not be limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
State Electrical and State Plumbing permits

Traffic Permits
Use Fees
Fire Department Review by local jurisdiction, including fire alarm design review.
Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment Permits required for
construction.
K.
Contractor to provide fencing around construction area to secure job site and staging, at
contractors risk.
L.
Owner pays the following fees:

1.
2.
3.
4.
PART 2 PART 3 -
State contracted code review, inspection fees

Tap fees
Electrical service upgrade fees
Fire Line Connection fees, if needed
PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION

SUMMARY OF WORK
01010 - 3

SUMMARY OF WORK
01010 - 4
SECTION 01095
REFERENCE STANDARDS, CODES AND DEFINITIONS
PART 1 -
GENERAL
1.1
Related Documents: Provisions of The General Conditions of the Contract (Design/Bid/Build)

and Division 1 General Requirements and applicable provisions elsewhere in the contract
documents apply to this Section.
1.2
Indicated refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, paragraphs or

Schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms
such as shown, noted, scheduled, and specified are used to help the reader locate the reference.
Location is not limited.
1.3
Directed, requested, authorized, selected, approved, required, and permitted mean directed by
the CDOT Representative, requested by the CDOT Representative, and similar phrases.
1.4
Reviewed, when used in conjunction with the CDOT Representative's action on submittals,
applications, and requests, is limited to the CDOT Representatives duties and responsibilities as
stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
1.5
Regulations include laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that
control performance of the Work.
1.6
Furnish means supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
1.7
Install describes operations at the Project Site including unloading, unpacking, assembly,
erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting,
cleaning, and similar operations.
1.8
Provide means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
1.9
Installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee,
subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity, including
installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Installers are required to be
experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform.
A.
The term experienced, when used with the term Installer, means having a minimum of 5 previous
projects similar in size and scope to this Project, being familiar with the special requirements
indicated, and having complied with requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction.
1.10
Project Site is the space available for performing construction activities, either exclusively or in
conjunction, with others performing work as part of the Project.
1.11
Testing Agency is an independent entity, or Geotechnical Company of Record, engaged to

perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project Site or elsewhere, or to report on and, if
required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests.

REFERENCE STANDARDS,
CODES AND DEFINITIONS
01095 - 1
1.12
Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the Construction Specifications
Institute's 16-Division format.
A.
Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications is abbreviated. Implied words and

meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural and
plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents
indicates.
B.
Imperative and streamlined language is used. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood
are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the Text, subjective language is
used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or by
others when so noted.
1. The words "shall be" are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
1.13
Abbreviations and Names: Where acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association,
standards-generating organization, authorities having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the
context of the text provision. Refer to the "Encyclopedia of Associations," published by Gale
Research Co., available in most libraries.
1.14
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments (including taxes), judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents,
established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon
performance of the Work.
1.15
CODES, ORDINANCES, PERMITS AND FEES
A.
Execute work per underwriters, public utility, local, state codes, ordinances, and regulations
applicable. Contact city water and sewer agencies for verification of all requirements, permits,
state fees and inspections prior to submitting bid. Obtain and pay for state plumbing and state
electrical required permits, inspections, utility service connections, meters and certificates.
Systems development fees and similar charges are not to be included in the bid, as they will be
paid directly to the utility agency by the Owner upon notification. Notify CDOT Representative of
items not meeting said requirements.
B.
This Contractor shall include in the work, all labor, materials, services, apparatus and drawings, in
order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, whether or not shown
on drawings and /or specified.
C.
All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the National Fire Codes of the
National Fire Protection Association, with the requirements of local utility companies, and with the
requirements of all governmental departments having jurisdiction. In the event of a conflict,
applicable codes and ordinances shall take precedence over this specification or contract
drawings.
D.
All material and equipment for the electrical portion of the mechanical systems shall bear the
approval label of, or shall be listed by the Underwriter's Laboratories, Incorporated, and shall be
installed in compliance with the National Electric Code.
E.
Comply with the latest edition and/or the adopted edition of the following codes and standards as
a minimum Approved State Building Codes:
The following approved building codes and standards have been adopted by State Buildings

01095 - 2
Programs (SBP) as the minimum requirements to be applied to all state-owned buildings and
physical facilities including capital construction and controlled maintenance construction projects:
The 2009 edition of the International Building Code (IBC)

(As adopted by the Colorado State Buildings and Real Estate Programs as follows: Chapter 1
as amended, Chapters 2-35 and Appendices C and I)
The 2009 edition of the International Mechanical Code (IMC)
(As adopted by the Colorado State Buildings and Real Estate Programs as follows: Chapters 215 and Appendix A)
The 2009 edition of the International Energy Conservation Code (IECC)
(As adopted by the Colorado State Buildings Program)
The 2011 edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC)
(National Fire Protection Association Standard 70) (As adopted by the Colorado State Electrical
Board)
The 2009 edition of the International Plumbing Code (IPC)
(As adopted by the Colorado Examining Board of Plumbers as follows: Chapter 1 Section
101.2,102, 105, 107, Chapters 2-13 and Appendices B, D, E, F and G)
The 2009 edition of the International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC)
101,102, 105, 107, Chapters 2-8 and Appendices A, B and C)
The National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA)
(as adopted by the Department of Public Safety/Division of Fire Safety as follows with editions
shown in parentheses: NFPA-1 (2006), 11 (2005), 12 (2005), 12A (2004), 13 (2002), 13D
(2002), 13R (2002), 14 (2003), 15 (2001), 16 (2003), 17 (2002), 17A (2002), 20 (2003), 22
(2003), 24 (2002), 25 (2002), 72 (2002), 409 (2004), 423 (2004), 750 (2003) and 2001 (2004))
The 2007 edition of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
(As adopted by the Department of Labor and Employment/Boiler Inspection Section as follows:
sections I, IV, VIII-Divisions 1 and 2 and 3, X and B31.1)
The 2007 edition of the National Boiler Inspection Code (NBIC)
(As adopted by the Department of Labor and Employment/Boiler Inspection Section)
The 2006 edition of the Controls and Safety Devices for Automatically Fired Boilers CSD-1
The 2007 edition of the Boiler and Combustion Systems Hazards Code, NFPA 85
The current edition of the Rules and Regulations Governing the Sanitation of Food
Service Establishments
(As adopted by the Department of Public Health and Environment/Colorado State Board of
Health)
The 2003 edition of ICC/ANSI A117.1, Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities
(As adopted by the Colorado General Assembly as follows: CRS 9-5-101, as amended, for
accessible housing)

01095 - 3
Sheet Metal and Conditioning Contractors National Assoc. Standards (SMACNA)

American Water Works Association (A.W.W.A.)
Local Utility Company Requirements
Local Governing Fire Department Requirements
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (N.E.M.A.)
Air Movement and Control Association (A.M.C.A.)
American Concrete Institute (A.C.I.)
Note: Additional codes, standards and appendices may be adopted by the state agencies and
institutions in addition to the minimum codes and standards herein adopted by State Buildings
Programs.
1. The 2012 edition of the IBC became effective on July 1, 2013. Consult the state electrical and
plumbing boards and the state boiler inspector and the Division of Fire Safety for adoption of
current editions and amendments to their codes.
2. Projects should be designed and plans and specifications should be reviewed based upon
the approved codes at the time of A/E contract execution. If an agency prefers to design to a
different code such as a newer edition of a code that State Buildings Programs has not yet
adopted, the agency must contact SBP for approval and then amend the A/E contract with a
revised Exhibit C, Approved State Building Codes. Please note that the state plumbing and
electrical boards enforce the editions of their codes that are in effect at the time of permitting
not design.
3. The states code review agents, or the State Buildings Programs approved agency building
official, shall review all documents for compliance with the codes stipulated herein. Note: The
Department of Public Health and Environment, Division of Consumer Protection will review
drawings for food service related projects.
4. This policy does not prohibit the application of various life safety codes as established by
each agency for specific building types and funding requirements. NFPA 101 and other
standards notwithstanding, approved codes will supersede where their minimum
requirements are the most restrictive in specific situations. If a conflict arises, contact State
Buildings Programs for resolution.
5. It is anticipated that compliance with the federal Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility
Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) and Colorado Revised Statutes Section 9-5101 will be met by compliance with the 2009 International Building Code and ICC/ANSI
A117.1. However, each project may have unique aspects that may require individual
attention to these legislated mandates.
6. The 2012 edition of the International Building Code (IBC) is to be applied to factory-built
nonresidential structures as established by the Division of Housing within the Department of
Local Affairs.

01095 - 4
F.
Appendices
Appendices are provided to supplement the basic provisions of the codes. Approved IBC
Appendices are as follows:
1. Mandatory
IBC Appendix Chapter C - Agricultural Buildings
IBC Appendix Chapter I - Patio Covers
2. Optional
Any non-mandatory appendix published in the International Building Code may be utilized at
the discretion of the agency. Use of an appendix shall be indicated in the project code
approach.
G.
Amendments
None
H.
Referenced Codes
1. While not adopted in entirety, portions of the following codes are referenced in the
International Building Code (IBC), the International Mechanical Code (IMC), the International
Energy Conservation Code (IECC) the International Plumbing Code (IPC), and the
International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC). These following codes would be applied as reference
standards.
2012 International Fire Code (IFC)
2012 International Existing Building Code (IEBC)
I.
Referenced Standards
The IBC, IMC, IECC, IPC and IFGC standards shall be utilized to provide specific, or prescriptive,
requirements on how to achieve the requirements established in the code. These standards may
be unique to the code or may be derived from other established industry standards. Recognized
standards may also be used to show compliance with the standard of duty established by the
code.
PART 2 -
PRODUCTS (Not Applicable):
PART 3 -
EXECUTION (Not Applicable):
END OF SECTION

01095 - 5

01095 - 6
SECTION 01200
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2

to this Section.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Preconstruction Conference
Construction Progress meetings
Project Closeout (Punch List) meeting
Project Final Inspection
Preconstruction Conference: Contractor shall attend a preconstruction conference, to be

held at the site of the Work, before starting construction to review responsibilities, personnel
assignments, and any other pertinent construction related issues. The time of the
preconstruction conference is to be determined by the Owner. Owner will provide notification
to the Contractor.
A.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Sub-Consultants

(as needed); the Contractor; subcontractors; and other concerned parties shall attend.
Participants shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to
the Work.
B.
Agenda: Discuss items that could affect progress, including, but not limited to the following:
1. Tentative construction schedule
2. Critical work sequencing
3. Conformance with CDOT procedures (CDOT Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction, Current Edition)
4. Submittals
5. Use of the premises
6. Anticipated interval of subsequent construction progress meetings
1.4
Construction Progress Meetings: Attend construction progress meetings at the Project Site
at regular intervals as scheduled by CDOT Project Manager or CDOT Architect. It is
anticipated that a Construction Progress Meeting shall take place during each site
observation visit that will be conducted by the CDOT Project Manager or CDOT Architect;
contractor will notify pertinent sub-contractors.
A.
Attendees: CDOT Project Manager or CDOT Architect, the Contractor, subcontractors; and
other concerned parties shall attend. All parties concerned with current progress or involved
in planning, coordination, or future activities shall be represented. Participants shall be
authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
B.
Agenda: Review minutes of the previous construction progress meetings. Review items of
significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion appropriate to Project
status.

PROJECT MEETINGS
01200 - 1
1.5
Project Closeout (Punch List) Meeting: Attend project closeout (punch list) meeting, to be
conducted at the Project Site, after issuance of notification to the Owner or Architect of
substantial completion. The timing of the project closeout (punch list) meeting shall be
determined by the Owner. Owner will provide notification to the Contractor. The Contractor
shall be made aware that a Project Closeout (Punch List) Meeting shall not be
scheduled by the Owner unless, in the opinion of the Owner, the total number of minor
items that are anticipated to be included on the punch list shall be ten (10) or less and
include no major structural, inspection or other major issues.
A.
Attendees: The Owner, Architect, Engineer and their Sub-Consultants (as needed), CDOT
State Buildings Delegee, the Contractor, subcontractors; Owners code consultant and other
concerned parties shall attend. All parties concerned with project closeout events.
Participants shall be authorized to perform project closeout tasks.
B.
Agenda: Project Closeout (Punch List) Meeting is to be conducted by the Owner. Review
project closeout procedures, perform Punch List walk-through of the work for the purpose of
demonstrating to the Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Engineers Sub-Consultants (as
needed) and code compliance consultant that the work has been performed and completed
within the guidelines set forth in the Contract Documents.
C.
Record Documents: During the project closeout meeting, the Contractor shall make
arrangements to transfer the record documents to the CDOT Project Manager.
D.
Building Permit(s): During the project closeout meeting, the Contractor shall show evidence
to the Owner that all necessary building permits have been signed off by the governing code
authority on the Projects Building Inspection Report Yellow Card (State Buildings Form SBPBIR).
E.
Contract Closeout Final Punch List is written by Owner and communicated to Contractor on
State Buildings Form SBP 06 Rev. 9/2006.
1.6
Project Final Inspection written by CDOT State Buildings Delegee and communicated to
Contractor
A.
Attendees: The Owner, Architect, Engineer, Sub-Consultants (as needed), CDOT State
Buildings Delegee, the Contractor, subcontractors; Owners code consultant and other
concerned parties shall attend. All parties concerned with project closeout events.
Participants shall be authorized to perform remaining punch list items.
B.
Agenda: Final Inspection Meeting is to be conducted by the Owner. Review project closeout
procedures, perform final walk-through of the work for the purpose of demonstrating to the
Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Engineers Sub-Consultants (as needed) and code
compliance consultant that the punch list items has been performed and completed within the
guidelines set forth in the Contract Documents.
C.
Contract Closeout Final Punch List is written by Owner and communicated to Contractor on
State Buildings Form SBP 06 Rev. 9/2006.
PART 2 -
PART 3 -
END OF SECTION
PROJECT MEETINGS
01200 - 2
SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
PART 1 -
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.

to this Section.
1.2
Summary: This Section specifies requirements for handling submittals.
1.3
General Procedures: Coordinate submittal preparation with performance of construction

activities, and with purchasing or fabrication, delivery, other submittals and related activities.
Transmit per the due dates listed per activity on the Submittal Log provided by Owner or
Architect.
A.
Coordinate transmittal of different submittals for related elements so processing will not be
delayed by the need to review concurrently for coordination. Submit four (4) copies of paper
submittals and/or an electronic copy, a minimum of one (1) stamped copy and/or an
electronic copy will be returned to contractor. Electronic submittals are acceptable except in
the case where engineer-stamped drawings are required or color selection or material
selection is required. CDOT or the Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a
submittal requiring coordination until all related submittals are received.
B.
Processing: Contractor shall allow ten working days beyond the date at which the submittal
arrives for initial review. Allow more time if processing must be delayed for coordination with
other submittals. The Architect or Owner will advise the Contractor when a submittal must be
delayed for coordination.
1. No extension of time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals
sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing.
C.
Substitutions: Contractor may submit like products for review/acceptance. Contractor must
provide specific documentation evidencing that proposed product meets complete
specification. Owner or Architect may reject for substitution. Any substitutions must comply
with agreed-upon Submittal Log Date.
D.
Submittal Preparation: Place a label or title block on each submittal for identification. Include
the following minimum information on the label:
1.
2.
3.
4.
CDOT Project Name and Project Number

Date (of transmittal to Owner or Architect)
Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor
Indication of review by Contractor, date, and result of review. Submittals without
Contractor review stamp will not be accepted and will be returned without review.
5. Specification Section and Submittal Schedule number, the products included in the
Submittal relating to Submittal clearly referenced on the submittal package.
6. Subsequent resubmittals require a suffix to the Submittal Section number identifying the
resubmittal as such.
7. Meet agreed-upon Submittal Schedule
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 1
E.
Submittal Transmittal: Package submittals appropriately for transmittal and handling.

Transmit with a transmittal form identifying the name of the Submittal and product, the
Specification Section, and the Submittal Schedule number.
F.
Project-Specific Submittal Log: Owner will provide a project-specific Submittal Log to

Contractor at the Project Pre-Construction Meeting. Submittals are due from Contractor to
Owner on the specific dates indicated. At Pre-construction meeting, owner will provide
contractor proposed schedule of submittal due dates for review. Contractor must proposed
any date changes within seven (7) days of pre-construction meeting. All Submittals are due
by six (6) weeks from Notice to Proceed date. The Submittal Log delineates due dates based
on the Notice to Proceed date of the project. Failure to meet these submittal deadlines will
have an effect on the Contractors overall rating as part of the States Contract Management
System requirements.
1.4
Contractor's Construction Schedule: The Contractor shall submit a written/electronic detailed

construction schedule within seven (7) calendar days of receiving the Notice to Proceed from
the Owner. Provide for separation of major construction activities. Provide starting and
completion dates for major construction activities.
1.5
Weekly Construction Reports: Contractor shall prepare a weekly construction report

recording information concerning events at the site. Report shall be sent electronically every
Friday by 8:00 a.m. recapping the current weeks activities and projecting the next weeks
activities, for each work day. Weekly progress photos should be included with this report.
Submit one copy, each, to the Architect and Owner, electronic files are preferred. Reports
shall include the following information:
A.
Substantial completions.
B.
General weather conditions, if applicable.
C.
Accidents, stoppages, delays, shortages, losses. (Note: any accidents or delays/losses need
to be communicated verbally to Owner at the time of incident.)
D.
Change Order Bulletins, Change Order Proposals, Change Orders, Emergency Change
Orders, or Field Orders received and/or implemented. Written report does not substitute for
verbal telephone communication by Contractor to Owner or Architect and/or CDOT Project
Manager on any pertinent issue.
1.6
Manufacturer's Operations Manuals/Instructions: Prepare written or published information

that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing,
operating and maintaining a product or piece of equipment. Include name of product and
name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer and (if applicable) manufacturers
recommended repair service provider, indexed, and referencing the Specification Section
specific to the product or equipment. See Section 01782 Operations and Maintenance Data
for more detailed information.
1.7
Manufacturers Maintenance Manuals/Instructions: Prepare written or published information

that give manufacturers written and/or graphic instructions and procedures for normal
maintenance of products and pieces of equipment. Contractor shall collect in a binder and
present four (4) copies to the Owner or Architect, indexed, and referencing the Specification
Section specific to the product or equipment. See Section 01782 Operations and
Maintenance Data for more detailed information.

SUBMITTALS
01300 - 2
1.8
Shop Drawings: Submit new information, drawn to accurate scale. Indicate deviations from
Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as
the basis of Shop Drawings. Include the following information:
A.
Dimensions, elevations, heights, etc.
B.
Identification of products and materials included.
C.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
D.
Coordination Drawings: General Contractor is required to prepare Coordination Drawings to

include: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans and/or building sections and details as
appropriate, drawn to scale and dimensioned, and coordinating penetrations, mounting,
clearances, embeds for the following:
1. Piping penetrations through foundation and slab, including adjacency to metal building
structure and framing, concrete curbs, foundations, and column bases; Steel embeds or
base plates for bollards, steel stair system, insulation system meeting the requirements of
IECC 2009; Track mounting clearance and attachment for overhead door system
including concrete curbs and column bases and adjacency to metal building structure and
framing, lighting and fans, and clerestory glazing to ensure required clearance at
overhead door openings; Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, ceiling fans,
diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers (if required), radiant heat system, exhaust and
ventilation system, access panels, vents, compressed air piping. General Contractor
shall provide the delivery date of Coordination Drawings to review, and the content of the
Coordination Drawings package or packages.
E.
Submittal: Submit electronic drawings or correctable, translucent, reproducible print(s) and

one copy made from the translucent, reproducible print(s) for review if the submittal is in the
form of a drawing. Submit four identical copies for review if the submittal is in the form of cut
sheets, written data, etc. The reproducible print(s) (if submittal is in the form of a drawing) or
one copy (if the submittal is in the form of cut sheets, written data, etc.) will be returned to the
Contractor marked with action taken and corrections or modifications required after review by
Architect, Owner, Engineers and Code Reviewer. The Contractor shall make all necessary
copies of the returned reproducible print or copy for distribution to Sub-Contractors or
affected parties. Submittals must have the stamp and signature of the Contractor, indicating
the General Contractor has reviewed the Submittal prior to submission to the Architect,
Owner, Engineer, and Code Reviewer. Submittals not reviewed by General Contractor will
be returned un-reviewed by the Architect.
F.
Do not fabricate or install any items from Shop Drawings without a final stamp from CDOT,
the Architect or the Engineer which indicates action to be taken (if any) by the Contractor.
1.9
Product Data: Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element or system. Mark
each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where Product Data includes information
on several products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable
information. Include, as applicable, the following information:
A.
Manufacturer's printed recommendations.
B.
Compliance with recognized testing agency standards and with the requirements of the
Specifications.

SUBMITTALS
01300 - 3
C.
Application of testing agency labels and seals.
D.
Submittal: Submit four identical copies or an electronic copy of product data. One copy will
be returned to the Contractor marked with action taken and corrections or modifications
required after review by Architect, Owner, Engineers and Code Reviewer. The Contractor
shall make all necessary copies of the returned submittal for distribution to Sub-Contractors
or affected parties.
1.10
Owner or Architects Action: Owner, Architect, and/or Engineers will review each submittal,
mark to indicate action taken, and return. Compliance with specified characteristics is the
Contractor's responsibility.
1.11
Action Stamp: The Owner or Architect, or Engineer will stamp each submittal with an action
stamp or transmittal. The stamp or transmittal will be marked to indicate action to be taken.
PART 2 -
PART 3 -
END OF SECTION

SUBMITTALS
01300 - 4
SECTION 01700
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 -
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2

to this Section.
COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK
A.
1.3
The Contractor shall communicate to Owner or Architect that project is substantially

complete. Owner will schedule a Project Closeout (Punch List) Meeting. The project shall be
considered complete when, in the Owner or Architects opinion, a list of incomplete work does
not exceed ten (10) minor items of the Work. Should the Owner or Architect determine that
the work is not complete, the Owner or Architect will immediately notify the Contractor, in
writing, stating reasons why the project is not considered complete. Project is not
considered complete if there are major issues outstanding or incomplete or failed inspections.
Should the Owner or Architect determine that the work is complete, after the walk through,
the Owner or Architect will prepare and issue a punch list of deficiencies that need to be
corrected before final acceptance. After Contractor brings the project into a state of
completion, a Final Inspection Meeting shall be set up by the Owner or Architect. The
Contractor is made aware that all additional costs associated with re-inspection shall be paid
from monies otherwise earned by the Contractor. These costs shall include the Owner or
Architects labor (time) and all associated costs of travel to the project site to attend the
follow-up Project Closeout (Punch List) Meeting.
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
1.4
Maintain a clean, undamaged set of Contract Drawings. Mark-up these drawings to show the
actual installation. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to
measure and record at a later date. The Record Drawings shall be kept current and shall be
marked-up as necessary during the course of executing the Work. If requested by the Owner
or Architect, the Contractor shall show evidence that the Record Drawings are current as a
precedent to approval of Contractor Payment Applications.
RECORD SPECIFICATIONS, FINAL AS-BUILT PLANS

A.
Maintain one copy of the Project Manual, including addenda. Mark to show variations in
actual Work performed in comparison with the Specifications and modifications. The Record
Specifications shall be kept current and shall be marked-up as necessary during the course
of executing the Work. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of options and
similar information on elements that are concealed or cannot be readily discerned later by
direct observation. If requested by the Architect or Owner, the Contractor shall show
evidence that the Record Specifications are current as a precedent to approval of Contractor
Payment Applications.
B.
Upon completion of Project, two (2) copies of final, accurate as-built drawings shall be
delivered to the Architect or Owner. This complete submittal shall include all drawings,

PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01700 - 1
including architectural, structural/civil engineering, mechanical, electrical, plumbing and fire.
1.5
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O & M) MANUAL

A.
1.6
Refer to Section 01782, Operations & Maintenance Manual, for further information on O & M
specifics.
START-UP, OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION

A.
Unless directed otherwise in Divisions 11, 13, 15 or 16, the Contractor shall arrange for
training and instruction of the Owner's personnel in proper start-up, operation and
maintenance procedures for all devices and equipment installed in this contract. All training
and instruction is intended to be completed in one session, however, at the mutual consent of
the Contractor and Owner, more than one session may take place. Schedule training with
Owner or Architect, most likely to take place on the day of the Substantial Completion Walk
Thru. The total length of the training and instruction session(s) shall not exceed 8 hours
unless mutually agreed upon by the Owner and the Contractor. Training and instruction in
excess of 8 hours shall not be compensated by the Owner. Training and Instruction shall
include, but not be limited to, the following topics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.7
Start-up procedures
Operating instructions
Shut-down procedures
Review of Operating and Maintenance manuals
FINAL CLEANING
A.
Complete the following before providing notification that the work is complete:
1. Remove labels that are not permanent labels.
2. Clean exposed hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films and
similar foreign substances.
3. Clean the site of rubbish, litter and other foreign substances. See Special Conditions.
B.
Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards
for cleaning. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner.
PART 2 -
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable):
PART 3 -
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable):
END OF SECTION

PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01700 - 2
SECTION 01782
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 -
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Provisions of The General Conditions of the Contract (Design/Bid/Build) and Division 1 General
Requirements and applicable provisions elsewhere in the contract documents apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.3
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1.
Operation manuals for systems and equipment
2.
Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of systems and equipment
Related Sections include the following:

1.
Section 01300 "Submittals" for submitting copies of operation and maintenance manuals.
2.
Section 01700 Project Closeout for timing of Operation and Maintenance Training for
Owner.
DEFINITIONS
A.
System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular

interaction.
B.
Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Preliminary Submittal: Submit two (2) copies of Operations and Maintenance manual in final
form prior to of the Project Closeout (Punch List) Meeting. Owner or Architect will return copy
with comments within 10 days of receipt.
1.
1.5
Correct or modify manual to comply with Owner or Architects comments. Submit four (4)
copies of corrected manual within 10 days of receipt of Owner or Architects comments.
COORDINATION
A.
Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more

than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information
furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

01782 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUALS, GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize the information required in the manual into
a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of
equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order
listed:
1.
Title page
2.
Table of contents
3.
Manual contents
Title Page: Include the following information:

1.
Subject matter included in manual
2.
Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor
Table of Contents: List each product included in the manual.

1.
If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to

accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each
volume of the set.
2.
Include Specification Section Number for each product in table of contents
3.
Include the final copy of the Submittal Log
Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents by specification
section number and then alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible,
assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single
binder.
1.
Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to

accommodate contents, (3 inch wide maximum) sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper;
with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents.
a.
Identify binder(s) on spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume
number for multiple-volume sets.
2.
Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each
tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of
equipment included in the section on each divider.
3.
Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.
4.
Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a.
If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.


01782 - 2
2.2
OPERATION MANUALS
A.
The Contractor shall refer to Divisions 11, 13, 15 and 16 specifications concerning the O & M
manuals for devices germane to Divisions 13, 15 and 16. Unless otherwise indicated,
organize O & M manuals into 3-ring binders.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
Copies of Warranties
Index referencing Specification section number
Clear identification of specific product(s) or equipment used
Identification of equipment or products identified in the project manual that may not be
typical
Parts list(s)
Start-up procedures
Operating Instructions
Wiring Diagrams
Piped system diagrams
Maintenance instructions
Manufacturer and/or Representative including:
a. Name of Firm, Address, Telephone Number, Facsimile Number, Contact Name and
e-mail address
List of Contractors, Sub-Contractors
a. Name of Firm, Address, Telephone Number, Facsimile Number, Contact Name and
e-mail address
Preliminary Submittal: Submit two (2) copies of each manual in final form prior to the Project
Closeout (Punch List) Meeting. Owner or Architect will return copy with comments within 10
days of receipt.
1. Correct or modify manual to comply with Owner or Architect's comments. Submit four (4)
final copies of each corrected manual within 10 days of receipt of Owner or Architect's
comments.
C.
Manuals shall be prepared from the following materials:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Loose leaf, punched paper

Holes reinforced with plastic cloth
Page size, 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches
Foldout diagrams and illustrations
Reproducible by dry-copy xerography method
Oil-, moisture- and wear-resistant plastic covers
1. General Requirements for Manuals:

a. Manufacturer's operating manuals giving complete instructions relative to assembly,
installation operation, adjustment, lubrication, maintenance, and carrying complete
parts list shall be furnished by the Contractor for every item of machinery and
equipment furnished by the Contractor.
b. Manuals furnished may be manufacturer's standard publications in regard to size and
binding provided they comply with specified requirements relative to quantity and
quality of information and data.
c. Manuals shall be bound in hard or flexible covers. Illustrations shall be clear, and
printed matter, including dimensions and lettering on drawings, shall be easily legible.
If reduced drawings are incorporated into manuals, original lines and letters shall be
darkened as necessary to retain their legibility after reduction. Larger drawings may

01782 - 3
be folded into manuals to page size.

2. Format Manuals as follows:
a. Title page: Include the name and function of the equipment, manufacturer's
identification number, and the project Specifications number and title.
b. Table of contents, in numerical order listing each section and subsection title of the
O&M Manual with reference to the page on which each starts and a list of included
diagrams and drawings.
c. Index, in alphabetical order.
d. Frontispiece: Recognition illustration of the equipment described in the O&M Manual.
e. Manufacturer's literature describing each piece of equipment, including major
assemblies and subassemblies, and giving manufacturer's model number and
drawing number.
f. Operation instructions including step-by-step preparation for starting, safe operation,
shutdown and draining, and emergency requirements.
g. Control diagrams, as-installed by the manufacturer.
h. Sequence of operation by the control manufacturer.
i. Wiring diagrams, as-installed and color codes, of electrical motor controllers,
connections and interlock connections.
j. Diagrammatic location, function and tag numbers of each valve.
k. Maintenance instructions: Include step-by-step procedures for inspection, operation
checks, cleaning, lubrication, adjustments, repair, overhaul, disassembly, and
reassembly of the equipment for proper safe operation of the equipment. Include list
of special tools which are required for maintenance with the maintenance information.
l. Possible breakdowns and repairs.
m. Manufacturer's parts list of functional components, control diagrams and wiring
diagrams, giving manufacturer's model number and manufacturer's part number.
n. "Long-Lead-Time" spare parts list for spare parts not readily available on the local
open market or for which it is anticipated ordering and delivery time will exceed 10
days.
o. List of nearest local suppliers of all equipment parts.
p. Lubrication schedule indicating type and frequency of lubrication.
q. Manufacturer's warranty and guarantee data.
r. Spare parts data as follows:
(1 Complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and sources of
supply.
(2 List of parts and supplies that are either normally furnished at no extra cost with
purchase of equipment, or specified herein to be furnished as part of Contract.
(3 List of additional items recommended by manufacturer to assure efficient
operation for period of 120 days.
s.
t.
Appendix: Include safety precautions, a glossary, and, if available at time of

submittal, copies of test reports, and other relevant material not specified to be
submitted.
Delete information on material or equipment not used in the work from the O&M
Manual.
3. Operating Diagrams:
a. Piping system, electrical wiring diagrams, fuel oil, lubricating oil, water capacity
diagrams, and other diagrams, necessary for operation of machinery and equipment
shall be furnished and installed where designated by the Engineer.

01782 - 4
b. No single diagram shall show more than one system, or parts thereof.
c. Diagrams shall be reproduced by photographic process to a size not to exceed 18
inches by 24 inches and shall be complete and legible in all respects. Systems shall
be subdivided into portions which are operable from location where diagrams are
installed, and to provide intelligible information within specified size. They shall be
made on white paper and vacuum-sealed in transparent plastic material impervious
to moisture and oil, and resistant to abrasion. Other formats which are equal in
clarity, sharpness, durability and permanence will be considered.
2.3
MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Content: For each system, or piece of equipment not part of a system, include source
information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance
service contracts, and warranty information, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each system, or piece of equipment included in the manual, identified
by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list
name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent.
C.
Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation

including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
D.
1.
Standard printed maintenance instructions, with specific product(s) or equipment

identified.
2.
Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance
Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:
1.
Troubleshooting guide
E.
Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service.
F.
Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
G.
Warranties: Include copies of warranties and lists of circumstances and conditions that would
affect validity of warranties.
1.
Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

a. Facsimile Number, Contact Name and e-mail address


01782 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MANUAL PREPARATION
A.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
1.
Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data,

include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to
identify each product or component incorporated into the Work.
END OF SECTION


01782 - 6
SECTION 02300
EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS AND STRUCTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract (Design/Bid/Build), including General and
Supplementary Conditions and any Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
Sub-Surface Investigation: Project 13-1-276 dated June 13, 2013 by Kumar & Associates (Rifle site);
Project 13-1-277 dated June 25, 2013 by Kumar & Associates (De Beque Site) (REFERENCED
PROJECT SOILS REPORTS)
C.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
B.
1.3
Section 02350: Site Grading

Section 02740: Asphalt Paving
Excavation, compaction and backfill operations specifically for areas below, or that
are intended to support buildings and structures, including slabs-on-grade.
This Section does not include the following:

1.
Excavation, compaction and backfill operations related to utility trenching, general site
grading outside of the footprint of the structure or building (excluding the approach
apron), and preparation of sub-grades for any parking areas.
2.
Preparation of earthwork below, and in support of paving.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Existing Fill Materials. Soil materials encountered in the test borings and sampled by the
geotechnical engineer between existing grade and extending to approximately four (4.5) feet
below existing grade at DeBeque, and extending to approximately seven and one-half (7.5) feet
below existing grade at Rifle..
B.
Engineered Fill Material: Suitable on-site soils free of organic matter, debris and material larger
than 2 inches.
C.
Imported Structural Fill Material. Material obtained off-site when sufficient approved on-site
engineered fill material is not available.
D.
Excavation: Removal of earth and soil material above subgrade elevations and to lines and
dimensions indicated.
DEBEQUE & RIFLE 10 FOOT ADDITIONS


02300 - 1
1.
Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond

indicated lines and dimensions as directed by the Engineer.
Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
lines and dimensions without direction by Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well
as remedial work directed by the Engineer, shall be without additional compensation.
2.
E.
Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, slabs, waste oil tank pads, or other man-made
stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.
F.
Non-Frost Susceptible (NFS) Material: Material that is placed so as to limit the effects of frost
heave.
G.
Subgrade: Exposed surface encountered at the bottom of an excavation operation. Subgrade is

intended to be the surface immediately below pad footing foundations or the underside of the
perimeter frost cut-off grade beam.
1.4
A.
SUBMITTALS
Material Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting
test results for compliance of the following:
1.
Soil material proposed for use as imported structural fill and underslab layer. Test
reports shall provide the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
US Standard Sieve breakdown showing percentages which pass a 2 inch, inch,

No. 4, No. 8, No. 50 and No. 200 standard sieves
Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index
Optimum moisture content
Maximum density
B.
Refer to Project-Specific Submittal Log presented by Owner at Pre-Bid Meeting.
C.
Perform testing and submit certificates for the following:

1.
Independent laboratory analysis of material proposed for use as structural fill.
2.
Sub-grade soil inspection results.
3.
In-place density tests for compacted sub-grade material, fill, and backfill used.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Earthwork operations shall require testing during progress of Work. Retesting of rejected Work,
shall be done at no cost to the Owner.
B.
Testing of Earthwork: Contractor shall retain the geotechnical agency of record, Kumar &
Associates to observe and approve soil proposed for use as engineered structural fill material.
This geotechnical testing agency shall also perform required in-place field density testing for
materials that are placed during backfill and compaction operations.


02300 - 2
1.6
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Existing Utilities: Contractor shall notify utility locating service to determine if any utilities are
located in an area that would encroach upon the building. Do not interrupt utilities serving
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Engineer and then only after
arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of any proposed utility interruptions.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions, if any, without Owner's permission.
Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
Site Information: Data in subsurface investigation reports was used for the basis of the design
and is available to the Contractor for information only. Conditions are not intended as
representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. Contractor shall be
responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this report.
1.
Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be performed by
Contractor, at the Contractors option; however, no change in the Contract Sum will
be authorized for such additional exploration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
On-Site Anticipated Foundation Soils. (Refer to the REFERENCED PROJECT SOILS

REPORTS)
B.
Engineered fill. Approved on-site soils free of organic matter, debris and material larger than 2
inches. Organic material, roots, brush or other vegetation, trash, brick, debris, frozen material, or
other detrimental substances, and rocks or unbroken lumps larger than 2 inches, if encountered,
must be removed.
C.
Imported Structural Fill Material: If there are insufficient quantities of on-site engineered fill
material, imported structural fill material may be used. Imported structural fill material shall have a
liquid limit not exceeding 30 and a plasticity index of not over ten (10) when determined in
conformity with AASHTO T 89 and T90 respectively. Imported structural fill material shall be
equivalent to Class 1 structure backfill material as defined in Section 703.08 (a) of Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction Current Edition, the Colorado Department of
Transportation with the following gradation requirements:
Sieve Size
Mass Percent Passing

Square Mesh Sieves
100
No. 4
30-100
No. 50
10-60
No. 200
5-20


02300 - 3
D.
Non-Frost Susceptible (NFS) Material: Non-Frost Susceptible Material shall be uniformly graded
washed sand with a maximum particle size of 1-1/2 inches and less than 10 percent passing the
No. 200 size sieve, and with not more than 5 percent by weight finer than 0.02 mm grain size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Protect existing or newly placed structures from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement,
undermining, washout, and other hazards created by ongoing or subsequent earthwork
operations.
B.
Provide barricades, coverings, or other types of protection necessary to prevent damage to

existing items.
C.
Protect and maintain bench marks, monuments or other established reference points and property
corners. If disturbed or destroyed, replace at Contractors expense to full satisfaction of Owner.
D.
Protect exposed sub-grade and any placed materials against freezing temperatures or frost.
Provide protective insulating materials if necessary.
1.
Do not place foundations or fill material on frozen ground.
2.
When freezing temperatures may be expected, do not excavate to full depth indicated
unless foundations or fill material can be placed immediately after excavation has
been completed and approved.
3.
Protect excavation from frost if placing of concrete or fill is delayed.
4.
Protect sub-grade under foundations from becoming frozen until structure is
completed.
E.
Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of
soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to surrounding areas.
F.
Unanticipated Conditions: Notify the Owner immediately upon finding evidence of previous
structures, fill materials which extend below designated excavation levels, or other conditions
which are not shown or which cannot be reasonably assumed from existing surveys and
geotechnical reports. Secure the Owners instruction before proceeding with further work in such
areas.
3.2
DEWATERING
A.
Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared
sub-grades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B.
Protect exposed and established sub-grades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage
by rain or water accumulation.
C.
Groundwater is not expected to be encountered during excavation, however if groundwater or

surface water enters the excavation, install dewatering system to prevent softening and
disturbance of sub-grade below foundations and fill material, to allow foundations and fill material
to be placed in the dry, and to maintain a stable excavation side slope.


02300 - 4
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
B.
EXPLOSIVES
Explosives: Do not use explosives.
EXCAVATION, GENERAL
Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to sub-grade elevations regardless of the character of surface
and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil
materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be
authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions. The Contractor is reminded that the
REFERENCED PROJECT SOILS REPORT is made part of the Contract Documents. The
Contractor is required to refer to this document.
EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

Excavate to the indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25
mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance laterally for placing and removing
concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1.
Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Remove existing fill soils under footings
as described in soils reports. Footings are to be supported by undisturbed natural
soils or compacted structural fill. Excavated fill materials may be used as structural fill
per the conditions noted in the soils report.
2.
Do not disturb bottom of excavation. It is anticipated that the structures can be

suitably supported and constructed on the undisturbed natural soils. Excavate by
hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to
required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. Place foundation
as soon as weather conditions permit after excavation is completed, inspected, and
approved.
a. Before concrete or fill material is placed, protect approved sub-grade from
becoming loose, wet, frozen, or soft due to weather, construction operations or
other reasons.
3.
Excavation for Interior Slab-on-Grade: The interior slab-on-grade is to be placed over

scarified clean natural soils free of organics and debris. Where fill is required, this to
be compacted to minimum 95% of maximum standard Proctor dry density within 2%
of optimum moisture content.
If the characteristics of the exposed slab-on-grade sub-grade are not considered to be suitable by
the geotechnical engineer and/or structural engineer, further excavation may be necessary. If the
soil is composed of suitable material, but is determined to be overly disturbed and/or loose, then
the top 8 inches of the exposed sub-grade shall be scarified, moisture conditioned and recompacted. The 8-inch thick scarified layer shall be moisture conditioned to within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content and compacted to at least 95 percent of maximum standard Proctor dry
density (AASHTO T99), unless otherwise indicated in the project Geotechnical Report. If the soil
is composed of unsuitable material such as debris, organics, asphaltic material, or excessive
material larger than 2 inches, such unsuitable material shall be removed. The depth of removal
shall be to a point where suitable material is re-discovered. The removed material shall be
replaced with either engineered fill material or imported structural fill material as necessary in
order to bring the sub-grade up to the lines and elevations indicated. It is not recommended to
extend the foundation downward to the point at which suitable material is re-discovered.


02300 - 5
3.6
SUBGRADE INSPECTION / OBSERVATION
A.
Contractor shall notify the referenced geotechnical testing agency when excavations have
reached required sub-grade to determine if the condition of the exposed sub-grade is in general
conformance with the recommendations contained in the Geotechnical Report for this project.
This document is made part of this Specification Section.
B.
If the geotechnical testing agency determines that unsatisfactory conditions are present, further
excavation may be necessary. See Section 3.5 Excavation for Structures of this Specification
Section.
C.
Authorized additional excavation and replacement operations and/or material will be paid for
according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.
Reconstruct any sub-grades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or
construction activities without additional compensation.
3.7
DRAINAGE
A.
Control grading around structures so that ground is sloped to prevent water from running into
excavated areas or damaging structures.
B.
Provide pumping required to keep excavated spaces clear of water during construction.
Should any ground water be encountered, notify CDOT Project Manager and Engineer.
3.8
UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
Fill unauthorized excavations with either engineered fill material or imported structural fill
material without additional compensation.
3.9
A.
STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

Stockpile either engineered fill material or imported structural fill materials without intermixing.
Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations.
3.10
A.
PLACEMENT OF ENGINEERED FILL MATERIAL AND/OR IMPORTED STRUCTURAL FILL

MATERIAL
Place and compact engineered fill material and/or imported structural fill material in excavations
promptly, but not before completing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Recording locations of underground utilities for Record Documents, if applicable.

Testing and inspecting underground utilities as necessary and as applicable.
Removing all trash and debris.
Removing temporary shoring, bracing, and sheeting, as applicable.
Place engineered fill material and/or imported structural fill material on sub-grades free of mud,
frost, snow, or ice. Engineered fill material and imported structural fill material shall be placed in


02300 - 6
lifts not exceeding 6 inches in depth. Place layers horizontally and compact each layer prior to
placing additional fill. Materials shall be moisture conditioned to within 2 percent of optimum
moisture content and compacted to at least 95 percent under slabs (98% under footings) of
maximum standard Proctor dry density (AASHTO T99), unless otherwise indicated in the project
Geotechnical Report. The use of imported structural fill material is only necessary if there are
insufficient quantities of on-site engineered fill material available.
1.
Compact material with equipment of sufficient size and proper type to obtain specified
density.
a. Use vibratory equipment to compact granular material, do not use water.
b. Control moisture for each layer of on-site material as necessary to meet
specified moisture content.
2.
Do not start backfilling until concrete forms have been removed, trash removed from
excavations, and concrete finishing completed.
Place fill evenly on each side of grade beams or provide bracing.
3.11
A.
SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

Uniformly moisten or aerate all placed engineered fill and/or imported structural fill to within 3
percent of optimum moisture content.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry any placed materials that exceeds optimum
moisture content by 2 percent or materials that are too wet to compact to specified dry unit
weight.
B.
Finish sub-grades which are intended to support structures and/or slabs-on-grade to required
elevations within the following tolerances:
1.
Plus or minus 1 inch.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

C.
Testing Agency: The Contractor will engage the referenced geotechnical testing agency to
perform field quality-control testing. It is the owners requirement that the geotechnical agency of
record, Kumar & Associates, be engaged to do the field testing.
D.
Allow testing agency to inspect and test each placed layer (lift) of engineered fill and/or imported
structural fill. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed
work comply with requirements. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide timely
notification to the geotechnical testing agency in order to assure close coordination between
earthwork operations and testing operations. The Owner assumes no responsibility for notification
of the geotechnical testing agency. Delays caused by failure of the Contractor to provide timely
notification to the geotechnical testing agency will not be considered valid justification for revision
to the Contract time.
E.
Exposed Footing Sub-grade: Allow testing agency to observe the exposed footing sub-grades for
a minimum of six (6) individual pad footings in order to determine if:
1.
2.
F.
The exposed bearing sub-grade is comprised of suitable materials.

The characteristics of the exposed bearing sub-grade (firmness, compaction) are
suitable.
Exposed Sub-grade Below Interior Slab-on-Grade: Allow testing agency to observe the exposed
sub-grade below the interior slab-on-grade prior to the placement of the layer of engineered fill to
determine if:


02300 - 7
1.
G.
The exposed sub-grade is sound, stable, firm and level and ready for placement of
the engineered fill material.
Exposed Sub-grade Below Exterior Slab-on-Grade (Apron): Allow testing agency to observe the
exposed sub-grade below the exterior slab-on-grade prior to placement of the non-frost
susceptible material to determine if:
1. The exposed sub-grade is sound, stable, firm and level and ready for placement of the
non-frost susceptible material.
H.
Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to; ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167,
ASTM D 2922, ASTM D 2937 or AASHTO T99 as applicable. Tests will be performed at the
following locations and frequencies:
1. Below Interior Slab-on-Grade: At each compacted engineered fill and/or imported
structural fill layer and for the underslab layer, at least 1 test for every 2,000 sq. ft. but in
no case fewer than 3 tests per lift or layer.
Below Pad Footings: Where the exposed sub-grade below a pad footing required either
removal and re-compaction or scarifying and re-compaction, the replaced, recompacted material shall be density tested. Where the exposed sub-grade below a pad
footing consists of suitable, undisturbed exposed natural material, the visual observation
in paragraph C. above is sufficient.
I.
Testing agency will promptly submit one (1) copy each of all observation conclusions and/or test
results to the list of people below indicating whether the Work is in compliance or non-compliance
with the specifications.
1. Structural and
Civil Engineer:
2. Owner/Architect
J.
3.12
A.
Richard Weingardt Consultants

9725 E. Hampden Ave, Suite 200
Denver, CO 80231
(P) 303-671-7033; (F) 303-671-7379
Contact: John Davis and Tom Fast
e-mail: jdavis@weingardt.com; tfast@weingardt.com
Chris Jahn, Project Manager
15285 S. Golden Road Building #47
Golden, CO 80401
(P) 303-512-5518, (F) 303-512-5550
e-mail: christopher.jahn@state.co.us
When testing agency reports that any placed materials have not achieved the degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace materials as required;
replace and/or re-compact and retest until specified compaction is obtained without additional
compensation. Remedial or repair work shall be at no cost to the Owner.
PROTECTION
Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.


02300 - 8
B.
3.13
A.
Repair and reestablish grades where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded,
rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or
weather conditions.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

Disposal: Stockpile surplus waste materials, if any, on site as directed by the Owner. If the
Owner has no use for the material and on site retention is not needed, the Contractor shall
remove surplus waste materials from the site and legally dispose of the materials at an off site
location to be determined by the Contractor.
END OF SECTION


02300 - 9


02300 - 10
SECTION 02350
SITE GRADING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
Provisions of The General Conditions of the Contract (Design/Bid/Build), and Division 1 General
Section. The Standard Specifications when referenced hereinafter shall mean the Colorado
Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction,
current edition.
Sub-Surface Investigation: Sub-Surface Investigation: Project 13-1-276 dated June 13, 2013 by
Kumar & Associates (Rifle site); Project 13-1-277 dated June 25, 2013 by Kumar & Associates (De
Beque Site) (REFERENCED PROJECT SOILS REPORTS)
The Contractor is hereby required to read and understand the Purpose and Scope of Study
portion of the document. The field exploration program is meant to provide information on subsurface conditions as they relate to recommendations for the structural engineering of the
foundation of the structures. The document is included at the end of this Specification Section
as a courtesy and means of providing the Contractor with added information about the site.
C.
1.2
All footings shall be placed below frost depth per IBC 2009. Compact approved fill to 98%
Standard Proctor Density. Sawcut existing asphalt where required for new construction, and
dispose of asphalt properly. General Contractor to provide asphalt patch to a full 5 inch depth,
tie into existing grades. Slope asphalt to 2% or better. (See drawings)
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.3

1.
Excavation, compaction, backfill operations associated with site grading specifically for
areas outside the limits of buildings, structures, and slabs-on-grade.
2.
Remove portions of existing pavement and concrete drain pan as indicated on the
drawings for demolition. Properly dispose (remove from the site) of removed items in
accordance with local requirements.
Related Sections include the following

1.
Section 02751: Exterior Concrete Flatwork
2.
Section 03300: Cast-In-Place Concrete
3.
Section 02740: Asphalt Paving
4.
Section 02300: Earthwork for Buildings and Structures
DEFINITIONS
A.
Imported Soil Fill Material. Material obtained off-site when sufficient approved on-site soil fill
material is not available.
DEBEQUE& RIFLE 10 FOOT ADDITIONS

RIFLE PROJECT #1 8942
SITE GRADING
02350 - 1
B.
Excavation: Removal of material encountered above proposed site grade elevations.

1.
Unauthorized excavation below proposed site grade elevations or beyond indicated lines
without direction by Engineer of record. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial
work directed by Engineer of record, shall be without additional compensation.
C.
Soil Fill: Materials used to raise existing site grade in areas that are not below structures or
slabs-on-grade but instead outside the limits of buildings, structures, or slabs-on-grade.
D.
Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, slabs, mechanical and electrical equipment pads,
or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.
E.
Sub-grade: Exposed surface encountered at the end of an excavation operation or the top
surface of a compacted layer of soil fill.
F.
Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services which exist outside the limits of the buildings foundation or slabs-on-grade.
G.
Utility Trench Backfill: Material used to fill trenches which contain utility lines which are not
located beneath structures but which are instead outside the limits of the buildings foundation
and slabs-on-grade.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency: All sampling, testing, and inspections specified herein will be performed by the
testing agency of record, employed by Contractor.
B.
Notification shall be given to the testing agency, Owner representative and Owner when
required, not less than 48 hours in advance of work requiring testing or inspection services.
C.
Environmental Compliance: The Contractor shall comply with applicable portions of local
environmental agency regulations pertaining to asphalt paving systems.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Existing Utilities: Contractor shall notify utility locating service to determine if any utilities are
located in an area that would encroach upon the building. Do not interrupt utilities serving
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by CDOT Project Manager and
then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Notify CDOT Project Manager not less than two days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without CDOT Project Managers written
permission.
Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work of this Section
will be performed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected. Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas and conditions

SITE GRADING
02350 - 2
C.
Construction Traffic: Conduct all site grading operations to ensure minimum interference with
driveway, parking lots, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities to include adjacent
project areas under construction or temporary access. Do not close or obstruct driveway,
walks, or other occupied or used facilities without permission from the Owner or authorities
having jurisdiction.
D.
Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protection necessary to prevent damage to

existing improvements or newly constructed improvements. Provide necessary fencing or
barricades.
1.
Protect all improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner's property.
2.
Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to property

owners, or the Owner.
E.
Existing Bench Marks and Monuments: Carefully preserve and maintain existing benchmarks,
horizontal/vertical control, monuments, property line pipes and pins and other reference points.
If disturbed or destroyed, restore or replace at no additional cost to Owner.
F.
Excess Materials: Arrange for disposition of unsuitable materials, waste materials, and
materials not allowed by specifications for fill, backfill, or site grading in accordance with local
requirements. Location of dump, length of haul, and disposal expenses are Contractor's
responsibility
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
All excavation and embankment materials shall be in accordance with Section 203 of the
Standard Specifications with the exception of Subsections 203.13 and 203.14
2.2
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
On-Site Soil Fill Material: Approved on-site material encountered during excavation operations
that has been sorted to remove organics, debris, and large cobbles. Onsite processed
sandstone can be used for structural fill. Follow recommendations of the Geotechnical Report
for this site. The on-site soil fill material shall be moistened.
B.
Imported Soil Fill Material: At the Contractors option, or if there is insufficient quantities of onsite soil fill material, imported soil fill material may be used. Imported soil fill material shall have
a liquid limit not exceeding 35 and a plasticity index of not over six when determined in
conformity with AASHTO T89 and T90 respectively. Imported soil fill material shall be approved
by the Geotechnical Engineering Consultant and should meet the following gradation
requirements:

SITE GRADING
02350 - 3
C.
2.3
Sieve Size
Mass Percent Passing

Square Mesh Sieves
100
No. 4
30-100
No. 50
10-60
No. 200
5-20
Utility Trench Backfill: Any on-site soil fill material encountered during excavation operations
that has been sorted to remove organics, debris, and large cobbles.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Warning Tape: All utilities that exist outside the boundary limits of the foundation, or beneath
the slab-on-grade shall be marked with warning tape at the time they are backfilled and covered
by site grading operations.
Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4
mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Red: Electric
Yellow: Gas
Orange: Telephone and other communications
Blue: Water systems
Green: Sewer systems
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Protect existing or newly placed structures, utilities, sidewalks, and other facilities from damage
caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by
site grading operations.
B.
Protect sub-grade and placed soil fill material against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide
protective insulating materials if necessary.
C.
Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of
soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to surrounding areas.
3.2
EXPLOSIVES
A.
Explosives: Do not use explosives.

SITE GRADING
02350 - 4
3.3
EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A.
3.4
Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to site grade elevations regardless of the character of

surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include
rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time
will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions. The Contractor is reminded
that the Sub-surface Soil Investigation is made part of the Contract Documents. See
paragraph 1.1 B. of this Section.
STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A.
Stockpile imported soil fill materials and excavated satisfactory soil fill materials. Place, grade,
and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1.
3.5
Do not store in an area that will allow the material to be washed into a private or public
water supply.
UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A.
Place utility trench backfill on sub-grades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B.
Place and compact utility trench backfill materials to final grade elevation. Compaction of utility
trenches shall be placed to the same criteria as the pavement subgrade in traffic areas;
otherwise, place utility trench backfill materials in 12 inch maximum loose lifts and compact to at
least 95% of the Standard Proctor density at a moisture content near optimum.
C.
Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6
inches (150 mm) below finished sub-grade under and slabs.
3.6
SOIL FILL
A.
Place soil fill materials on sub-grades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B.
Place and compact soil fill materials to final site grade elevations indicated. Place soil fill
materials in 8 inch maximum loose lifts and compact to at least 95% of the Standard Proctor
density at a moisture content near optimum.
3.7
SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A.
Uniformly moisten or aerate each subsequent soil fill layer before compaction to within 3
percent of optimum moisture content.
1.
3.8
Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil fill material that
exceeds optimum moisture content by 3 percent and is too wet to compact to specified
dry unit weight
SLOPE AND TOLERANCE

A.
Slope final site grades next to structures in order to direct water away from buildings and to
prevent ponding. Finish site grades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

SITE GRADING
02350 - 5
3.9
1.
Minimum 2 percent slope away from structures for the first 10 feet where sidewalks or
pavements are directly adjacent to buildings.
2.
Minimum 5 percent slope away from structures for the first 10 feet where sidewalks or
pavements do not immediately adjoin the structure.

A.
Testing Agency: Contractor will engage Kumar and Associate to perform field quality-control
testing.
B.
Allow testing agency to inspect and test each soil fill layer. Proceed with subsequent site
grading operations only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
C.
Testing agency will test compaction of soil fill layers in place according to ASTM D 1556,
ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the
following locations and frequencies:
1.
General Site Graded Areas: At least 1 test for every 5,000 sq. ft. of area but in no case
fewer than 2 tests per lift or layer.
D.
Testing agency will promptly submit four (4) hard copies and one (1) electronic copy to the
CDOT Architect of all test results, indicating whether the test results show compliance or noncompliance with the specifications.
E.
When testing agency reports that soil fill layers have not achieved degree of compaction
specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.10
PROTECTION
A.
Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
B.
Repair and reestablish grades where completed or partially completed surfaces become
eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction
operations or weather conditions.
3.11
A.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

Disposal: Stockpile any surplus waste materials, if any, on site as directed by the Owner.
END OF SECTION

SITE GRADING
02350 - 6
SECTION 02370
TEMPORARY CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
current edition.
SUMMARY
A.

1.
2.
3.
B.
Water Control
Dust Control
Erosion and Sediment Control

1. Section 01010 - Summary of Work
2. Section 01095 Reference Standards and Definitions
C.
1.3
References:
1.
Stormwater Management Plan (SWMP) shall be provided by the Owner.
2.
CDOT Standards Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, current edition.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Best Management Practices in compliance with the Standard Specifications Section 208
Erosion Control.
B.
Water Control
1.
Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate and maintain
pumping equipment.
2.
Protect site from puddling, ponding, or running water. Provide water barriers as
required to protect site from soil erosion.
C.
Dust Control
1.
Execute the Work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations.
2.
Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere.
D.
Erosion and Sediment Control

1.
Plan and execute construction by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and
fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation.
2.
Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time.
3.
Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water flow.

TEMPORARY CONTROLS
02370 - 1
4.
Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or
clays.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION

TEMPORARY CONTROLS
02370 - 2
SECTION 02740
ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
A.
1.1
current edition.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes provisions for hot-mixed asphalt paving on a prepared base as
shown on the project plans.
B.
Related Sections include the following.

1. Section 02350: Site Grading
2. Section 02370: Temporary Controls
3. Section 03300: Cast in Place Concrete
C.
References:
1. Colorado Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction, current edition.
2.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Geotechnical Report: Sub-Surface Investigation: Project 13-1-276 dated June 13,

2013 by Kumar & Associates (Rifle site); Project 13-1-277 dated June 25, 2013 by
Kumar & Associates (De Beque Site) (REFERENCED PROJECT SOILS REPORTS)
All submittals shall be in accordance with Sections 203, 217, 304, 401 and 403 of the
Standard Specifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Hot-mix asphalt paving installer shall have not less than five
years experience on projects of similar size and scope.
B.
Testing Agency: All sampling, testing, and inspections specified herein will be performed
by the geotechnical agency of record employed by Contractor.
C.
Notification shall be given to the testing agency, engineer and Owner when required, not
less than 48 hours in advance of work requiring testing or inspection services.

DE BEQUE PROJECT #18609
ASPHALT PAVING
02740 - 1
D.
1.4
Environmental Compliance: The Contractor shall comply with applicable portions of local
environmental agency regulations pertaining to asphalt paving systems.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Site Information: Perform necessary research of public utility records, and verify existing
and temporary utility locations.
B.
Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work of this
Section will be performed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected. Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas and
conditions.
C.
Construction Traffic: Conduct all paving operations to ensure minimum interference with
driveway, parking lots, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities to include
adjacent project areas under construction or temporary access. Do not close or obstruct
driveway, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without permission from the Owner
or authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protection necessary to prevent damage to

existing improvements or newly constructed improvements. Provide necessary fencing
or barricades.
1.
2.
1.5
Protect all improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner's property.

Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to
property owners, or the Owner.
E.
Existing Bench Marks and Monuments: Carefully preserve and maintain existing
benchmarks, horizontal/vertical control, monuments, property line pipes and pins and
other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, restore or replace at no additional cost
to Owner.
F.
Excess Materials: Arrange for disposition of unsuitable materials, waste materials, and
materials not allowed by specifications for fill, backfill, or site grading in accordance with
local requirements. Location of dump, length of haul, and disposal expenses are
Contractor's responsibility.
SITE CONDITIONS
A.
Construct hot-mixed asphalt surface course when atmospheric temperature is above 40

deg F (4 deg C) and when base is dry. Do not apply tack coats or surface course in rainy
weather or when subgrade surface is wet or contains an excess of moisture. Tack coat
shall be covered the day of application.
B.
Grade Control: Establish and maintain required lines and elevations as indicated on
Drawings.
C.
Field Measurements: Verify dimensions and existing conditions shown on the Drawings
by taking field dimensions. Report discrepancies to the Owner for clarification, and make

ASPHALT PAVING
02740 - 2
minor adjustments in layout as required by field conditions and as approved by the

Owner, at no additional cost to the Owner.
D.
Environmental Requirements: Perform work only under suitable weather conditions.

Comply with the environmental requirements for asphalt placement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. All hot-mix asphalt paving materials shall be in accordance with Sections 401 and 403 of the
Standard Specifications with the exception of Subsections 401.21, 401.22, 403.04 and 403.05.
B. All aggregate base course materials shall be in accordance with Section 304 of the Standard
Specifications with the exception of Subsections 304.07 and 304.08.
C. All herbicide treatment materials shall be in accordance with Section 217 of the Standard
Specifications with the exception of Subsections 217.04 and 217.05. Herbicide to be used for this
project shall be Mono-bor Chlorate by U.S. Borax, or a mixture of HVAR S-L and Trysben 200 by
Dupont, or approved equal.
D. All excavation and embankment materials shall be in accordance with Section 203 of the
Standard Specifications with the exception of Subsections 203.13 and 203.14
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Execution shall be in accordance with Sections 203, 217, 304, 401 and 403 of the
Standard Specifications, as applicable.
3.2
SURFACE PREPARATION
3.2
A.
General: Remove loose material from compacted subgrade surface.
B.
Proof rolling: Proof rolling of the subgrade may be required after subgrade placement or
reconditioning has been completed. Proof rolling shall be conducted with a double
tandem ten wheel end-dump truck, loaded to a minimum gross weight of 45,000 pounds,
or other equipment as approved by the Owner. Areas found to be weak and those areas
which fail shall be reconditioned again as necessary and recompacted to the
requirements for density and moisture at the Contractors expense. Proof rolling of failed
areas shall be conducted immediately after they are reconditioned. Where failing areas
are still encountered, the Owner may require the Contractor to remove the unsuitable
materials as muck excavation and backfill with structural fill material. The Owner may
designate as unsuitable those soils that are detrimental to the finished roadway. All
unsuitable material shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
PROCEDURES AND CONTROL

ASPHALT PAVING
02740 - 3
A.
3.3
3.4
Grade Control: Establish or verify and maintain required lines and grades, including
cross-slope, for each course during construction operations.
EQUIPMENT
A.
Placing Equipment: Self-contained, power-driven unit capable of spreading, shaping,

and finishing to the degree of smoothness required. Provide hand tools, such as shovels
and rakes, as required to correct any irregularities in the pavement.
B.
Rolling Equipment: Power-driven rollers weighing not less than 8 tons, equipped with
adjustable scrapers and sprinkling devices to keep roller wheels clean and wet.
C.
Hand Tampers: Provide flat plate type, pneumatic hand tampers for compacting areas
next to structures or other areas inaccessible to power rollers.
D.
Exercise care in applying bituminous materials to avoid smearing of adjoining concrete

surfaces. Remove and clean damaged or stained surfaces.
PLACING MIX
A.
General: Place hot-mixed asphalt mixture on clean and dry prepared surface, spread,
and strike off. Spread mixture at minimum temperature of 235 deg F (107 deg C). Place
areas inaccessible to equipment by hand. Place each course to required grade, crosssection, and compacted thickness.
B.
Pavement Thickness and Placement:

1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
Pavement Thickness and placing procedures for Public Streets shall be in

accordance with local Jurisdictional Agencies and the Metropolitan Government
Pavement Engineers Council (MGPEC) Uniform Specifications for Mixture
Design, Field Control and Construction of Hot Asphalt Pavements, latest issue.
Pavement Thickness shall be 5 inches Hot Mix Asphalt with 6 inches Aggregate
Base Course or 8 inches Portland Cement Concrete Pavement in accordance
with Recommendations from the Geotechnical Engineer.
Paving patching thickness shall be 9 inches thick (minimum) in designated areas.
The asphalt overlays required to meet finish grades shall be applied in layers not
exceeding 3 inch compacted thickness.
C.
Paver Placing: Place in strips not greater than 10 feet wide, unless otherwise acceptable
to Owner. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend
rolling to overlap previous strips. Place strips parallel to the centerline of all driveways.
D.
Immediately correct surface irregularities in finish course behind paver. Remove excess
material forming high spots with shovel or lute. While mix is still hot, compact and finish
off each course with power rollers.
E.
Joints: Produce dense, watertight finished joints between old and new pavements, or
between successive days' work, to ensure continuous bond between adjoining work.
Construct joints to have same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of hotmixed asphalt course. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat.
TOLERANCES

ASPHALT PAVING
02740 - 4
3.6
3.7
A.
Thickness: In-place compacted thickness will not be acceptable if variations from

thickness noted or specified exceed 1/4 inch. Paved areas deficient in thickness will be
overlaid with an additional course of asphalt material to achieve the minimum specified
thickness. The owner reserves the right to require the Contractor to remove paved areas
where the pavements thickness exceeds the maximum tolerance limits creating bird
baths. Where the tolerance limits are exceeded, all corrective work shall be performed in
a manner which leaves the finished surface with a neat, smooth appearance.
B.
Surface Smoothness: Test finished surface of each asphalt paving course for
smoothness, using a 10 foot straightedge. Surfaces will not be acceptable if variations
exceed plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
C.
Patching: Remove and replace mixtures that become mixed with foreign materials,
defective areas, and existing pavements at transitions with new paving. Cutout such
areas and fill with fresh hot asphaltic concrete. Compact by rolling to required surface
density and smoothness. Remove deficient areas for full depth of course. Saw-cut sides
perpendicular and parallel to direction of traffic with edges vertical. Apply tack coat
before placing asphalt concrete mixture.
ROLLING
A.
General: Begin rolling when mixture will bear roller weight without excessive
displacement.
B.
Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas
inaccessible to rollers.
C.
Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling

of joints and outside edge. Check surface after breakdown rolling and repair displaced
areas by loosening and filling, if required, with hot material.
D.
Second Rolling: Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is hot.
Continue second rolling until mixture has been evenly compacted.
E.
Finished Rolling: Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of
roller marks. Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has attained
95 percent laboratory density.
F.
Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has
cooled and hardened.
G.
Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to
become marked.

A.
General: Testing in-place hot-mixed asphalt courses for compliance with requirements
for thickness and surface smoothness will be done by geotechnical agency of record.
Contractor to provide independent testers reports to Architect and Owner. Repair or
remove and replace unacceptable paving as directed by Architect or Owner.

ASPHALT PAVING
02740 - 5
B.
Thickness: In-place compacted thickness tested in accordance with ASTM D 3549 will
not be acceptable if exceeding following allowable variations:
1.
3.8
All Asphaltic Courses: Plus or minus 1/4 inch.
C.
Sampling or Testing: During paving operations the testing agency will perform sampling
and testing of asphalt paving mixtures. Record locations where samples are taken to
correlate with subsequent testing. Test compacted mix and report; bulk density in
accordance with AASHTO T 166, Marshall stability and flow in accordance with ASTM D
1559, maximum theoretical specific Gravity (RICE) in accordance with Colorado
Procedure 51.
D.
Minimum Quality Requirements: Minimum acceptable density of in-place course material

is 95% of recorded laboratory specimen density; minimum Rt of 90 or Marshall stability of
1650.
E.
Non-Complying Work: Repair or replace defective or non-complying work at no

additional cost to the Owner.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A.
Protection: Protect newly placed material from traffic by barricades or other suitable
method until mixture has cooled and attained maximum degree of hardness. After final
rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on asphalt concrete pavement until it has cooled
and hardened and in no case sooner than 6 hours.
B.
Completed Work: Pavement surfaces shall be clean, free of loose gravel or aggregate,
sound, and unmarred at time of acceptance of the work.
END OF SECTION

ASPHALT PAVING
02740 - 6
SECTION 02751
EXTERIOR CONCRETE FLATWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
A.
1.2
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This work shall include furnishing all materials, labor, equipment and miscellaneous items
necessary for the construction of concrete curb, gutter, sidewalk, handicap ramps, driveway or
any combination thereof, drain pans, utility housekeeping pads, building doorway pads, and building aprons, all in accordance with these specifications and in close conformity with the lines,
grades, and typical sections as shown on the Plans or established in the field.
B.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

Section 02300 Earthwork for Buildings and Structures
Section 02350 Site Grading
Section 03300 Cast in Place Concrete
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1
PRE-FORMED FILLERS
A.
The materials shall conform to the requirements specified in the following:

Section 03300 Cast in Place Concrete
B.
Pre-formed filler for expansion shall meet AASHTO M213 specifications.
PART 3 - METHODS AND PROCEDURES

3.1 EXCAVATION
A.
3.2
Excavation shall be made to the required depth and width to permit the installation and
compaction of Class 6 roadway base and bracing of the forms. The foundations shall be shaped
and compacted to a firm, even surface conforming to the section shown on the plan. Material
determined to be unsuitable or uncompactable by the Engineer will be removed and replaced.
FORMS


02751- 1
A.
Forms shall be wood or metal and shall extend for the full depth of the concrete. All forms shall
be straight, free from warp and of sufficient strength to resist the pressure of the concrete without
springing. Bracing and staking of forms shall be such that the forms remain in alignment both
horizontally and vertically until removal. Satisfactory slip forms may be used when approved.
Use of a curbing machine will be permitted providing line and grade tolerances can be met.
B.
Steel plates that can be shaped to the desired radius shall be used on all short radii. Open
joints shall be formed with a steel separator plate conforming to the section being installed.
C.
All forms must be oiled and cleaned prior to placement of concrete.
3.3
MIXING AND PLACING
A.
The foundations shall be thoroughly moistened immediately prior to the placing of the concrete.
Compaction of the concrete shall have thorough consolidation achieved by tamping, spading,
vibrating or other acceptable methods. Forms shall be left in place until the concrete has set
sufficiently to prevent deformation due to removal. Upon removal of the forms, the curb face
shall be immediately finished to a uniform surface. In the case of matching existing concrete
finishes, an approved method shall be used.
B.
Concrete in slabs shall be thoroughly consolidated with the use of vibrating bridge screeds,
roller pipe screeds, or other approved means. These surfaces shall not be manipulated prior to
finishing operations.
3.4
FINISHING
A.
3.5
The surface shall be floated with a wood or magnesium float and given a broom finish. No
plastering of the surface will be permitted. All outside corners of slabs and joints shall be
rounded to a 1/4-inch radius. Broom marks to be perpendicular to traffic or pedestrian flow.
JOINTS
A.
Expansion joints shall be made using -inch width pre-molded expansion joints. Construction
joints, using a inch width pre-molded joint filler, shall be placed at the end of day's run or
during a day's work if there is more than a 20-minute delay in concrete delivery.
B.
Construction joints shall be formed around all appurtenances such as manholes, utility poles,
adjacent structures, etc., extending into or abutting the work. Pre-molded expansion joint filler
-inch thick shall be installed in these joints. Expansion joint filler shall be installed between
concrete sidewalks and any fixed structure.
C.
Scoring joints (contraction joints) shall be made by a forming tool to a depth of one quarter of
the section with a width of 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch in width. Dummy joints in lieu of open joints will
be permitted with use of curbing machine.
D.
Joint spacing shall be located as follows:

1. Expansion joints: Every 100 feet on center; at end of corner radius; at driveway sections.
2. Construction joints: As required during construction; at appurtenances and structures
through or abutting work.
3. Scoring joints: Every 10 feet on center for curb and gutter, and for sidewalks equal to width
of sidewalk to approximate squares as shown on drawings.


02751- 2
4. Saw cuts: If saw cut joints are required or permitted, cutting shall be timed properly with
the set of the concrete. Cutting shall be started as soon as the concrete has hardened
sufficiently to prevent aggregates being dislodged by the saw, and shall be completed
before shrinkage stresses have developed sufficiently to induce cracking. The saw cut
depth shall be 1/4 slab thickness.
3.6
A.
3.7
A.
3.8
A.
CURING
Immediately upon completion of the finishing, concrete shall be moistened and kept moist for a
minimum of 72 hours in accordance with Section 03300 of these Specifications. In lieu of
wetting, use of a membrane curing compound, at the direction of the Engineer, will be
permitted. Covering of finished concrete shall be required using insulated blankets for a
minimum period of seven (7) days.
EXCESSIVE TEMPERATURE PROTECTION, PROTECTION FROM INJURY, AND TESTING

REQUIREMENTS
Requirements for these items shall be in accordance with Section 03300 of these
Specifications.
BACKFILLING
After the concrete has set sufficiently, the areas behind the curb shall be backfilled to the
required elevations and shall be thoroughly compacted, in accordance with Section 02300
Earthwork for Buildings & Structures.
END OF SECTION


02751- 3


02751- 4
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 -
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.

to this Section.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.2
Section 02350:
Section 02740:
Section 02751:
Section 05500:
Section 07110:
Section 07210:
Section 07920:
Section 09900:
Site Grading
Asphalt Paving
Exterior Concrete Flatwork
Miscellaneous Metals
Dampproofing
Building Insulation
Joint Sealants
Painting
SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design,
admixtures, placement procedures, testing, miscellaneous items, and finishes for all
reinforced concrete items shown by the structural engineer.
B.
Drain pans and other miscellaneous civil improvement works are not addressed by this
Section.
C.
Cast-in-place concrete includes the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Foundation (pad footings, frost cut-off grade beams, curb, and pedestals)
Slabs-on-grade
Waste oil storage tank base
Form Materials
Reinforcing
Concrete Materials
Related materials to include:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Absorptive Cover
Moisture-Retaining Cover
Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound
Cleaner / Stripper
Sealer
Evaporation Control
Bonding Agent
Preformed Expansion Joint Filler
Joint Sealant
Slab Construction Joint Forms
Slab Control Joint Forms

03300 - 1
l.
1.3
Embedded (in concrete) Steel Pipe Bollards
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product data for proprietary materials and items, including all admixtures, patching
compounds, joint systems, absorptive cover, moisture-retaining cover, liquid membraneforming curing compound, sealer, evaporation control compound, bonding agent,
cleaner/stripper, preformed expansion joint filler strips, joint sealant, and others as requested
by the Structural Engineer.
B.
Submit certifications that curing compound (if used) is compatible with finishes.
C.
Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing fabrication, bending, and placing concrete
reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced
Concrete Structures, ACI 318, and ACI Detailing Manual SP 66 showing bar schedules,
stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include
special reinforcing required for openings through concrete structures, within slabs on grade at
wall corners, pilaster projections, sumps, trenches, and doorways, and location of any
construction joints not shown. Include all accessories specified and required to support
reinforcement at positions shown on the structural drawings.
D.
Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test. Provide record of 30
breaks with statistical data as required for mix verification per ACI 318, 5.3.2.
E.
Submit results of concrete slump, air content, and compressive strength tests during
construction per ACI 301.
F.
Material certificates in lieu of material laboratory test reports when permitted by the Structural
Engineer. Material certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that
each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements including cement
content, w/c ratio, entrained air content, design slump and unit weight. Provide certification
from admixture manufacturers that chlorides have not been used in mixes.
G.
Refer to Project-Specific Submittal Log presented by Owner at Pre-Bid Meeting.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and
standards (latest edition and/or version), except where more stringent requirements are
shown or specified elsewhere:
1. ACI 117, Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and
Commentary.
2. ACI 211.1, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and
Mass Concrete.
3. ACI 211.2, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight
Concrete.
4. ACI 211.5R, Guide for Submittal of Concrete Proportions.
5. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for
Buildings."
6. ACI 301, Specifications of Structural Concrete for Buildings.
7. ACI 302.1R, Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.

03300 - 2
8. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for
Buildings."
9. ACI 304R, Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete.
10. ACI 305R, Hot Weather Concreting.
11. ACI 306R, Cold Weather Concreting.
12. ACI 308R, Guide to Curing Concrete.
13. ACI 309, Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete.
14. ACI 315, Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.
15. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."
16. ACI 347, Guide to Formwork for Concrete.
17. ANSI/ASTM A82, Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement.
18. ANSI/ASTM A185, Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.
19. ASTM A615, Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel for Concrete Reinforcement.
20. ASTM C33, Concrete Aggregates.
21. ASTM C94, Ready-Mixed Concrete.
22. ASTM C150, Portland Cement.
23. ASTM C260, Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
24. ASTM C309, Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
25. ASTM C494, Water Reducing Admixtures for Concrete.
26. ASTM C618, Fly Ash Mineral Admixture for Concrete.
27. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice."
B.
Concrete Testing Service: The Contractor shall employ an independent testing agency to
perform material evaluation tests of the concrete work. Work and materials that are defective
shall be repaired or replaced and re-tested at the Contractors expense. Testing shall comply
with special inspection requirements of IBC Ch. 17 and as noted in the Special Inspection
Plan on the structural drawings.
C.
Materials and installed work shall require testing during progress of Work. Retesting of
rejected materials for installed Work, shall be done at no cost to the Owner.
1.5
MATERIALS DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.
General: Materials handling and batching shall conform to applicable provisions of ASTM
C94.
B.
Reinforcing: Unload and store reinforcing bars so they will be kept free of mud and damage.
C.
Grout, Curing, Bond Breaking, Adhesive, and other products: Deliver in original sealed
containers. Store in strict compliance with manufacturers recommendations.
PART 2 -
2.1
PRODUCTS
FORM MATERIALS
A.
Contractor shall be responsible for design, strength, and safety of formwork. Formwork shall
be designed to withstand vibrator action. Design, strength, spans, details, etc. of forms shall
be the Contractors responsibility, and shall be in full conformance with the form
manufacturers recommendations.

03300 - 3
B.
Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or other
acceptable panel-type materials complying with PS 1, A-C or B-B High Density Overlaid
Concrete Form, Class I to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in
largest practical sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on
drawings. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly
placed concrete without bow of deflection.
C.
Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another acceptable
material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
D.
Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a maximum of
210 g/L volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not stain, or adversely affect concrete
surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Formshield WB or Formshield Pure, The Euclid Chemical Company 1-800-321-7628
www.euclidchemical.com
Clean Strip Form Release (J-1EF), Dayton Superior 1 877-416-3439
www.daytonsuperior.com
b. Duogard II, W.R. Meadows, Inc. 1-800-342-5976
www.wrmeadows.com
E.
Inspection must occur prior to placing concrete. Forms must be inspected for cleanliness,
accuracy of alignment, and reinforcing steel clearances.
F.
Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties

designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal.
Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to the plane of the exposed
concrete surface.
1. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in the
concrete surface.
2.2
REINFORCING MATERIALS
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed.
B.
Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ANSI/ASTM A185 plain type; inflat sheets only; uncoated finish
unless noted as hot dip galvanized on the structural drawings.
C.
Steel Tie Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel, minimum 16 gage annealed type.
D.
Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing,
supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar-type
supports complying with CRSI specifications.
1. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base
material may not suitably or adequately support chair legs.
2. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with forms,
provide supports with legs that are protected by plastic (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel
(CRSI, Class 2).
3. Wood, brick or other unacceptable material is not permitted.

03300 - 4
2.3
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
General: Refer also to TABLE 03300 1 at the end of this Specification Section.
B.
Portland Cement:
1. ASTM C 150, Type Vunless otherwise noted on drawings
2. Use one brand of cement throughout the Project, unless otherwise noted on drawings.
3. Refer to Table 03300-1 at the end of this specification section for more information about
the different uses of concrete.
C.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type F. Fly ash shall not exceed 20% of total cementitious material
by weight.
D.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33. Provide aggregates from a single source

throughout the Project.
1. For exposed exterior surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain
substances that may cause spalling.
2. Fine Aggregate: Natural Sand.
3. Coarse Aggregate: Gravel or crushed stone containing no deleterious substances that
cause surface spalling.
4. Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be as follows:
For footings.. 1 inch
For walls3/4 inch
E.
Ready-Mix Concrete:
1. Materials: Materials, including cement, aggregates, water, and admixtures, shall meet
the requirements of ASTM C94, subject to the additional requirements of this section.
2. Quality of Concrete: Concrete shall be furnished under Alternative No. 3, ASTM C 94,
whereby the manufacturer assumes full responsibility for the selection of the proportions
for the concrete mixture, with the minimum allowable cement content specified. Submit
statement of composition as specified in Part 1 of this section.
3. Cement Content: As required to meet minimum strengths as indicated on the structural
drawings.
4. Air Content: See Table 03300-1
5. Slump: See Table 03300-1
6. Maximum water-cement ratio: See Table 03300-1
7. Manufacture and Delivery:
a. Measurement of materials, batching, mixing, transporting, and delivery shall be as
specified in ASTM C 94.
b. Hauling Time: Discharge all concrete transmitted in a truck mixer, agitator, or other
transportation device no later than 1-1/2 hours, or 300 revolutions of the drum after
the mixing water has been added, whichever is earliest. In hot weather, limit mixing
time to 45 minutes or 125 revolutions of the drum. If the manufacturer cannot meet
these requirements, then the water and cement shall be introduced into the mix at the
project site.
c. Extra Water:
(i Deliver concrete to site in exact quantities required by design mix.
(ii Additional water is not permitted to be added to mix after leaving batch plant
without prior approval of the structural engineer. If additional water is to be
added, sets of 3 test cylinders shall be created for every truck where water has

03300 - 5
been added, taken at the point of placement. Additional water quantity shall be
indicated on truck ticket and signed by person responsible.
(iii Where extra water is added to concrete it shall be mixed thoroughly for 50
revolutions of drum before depositing.
(iv Water may be added to the site only once for each batch.
(v An additional slump and air content test shall be performed following the addition
of any water.
d. Redosage with High Range Water Reducing Mixture (Superplasticizer); May be
done with prior acceptance of Engineer regarding dosage and time periods.
F.
Water: Potable.
G.
Admixtures: Assure that admixtures used contain zero percent calcium chloride, or
admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions or thiocyanates.
H.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. The Contractor is responsible for assuring that the
admixture is compatible with all other admixtures, if used, as well as related materials.
a. Air Mix or AEA-92 Series, The Euclid Chemical Company 1-800-321-7628
b. Darex AEA, W.R. Grace &Co. 1-877-423-6491
www.graceconstruction.com
I.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. This admixture may be used at the
Contractors option. The Contractor is responsible for assuring that the admixture is
compatible with all other admixtures, if used, as well as related materials.
a. EuconSeries, The Euclid Chemical Company 1-800-321-7628
b. Plastocrete 161, Sika Corp. 201-933-8800
www.sikausa.com
J.
Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type C. This admixture may be used at the
Contractors option. The Contractor is responsible for assuring that the admixture is
a. Accelguard Series, The Euclid Chemical Company 1-800-321-7628
b. Plastocrete 161FL, Sika Corp. 201-933-8800
www.sikausa.com
K.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. This admixture may be
used at the Contractors option. The Contractor is responsible for assuring that the admixture
is compatible with all other admixtures, if used, as well as related materials.

03300 - 6

a. Eucon Retarder Series, The Euclid Chemical Company 1-800-321-7628
b. Plastocrete 161MR, Sika Corp. 201-933-8800
www.sikausa.com
L.
Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. This admixture may be
used at the Contractors option. The Contractor is responsible for assuring that the admixture
is compatible with all other admixtures, if used, as well as related materials.
a. Accelguard Series, The Euclid Chemical Company 1-800-321-7628
b. Plastocrete 161FL, Sika Corp. 201-933-8800
www.sikausa.com
M.
Water-Reducing, HighRange Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. This admixture may be used
at the Contractors option. The Contractor is responsible for assuring that the admixture is
a. Eucon 37 or Plastol Series, The Euclid Chemical Company 1-800-321-7628
b. Sikament FF, Sika Corp. (201) 933-8800
www.sikausa.com
N.
Water-Reducing, HighRange, and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G. This

admixture may be used at the Contractors option. The Contractor is responsible for assuring
that the admixture is compatible with all other admixtures, if used, as well as related
materials.
a. Eucon 537 or Plastol Series, Euclid Chemical Co. 1-800-321-7628
O.
2.4
Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per
sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. Burlap shall be free of sizing or any
substance that is harmful to concrete.
B.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171.

1. Waterproof Paper.
2. Polyethylene Film, clear.

03300 - 7
3. White-Burlap-Polyethylene Sheet.
C.
Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid-type membrane-forming curing

compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B. Moisture loss not more than 16.0
oz/sq. yard (0.55 kg/sq. meter) using an application rate specified by the manufacturer. The
liquid membrane-forming curing compound shall be dissipating type, with red or white
pigmented fugitive dye. Confirm effect of color on finished surface coloration with architect
prior to ordering materials or application of curing compound to architecturally exposed
concrete surfaces including slabs.
a. KUREZ DR VOX, Euclid Chemical Co. 1-800-321-7628
b. Day-ChemRez Cure (J-11-W), Dayton Superior 1-877-416-3439
c. Crystal Rez, SpecChem, 1-866-791-8700
www.specchemllc.com
D.
Cleaner / Stripper: Biodegradable citrus-based solvent that will not etch concrete.
a. Euco Clean & Strip, Euclid Chemical Co. 1-800-628-9900
b. Citrus Peel (J-48), Dayton Superior Corporation 1-866-329-8724
www.daytonsuperiorchemical.com
c. Green Bean Clean, Dayton Superior 1-877-416-3439 www.daytonsuperior.com
E.
Interior Concrete Sealer (SC-1): Liquid-type non-yellowing sealer compound designed to

provide protection from oil and gasoline. To be used on all horizontal interior concrete
including concrete floors and concrete stair treads
1. Approved Product:
a. Dayton Superior Tuf Seal J35 High Gloss Sealer
1-877-416-3439 www.daytonsuperior.com
F.
Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete

slab surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss. It is the responsibility of the
Contractor to assure compatibility between evaporation control product and curing
compound.
a. EucoBar, Euclid Chemical Co. 1-800-321-7628
b. Sure Film (J-74), Dayton Superior 1-877-416-3439 www.daytonsuperior.com
G.
Bonding Agent: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base.

03300 - 8

a. Polyvinyl Acetate (Interior Only):
(i
(ii
Euco Weld, Euclid Chemical Co. 1-800-321-7628

Superior Concrete Bonder (J-41), Dayton Superior 10877-416-3439
b. Acrylic or Styrene Butadiene:

(i
(ii
H.
SBR Latex, Euclid Chemical Co. 1-800-321-7628

Day-Chem Ad Bond J-40, Dayton Superior 1-877-416-3439
Preformed Expansion Joint Filler. Preformed rigid sugarcane fiber board product containing
durable asphalt conforming to ASTM D 1751.
a. Conflex , A Knight Company 1-800-375-0289
www.aknightcompany.com
I.
Joint Sealant: Sealant over the top of the preformed expansion joint filler strip, and within the
sawn shrinkage control joints in the slab on grade. Sealant shall be a one-component, highperformance, gun-grade, urethane sealant for sealing and protecting moving joints of all
types and suitable for exterior joints and possessing chemical resistance to: gasoline, mineral
spirits, lubricating oil, and diesel fuel. Sealant shall conform to ASTM C 920, Type S,
GradeNS, Class 25.
a. Eucolastic I, One-Part Urethane Sealant, Euclid Chemical Company 1-800-321-7628
b. Sonolastic NP 1, Sonneborn ChemRex 1-800-243-6739
www.chemrex.com
2. Color: Manufacturers standard, gray (or as directed by the Architect).
J.
Slab Construction Joint Forms: Galvanized steel with continuous tongue and groove.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Keyed Kold, Burke Co.
b. Super Screed, Vulcan Metal Products
K.
Slab Control Joint Forms: Molded plastic material for insertion into slab surface during
finishing. Configuration shall provide joint depth of not less than 1/4th of the slab thickness.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Zipcap, Greenstreak Plastic Products Co.
b. Crack Inducer, Progress Unlimited, Inc.
c. Kold-Seal Zipper STRIP, Vinylex Corp.

03300 - 9
2.5
ANCHORING SYSTEMS
A.
Anchor bolts: ASTM F1554 Gr. 36 or Gr. 55 nonheaded type, with threaded ends, double
nut and 2x2x3/16 plate washer at embedded end unless otherwise indicated on structural
drawings.
B.
Hilti HIT HY 150 MAX-SD Injection Adhesive Anchor by Hilti Fastening Systems, P.O. Box
21148, Tulsa, OK 74121, Ph (800) 879-8000 or approved equal.
C.
HiltiKwik Bolt III by Hilti Fastening Systems or approved equal. Use as indicated on the
drawings only.
D.
Hilti X-U powder actuated fasteners by Hilti Fastening Systems or approved equal, or as
indicated on structural drawings
2.6
PATCHING GROUT
A. Portland cement, water, and fine sand passing a No. 30 mesh sieve.
B. Sikagrout 212 or Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod as manufactured by Sika Corporation, or approved
equal.
2.7
NONSHRINK GROUT
A.
Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and

plasticizing agents meeting the requirements of ASTM C1107; capable of developing a
minimum compressive strength of 6,000 psi in 28 days.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, use one of the following:
a. Masterflow 713" - Master Builders
b. Five Star Grout - U.S. Grout Corp.
c. Propak Protex
d. 1107 Advantage Grout Dayton Superior 1-877-416-3439
2.8
SLEEVES
A.
2.9
Floor Sleeves: PVC or hot dipped galvanized schedule 40 pipe sleeves, two pipe sizes larger
than carrier pipe, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.
OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS

A.
2.10
Items encased in concrete shall not be painted. Structural steel items embedded into
concrete shall be painted with finish paint coating minimum 2 inch embedment into concrete,
the remainder shall not be painted. Where accessible, paint bollards 6 inch embedment.
PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES

A.
Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch
or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301.

03300 - 10
1. Limit use of fly ash in proportions not greater than 20percent by weight of total amount of
cementitious materials. Fly ash is allowed, however it is not recommended for use in the
interior concrete slab-on-grade which has a hard trowel finish.
B.
Submit design mixes to the CDOT representative for distribution to contracted Structural
Engineer for proposed mix for each use of concrete at least 10 days prior to start of Work.
Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed and
accepted by the Structural Engineer, per submittal process.
C.
Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the properties as shown in TABLE
03300 - 1 which is located at the end of this specification section. Note that there are
different uses which require different mixes, cement types, strengths, etc.
D.
Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor

when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant, as accepted in writing by the Structural Engineer prior to placement. Laboratory test
data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the
Structural Engineer before using in Work.
2.11
ADMIXTURES
A.
The use of water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture

(superplasticizer) in concrete for placement and workability is acceptable and done at the
Contractors option.
B.
The use of accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below
50 deg F (10 deg C) is acceptable.
C.
Use admixtures for water reduction, set acceleration, or retarding in strict compliance with
manufacturer's directions.
2.12
CONCRETE MIXING
A.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94.
B.
Batch Tickets: All concrete delivered to the Project shall be accompanied with batch tickets
that bear the Mix Identification Number that matches the mixes that were reviewed and
approved by the Structural Engineer. If concrete is delivered to the site without
accompanying batch tickets that bear the Mix Identification Number, the Contractor is notified
that the material may be rejected.
PART 3 -
3.1
GENERAL
A.
3.2
EXECUTION
Coordinate the installation of joint materials, anchor rods, trench drains, sleeves, block-outs,
drains and other related materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.
FORMS

03300 - 11
A.
General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral,
static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such
loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape,
alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and surface
irregularities complying with the following ACI 347 limits:
1. Provide Class A tolerances for concrete surfaces exposed to view. Refer to Architectural
drawings for control joint and tie hole patterns, as indicated.
2. Provide Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces.
B.
Forms:
1. Sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar.
2. Seal wood with coating material to minimize absorption of moisture from the concrete.
3. Coat textured forms with release agent and others where required. Application shall be
prior to reinforcement placement.
4. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust preventive form oil or otherwise protect against
rusting. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable.
C.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces.
Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom
forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, recesses, and the like for easy removal.
D.
Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent losing concrete mortar.
Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
E.
Chamfer exposed corners and edges 3/4 inch, both interior and exterior of structure, except
where other construction contacts the concrete, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer
strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints, as indicated on
Structural or Architectural drawings.
F.
Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work
of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, sleeves, and chases
from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into
forms.
G.
Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete.
Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before placing concrete. Retighten
forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain
proper alignment.
H.
Where tolerances are not stated elsewhere in these specifications or drawings for any
individual structure or feature, permissible deviations from established lines, grades, and
dimensions are listed below:
1. Variation From the Plumb:
a. In the lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and in arises: In 10 feet, 1/4-inch; in any
story or 20 feet maximum, 3/8-inch; in 40 feet or more, 3/4-inch.
b. For exposed corners, control-joints and other conspicuous lines: In any bay or 20
feet maximum 1/4-inch; in 40 feet or more, 1/2-inch.
2. Variation From the Level or From the Grades Shown:
a. In Top of Walls: In 10 feet, 1/4-inch; in any bay or 20 feet maximum, 3/8-inch; in 40
feet or more, 3/4-inch.
b. For exposed horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines: In any bay or 20 feet
maximum, 1/4-inch; in 40 feet or more, 1/2-inch.

03300 - 12
3. Variation of the linear building lines from established position in plan and related position
of walls and partitions: In any bay or 20 feet maximum, 1/4-inch; in 40 feet or more, 1/2inch.
4. Variation in the sizes and locations of sleeves, floor openings and wall openings: 1/4inch.
5. Variation of cross-sectional dimensions in the thickness of slabs and walls: Minus, 1/4inch; plus, 1/2-inch.
6. Variation from established lines and grades in sidewalks, plazas, outdoor concrete slabs,
curb and gutter sections: in 10 feet, 1/4-inch; in 1 foot, 1/8-inch.
3.3
PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A.
Design: The reinforcement design shown on drawings shows only the necessary information
for detailing the reinforcement and preparing placing and bending details.
B.
Bending: In accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, Chapter 7.
C.
Placement: Place reinforcement accurately as shown on the drawings. Adequately secure

reinforcement in position by concrete or metal chairs and spacers, in accordance with CRSI
Manual of Standard Practice. Provide concrete clear cover as shown, where not indicated
provide cover in accordance with CRSI. In walls, use bolsters or chairs between form and
reinforcement to prevent lateral displacement of reinforcement and to ensure proper concrete
cover. In slabs on grade and slabs over metal deck, provide chairs for reinforcing and welded
wire fabric reinforcing to meet cover requirements; bars lying on the bottom or pulled up
during concrete placement and finishing is not permitted.
D.
Placing bars in fresh concrete as the Work progresses (stabbing), and adjusting bars during
the placement of concrete is not permitted.
E.
Splices:
1. Bar laps shall be in contact and securely tied, unless otherwise noted.
2. Locate splices of reinforcement as shown on the drawings.
3. In beams, grade beams, and suspended structural slabs, all top bars shall be spliced at
midspan and all bottom bars shall be spliced at supports.
4. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least
one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent
continuous laps in either direction.
F.
Reinforcement shall be continuous around corners.
G.
Bars shall not be field bent unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Bars shall not be
bent or straightened in a manner that will damage the bars. The use of heat to bend or
straighten bars is not permitted.
H.
Tack welding of reinforcing bars is not permitted.
I.
Inspection: After reinforcement has been placed, it shall be inspected prior to placing the
concrete.
J.
Condition of Surfaces: At time concrete is placed, all metal reinforcement shall be free from
rust, scale, frost, oil, dirt, or other coatings that would destroy or reduce the bond, unless
otherwise noted on the drawings.

03300 - 13
3.4
JOINTS
A.
Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints in the slabs-on-grade so they do
not impair strength or appearance of the item, as acceptable to the Structural Engineer. It is
the responsibility of the Contractor to locate all construction joints as necessary.
1. Continue all reinforcing steel across construction joints.
B.
Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints in slabs-on-grade.

Bulkheads designed and accepted for this purpose may be used for slabs.
C.
Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Construction joints are

allowed only in the slabs-on-grade. Construction joints are not allowed in the pad footings,
pedestals, or perimeter frost cut-off grade beam. Construction joints in the slabs-on-grade
are not required and are used only at the contractors option. Construction joints in the slabson-grade can be built as shown and detailed or the Contractor may propose an alternate
construction joint for review and acceptance by the Structural Engineer. Slab on grade
construction joints shall align with control joint pattern such that exposed construction joints
do not exist in the completed condition.
D.
Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete.
E.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct isolation joints in slabs-on-grade at points of

contact between slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, grade
beams, pre-engineered column, and other locations, as indicated.
F.
Control Joints (Shrinkage Joints) in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct control joints in slabs-ongrade to form panels of patterns as shown on Structural Drawings. Saw cuts shall be 3/16
inch wide by 1/4 slab thickness as indicated
1. Control joints in slabs shall be formed by saw cuts as soon as possible after slab finishing
as may be safely done without dislodging aggregate.
2. Unless shown and dimensioned otherwise, provide shrinkage joints not exceeding 10 feet
in either direction and located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at column
center lines, half bays, third bays).
3. Reduce control joint depth as required to avoid cutting or damaging reinforcing steel,
inch deep minimum.
4. Refer to Section 07920 Joint Sealants for sealing of control joints.
3.5
INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS

A.
General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items required
for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting
drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be
attached. The Contractor is made aware that the anchor rods for the pre-engineered metal
building are not provided by the pre-engineered metal building manufacturer. These anchor
rods are extremely important embedded items and require close attention to location,
spacing, and arrangement to assure proper connection to the pre-engineered metal building
structure. Anchor to prevent floatation and displacement. Use of plywood or sheet metal
setting templates is required for main building column anchor bolts.
B.
Give all trades whose work is related to the concrete ample notice and opportunity to
introduce embedded items before concrete is placed.

03300 - 14
C.
Position embedded items accurately and support them against displacement. Fill voids in
sleeves, and inserts, and anchor slots temporarily with readily removable material to prevent
the entry of concrete.
D.
Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to
achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to
support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
E.
Embedded steel pipe bollards shall be painted prior to casting in concrete, with 6 inches of
the embedded portion of the steel pipe to be painted. The embedded steel pipe bollard shall
be plumb and secured prior to casting. Assure that the steel pipe bollard has a 42 inch
projection prior to embedding. The concrete bollard foundation shall be installed to permit
removal and replacement of both bollard and concrete without damaging adjacent concrete
slabs and foundations. The inner portion of the embedded steel pipe bollard is allowed to be
filled either during the embedment or at a later time. The top of the inner fill portion shall be
mounded 1 inch so as to allow drainage. Upon completion of the embedding and filling of the
steel pipe bollard, the exposed steel portion and the mounded top concrete shall be touch up
painted as specified in Section 09900, Section 3.6.B.
3.6
INSTALLING PREFORMED EXPANSION JOINT FILLER STRIPS

A.
General: Preformed expansion filler strips shall be free from dirt or other substances which
would impair its bond to concrete. No damaged pieces of preformed expansion joint filler
materials shall be installed.
B.
Preparations: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, preformed expansion

joint filler strips shall be placed perpendicular to the finished surface of the concrete.
Preformed expansion joint filler strips shall be placed so that their edges are below the
finished concrete surface so as to provide a recess for the subsequent sealant, inch deep
minimum, 1 inch deep maximum.
C.
Seals and Caps: Hydrostatic seals or joint caps may be installed and subsequently removed
so as to allow placement of the sealant.
3.7
INSTALLING POLYURETHANE JOINT SEALANT

A.
General: Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; take care to

produce beads of proper width and depth, tool as recommended by manufacturer, and
immediately remove surplus sealant.
B.
Apply materials only within manufacturer's specified application life period. Discard sealant
after application life is expired or if prescribed application period has elapsed.
3.8
PREPARING FORM SURFACES

A.
General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, non-residual, low-VOC, formrelease agent before placing reinforcement. Do not allow form release agent to come in
contact with the reinforcement.

03300 - 15
3.9
Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact with
in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply according to
manufacturer's instructions.
3.10
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Preparation Before Placing:

1. Remove hardened concrete and foreign materials from inner surfaces of conveying
equipment.
2. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation,
reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit
installation of their work.
3. Remove ice and excess water and sprinkle semi porous subgrades sufficiently to
eliminate suction.
4. Do no place concrete on frozen ground.
5. Do not place concrete during rain, sleet, or snow unless protection is provided.
B.
General: Comply with ACI 304, Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing
Concrete, and as specified.
C.
Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be
placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. If
a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit
concrete to avoid segregation at its final location.
D.
Placing Concrete in Forms: Place concrete in final position to avoid segregation due to
rehandling or flowing. Spread concrete in horizontal layers and do not drop more than 5 feet
without using drop chutes. Place concrete at such a rate that the concrete remains plastic
and flows readily into spaces between bars. Do not deposit concrete that has partially
hardened or become contaminated by foreign material. Deposit concrete in forms in
horizontal layers between 6 inches and 20 inches high and in a manner to avoid inclined
construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while
preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. Remove temporary form spreaders when
concrete reaches them.
E.
Compacting:
1. Use high frequency vibrators in the placement of concrete forms. When concrete is
being placed on hardened concrete or in bottom of forms, exercise care to ensure
complete consolidation. After the initial lift, vibrator shall penetrate through and into top
of previous lift of concrete.
2. Internal vibrators shall have a minimum frequency of 8,000 rpm. Over vibrating and use
of vibrators to transport concrete within forms shall not be allowed. Insert and withdraw
vibrators at many points, from 18 to 30 inches apart, for 5 to 15-second duration. Keep a
spare vibrator on the project site during all concrete placing operations.
3. Once concreting is started, it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until the
placing of the panel or section is completed, preventing fresh concrete from being
deposited on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams and
planes of weakness within the section.
4. Remove splashes or accumulations of hardened or partially hardened concrete or mortar
on forms or reinforcement above general level of the concrete already in place before the
work proceeds.
5. Maintain reinforcement in proper position during concrete placement operations.

03300 - 16
6. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or
darbies to smooth surfaces free of lumps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to
beginning finishing operations.
F.
Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation,
within limits of construction joints, until completing placement of a panel or section.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners.
2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or
darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to
beginning finishing operations.
3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement.
G.
Cold Weather Placement:

a. When for three successive days prior to concrete placement the average daily
outdoor temperature drops below 40o F or when the average outdoor temperature is
expected to drop below 40o F on the day of concrete placement, preparation,
protection and curing of concrete shall comply with ACI 306.R.
b. Minimum temperature of concrete upon delivery shall conform to ACI 301 Table
7.6.1.1. Concrete temperature at time of placement shall conform to minimum values
of ACI 306.R Table 1.4.1, and shall not exceed minimum values by more than 20o F.
c. Subject to acceptance of Engineer an accelerating admixture may be used.
Admixtures shall meet requirements of Part 2. Calcium Chloride and other chloridetype accelerating admixtures will not be allowed.
d. Comply with concrete protection temperature requirements of ACI 306.R. Record
concrete temperatures during specified protection period at intervals not to exceed 16
hours and no less than twice during any 24 hour period.
e. Submittal of detailed procedures, means, and methods, for production,
transportation, placement, protection, curing, and temperature monitoring of concrete
during cold weather is required.
f. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place
concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
H.
Hot Weather Placement:

a. When depositing concrete in hot weather, follow recommendations of ACI 305R.
b. Temperature of concrete at time of placement shall not exceed 85o F.
c. When air temperatures on day of placement are expected to exceed 90o F, mix
ingredients shall be cooled before mixing. Flake ice or well-crushed ice of a size that
will melt completely during mixing may be substituted for all or part of mix water.
d. Retarding admixture may be used subject to acceptance of Engineer. Admixtures
shall meet requirements of Part 2.
e. Protect to prevent rapid drying. Start finishing and curing as soon as possible. Cover
reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel
temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before
embedding in concrete.
f. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas.
I.
Protection: Protect newly finished slabs from rain damage. Protect finished slabs from
mortar leakage from pouring of concrete above. Cover masonry walls, glazing, and other
finish materials with polyethylene or otherwise protect from damage due to pouring of
concrete.

03300 - 17
3.11
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A.
Rough-Formed Finish: Provide a rough-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not

exposed to view in the finished Work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete
surface having texture imparted by form-facing material used, with all tie holes and defective
areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height
rubbed down or chipped off.
B.
Smooth-Formed Finish: Provide a smooth-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces

exposed to view or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete. This is
an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form-facing material, arranged in an
orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas
with fins and other projections completely removed and smoothed.
C.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed
surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching
adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly
across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Protect concrete from damage until completion of concrete sealing.
3.12
SLAB FINISHES
A.
Screeding: After concrete has been thoroughly consolidated, screed slabs to the desired
elevation and contours by means of accurately placed edge forms and intermediate screed
strips.
B.
Jointing: Locate and construct control joints as shown.
C.
Float Finish: Apply float finish to all slab surfaces.

1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until
ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface
water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of
power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by handfloating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to tolerances of
F(F) 18 (floor flatness) and F(L) 15 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E
1155. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Slope surfaces to drains, a minimum of
inch per foot unless otherwise noted. Immediately after leveling, re-float surface to a
uniform, smooth, granular texture.
D.
Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to all slab surfaces.

1. After floating, begin first trowel-finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final
troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface.
Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks,
uniform in texture and appearance, and finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 20 (floor
flatness) and F(L) 17 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Grind
smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system.
E.
Non-slip Broom Finish: Apply a non-slip broom finish only to the exterior concrete aprons,
stoops, and the waste oil tank slab.

03300 - 18
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiberbristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Do not apply broom finish until such
operations are assured of not dislodging aggregate.
3.13
CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION

A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss
before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply according
to manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces with forms in place for the full
curing period of 7 days minimum. If forms are removed prior to full curing period, continue
curing after forms are removed by any of three curing methods:
1. Method that maintains the presence of mixing water in the concrete during the early
hardening period. These include ponding, spraying, fogging, and saturated wet
coverings.
2. Method that prevents loss of mixing water from the concrete by sealing the surface.
These include impervious paper, plastic sheets, or applying membrane-forming curing
compounds.
3. Method that accelerates strength gain by supplying heat and additional moisture to the
concrete. This is accomplished with heating the concrete, heating the forms, or heating
pads.
C.
Curing Unformed Surfaces: Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from
concrete surface and after placing and finishing. Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs,
aprons, stoops, and toppings by any of the following three curing methods:
1. Moisture curing:
a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.
b. Use continuous water-fog spray.
c. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover
with water, and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage
of concrete surfaces and edges, with a 4-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
d. Maintain moisture curing method for not less than 3 days.
2. Moisture-retaining cover curing:
a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover, placed in widest practical
width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or
adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover
material and waterproof tape.
b. Maintain moisture-retaining cover curing method for not less than 3 days.
3. Liquid membrane-forming curing compound: Use membrane curing compound that will
not adversely affect surfaces to be covered with finish materials applied directly to the
concrete. Furthermore, use membrane curing compound that will not adversely affect
any sealer compound to be applied at a later date. The Contractor is made aware of the
fact that the interior concrete floor slab-on-grade in the Vehicle Storage Bays will be
coated with a sealer after the slab has cured. As such, there is a high probability that a
liquid membrane-forming curing compound will be required to be removed, either
mechanically or chemically, so that the sealer can be successfully applied. If the

03300 - 19
Contractor chooses to cure the unformed slab surface with a liquid membrane-forming
curing compound, then the Contractor must consider this potential for additional work in
order to prepare the slab for sealing. The liquid membrane-forming curing compounds
that have been specified are dissipating type products. If the dissipation has not fully
taken place, then the remaining product on the surface of the slab must be removed
through the use of a cleaner/stripper product. The Contractor is reminded that there are
three acceptable methods to providing for curing of unformed surfaces. Apply curing
compound as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours and after
surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly according to manufacturer's
directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application.
D.
Protection:
1. In cold weather, maintain the moisture conditions but also, by heating or covering,
maintain temperature of the concrete between 50 degrees F and 70 degrees F for entire
curing period.
2. In hot weather, take immediate steps to protect newly finished concrete from the drying
effects of wind and sun, and maintain temperature of the air surrounding the concrete
uniform within 5 degrees F in any one hour or 50 degrees F in any 24-hour period.
During curing period, protect concrete from mechanical damage, loading, shock, and
vibration.
E.
Cleaning and/or Stripping Unformed Surfaces: If the dissipating liquid membrane-forming

curing compound has not fully dissipated by the time the sealer is to be applied, then the
remaining portions shall be removed through the use of a cleaner/stripper product. Surface
shall be prepared in accordance with manufacturers directions. Application may be with
sprayers, automatic floor scrubbers, or other conventional methods. Apply cleaner/stripper in
accordance with manufacturers written recommendations. Thoroughly clean surface in
advance of applying sealer. Cleaner/stripper need only be applied to slab-on-grade surfaces
that are intended to be sealed.
F.
Sealer:
1. Offices:
a. Apply sealer to all exposed interior concrete slab-on-grade surfaces in the vehicle
storage building, including those areas that are not directly beneath proposed
vehicular equipment, i.e. the admin area and stairs. Floors shall be cleaned prior to
application of the sealer if concrete has had a liquid membrane-forming curing
compound previously applied. Apply sealer in accordance with manufacturers
written recommendations.
b. Apply sealer to exposed concrete on building exterior at apron. Concrete shall be
cleaned prior to application of the sealer if concrete has had a liquid membraneforming curing compound previously added. Apply sealer in accordance with
manufacturers written recommendations
3.14
REMOVING FORMS
A.
General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls,
columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less
than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently
hard to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and provided curing and protection
operations are maintained. All supporting forms shall remain in place for a minimum of 14
days and until concrete has obtained design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Do

03300 - 20
not remove supporting forms or shoring until members have acquired sufficient strength to
support their weight and imposed loads safely.
3.15
REUSING FORMS
A.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply
new form-coating compound as specified for new formwork.
B.
When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces,
remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid
offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces.
3.16
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A.
Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately
after removing forms.
B.
Mix dry-pack mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate
passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing.
Mix the patching grout in advance and allow to stand with frequent manipulation with a trowel,
without adding water, until it has reached the stiffest consistency that will permit placing.
1. Cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left
by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth less than 1 inch.
Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen
with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with bonding agent. When the
bonding agent begins to lose the water sheen, apply the premixed patching grout. The
grout shall be thoroughly consolidated into place and struck off to leave the patch slightly
higher than the surrounding surface. To permit initial shrinkage, leave the patch
undisturbed for at least 1 hour before finishing it. Keep the patched area damp for 7
days. Do not use metal tools in finishing a patch in a formed wall that will be exposed.
C.
Repairing Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if
defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of the Structural Engineer. Surface defects include
color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and
other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed
by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes and fill with dry-pack mortar.
1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, containing defects that affect the
concrete's durability. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete.
D.
Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for
smoothness and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low
and high areas as specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope
and smoothness by using a template having the required slope.
1. Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete's durability.
Surface defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate
to the reinforcement or completely through non-reinforced sections regardless of width,
spalling, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.
2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured.

03300 - 21
3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing surface
finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish
repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with
clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4-inch clearance all
around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding
agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or
class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish so as to blend in with the adjacent
finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
E.
Repair isolated random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter by dry-pack
method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt,
and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound.
Place dry-pack before bonding agent has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and
finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72
hours.
F.
Perform structural repairs with prior written approval of the Structural Engineer for method
and procedure.
G.
Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to prior written acceptance of the
Structural Engineer.
3.17
QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION

A.
General: The Contractor shall employ an independent testing agency to perform tests and to
submit test reports for the concrete work. Work and materials that are defective shall be
repaired or replaced and re-tested at the Contractors expense.
B.
Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement shall include the following:
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM
C 94.
a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour exceeding 5
cu. yd. plus additional tests for each 50 cu. yd. more than the first 50 cu. yd. of each
type of concrete. If slumps differ by more than 2 inches, the mixer or agitator shall
not be used until condition causing this variation is corrected. The equipment for
these tests shall be furnished by Contractors certified independent testing laboratory
technician.
b. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each
day's pour exceeding 5 cu. yd. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. more than the
first 50 cu. yd. of each type of air-entrained concrete.
c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40
deg F (4 deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for
each set of compressive-strength specimens.
d. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for
each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders
for laboratory-cured test specimens. The Contractor shall make available a storage
area to securely keep and store freshly made compression test specimens at the site
until they are hardened and ready for transportation to the laboratory. The testing
agency is responsible for providing a suitable container into which the compression
test specimens will be placed.

03300 - 22
e. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5
cu. yd. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. more than the first 50 cu. yd. of each
concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens
tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.
If the Contractor wishes to demonstrate that the strength of any portion of the work
has attained a specific strength earlier than that which would be demonstrated under
the normal testing regimen, the Contractor is allowed to make extra compression test
specimens.
2. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three
consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no
individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than
500 psi.
C.
Test results will be reported in writing to the Owner, Architect, and Engineer within 24 hours
after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification
name, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, age of specimen,
concrete use, mix identification number from the batch ticket, approximate location of
concrete batch within the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days and the
compressive breaking strength.
1. Owner: Anne Feeser-Olesen, CDOT, 15285 S. Golden Road Building #47 Golden, CO
80401 Fax (303) 512-5550, anne.feeser@state.co.us
2. Architect: Kris Belter, Intergroup Architects, 2000 West Littleton Blvd., Littleton, CO.,
80120, kbelter@intergrouparchitects.com
3. Engineer: John Davis, Richard Weingardt Consultants, Inc., 9725 East Hampden Ave.,
Suite 200, Denver, CO 80231, jdavis@weingardt.com
D.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be

permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.
E.
Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test
results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained
in the structure, as directed by the Structural Engineer. Testing agency may conduct tests to
determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other
methods as directed. Any additional tests shall be done at no cost to the Owner.
F.
Batch Tickets: The testing agency shall obtain the batch tickets from any and all delivered
loads from which tests were obtained. The testing agency is responsible for assuring that the
Mix Identification Number resides on the batch ticket. It is the responsibility of the Contractor
to assure that the ready-mix delivery supplier provides batch tickets for all loads and that
these batch tickets show the Mix Identification Number. The Mix Identification Number shall
match that which was shown on the submitted mixes which were reviewed by the Structural
Engineer. If concrete is delivered to the site without accompanying batch tickets that bear the
Mix Identification Number, the Contractor is notified that the material may be rejected.

03300 - 23
TABLE 03300 - 1
f 'c 1
(ksi)
USE
Foundations
& grade
beams (all
portions)
4.5
Slab-ongrade
(Interior)7
4.5
Slabs-ongrade
(Exterior
Drain Pan)
1
4.5
W/C 2
RATIO
(max)
AGGREGATE 3
TYPE
0.45 (ae)
ASTM C 33
NW Coarse #1
0.45 (ae)
0.45 (ae)
CEMENT
SLUMP
4
TARGET %
AIR 5
4"
(+/- )
6% +/- 1.5 %
Type V
ASTM C 33
NW Coarse #2
3.5"
(+/- )
2.0%
Type V
ASTM C 33
NW Coarse #2
3.5"
(+/- )
7.5% +/- 1.5%
Type V
(in)
(min)
(max)
TYPE
Compressive strength at 28 days unless otherwise noted. The value for f c = 4.5ksi for
Foundations is based on ACI Table 4.3.1. for Severe exposure to sulfates. 2 ACI 211.1,
Table 6.3.4 (a). (ae) denotes air-entrained concrete, (nae) denotes non air-entrained concrete.
NW = Normal Weight
NW-Coarse #1 Maximum size 1 1/2, with nominal maximum size of 1, Size Numbers
5, 56 or 57 as shown in Table 2 of ASTM C33.
NW-Coarse #2 Maximum size of 1, with nominal maximum size of , Size Numbers 6
or 67 as shown in Table 2 of ASTM C 33.
ACI 211.1, Table 6.3.1. Slump may be increased when chemical admixtures are used, provided
that the admixture-treated concrete has the same or lower water-cement ratio and does not
exhibit segregation potential or excessive bleeding.
ACI Table 4.2.1. Specified for Severe Exposure and the nominal maximum aggregate size.
Tolerance is -1% to + 2%. Alternately, the contractor may submit mix designs of same structural
properties per CDOT requirements for Class 2 exposure per Section 601.04 of the CDOT
Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction.
Recommend use of water reducing admixture or super plasticizer for slabs on grade to allow for
adequate working time for placement and finishing without addition of water. Adding water to slab
on grade concrete greatly increases shrinkage and reduces strength.
END OF SECTION

03300 - 24
SECTION 05500
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Section.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.2
Section 03300: Cast in Place Concrete

Section 09900: Painting
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
Steel concrete-filled bollards.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For Bollards

1.
Installation Instructions for 6 inch pipe bollards including proposed base plate.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
Show Members, sizes and thicknesses, brackets, sleeves, anchorage locations,
anchorage details, and accessory items.
2.
Furnish setting diagrams for anchorage installation as required
3.
Show dimensional compliance with applicable building codes and accessibility
requirements.
C.
Refer to Project-Specific Submittal Log provided by Owner at Pre-Bid Meeting
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METALS
A.
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without
seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B

05500 - 1
2.2
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Cast-Metal Units: Cast iron, with an integral abrasive, as-cast finish.

1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.3
American Safety Tread Co., Inc.

Balco Inc.
Barry Pattern & Foundry Co., Inc.
Granite State Casting Co.
Safe-T-Metal Company, Inc.
Wooster Products Inc.
Or Other Approved Equal
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Provide complete bollard assemblies.

1.
2.
Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.

Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
B.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove
sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C.
Weld connections to comply with the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
2.4
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
BOLLARDS
A.
Embedded Steel Pipe Bollards. Embedded steel pipe bollards shall be 6 inch nominal diameter,
ASTM A53, Type E, Grade B Electric-Resistance Welded or ASTM A53, Type S, Grade B
Seamless members, By = 35 KSI minimum. Bollards shall be painted with Tnemec paint
system; see specification section 9900- 2.4 B. Extend finish paint 6 into embedded concrete.
B.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
C.
Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel
and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
D.
Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing

05500 - 2
of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental

Chambers."
E.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
F.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPCSP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
If unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, notify Architect in writing. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have
been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
B. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.
3.3
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION

05500 - 3

05500 - 4
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2

to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
WORK INCLUDED: Furnish and install temporary and permanent wood blocking, nailers,
backers, and grounds required to anchor or support work specified in other Sections, as
shown on the Drawings or specified herein, or as required to complete the Work.
B.
RELATED WORK:
1. Wood formwork for concrete is specified in Section 03300.
C.
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings, General and Supplementary Conditions, and

applicable provisions of Division 1 Sections apply to this Section.
REFERENCES:
A.
1.4
REFERENCE STANDARDS: Comply with the requirements of the reference standards

noted herein, except where more stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise
required by the Contract Documents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
STANDARDS: Comply with the following grading and quality standards:

1. Lumber:
a. ANSI PS 20 American Softwood Lumber Standard
b. WWPA Grading Rules
c. Applicable grading rules of other inspection agencies certified by American Lumber
Standards Committees (ALSC) Board of Review, as specified herein.
2. Plywood and Construction Panels:
a. ANSI PS 1 U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood for
plywood construction panels.
b. APA PRP-108 for products not manufactured under PS 1 provision.
B.
GRADE STAMPS:
1. Each piece of lumber and plywood specified by grade shall bear the grade stamp and
trademark of the agency under which it is produced.
2. Fire-retardant treated lumber shall bear the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. label, and

ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 1
shall be stamped Kiln Dried after Treatment or KDAT.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A.
PART 2 -
2.1
STORAGE AND PROTECTION: Store and protect all materials in a manner to prevent
damage or deterioration, and as recommended by suppliers.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS:
A.
LUMBER: Construction grade or better, minimum Fb-650, unless otherwise indicated,

surfaced dry, S4S, with 19% maximum and 12% minimum moisture content at time of
installation.
B.
PLYWOOD: Each panel shall be identified with the grade trademark of APA and shall meet
the requirements of ANSI PS 1-95. Unless otherwise noted, plywood shall be veneer group
1, thickness as indicated (minimum allowable thickness as noted below), 4x 8 sheets where
practical, and shall conform to the following grades:
1. Miscellaneous Concealed Plywood:
C-C Plugged Exterior, thickness ad indicated but not less than inch nominal, FRT
2. Miscellaneous Exposed Plywood
A-D Interior, thickness as indicated but not less than inch nominal, FRT.
C.
DECAY AND INSECT RESISTANT LUMBER

1. Above Ground Use: CCA oxide treated, conforming to AWPA P5 and AWPB LP-2,
graded for particular application.
2. Ground Contact Use: CCA oxide treated, conforming to AWPA P5 and AWPB LP-22,
graded for particular application.
3. Decay and insect resistant lumber may be identified on Drawings as CCA or PT.
D.
FIRE-RETARDANT LUMBER AND PLYWOOD:

1. Interior Use:
a. General: Pressure treated with fire retardant chemicals containing no halogens,
sulfates, ammonium phosphate, or formaldehyde, kiln-dried after treatment to 19% or
less moisture content for lumber and 15 or less moisture content for plywood, and
conforming to AWPA C20 and C27.
b. UL Rating: UL rated FR-S, with flame spread rating of 25 or less as determined by
UL 723, NFPA 255, or ASTM E84 tunnel test.
c. Corrosion Rates: Less than one mil per year for carbon steel, galvanized steel,
aluminum copper, and red brass in contact with the fire retardant treated wood when
tested in accordance with Federal Specification MIL-L-19140E, Paragraph 4.6.5.2.
d. Equilibrium Moisture Content: Not more than 25% when tested in accordance with
ASTM D3201 procedures at 95% relative humidity and 80 F.
e. Fire Retardant Chemical: Registered for use as a wood preservative by the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency.
f. Testing: Fire performance and strength properties for both lumber and plywood, of

ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 2
the fire retardant treated wood shall be recognized by issuance of a National

Evaluation Services Report. Fire retardant chemical must not damage the middle
lammella of the wood structure when exposed to 170 F and 90% relative humidity for
23 days.
2. Exterior Use:
a. Similar to FRT lumber and plywood for interior use, with no increase in fire hazard
classification when tested in accordance with ASTM D2898.
b. UL label for exterior lumber and plywood shall contain the additional notation, No
increase in the listed classification when subject to the standard rain test.
3. Fire-retardant lumber and plywood may be identified on the Drawings as FRT.
E.
FASTENERS:
1. Provide nails, screws, bolts and nuts, including expansion and toggle bolts or other
specialty fasteners of the type and size indicated or best suited for the work, but not less
than required by local building codes.
2. Provide galvanized, cadmium plated, or other approved non-corrosive fasteners for
exterior work.
PART 3 -
3.1
EXECTUION
EXAMINATION:
A.
3.2
VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS: Examine areas and conditions under which the work of
this Section will be performed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected. Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas and
conditions.
INSTALLATION:
A.
BLOCKING AND NAILERS: Provide all necessary special framing, furring, blocking, nailers,
and other construction necessary for the installation, anchoring, or bracing of the work of
other trades, whether specifically indicated or not.
B.
PLYWOOD: Unless otherwise indicated, install with long dimension perpendicular to framing
members; butt joints true and square. Except where adhesive application may be noted,
secure plywood to framing at maximum 6 o.c. at sides, ends, and edges, and 10 o.c. in field
of panels. Use nails at wood framing and bolts or screws at metal framing.
C.
DECAY AND INSECT RESISTANT LUMBER AND PLYWOOD: Use decay and insect
resistant (CCA) lumber or plywood where in contact with the ground or with concrete or
masonry, or where used as nailers in conjunction with roofing and flashing systems.
D.
FIRE RETARDANT LUMBER AND PLYWOOD:

1. Use fire retardant (FRT) lumber or plywood in rated construction or where required by
local codes. Use exterior FRT lumber or plywood where exposed to weather or
sustained relative humidity in excess of 75 .
2. Caution: Do not rip or mill fire retardant treated (FRT) lumber; only end cutes, drilling
holes, and joining cuts are allowed.

ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 3
E.
FASTENERS:
1. Install fasteners of size and type indicated on the Drawings, but not of size or spacing
less than required by local building code.
2. Unless otherwise indicated or required by fastener type, install fasteners with heads flush
with wood surface.
3. Provide suitable washers at all nuts.
F.
INSPECTION:
1. Discard lumber or plywood pieces with defects which might impair quality of work.
2. Examine completed work to ensure that fasteners and connections are secure. Perform
additional nailing or boiling when required. Determine that nail heads and bolt heads are
flush with wood surface and correct.
3. Leave surfaces clean, free from dirt or debris, ready for application or installation of finish
materials or subsequent work.
END OF SECTION

ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 4
SECTION 06640
PLASTIC PANELING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Section.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Section 07210:
Section 09900:
Section 13122:
Section 15800:
Insulation
Painting
Metal Building Systems
Air Distribution System
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes composite glass-fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) wall paneling and trim
accessories.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: furnish two (2) 12 inch x 12 inch samples of each color in the specified profile for each
FRP type.
C.
Details: Fully detail to graphically show all panel dimensions and vertical and horizontal
termination and transitions. Key to floor plan. Elevate all walls of wash bay.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to

ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
1.
2.
1.5
Flame-Spread Index: 200 or less.

Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.
Store material(s) in accordance with manufacturers instructions, with seals and labels intact
and legible.
B.
Store butyl tape in accordance with manufacturers instructions, maintaining temperatures

above freezing at all times prior to installation.

PLASTIC PANELING
06640 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FRP2 - COMPOSITE FRP PANELING
A.
General: Gelcoat-finished, composite glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels, factory-laminated to

plywood complying with ASTM D 5319.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.2
Crane Composites, Inc., (formerly Kemlite Company Inc.)

Creative Panel Solutions
Nudo Products, Inc.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Nudo

Products, Inc NuFiber panels mounted to .625 inch plywood backing or equal.
Substrate: Plywood
Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.675 inch
Surface Finish: Molded pebble texture
Fire Rating: Class C : non-structural
Width: 4 foot-0 inches
Length: Longest available length avoiding horizontal joints, Min. 10 foot-0 inches
Color: White
ACCESSORIES
A.
FRP2 Accessories: Manufacturer's accessories designed and specifically sized to secure,

retain and cover edges of composite panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside
corners, caps and fasteners as needed to secure and conceal all exposed edges. All edges of
Composite panels to be covered with manufactures standard trim set in full bed of sealant.
Accessories to be utilized that provide complete seal of all edges and concealing all non vinyl
fasteners.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Color: Match panels

Edge to Edge Trim: 2 inch inch T bar (V-45), set in receiver for Two-Piece Division bar
(V-55)
Edge to alternate material: Manufacturers standard vinyl trim with minimum one inch
face overlapping FRP panel.
Inside Corner: Manufacturers standard vinyl trim with minimum of one inch face
overlapping each surface.
Outside Corner: Manufacturers standard vinyl trim with minimum of one inch face
overlapping in each direction.
Mechanical Edge Fasteners: Manufacturers recommended stainless steel self tapping
and countersunk skews.
Mechanical Field Fasteners: Manufacturers standard stainless steel self tapping rivet or
screw with exposed vinyl head.
Strapping: Provide 4 inch 20 gauge metal straps for bracing between girts.

PLASTIC PANELING
06640 - 2
B.
Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by

plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint
Sealants."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt,
and dust.
B.
Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
C.
Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends of walls
not less than half the width of full panels.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions, with manufactures

standard mounting rivets, hardware and trim. Provide a full bed of sealant at all overlapping
vertical wall joints. Place a full bed of sealant at the overlapping horizontal joints in the wash
bay ceiling. Panel overlaps to meet manufacturers recommendations.
B.
FRP-2 - COMPOSITE FRP PANELING

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Composite FRP panels to be mounted directly to engineered buildings wind girt system
and vertical metal stud sub framing coordinated to occur at vertical joint of FRP
composite panels and a maximum vertical dimension of 4 foot-0 inches. Horizontal sub
framing to be provided as required limiting vertical span of panels to maximum 4 foot-0
inches o.c.
Install panels in a bed of adhesive at horizontal and vertical framing. Mechanically anchor
panels to metal stud sub framing. Predrill and use grommet type washer for anchors.
Panels to be installed with out horizontal joints unless vertical application extends beyond
the available length of composite panel.
Mechanical edge fasteners to be countersunk and concealed by manufacturers vinyl trim.
Install vertical metal straps behind frp panels for bracing every 4 feet on center between
metal girts.
Mechanical field fasteners permitted as recommended by panel manufacturer for span of
rating of FRP composite panel. When required field fasteners to be manufacturers
standard through fastener with vinyl head.
Install trim accessories with adhesive and full bed of sealant. All exposed plywood edges
to have manufacturers trim and full bed of sealant.
Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside
corner trim in a bead of sealant.
Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.
Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent
recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no
residue remains.
END OF SECTION
PLASTIC PANELING
06640 - 3

PLASTIC PANELING
06640 - 4
SECTION 07110
DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 -
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.

to this Section.
B.
Related Sections:
1. Section 03300: Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.2
SUMMARY
A.

1. Application of dampproofing coating to the exterior face of the concrete foundation.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product data for each type of product specified, including data substantiating that materials
comply with requirements for each dampproofing material specified. Include recommended
method of application, recommended primer, and number of coats, coverage or thickness.
B.
Refer to Project-Specific Submittal Log provided by Owner at Pre-Bid Meeting.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
1.6
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed dampproofing

similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.

A.
Deliver materials to Project site as specified by manufacturer labeled with manufacturers

name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life, and directions for
storing and mixing with other components.
B.
Store materials as specified by the vapor barrier/dampproofing manufacturer in a clean, dry,

protected location and within the temperature range required by vapor barrier/dampproofing
manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
C.
Remove and replace material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Substrate: Proceed with dampproofing only after substrate construction and penetrating

DAMPPROOFING
07110 - 1
work have been completed.

B.
Protect all adjacent areas not to be applied to. Where necessary, apply masking to prevent
staining of surfaces to remain exposed wherever membrane abuts to other finish surfaces.
C.
Perform work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are within
manufacturers recommendations for the material and application method used.
D.
Ambient temperature shall be within manufacturers specifications.
E.
All plumbing, electrical, mechanical and structural items to be under or passing through the
vapor barrier/dampproofing membrane shall be positively secured in their proper positions
and appropriately protected prior to membrane application.
F.
Vapor barrier/dampproofing membrane shall be installed before placement of reinforcing

steel. When not possible, all exposed reinforcing steel shall be masked by General
Contractor prior to membrane application.
PART 2 -
2.1
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. EPRO Waterproofing Systems
P.O. Box 347
Derby, KS 67037
800-882-1896 www.eproserv.com
2. W.R. Meadows, Inc.
P.O. Box 338
Hampshire, IL 60140
800-342-5976 www.wrmeadows.com
3. Karnak
800-526-4236 www.karnakcorp.com
4. Tremco Barrier Solutions
www.termcobarriersolutions.com
2.2
DAMPPROOFING
A.
Spray-Applied, solvent dampproofing should be asbestos-free, non-fibered asphalt

compound that meets U.S. EPA Architectural Coatings Rule requirements for VOC content.
1. SealMastic Spray-Mastic by W.R. Meadows
a. ASTM D 4479, Type I
B.
Spray-Applied water-based dampproofing should be asbestos-free, non-fibered polymer

modified asphalt emulsion.

DAMPPROOFING
07110 - 2
1. EcoDamp polymerized moisture protection membrane by EPRO Waterproofing Systems
C.
Brush applied solvent dampproofing should be an asbestos-free, fibered, asphalt compound

that meets the U.S. EPA Architectural Coatings Rule requirements for VOC content.
1. SealMastic Semi-Mastic by W.R. Meadows
D.
Trowel applied solvent dampproofing should be a heavy bodied, asbestos-free, fibered,

asphalt compound that meets the U.S. EPA Architectural Coatings Rule requirements for
VOC content.
1. SealMastic Trowel-Mastic W.R. Meadows
E.
Fluid-Applied, Elastomeric Coal-Tar Free Waterproofing, High Solids, VOC-Compliant,

Modified Polyurethane Waterproofing membrane.
1. TREMProof 201/60 Tremco Sealants, Roller (R) Grade
a. ASTM C 836
PART 3 -
3.1
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Clean concrete substrate of all scale, loose concrete, dust, rust, dirt, oil, grease and other
foreign matter. Use a wire brush. Before product application, fill voids, cracks and holes in
concrete with cement mortar and allow patch to dry.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with manufacturer's recommendations except where more stringent requirements are
indicated and where Project conditions require extra precautions to ensure satisfactory
performance of work.
B.
Application: Apply dampproofing to the following surfaces.

1. Exterior, below-grade surfaces of concrete foundation grade beams in contact with earth
or other backfill.
2. Backside of block or concrete retaining walls.
C.
Apply vertical dampproofing down grade beams from finished-grade line to bottom of grade
beam. Do not extend onto surfaces exposed to view when the Project is completed.
D.
Apply dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer instructions.
E.
Apply dampproofing to properly prepared surface in a continuous, unbroken film, free of

DAMPPROOFING
07110 - 3
pinholes, filling and spreading around all joints, slots and grooves and penetrating into all
crevices, chases, reveals, soffits and corners.
F.
3.3
The manufacturers technical representative shall visit the site during installation and before
backfilling and submit to the Contractor, CDOT and the Architect within two (2) days a written
report stating what was observed and if the work was being done per the manufacturers
requirements.
BACKFILLING
A.
3.4
Backfilling should be done within 24 to 48 hours after application or as required by product.

No longer than seven days maximum should elapse. Be careful not to damage or rupture the
film or displace coating or membranes.
PRECAUTIONS
A.
Handle as a combustible product. Read and follow application information and precautions.
END OF SECTION

DAMPPROOFING
07110 - 4
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 -
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2

to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.

1. Foundation wall insulation (supporting backfill)
2. Concealed building insulation
3. Sound-attenuating insulation
B.
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Section 06640 Plastic Paneling
Section 07110 Dampproofing
Section 07260 Vapor Retarders
Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames
Section 09260 Gypsum Board Assembly
Section 13122 Metal Building Systems
Thermal and Moisture Protection

Minimum R-values for Insulation and air filtration must comply with the building envelope
requirements for metal buildings with R-3.5 Thermal Spacer Block in 2009 IECC for the
following climate zone:
1.
Insulation:
Walls: R-19 Batt Insulation with 6 Mil Moisture Barrier

Roof: R-38 Batt Insulation with 6 Mil Moisture Barrier
2. All wall and roof areas to be covered with Metal Building Liner panels
3. Caulking:
Caulk all joints of dissimilar materials
4. Flashing and Trim pieces:
Per Metal Building suppliers standard details.
5. CLIMATE ZONE 6:
i Roofs: Prescriptive Approach*:R-13 + R-19; U-Factor Alternative**: U-0.049
ii. Walls: Prescriptive Approach*: R-13 + R5.6 CI; U-Factor Alternative**: 0.069
iii. Slab: R-10 for 24 inches below per table 502.2(1) and section 502.2.6,
placed vertically outside foundation;
6. Prescriptive Approach: Comply with Table 502.2 Building Envelope Requirements
Opaque Assemblies of 2009 IECC
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 1
ROOFS
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCE
The first R-value is for faced fiberglass insulation
batts draped over purlins. The second R-value is
ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1
R-13 + R-13 for unfaced fiberglass insulation batts installed
Table A2.3 including
R-13 + R-19 parallel to the purlins. A minimum R-3.5 thermal
Addendum "G"
spacer block is placed above the purlin/batt, and
the roof deck is secured to the purlins.
WALLS
R-16, R-19
The construction is faced fiberglass insulation

batts installed vertically and compressed
between the metal wall panels and the steel
Addendum "G"
framing.
R-13 + R-5.6 ci The first R-value is for faced fiberglass insulation
R-19 + R-5.6 ci batts installed perpendicular and compressed
between the metal wall panels and the steel
framing. The second rated R-value is for
continuous rigid insulation installed between the
Addendum "G"
metal wall panel and steel framing, or on the
interior of the steel framing.
7. **U-Factor Alternative: An assembly with a U-factor equal to or less than the value
designated in the table is also acceptable. The U-Factor is determined by the complete
wall or roof assembly including all metal building and insulation components. Provide
manufacturers testing information for complete wall or roof assemblys tested U-value
and/or Energy Code Compliance Information or alternatively submit a completed
COMCheck for complete wall or roof assembly calculating the U-Value for each
assembly.
8. All exterior wall and roof areas to be covered with pre-formed, pre-finished metal panels.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data for each type of insulation product used.
B.
Product test reports from and based on tests performed by a qualified independent testing
agency evidencing compliance of insulation products with specified requirements including
those for thermal resistance, fire-test-response characteristics, water-vapor transmission,
water absorption, and other properties, based on comprehensive testing of current products.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the

fire-test-response characteristics indicated on Drawings or specified elsewhere in this Section
as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials
with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136

BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 2
1.5

A.
Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling,
and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B.
Protect plastic insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project
site before installation time.
3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each
area of construction.
PART 2 -
2.1
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

insulation products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Extruded-Polystyrene Board (XPS) Insulation:
a. DiversiFoam Products www.diversifoam.com 1-763-477-5854
b. Dow Chemical Co. www.dow.com 1-866-583-2583
c. Owens Corning www.owenscorning.com 1-800-438-7465
d. UC Industries, Inc.; OwensCorning www.owenscorning.com 1-800-438-7465
2. Glass-Fiber Insulation:
a. Guardian Building Products www.guardianbp.com 1-800-569-4262
b. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation www.owenscorning.com 1-800-438-7465
c. CertainTeed Corporation www.certainteed.com 1-800-233-8990
d. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH www.knaufusa.com 1-317-398-4434
e. Johns Manville www.jm.com 1.800.654.3103
2.2
INSULATING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced
standards.
1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's
standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.
B.
Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polystyrene thermal insulation formed

from polystyrene base resin by an extrusion process using hydrochlorofluorocarbons as
blowing agent to comply with ASTM C 578 for type and with other requirements indicated
below:
1. Type IV, 1.60-lb/cu. ft. (26-kg/cu. m) minimum density, unless otherwise indicated.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices
of 75 and 450, respectively

BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 3
C.
Faced Mineral-Fiber Batt or Blanket Insulation: Thermal insulation combining mineral fibers
of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665, Type III,
Class A (batts or blankets with reflective vapor-retarder membrane facing and flame spread
of 25 or less); with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder
membrane on one face.
1. Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass.
D.
Un-faced Mineral-Fiber Batt or Blanket Insulation to be used with vapor retarder: Thermal
insulation combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to
comply with ASTM C 665, Type II, Class A.
1. Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass.
2. Un-Faced Insulation is required when using Banded Liner System
E.
Un-faced Mineral Fiber Batt or Blanket Insulation to be used in interior framed partition walls
as sound insulation combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting
resins to comply with ASTM C 665, Type I, unfaced.
Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass.
2.3
AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS

A.
Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.
B.
Protection Board: Pre-molded, semi rigid asphalt/fiber composition board, 1/4 inch (6 mm)
thick, formed under heat and pressure, standard sizes.
2.4
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: 2 outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an

inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less
than 25 lb/1000 sq. ft. (12 kg/100 sq. m), with maximum permeance rating of 0.0507 perm
(2.9 ng/Pa x s x sq. m).
B.
Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder

manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
C.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders:
a. DURA-SKRIM 6WW; Raven Industries, Inc.
b. Griffolyn T-65; Reef Industries, Inc., Griffolyn Div
PART 3 -
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION

BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 4
A.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing

projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or that interfere with insulation attachment.
B.
Close off openings in cavities receiving poured-in-place insulation to prevent escape of

insulation. Provide bronze or stainless-steel screens (inside) where openings must be
maintained for drainage or ventilation.
3.3
A.
Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and

application indicated.
B.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to
ice and snow.
C.
Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit
tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere
with placement.
D.
Apply single layer of insulation to meet required R-value, unless multiple layers are otherwise
shown or required to meet the required R-value.
3.4
3.5
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other
conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION

A.
On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.
B.
Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by

applying protection board. Set in adhesive according to written instructions of insulation
manufacturer.
C.
Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by applying
protection board.
INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A.
Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's

written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive
or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B.
Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic,
or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids
in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation
manufacturer.

BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 5
C.
Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.
1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to
surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
D.
Set reflective, foil-faced units with not less than 0.75-inch (19-mm) air space in front of foil as
indicated.
E.
Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the

following requirements:
1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members. Where
more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit
between ends.
2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3.6
INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS

A.
General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor

transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated.
Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those
filled with loose-fiber insulation.
B.
Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than 2 wall studs.
Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall
openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
C.
Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor-retarder tape according to
vapor retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with
vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.
D.
Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as

recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer.
E.
Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor
retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and
vapor retarder.
F.
Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment
3.7
PROTECTION
A.
General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful
weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or
enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by
permanent construction immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 6
SECTION 07260
VAPOR RETARDERS
1.1
GENERAL
A. Provisions of The General Conditions of the Contract (Design/Bid/Build) and Division 1
General Requirements and applicable provisions elsewhere in the contract documents apply to this
Section.
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Reinforced vapor retarders
B.
Tape to seal joints and repair vapor retarder
C.
Pipe boots for sealing penetrations
D.
Vapor Retarders at non-faced batt insulation
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Slabs on grade
B.
Section 07210 - Building Insulation
C.
Section 13122 Metal Building Systems
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM International (ASTM):

1.
ASTM D 882 - Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting.
2.
ASTM D 1709 - Impact Resistance of Plastic Film by the Free-Falling Dart Method.
3.
ASTM D 2582 - Puncture-Propagation Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and Thin
Sheeting.
4.
ASTM D 3776 - Mass Per Unit Area (Weight) of Woven Fabric.
5.
ASTM D 4833 - Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles, Geomembranes, and
Related Products.
6.
ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
7.
ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
8.
ASTM E 1643 - Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or
Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
9.
ASTM E 1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in
Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs.
B.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 701 - Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant
Textiles and Films.
SUBMITTALS

VAPOR RETARDERS
07260-1
1.6
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1.
Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2.
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3.
Installation methods.
C.
Samples: Submit manufacturer's samples of reinforced vapor retarders.
D.
Verification Samples: For each product specified, two samples, minimum size 5 inches (125
mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7
Pre-installation Meeting: Convene a pre-installation meeting two weeks before start of

installation of reinforced vapor retarders. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work
of this section, including Contractor, Architect, and installer. Review installation, protection,
and coordination with other work.

A.
Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and

packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
B.
Storage:
1.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
2.
Store materials in a clean, dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Handling: Protect materials during handling and installation to prevent damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
MANUFACTURER
A.
Raven Engineered Films www.ravenefd.com
B.
Stego Industries
www.stegoindustries.com
C.
W.R. Meadows
www.wrmeadows.com
1-605-335-0174
(877) 464-7834
1-800-342-5976
UNDERSLAB REINFORCED VAPOR RETARDERS

A.

1. Reinforced-Polyethylene or Polyolefin Resin Vapor Retarders:
a. Raven Industries Engineered Films Vapor Block 10 mil minimum
b. Stego Industries Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier 15 mil minimum
c. W. R. Meadows Perminator, 10 mil minimum,
B.
Reinforced- Polyethylene or Polyolefin Resin Vapor Retarders: 10 mil minimum thickness

with permeance rating of less than 0.01 perm (2.9 ng/Pa x s x sq. m).
WALL CAVITY VAPOR RETARDER

A.
Products:

VAPOR RETARDERS
07260-2
1. Guardian Building Products Energy Saver FP Fabric as part of the Energy Saver FP
Insulation System
2. Owens Corning Type 1070 Vapor Retarder Fabric as part of the OptiLiner Banded Liner
System
3. Low Permeance Vapor Retarder with 8 mil minimum thickness, a permeance rating between
0.01 perms and 0.02 perms per ASTM E 96 Method A , minimum Tensile Strength (Strip)
per ASTM D 5034 of 100lb Warm and 91lb Weft, minimum Grab Tensile per ASTM D
5034-95 of 136lb warp and 129 lb weft and minimum Tear Strength per ASTM D 2261 of 50
lbs Warp and 50 lbs Weft
2.4
ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Ensure accessories are from same manufacturer as reinforced vapor retarders.
B.
Mastic Tape:
1.
Description: Black, double-sided, asphaltic, pressure-sensitive, mastic tape.
2.
Weight: 3.75 pounds per 100 feet (1.7 kg per 30 m).
3.
Thickness: 35 mils (0.9 mm).
4.
3 Inch Seam Shear: 35 pounds (156N).
C.
Self-Adhesive Repair Tape:

1.
Description: Reinforced white backing with Gray Adhesive.
2.
Weight: 3.0 lbs for 4 inch x 50 foot roll.
3.
Thickness: 26 mils (0.65 mm).
4.
3 inch Seam Shear: 30 lbs (134 N)
D.
Fire Retardant Self-Adhesive Tape:

1.
Description: White backed adhesive tape.
2.
Weight: 3.75 lbs per roll, 4 inches x 180 feet long.
3.
Thickness: 5 mils(0.125 mm).
4.
Adhesion to Steel: 66 oz/in (18 N/in).
E.
Pipe Boots: pipe boots, factory-fabricated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces and areas to receive reinforced vapor retarders. Notify Architect in writing of
defects of work and other unsatisfactory site conditions that would cause defective installation
of vapor retarders. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been
corrected.
B.
Verify site dimensions.
C.
Commencement of work will imply acceptance of substrate.
INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS

A.
In non-faced batt or blanket thermal insulation systems using a vapor retarder as part of the
insulation system, refer to further installation requirements in Section 07210.

VAPOR RETARDERS
07260-3
B.
General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor

transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated.
Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those
filled with loose-fiber insulation.
C.
Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than 2 wall
studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at
perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches (406 mm)
o.c.
D.
Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor-retarder tape according to
vapor retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with
vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.
E.
Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as

recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer.
F.
Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor
retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and
vapor retarder.
G.
Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other
work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
3.2 PROTECTION
C.
Protect reinforced vapor retarders from damage until covered by roof insulation.
D.
Protect reinforced vapor retarders from damage until covered by wall finish.
E.
Protect reinforced vapor retarders from damage during installation of reinforcing steel and
utilities and during placement of granular materials or concrete slab.
F.
Immediately repair damaged vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION

VAPOR RETARDERS
07260-4
SECTION 07272
FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes fluid-applied, vapor-retarding membrane air barriers.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Section 07210 Building Insulation
DEFINITIONS
A.
Air-Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the movement of
air.
B.
Air-Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides continuity.
C.
Air-Barrier Assembly: The collection of air-barrier materials and accessory materials applied to
an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement
through the wall.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.

1.
1.5
Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating

substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of products.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Certificates: From air-barrier manufacturer, certifying compatibility of air barriers and
accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the
barrier.

FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS

07272 - 1
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer.
1.
1.7
Installer shall be licensed by ABAA according to ABAA's Quality Assurance Program and
shall employ ABAA-certified installers and supervisors on Project.

A.
Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
B.
Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
1.8
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by air-barrier manufacturer.
1.
2.
Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air-barrier performance.

Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier materials and air-barrier accessories from single
source from single manufacturer.
B.
Low-Emitting Materials: Air barriers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.2
A.
General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor-retarding air barrier.
Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing
substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations and
transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified
limits.
B.
Air-Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
when tested according to [ASTM E 283] [ASTM E 783] [or] [ASTM E 2357].


07272 - 2
2.3
VAPOR-RETARDING MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER

A.
Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Retarding Membrane Air Barrier: Elastomeric, modified bituminous

membrane.
1.

a.
Elastomeric, Modified Bituminous Membrane:

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
2.
Physical and Performance Properties:

a.
b.
c.
2.4
Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; [Barriseal R] [or] [Barriseal S].

Epro Services, Inc.; [Ecoflex-R] [or] [Ecoflex-S].
Henry Company; [Air-Bloc 06] [Air-Bloc 06 QS] [Air-Bloc 06 WB].
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash Liquid.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Air-Shield LM.
Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; ExoAir 120SP/R.
Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft.
pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.
Vapor Permeance: Maximum 0.1 perm ASTM E 96/E 96M.
Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 500 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C.
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
General: Accessory materials recommended by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a complete

air-barrier assembly and compatible with primary air-barrier material.
B.
Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by air-barrier material

manufacturer.
C.
Counterflashing Strip: Modified bituminous, 40-mil- thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 32

mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to an 8-mil- thick, cross-laminated polyethylene film with
release liner backing.
D.
Butyl Strip: Vapor retarding, 30 to 40 mils thick, self-adhering; polyethylene-film-reinforced top

surface laminated to layer of butyl adhesive with release liner backing.
E.
Modified Bituminous Strip: Vapor retarding, 40 mil thick, smooth surfaced, self-adhering;
consisting of 36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil-thick polyethylene film with
release liner backing.
F.
Joint Reinforcing Strip: Air-barrier manufacturer's glass-fiber-mesh tape.
G.
Substrate-Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel-grade substrate filler.
H.
Adhesive and Tape: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure-sensitive

adhesive tape.
I.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, [0.0187 inch] [0.0250 inch] <Insert
dimension> thick, and Series 300 stainless-steel fasteners.


07272 - 3
J.
Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: One- or two-component, foamed-in-place, polyurethane

foam sealant, 1.5- to 2.0-lb/cu. ft density; flame-spread index of 25 or less according to
ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant
manufacturer.
K.
Modified Bituminous Transition Strip: Vapor retarding, 40 mils thick, smooth surfaced, selfadhering; consisting of 36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- thick polyethylene film
with release liner backing.
L.
Adhesive-Coated Transition Strip: Vapor-permeable, 17-mil- thick, self-adhering strip consisting

of an adhesive coating over a permeable laminate with a permeance value of 37 perms.
M.
Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 2000, minimum 50- to 65-mil- thick, cured sheet neoprene
with manufacturer-recommended contact adhesives and lap sealant with galvanized-steel
termination bars and fasteners.
N.
Preformed Silicone-Sealant Extrusion: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of cured lowmodulus silicone extrusion, sized to fit opening widths, with a single-component, neutral-curing,
Class 100/50 (low-modulus) silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.
1.

a.
b.
c.
d.
Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal.

Momentive Performance Materials Inc.; US11000 UltraSpan.
Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span.
Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; Spectrem Simple Seal.
O.
Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50 (low
modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, Use O. Comply with Section 07920 "Joint Sealants."
P.
Termination Mastic: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied elastomeric liquid;

trowel grade.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other
contaminants.
Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by airbarrier manufacturer.
Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by
plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


07272 - 4
3.2
SURFACE PREPARATION
A.
Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air-barrier application.
B.
Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray
affecting other construction.
C.
Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other
penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
D.
Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,
holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching membrane.
E.
Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.
F.
At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and
edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.
G.
Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another
with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous
support for air barrier.
3.3
JOINT TREATMENT
A.
Concrete and Masonry: Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to
ASTM C 1193 and air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from
joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 before coating surfaces.
1.
3.4
Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of air-barrier manufacturer's recommended

preparation coat extending a minimum of 3 inches along each side of joints and cracks.
Apply a double thickness of fluid air-barrier material and embed a joint reinforcing strip in
preparation coat.
TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATION

A.
General: Install strips, transition strips, and accessory materials according to air-barrier
manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a
continuous air barrier.
1.
2.
B.
Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base
flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.
Install modified bituminous strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum
of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate.
Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be
covered by fluid air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24
hours.
1.
Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to

achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.


07272 - 5
C.
Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier material continuously to roofing-membrane air barrier,
concrete below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and window
systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door
framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials.
D.
At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with
termination mastic.
E.
Apply joint sealants forming part of air-barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended
application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within
these temperature ranges.
F.
Wall Openings: Prime concealed perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls,
storefronts, and doors. Apply modified bituminous transition strip so that a minimum of 3 inches
of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing
to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch of full contact.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Modified Bituminous Transition Strip: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion.

Adhesive-Coated Transition Strip: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion.
Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: Apply adhesive to wall, frame, and flashing sheet. Install
flashing sheet and termination bars, fastened at 6 inches o.c. Apply lap sealant over
exposed edges and on cavity side of flashing sheet.
Preformed Silicone-Sealant Extrusion: Set in full bed of silicone sealant applied to walls,
frame, and air-barrier material.
G.
Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and
miscellaneous penetrations of air-barrier material with foam sealant.
H.
Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with
termination mastic.
I.
Seal top of through-wall flashings to air barrier with an additional 6-inch wide, modified
bituminous strip.
J.
Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by
metal counter flashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.
K.
Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and
flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired
areas in strip direction.
3.5
FLUID AIR-BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A.
General: Apply fluid air-barrier material to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to
achieve a continuous air barrier according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.
Apply fluid air-barrier material within manufacturer's recommended application temperature
ranges.
1.
2.
3.
Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.

Limit priming to areas that will be covered by fluid air-barrier material on same day.
Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.
Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to
achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.


07272 - 6
B.
Membrane Air Barriers: Apply a continuous unbroken air-barrier membrane to substrates

according to the following thickness. Apply air-barrier membrane in full contact around
protrusions such as masonry ties.
1.
Vapor-Retarding Membrane Air Barrier: Total [dry film thickness as recommended in

writing by manufacturer to meet performance requirements, but not less than 40-mil dry
film thickness, applied in one or more equal coats.
C.
Apply strip and transition strip a minimum of 1 inch onto cured air-barrier material according to
air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner.
E.
Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair
substrates and reapply air-barrier components.
3.6

A.
Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period,
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required
by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for more than 60 days, remove and
replace air barrier or install additional, full-thickness, air-barrier application after repairing
and preparing the overexposed membrane according to air-barrier manufacturer's written
instructions.
Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved by
air-barrier manufacturer.
B.
Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work
using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
C.
Remove masking materials after installation.
END OF SECTION


07272 - 7


07272 - 8
SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 -
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Provisions of The General Conditions of the Contract (Design/Build) and Division 1 General
Section.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
Section 03300:
Section 08110:
Section 08800:
Section 09260:
Section 13122:
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Steel Doors & Windows
Glazing for glazing sealants
Metal Building Components
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by
reference to this Section:
B.
This Section includes sealants for the following applications:

1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces:
a. Joints between different materials and around frames of doors and windows.
b. Other joints as indicated.
2. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings.
c. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows.
e. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
f. Other joints as indicated.
1.3
A.
1.4
Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight
continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured
sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 1
1.5
C.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products

furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
D.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint

sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose
work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1.6
1.7

A.
Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing
time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B.
Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent
their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or
other causes.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the
following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside
limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).
2. When joint substrates are wet.
B.
Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths
are less than or greater than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications
indicated.
C.
Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until

contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
PART 2 -
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 2
B.
2.2
ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A.
2.3
2.4
Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by CDOT Architect from manufacturer's full
range for this characteristic.
Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated
for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at
the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade,
class, and uses.
JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A.
General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for
applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory
testing.
B.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or
joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide
self-adhesive tape where applicable
C.
Backer rod to be closed-cell type.
A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction
joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of

sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of
staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and
formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 -
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
joint-sealant performance.
B.

JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 3
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical
abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate
capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles
remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free
compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following:
a. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm
substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
a. Metal
b. Glass
c. Porcelain enamel
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant
manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience.
Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers
to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by
cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after
tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A.
General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for
products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of
joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C.
Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative
to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
D.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and back of joints.

JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 4
E.
Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
F.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth,
uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and
adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
3.4
CLEANING
A.
3.5
Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants
and of products in which joints occur.
PROTECTION
A.
3.6
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite
such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are
indistinguishable from the original work.
ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A.
One-Part Nonacid-Curing Silicone Sealant: At all exterior joints, provide products complying
with the following:
1. Products:
a. Dow Corning 790; Dow Corning
b. Silpruf SCS 2000; GE Silicones
c. 890 FTS; Pecora Corporation
d. Spectrem 2; Tremco
e. SikaSil WS 605-S; Sika Corporation
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag)
3. Class: 50
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).

JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 5
B.
Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: At interior joints exposed to water, kitchen, toilets,

showers, etc., provide products formulated with fungicide that are intended for sealing and
other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and
temperature extremes, and that comply with the following:
1. Products:
a. Dow Corning 786 Mildew Resistant; Dow Corning
b. Sanitary SCS 1702; GE Silicones
c. 898NST Silicone Sanitary Sealant; Pecora Corporation
d. PSI-611; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
e. Proglaze White; Tremco
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag)
3. Class: 25
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic)
C.
Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant: At interior joints not otherwise indicated, provide
products complying with the following:
1. Products:
a. Chem-Calk 500; Bostik Inc.
b. Vulkem 227; Mameco International
c. Dynatrol II; Pecora Corporation
d. PSI-270; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
e. NP 2; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc.
f. Dymeric, Tremco Inc.
2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag)
3. Class: 25
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic)
D.
Multicomponent Pourable Urethane Sealant: At interior and exterior horizontal joints, provide
products complying with the following:
1. Products: Provide one of the following
a. Chem-Calk 550; Bostik Inc.
b. Urexpan NR-200; Pecora Corporation
c. Sikaflex - 2c SL; Sika Corporation
d. SL 2; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc.
e. THC-900; Tremco
2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and P (pourable)
3. Class: 25
4. Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic)
END OF SECTION

JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 6
SECTION 08110
STEEL DOORS, WINDOWS AND FRAMES
PART 1 -
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2

to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Steel doors
Steel door frames
Borrowed-light frames
Hollow metal doors
Hollow metal frames
Hollow metal windows
Hollow metal borrowed lights
Other hollow metal items

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Section 07920: Joint Sealants

Section 08305: Access Doors - for Access Panels
Section 08710: Door Hardware - for door hardware and weather stripping.
Section 08800: Glazing - for glass in glazed openings.
Section 09260: Gypsum Board Assemblies - for frames installed in steel-framed gypsum
board partitions.
6. Section 09900: Painting - for field painting factory-primed doors and frames.
7. Section 13122: Metal Building Systems - frames installed in exterior metal building walls.
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.4
Design Requirements: Exterior hollow metal frames shall be designed by a professional

engineer registered in the State of Colorado, to resist a wind load of 27.5 psf with a maximum
deflection not to exceed L/180. Provide internal reinforcing as required to meet these
requirements. Design calculations shall be submitted to the CDOT Architect on request.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type,
level and model, material description, core description, construction details, label compliance,
sound and fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show the following:

1. Elevations of each door design


08110 - 1
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Details of doors including vertical and horizontal edge details

Frame details for each frame type including dimensioned profiles
Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware
Details of each different wall opening condition
Details of anchorages, accessories, joints, and connections
Coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements
C.
Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing

schedule for doors and frames.
D.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
A.
Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit
and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished
doors and frames.
B.
Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage
is found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are
acceptable to CDOT Architect. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired
as directed.
C.
Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch(100-mm-) high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could
create a humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately.
Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation.
PART 2 -
2.1
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

following:
1. Steel Doors and Frames:
a.
Curries Manufacturing
b.
Elco Metal Products
c.
Gateway Metal Products
d.
North Central Supply
e.
Southwestern Hollow Metals
f.
State Door, Inc.
g.
Transit Mix Doors Shop
h.
Or approved equal
2.2
MATERIALS


08110 - 2
A.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of
scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
B.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or

ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an
A40 (ZF120) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
D.
Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), Class B
coating; mill phosphatized; suitable for unexposed applications; stretcher-leveled standard of
flatness where used for face sheets.
2.3
DOORS
A.
General: Provide doors of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated.
B.
Interior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing
ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Vision Lite Systems: Manufacturer's standard kits consisting of glass lite moldings to
accommodate glass thickness and size of vision lite indicated.
D.
Interior Windows: Refer to glazing section for glazing requirements.
2.4
2.5
Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C, (Standard Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush)
Door closers as specified
Lever lock sets
Kick plates as specified
Paint doors and frames as scheduled
Sound insulated
Other hardware as specified
FRAMES
A.
General: Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, windows and
other openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Frames of 18 gauge thick steel sheet for interior doors and window frames.
C.
Frames of 16 gauge thick galvanized steel sheet for exterior doors.
D.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers
on strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door frames.
E.
Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 16 gauge thick, electrolytic zinc-coated
or metallic-coated steel sheet.
F.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to
be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable.
FABRICATION


08110 - 3
A.
General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid,
neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit
and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently
factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site.
B.
Door Construction: For locations as indicated, fabricate doors, panels, and frames from coldrolled steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door
construction or by addition of 16 gauge metallic-coated steel channels with channel webs
placed even with top and bottom edges.
C.
Interior Door Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails
of non-flush units, from the following material:
1. Cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum 18 gauge for interior doors
2. Galvanized steel sheet, minimum 16 gauge for exterior doors
D.
Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction that produces a door

complying with SDI Standards.
E.
Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames.
F.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from
either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
G.
Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or

scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies and
tested according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies.
H.
Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed
hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware
supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series
specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.
I.
Frame Construction: Fabricate frame with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners
to shape required to accommodate specified door and adjacent wall construction.
J.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for
surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site.
K.
Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI
A250.8.
L.
Glazing Stops: Manufacturer's standard, formed from 20 gauge thick steel sheet.
1. Provide non-removable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior
doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors.
2. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing stops on inside of glass, louvers, and other
panels in doors.
2.6
FINISHES
A.
Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer

complying with ANSI A250.10 for acceptance criteria.


08110 - 4
PART 3 -
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install pre-hung steel doors, frames, and accessories manufactured specifically for
metal buildings (no knock down frames permitted) according to Shop Drawings,
manufacturer's data, and as specified
B.
Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames
accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are
set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
1. Provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge
jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with
screws.
2. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
3. Provide at least two anchors per side on interior window frames
C.
Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames,
within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and
ANSI/DHI A115.1G.
D.
Window installations: Comply with industry standards for commercial window installation.
3.2

A.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged
areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer.
B.
Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from
doors and frames.
END OF SECTION


08110 - 5


08110 - 6
SECTION 08305
ACCESS DOORS
PART 1 -
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2

to this section.
SUMMARY
A.
The extent, location, type and size of each access door required shall be determined by the
individual trade contractor, i.e.: mechanical, electrical, fire protection, etc.
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Section 08710:
Section 08110:
Section 09260:
Section 09310:
Section 09511:
Door Hardware
Steel Doors and Frames
Ceramic Tile.
Acoustical Panel Ceilings
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product data for each type of access door assembly specified, including details of
construction relative to materials, individual components, profiles, finishes, and fire-protection
ratings (if required).
1. Include complete schedule, including types, general locations, sizes, wall and ceiling
construction details, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.
B.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain access doors for entire Project from one source and by
a single manufacturer.
B.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and
frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per test method as indicated
below, and are labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Size Variations: Obtain Architects acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units, which
may vary slightly from sizes indicated.

ACCESS DOORS
08305 - 1
PART 2 -
2.1
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.2
Acudor Products Inc.

Bar-Co, Inc. Div., Alfab, Inc.
J.L. Industries
Karp Associates, Inc.
Larsen's Manufacturing Co.
Milcor, Inc.
Nystrom, Inc.
MATERIALS
A.
2.3
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366 commercial-quality, cold-rolled steel sheet with baked-on,
rust-inhibitive primer.
ACCESS DOORS
A.
Non-Insulated, Fire-Rated Access Doors: Self-latching units consisting of frame, trim, door,
and hardware, complying with the following requirements:
1. Frame with Exposed Trim: 16 gauge sheet steel with 1 inch trim flange overlapping
surfaces surrounding door frame.
2. Door: 16 gauge sheet, welded pan type.
3. Hinges: Continuous type.
4. Latches: Bolt type, operated by either a ring turn or flush key device (keyed alike).
5. Fire-Protection Rating for walls and ceilings: As applicable.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
General: Manufacture each access door assembly as an integral unit ready for installation.
B.
Steel Access Doors and Frames: Continuous welded construction. Grind welds smooth and
flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to
secure access panels to types of supports indicated.
1. Exposed Flange: Nominal 1 inch wide around perimeter of frame.
2. For gypsum board assemblies or gypsum veneer plaster, furnish frames with edge trim
for gypsum board or gypsum base.
3. For installation in masonry construction, furnish frames with adjustable metal masonry
anchors.
C.
Locking Devices: Furnish number required to hold door in flush, smooth plane when closed.
1. Cylinder lock, furnish 2 keys per lock and key all locks alike.

ACCESS DOORS
08305 - 2
PART 3 -
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installing access doors.
B.
Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels
aligned with adjacent finished surfaces.
C.
Install concealed-frame access doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces.
3.2
ADJUST AND CLEAN

A.
Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.
B.
Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION

ACCESS DOORS
08305 - 3

ACCESS DOORS
08305 - 4
SECTION 08360
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
PART 1 -
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2

to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following types of sectional overhead doors:

1. Doors with steel-framed steel panels
2. Tracks and hardware for overhead doors
3. Remote-controlled automatic door operators
B.

1. Section 08800: Glazing
2. Section 13122: Metal Building Systems
3. Section 16050: Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
1.3
A.
Structural Performance: Provide sectional overhead doors capable of withstanding the

effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent
deformation of door components:
1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft., or as otherwise
applicable to the site location, acting inward and outward.
B.
1.4
Operation-Cycle Requirements: Design sectional overhead door components and operator

to operate for not less than 25,000 cycles.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type and size of sectional overhead door and accessory. Include
details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles,
and finishes. Provide roughing-in diagrams, operating instructions, and maintenance
information. Include the following:
1. Setting drawings, templates, and installation instructions for built-in or embedded anchor
devices.
2. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.


08360 - 1
3. Motors: Show nameplate data and speed ratings; characteristics; mounting

arrangements; size and location of winding termination lugs, conduit entry, and grounding
lug; and coatings. Demonstrate compliance with all items in Section 2.6 of this
Specification.
B.
Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturer's data sheets.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems. Differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring and between components
provided by door manufacturer and those provided by others.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for units with factory-applied finishes.
D.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized representative

of the sectional overhead door manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units
required for this Project.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain sectional overhead doors through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1. Obtain operators and controls from the sectional overhead door manufacturer.
C.
Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
PART 2 -
2.1
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Raynor Garage Doors

Clopay Building Products Co.
Overhead Door Corporation
Haas Door Co.
McKee Door, Inc.; a United Dominion Company
Wayne-Dalton Corp.
Windsor Door; a United Dominion Company
American Garage Door Supply (stainless steel hardware)


08360 - 2
2.2
STEEL SECTIONS
A.
Construct door sections from galvanized, structural-quality carbon-steel sheets complying

with ASTM A 653, commercial quality, with minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi and a
minimum G60 zinc coating.
1. Steel Sheet Thickness: Exterior face shall be 25 gauge minimum, hot dipped galvanized
steel, shop painted. Interior face shall be 25 gauge minimum, hot dipped galvanized
steel, shop painted. Interior and exterior faces panels shall be either: grooved, ribbed, or
textured (embossed).
B.
Fabricate door panels from a single sheet to provide sections 24 inches high and nominally 3
inches deep, with an R-Value not less than R-17. Roll horizontal meeting edges to a
continuous, interlocking, keyed, rabbeted, shiplap, or tongue-in-groove weather tight seal,
with a reinforcing flange return.
C.
Enclose open section with not less than 14 gauge galvanized end stiles welded in place.
Provide not less than 16 gauge galvanized intermediate stiles, cut to door section profile,
spaced at not more than 48 inches o.c., and welded in place.
D.
Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle complying with bottom section
profile and allowing installation of astragal.
E.
Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to

stiffen door and for wind loading. Provide galvanized steel bars, struts, trusses or strip steel,
formed to depth and bolted or welded in place.
F.
Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment.
G.
Insulation: Insulate inner core of steel sections with manufacturer's standard rigid cellular
bonded and adhered polystyrene or foamed-in-place polyurethane thermal insulation, with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively, according
to ASTM E 84; or with fiberglass thermal insulation. Secure insulation to door section.
Enclose insulation completely, with no exposed insulation material evident. EXCEPTION:
Insulation NOT required on Sand Shed Overhead Doors.
H.
Fabricate sections so finished door assembly is rigid and aligned, with tight hairline joints,
and free of warp, twist, and deformation.
I.
Finish galvanized steel door sections as follows:

1. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
2. Surface Preparation: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces
are free of oil and surface contaminants.
3. Pretreat zinc-coated steel, after cleaning, with a conversion coating of type suited to
organic coating applied over it.
4. Apply manufacturer's standard primer and powder-coat-applied finish coats to interior
and exterior door faces after forming, according to coating manufacturer's written
instructions for application, thermosetting, and minimum dry film thickness.
a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors
and glosses.


08360 - 3
2.3
TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES

A.
Tracks: Provide 14 gauge galvanized steel track system for vehicle storage areas providing
the required clearances shown. Provide complete track assembly including brackets, bracing,
and reinforcement for rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type and
size. Slot vertical sections of track at 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. for door-drop safety device.
Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical or otherwise design to ensure tight closure at jambs
when door unit is closed. Weld or bolt to track supports.
B.
Track Reinforcement and Supports: Provide galvanized steel track reinforcement and
support members for vehicle storage areas, complying with ASTM A 36 and ASTM A 123.
Use stainless steel supports in the wash bay, Secure, reinforce, and support tracks as
required for door size and weight to provide strength and rigidity without sag, sway, and
vibration during opening and closing of doors.
C.
Support and attach tracks to opening jambs with continuous angle welded to tracks and
attached to wall. Support horizontal (ceiling) tracks with continuous angle welded to track
and supported by laterally braced attachments to overhead structural members at curve and
end of tracks.
D.
Weatherseals: Provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping

gaskets of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and at top of overhead door.
1. Provide motor-operated doors with combination bottom weatherseal and sensor edge.
2. In addition, provide continuous flexible seals at door jambs for a weathertight installation.
E.
Windows: Provide windows of type and size indicated and in arrangement shown. Set
glazing in vinyl, rubber, or neoprene glazing channel for metal-framed doors. Provide
removable stops of same material as door section frames.
1. Size: Manufacturer's standard panel for type of glazing indicated.
2. Clear insulated glass units complying with IECC energy code for applicable climate zone,
glass type complying with ASTM C 1036.
3. Coordinate glazing size with O.H. door manufacturer standard window size.
2.4
HARDWARE
A.
General: Provide heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized,

stainless-steel, or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type.
B.
Hinges: Provide 14 gauge heavy-duty galvanized steel hinges, at each end stile and at each
intermediate stile. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails with bolts and lock
nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping fasteners where access to nuts is
not possible. Provide double-end stiles and hinges.
C.
Rollers: Provide heavy-duty rollers, with steel ball bearings in case-hardened steel races,
mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. Roller shaft should be minimum 7
inches in length. Extend roller shaft through both hinges of the specified double hinges.
Provide 3-inch diameter case hardened steel roller tires for 3-inch track or 2-inch diameter
roller tires for 2-inch track, depending on door size.


08360 - 4
D.
Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by
padlock, located on single-jamb side, operable from inside only.
E.
Fabricate locking device assembly with lock to be manually engaged only.
F.
Where door unit is power operated, provide safety interlock switch to disengage power supply
when door is locked.
2.5
COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM
A.
Torsion Spring: Use manufacturer recommended springs rated 25,000 cycles or greater, for
the size, weight and configuration of door. Use 302 stainless steel wire for springs in wash
bays. Combine operation with a spring bumper in each horizontal track to cushion door at
end of opening operation.
B.
Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket, as required to connect stationary end of spring to
the wall, to level shaft and prevent sag.
C.
Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation.
2.6
ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS

A.
General: Provide electric door operator assembly minimum horse power complete with
electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid
operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking
door, and accessories required for proper operation. Provide two (2) remote openers per
door and a waterproof wall-mounted control panel for all bays.
1. Usage Classification: Heavy Duty, 25 or more cycles per hour and more than 90 cycles
per day
2. Safety: Listed according to UL325 by a qualified testing agency for commercial or
industrial use.
B.
Emergency Manual Operation: Provide manual chain hoist for emergency manual operation.
Chain to be accessible at floor level.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
D.
Disconnect Device: Provide hand-operated disconnect or mechanism for automatically

engaging sprocket-chain operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while
disconnecting motor, without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect and operator
so they are accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent
motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.
E.
Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and
without affecting emergency auxiliary operator.
F.
Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with
NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V, ac or dc.
G.
Door-Operator Type: Provide unit consisting of electric motor and the following:


08360 - 5
1. Jackshaft type, side mounted, with V-belt primary drive, chain and sprocket secondary
drive, and quick disconnect-release for manual operation.
2. Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, continuous-duty, Class A
insulated, electric motors, complying with NEMA MG 1, with overload protection, sized to
start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction, from any position, at not less than
2/3 foot per second and not more than 1 foot per second, without exceeding nameplate
ratings or considering service factor. Motor Exposure: Exterior, dusty, wet or humid
H.
Door Controls: Provide momentary-contact, 3-button control station with push-button controls
labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."
1. Provide interior side-mounted units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with
general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 4x (weatherproof) enclosure.
I.
Obstruction Detection Device: Provide each motorized door with a primary and secondary
entrapment protection device in accordance with UL 325 for a Vehicular Class III Door
operator. External entrapment protection consisting of an indicated automatic safety sensor
capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of device immediately stops and
reverses downward door travel.
1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturers standard system designed to detect an obstruction
in door opening without contact between door and obstruction
a. Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with door operator control circuit to
detect damage to or disconnection of sensing device. When self-monitoring feature
is activated, door closes only with sustained pressure on close button.
b. Wash Bays: Wash bay doors to have photoelectric sensors approved for wet
environments. Vitector Nema 4/4X Optoeye or eqivalant product.
2. Electric Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather
stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor immediately stops and reverses
downward door travel. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up
reel.
a. Provide electrically actuated automatic bottom bar.
(1 Self-Monitoring Type: Provide self-monitoring, 4-wire configured device
designed to interface with door-operator control circuit to detect damage to or
disconnection of sensor edge.
J.
Limit Switches: Provide adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to
automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions.
K.
Radio Control: Provide radio control system consisting of the following:

1. 3-channel universal coaxial receiver to open, close, and stop door, 1 per operator
2. Multifunction remote control
3. Remote antenna mounting kit
PART 3 -
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION


08360 - 6
A.
Examine wall and overhead areas, including opening framing and blocking, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, clearances, and other
conditions affecting performance of Work of this Section.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install door, track, and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware,
jamb and head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to
Shop Drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and as specified.
B.
Fasten vertical track assembly to framing at not less than 24 inches o.c. Hang horizontal
track from structural overhead framing with angle or channel hangers welded and bolt
fastened in place. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for
rigid installation of track and door-operating equipment.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or
distortion and fitting weathertight for entire perimeter.
B.
Adjust belt-driven motors as follows:

1. Use adjustable motor-mounting bases for belt-driven motors.
2. Align pulleys and install belts.
3. Tension belt according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup

services and to train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below:
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup
and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
3. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract
Closeout."
4. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
5. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice.
END OF SECTION

08360 - 7


08360 - 8
SECTION 08520
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 -
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.

to this Section.
B.
Related Sections
1. Section 07920: Joint Sealants
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes Commercial Grade exterior, horizontal sliding aluminum windows and
fixed aluminum windows in mulled units, double glazed with insulating glass, designed for
metal buildings, of the performance class indicated.
A.
General: Provide aluminum windows engineered, fabricated, and installed to withstand

normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading without failure, as demonstrated
by testing manufacturer's standard window assemblies representing types, grades, classes,
and sizes required for Project according to test methods indicated. Thermal performance of
windows is to comply with the requirements in the 2009 IECC for the applicable climate zone.
B.
Performance Requirements: Testing shall demonstrate compliance with requirements

indicated in AAMA 101 for air infiltration, water penetration, and structural performance for
type, grade, and performance class of window units required. Where required design
pressure exceeds the minimum for the specified window grade, comply with requirements of
AAMA 101, Section 3, "Optional Performance Classes," for higher than minimum
performance class.
1. Air-Infiltration Rate for Operating Units: Not more than 0.37 cfm/ft. of operable sash joint
for an inward test pressure of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. Water Penetration: No water penetration as
defined in the test method at an inward test pressure of 20 percent of the design
pressure.
2. Uniform Load Deflection: No deflection in excess of 1/175 of any member's span during
the imposed load, for a positive (inward) and negative (outward) test pressure of 60
lbf/sq. ft.
3. Structural Performance: No failure or permanent deflection in excess of 0.4 percent of
any member's span after removing the imposed load, for a positive (inward) and negative
(outward) test pressure of 30 lbf/sq. ft.
4. Condensation Resistance: Where window units are indicated to be "thermally improved,"
provide units tested for thermal performance according to AAMA 1503.1 showing a
condensation resistance factor (CRF) of 45.

ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08520 - 1
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data for each type of window specified, including the following:
1. Construction details and fabrication methods
2. Profiles and dimensions of individual components
3. Data on hardware, accessories, and finishes
B.
Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of each type of window required including
information not fully detailed in manufacturer's standard Product Data and the following:
1. Layout and installation details, including anchors
2. Elevations at 1/4 inch = 1 foot scale and typical window unit elevations at 3/4 inch = 1
foot scale
3. Full-size section details of typical composite members, including reinforcement and
stiffeners
4. Location of weep holes
5. Panning details
6. Hardware, including operators
7. Glazing details
C.
Test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating that each type, grade, and
size of window unit complies with performance requirements indicated based on
comprehensive testing of current window units within the last 5 years. Test results based on
use of down-sized test units will not be accepted.
D.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed installation of

aluminum windows similar in material, design, and extent to those required for this Project
and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum windows from one source and by a single
manufacturer.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Check window openings by field measurements before fabrication and
show recorded measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee
opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum windows without field
measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions
correspond to guaranteed dimensions.
PART 2 -
PRODUCTS

ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08520 - 2
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Horizontal-Sliding Windows:
(1 Dominion Building Products
(2 EFCO Corporation
(3 Kawneer
(4 Manko
b. Fixed Windows:
(1 Dominion Building Products
(2 EFCO Corporation
(3 Kawneer
(4 Manko
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum Extrusions: Provide alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for strength,
corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000-psi ultimate
tensile strength and not less than 0.062 inch thick at any location for main frame and sash
members.
B.
Fasteners: Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other

materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum
window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components of window units.
1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw anchor into aluminum less than 0.125 inch thick,
reinforce interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads
or provide standard, noncorrosive, pressed-in, splined grommet nuts.
2. Exposed Fasteners: Except where unavoidable for application of hardware, do not use
exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of
member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate.
C.
Anchors, Clips, and Window Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips, and window accessories
of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or hot-dip zinc-coated steel or iron complying with
requirements of ASTMs B 633; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure
indicated.
D.
Compression-Type Glazing Strips and Weatherstripping: Unless otherwise indicated, and at

manufacturer's option, provide compressible stripping for glazing and weatherstripping such
as molded EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM D 2000 Designation 2BC415 to
3BC620, or molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D 2287, or molded expanded EPDM
or neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Grade 4.
E.
Sliding-Type Weatherstripping: Provide woven-pile weatherstripping of wool, polypropylene,

or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701.2.
1. Provide stripping with integral centerline barrier fin of semirigid plastic sheet of
polypropylene.

ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08520 - 3
F.
Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated window units, provide type recommended by
manufacturer for joint size and movement. Sealant shall remain permanently elastic,
nonshrinking, and nonmigrating. Comply with Division 7 Section 7920 "Joint Sealants" of
these Specifications for selection and installation of sealants.
G.
Wire-Fabric Insect Screen: 18-by-18, 18-by-16, or 18-by-14 mesh of 0.011-inch- diameter,

coated aluminum wire, complying with FS RR-W-365, Type VII.
2.3
HARDWARE
A.
2.4
General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless

steel, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with aluminum and of sufficient
strength to perform the function for which it is intended.
ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessories that comply with indicated standards.
B.
Insect Screens: Provide insect screens for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. Locate
screens on inside or outside of window sash or ventilator, depending on window type.
Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable
arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches.
1. Wickets: Provide sliding or hinged-type wickets, framed and trimmed for a tight fit and
durability during handling. Screen Frames: Fabricate frames of aluminum members of
0.020-mil- minimum wall thickness, with mitered or coped joints and concealed
mechanical fasteners. Finish to match window units.
a. Provide removable PVC spline-anchor concealing edge of screen frame.
C.
Weatherstripping: Provide sliding-type weatherstripping where sash rails slide horizontally or

vertically along unit frame. Provide compression-type weatherstripping at perimeter of each
operating sash where sliding type is inappropriate.
1. Provide weatherstripping locked into extruded grooves in sash.
2.5
HORIZONTAL-SLIDING WINDOWS
A.
Window Grade and Class: Comply with requirements of AAMA Grade and Performance
Class HS-CW50. Window units shall successfully pass operating force test performance
requirements specified in AAMA 101.
B.
Hardware: Provide the following operating hardware:

1. Sweep Latch
2. Pull
2.6
FIXED WINDOWS

ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08520 - 4
A.
B.
2.7
Window Grade and Class: Comply with requirements of AAMA Grade and Performance
Class FW-AW100. Window units shall successfully pass operating force test performance
requirements specified in AAMA 101.
Clerestory Window units shall be mulled units selected to withstand local wind load
requirements.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate aluminum window units to comply with indicated standards. Include a
complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units.
1. Provide units that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing.
2. Prepare window sash or ventilators for glazing, except where preglazing at the factory is
indicated.
B.
Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate window units with an integral, concealed,

low-conductance, thermal barrier, located between exterior materials and window members
exposed on interior, in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact.
1. Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than 3 years, has
been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and condensation, and
has been tested to show adequate strength and security of glass retention.
2. Provide hardware with low conductivity or nonmetallic material for hardware bridging
thermal breaks at frame or vent sash.
3. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to
exterior.
4. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged ventilators and similar lines of natural
water penetration.
5. Subframes: Provide subframes with anchors for window units as shown, of profile and
dimensions indicated but not less than 0.062-inch- thick extruded aluminum. Miter or
cope corners, and weld and dress smooth with concealed mechanical joint fasteners.
Finish to match window units.
6. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete
with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection
tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and
building deflections, as indicated.
7. Glazing Stops: Provide screw-applied or snap-on glazing stops, coordinated with glass
selection and glazing system indicated. Finish to match window units.
C.
2.8
Preglazed Fabrication: Preglaze window units at the factory where possible and practical for
applications indicated. Comply with glass and glazing requirements of Division 8 Section
"Glazing" of these Specifications and AAMA 101.
FINISHES
A.
Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and
designating finishes.
B.
Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as

fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II,
clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 607.1.

ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08520 - 5
PART 3 -
3.1
EXECUTION
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
Inspect openings before installation. Verify that rough or masonry opening is correct and sill
plate is level.
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for installing window units,
hardware, operators, and other components of the Work.
B.
Set window units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash.
Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.
1. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or
electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements
specified under "Dissimilar Materials" Paragraph in appendix to AAMA 101.
C.
Set sill members and other members in a bed of sealant or with joint fillers or gaskets, as
shown on Shop Drawings, to provide weathertight construction. Refer to Division 7 Section
07920 "Joint Sealants" for compounds, fillers, and gaskets to be installed concurrently with
window units. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components of the Work.
1. Sealants, joint fillers, and gaskets to be installed after installation of window units are
specified in another Division 7 Section 07920.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
3.4
Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and at
weatherstripping for smooth operation and a weathertight closure.
CLEANING
A.
Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installing windows. Exercise care to avoid damage
to protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt,
and other substances. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.
B.
Clean glass of preglazed units promptly after installing windows. Comply with requirements
of Division 8 Section "Glazing" for cleaning and maintenance.
3.5
PROTECTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to aluminum window
manufacturer, that ensure window units are without damage or deterioration at the time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08520 - 6
SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 -
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2

to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.

1. Commercial door hardware for the following:
a. Swinging doors
B.

1. Section 08110: Steel Doors and Frames
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes.
B.
Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of the suppliers

Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as
well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors,
frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door
hardware.
1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and
Format for the Hardware Schedule."
2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating
complete designations of every item required for each door or opening.
a. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Schedule at the
end of Part 3.
3. Content: Include the following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item
b. Manufacturer of each item
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information
d. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor
plans and in door and frame schedule

DOOR HARDWARE
08710 - 1
e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule

f. Mounting locations for door hardware
g. Door and frame sizes and materials
4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date,
particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of
other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data,
Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information
essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.
C.
Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of suppliers Architectural Hardware

Consultant, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying
diagram and index each key set to unique door designations.
D.
Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware.
E.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's

vicinity and who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant, available during
the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware
and keying.
1. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
C.
Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by the

Door and Hardware Institute as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is
experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are
comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.
D.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following:

1. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)",
ICC A117.1 and NFPA 101.
F.
Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section 01200 "Project Meetings." Incorporate keying conference decisions into
final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and
plans for future expansion
2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram
3. Requirements for key control system

DOOR HARDWARE
08710 - 2
4. Address for delivery of keys
1.5

A.
Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered
to Project site.
B.
Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware
Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
C.
Deliver keys to Owner either in person or by registered mail or overnight package service.
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and
other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop
Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and
installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
PART 2 -
PRODUCTS
2.1
SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A.
General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section.
B.
Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule at the
end of Part 3.
2.2
HINGES AND PIVOTS

A.

following:
1. Hinges
a. Ives (IVE)
b. McKinney
c. Stanley
B.
Standards: Comply with the following:

1. Butts and Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1.
2. Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI/BHMA A156.7.
C.
Quantity: As scheduled.
D.
Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door
thickness and clearances required:

DOOR HARDWARE
08710 - 3
E.
Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves)
into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.
F.
Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Entrance Doors: Heavy-weight ball bearing hinges.
2. Doors with Closers: Ball-bearing hinges.
3. Interior Doors: Ball-bearing hinges.
G.
Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin.
2. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a
groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the following
applications:
a. Out-swinging doors with locksets.
3. Corners: Square.
H.
Fasteners: Comply with the following:

1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes.
2. Stainless Steel Screws: At doors in wash bay provide stainless steel screws at metal
door and frames.
2.3
LOCKS AND LATCHES

A.

following:
1. Card Reader Lock
a. Alarm Lock Trilogy ETPDL Card Reader Lock (with interior lever handle) no
substitutions (ALA). Use in all non-wet locations.
b. Alarm Lock Trilogy PDL3000 Card Reader Lock- no substitutions (ALA). Use in all
wash bay applications
2. Mechanical Locks and Latches:
a. Best Lock Corporation (BLC)
b. Sargent Manufacturing; An ASSA ABLOY Group Company (SGT)
c. Schlage Lock Company; an Ingersoll-Rand Company
B.
Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Card Reader Lock Accessories:

1. At each exterior card reader lock provide a Key Pad Cover sized to match lock.
a. Manufacturer: Safety Technology International
(1 Product: STI-6516 Mini Bopper Stopper with Spring Loaded Hinge - Clear
2.4
CYLINDERS AND KEYING

DOOR HARDWARE
08710 - 4
A.

following:
1. Cylinders: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.
B.

1. Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A156.5.
C.
Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless
steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following:
1. Number of Pins: Six
2. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks
D.
Construction Keying: Comply with the following:

1. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of
construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.
E.
Keying System: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a factory-registered keying system

complying with the following requirements:
1. Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master key, and a
grand master key.
F.
Keys: Provide nickel-silver keys complying with the following:

1. Quantity: In addition to one extra blank key for each lock, provide the following:
a. Cylinder Change Keys: Five
b. Master Keys: Five
c. Grand Master Keys: Five
2.5
CLOSERS
A.

following:
1. Surface-Mounted Closers:
a. LCN Closers; and Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN)
b. Norton Door Controls; Div. of Yale Security Inc.; An ASSA ABLOY Group Company
(NDC)
c. Sargent Manufacturing Company; An ASSA ABLOY Group Company (SGT)
B.

1. Closers: ANSI/BHMA A156.4.
C.
Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written

recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather,
and anticipated frequency of use. Provide non-sized closers, adjustable to meet field
conditions and requirements for opening force.

DOOR HARDWARE
08710 - 5
2.6
PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS

A.

following:
1. Metal Protective Trim Units:
a. Hager Companies (HA)
b. Ives; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS)
c. Rockwood Manufacturing; An ASSA ABLOY Group Company (RO)
d. Trimco (TR)
B.
Standard: Comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.6.
C.
Materials: Fabricate protection plates from the following:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.050 inch thick; beveled top and 2 sides.
D.
Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting
of either machine or self-tapping screws.
E.
Furnish protection plates sized 2 inches less than door width by height specified in Door
Hardware Schedule.
2.7
STOPS AND HOLDERS

A.

following:
a. Ives; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS)
b. Rockwood Manufacturing; An ASSA ABLOY Group Company (RO)
c. Trimco (TR)
B.

1. Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16
C.
Wall Stops: For doors, unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated.
1. Where wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders.
D.
2.8
Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter
1/2 inch (13 mm); fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.
DOOR GASKETING
A.

B.

following:

DOOR HARDWARE
08710 - 6
1. Door Gasketing:
a. National Guard Products, Inc. (NG)
b. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PK)
c. Zero International (ZI)
C.
D.

General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke,
light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide
noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.
E.
Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for
gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283.
F.
Gasketing Materials: Comply with ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702.
2.9
THRESHOLDS
A.

following:
1. National Guard Products, Inc. (NG)
2. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM)
3. Zero International (ZI)
B.
2.10
FABRICATION
A.
Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's

name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in
conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect.
1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
B.
Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method
indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness.
Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and
ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or
forming methods if different from specified standard.
C.
Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates

generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to
commercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips
flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed,
except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for
installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only

DOOR HARDWARE
08710 - 7
means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow
door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.
2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications:
a. Mortise hinges to doors
b. Strike plates to frames
c. Closers to doors and frames
3. Steel Through Bolts: For the following fire-rated applications, unless door blocking is
provided:
a. Surface hinges to doors.
b. Closers to doors and frames.
c. Surface-mounted exit devices.
4. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors.
2.11
FINISHES
A.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other
components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are
assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D.
BHMA Designations: Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by the
following:
BHMA 630: Satin stainless steel, over stainless-steel base metal.
PART 3 -
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction,
and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 series.

1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to SDI 107.

DOOR HARDWARE
08710 - 8
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable
publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
B.
Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to
be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of
surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install
surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
C.
3.4
Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior, vsf bay, wash bay, and acoustical doors in full bed of
sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section 07920 "Joint Sealants."
ADJUSTING
A.
Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the
door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to
the leading edge of the door.
3.5
3.6

A.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B.
Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

Manufacturer:
(ALA) Alarm Lock
(IVE) Ives
(LCN) LCN
(NGP) National Guard Products
(SCH) Schlage

Approved Substitution:
no substitutions
McKinney, Stanley
Sargent
Pemko, Zero
Sargent
DOOR HARDWARE
08710 - 9
(VON) Von Duprin

(STI) Safety Technology International
Precision
no substitutions
HARDWARE GROUPS NO. 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 08: NOT USED
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 06: RESTROOM

DOOR NUMBER: 02 [RESTROOM]
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
3
EA
HINGE
1
EA
PRIVACY LOCK
1
EA
SURFACE CLOSER
2
1
1
EA
EA
SET
KICK PLATE
WALL STOP
SEALS
CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
L9040 07A L583-363
4040XP RW/PA SRI TBSRT - INSTALL
REGULAR ARM
8400 12" X 34 LDW B4E
WS407CVX
5050B - HEAD AND JAMBS
FINISH
630
630
689
MFR
IVE
SCH
LCN
630
630
BRN
IVE
IVE
NGP
FINISH
630
630
630
GRY
630
MFR
IVE
SCH
IVE
IVE
IVE
FINISH
630
630
689
MFR
IVE
SCH
LCN
GRY
630
US32
IVE
IVE
GJ
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 07: OFFICE DOOR

DOOR NUMBER: 03 [OFFICE]
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
3
EA
HINGE
1
EA
OFFICE/ENTRY LOCK
1
EA
WALL STOP
3
EA
SILENCER
2
EA
KICK PLATE
CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
L9050P 07A L583-363
WS407CVX
SR64-1
8400 12" X 34 LDW B4E
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 09: STORAGE DOOR

DOOR NUMBER: 04 [STORAGE]
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
3
EA
HINGE
1
EA
STOREROOM LOCK
1
EA
SURFACE CLOSER
3
2
1
EA
EA
EA
SILENCER
KICK PLATE
DOOR HOLD/STOP
CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP
L9080P 07A
4040XP CUSH SRI TBSRT - INSTAL
PARALLEL ARM
SR64-1
8400 12" X 34 LDW B4E
904H-US32-J SET TO 100 DEGREES
END OF SECTION
DOOR HARDWARE
08710 - 10
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
PART 1 -
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2

to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those
specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this
Section:
1. Windows
2. Man Doors
3. Overhead Doors
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3

Section 08110: Steel Doors, Windows, and Frames.
Section 08220: Special Doors and Frames
Section 08360: Sectional Overhead Doors
Section 08520: Aluminum Frames
Section 08710: Door Hardware
Section 13122: Metal Building Systems
DEFINITIONS
A.
Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced
glazing publications.
B.
Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is
attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and
practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written
instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on
interior surfaces of glass.
1.4
A.
General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and
wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage
attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of

GLAZING
08800 - 1
sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or

other system or material defects.
B.
Provide glazing that complies with the 2009 International Energy Conservation Code
requirements for fenestration, specifically Table 502.3, reproduced below.
4
5
EXCEPT
AND
6
CLIMATE ZONE
1
2
3
MARINE MARINE 4
Vertical fenestration (40% maximum of above-grade wall)
U-factor
Framing materials other than metal with or without metal reinforcement or cladding
1.20 0.75 0.65
0.40
0.35
0.35
U-factor
Metal framing with or without thermal break
Curtain wall/storefront U0.45
1.20 0.70 0.60
0.50
0.45
factor
1.20 1.10 0.90
0.85
0.80
0.80
Entrance door U-factor
All other U-factora
1.20 0.75 0.65
0.55
0.55
0.55
SHGC-all frame types
0.40
0.25 0.25 0.25
0.40
0.40
SHGC: PF < 0.25
NR
0.33
0.33
0.33
NR
NR
SHGC: 0.25 PF < 0.5
NR
0.40 0.40 0.40
NR
NR
SHGC: PF 0.5
Skylights (3% maximum)
0.60
0.75 0.75 0.65
0.60
0.60
U-factor
0.35 0.35 0.35
0.40
0.40
0.40
SHGC
0.35
0.35
0.40
0.40
0.80
0.45
0.80
0.45
0.45
NR
NR
0.45
NR
NR
0.60
NR
0.60
NR
C.
Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm
glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for
various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in
strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the site location
requirements.
D.
Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the
following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass
framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B.
Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in
preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.
C.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that
products furnished comply with requirements.

GLAZING
08800 - 2
D.
Samples: For each type of insulated glazing system specified, provide a 12 square sample.
E.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in

material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain each type of glass from the same primary-glass
manufacturer.
C.
Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for
each product and installation method indicated.
D.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product

manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in
referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: GANA'S "Glazing Manual" and "Laminated Glass Design Guide."
2. AAMA Publications:
AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and
AAMA TIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
3. SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM-3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines," and SIGMA
TB-3001, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
E.
Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least

one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following inspecting and
testing agency:
1. Insulating Glass Certification Council
2. Associated Laboratories, Inc.
3. National Accreditation and Management Institute
1.7

A.
Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to

prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes,
direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
B.
For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with
insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid
hermetic seal ruptures.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and
when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

GLAZING
08800 - 3
PART 2 -
2.1
1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions
are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4
deg C).
PRODUCTS
PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS

A.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products indicated in schedules
at the end of Part 3.
B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated in
schedules at the end of Part 3.
2.2
PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS

A.
2.3
Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class
as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3.
INSULATING GLASS
A.
Insulating-Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a

dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with
requirements specified in this Article and in the Insulating-Glass Schedule at the end of
Part 3.
1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where
needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites
and to comply with glass design requirements specified in "Performance Requirements"
Article. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is indicated.
B.
Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated in the
Insulating-Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3 are nominal and the overall thicknesses of
units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge.
C.
Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Manufacturer's standard sealants

Polyisobutylene and polysulfide
Polyisobutylene and silicone
Polyisobutylene and hot-melt butyl
Polyisobutylene and polyurethane
D.
Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.
E.
Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction complying

with the following requirements:
1. Aluminum with mill or clear-anodized finish.

GLAZING
08800 - 4
2.4
ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS

A.
General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:
1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,
and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
time of installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
B.
Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements
indicated for each liquid-applied, chemically curing sealant in the Glazing Sealant Schedule
at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade,
class, and uses.
1. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in
the Glazing Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for
adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand
the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and
remain in compliance with other requirements in ASTM C 920 for uses indicated.
C.
2.5
Glazing Sealant for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to product used in test
assembly to obtain fire-protection rating.
GLAZING TAPES
A.
Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids
content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces;
with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for
application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with
ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.
2.6
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus
5.
D.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness

required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

GLAZING
08800 - 5
2.7
E.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
F.
Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and
density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.
G.
Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to
obtain fire-resistance rating.
FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS

A.
Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for
Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with
written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with
system performance requirements.
B.
Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces
square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces.
C.
Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges.
PART 3 -
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep system.
3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before
glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
GLAZING, GENERAL
A.
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.

GLAZING
08800 - 6
B.
Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass,

minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.
C.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass
from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge
damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair
performance and appearance.
D.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.
E.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G.
Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows:
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face
clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of
tape.
H.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and
according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
J.
Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or
gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when
installation is subjected to movement.
K.
Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended
by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt
joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.4
TAPE GLAZING
A.
Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are
flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B.
Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes
to make them fit opening.
C.
Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first
and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints by applying tapes
to jambs and then to heads and sills.

GLAZING
08800 - 7
D.
Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E.
Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed.
F.
Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
G.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting
dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable
stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
H.
Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
3.5
SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A.
Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between
glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from
extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers
or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative
to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B.
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or
bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.6
3.7
PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A.
Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
B.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do
come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass
manufacturer.
C.
Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt,
scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer.
D.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any
way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E.
Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before
date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended by glass manufacturer.
GLASS SCHEDULE

GLAZING
08800 - 8
A.
Where glass is designated on the Drawings, provide the following:

1. GL-1: Uncoated Clear Insulating Safety Glass: Where glass of this designation is
indicated, primarily for doors, provide uncoated insulating-glass units complying with the
following:
a. Class 1, Kind FT (Fully Tempered), clear float glass.
b. Overall thickness: 5/8 inch double pane.
c. Tinting: None
d. Exterior applications to comply with Table 502.3 of 2009 IECC for U factor and SHGC
2. GL-2: Uncoated Clear Insulating Glass: Where glass of this designation is indicated,
primarily for interior windows, provide uncoated insulating-glass units complying with the
following:
a. Class 1, Kind HS, clear float glass.
c. Tinting: None
3. GL-3: Insulated Double Strength Glazing: Where glass of this designation is indicated,
primarily for regular VSF garage doors, provide uncoated insulating-glass units complying
with the following:
a. Clear Float Glass: 1/8 inch insulated DSB, complying with ASTM C 1036, Type I,
Class 1, Quality q3.
c. Tinting: None
4. GL-4: Polycarbonate Glazing: Where glass of this designation is indicated, primarily
wash bay garage doors, provide 2 sheets of 3/16 inch thick polycarbonate with 1/8 inch
air space for a total of 1/2 inch thick glazing system. Use Makrolon GP or equal. Provide
clear (not frosted) panels with light transmission of 75%. Coordinate glazing size with
O.H. door manufacturer standard window size.
5. GL-5: Uncoated Clear Insulating Glass: Where glass of this designation is indicated,
primarily for exterior clerestory windows, provide uncoated insulating-glass units
complying with the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Class 1, Kind HS, clear float glass.

Overall thickness: 1 inch double pane.
Tinting: None
Exterior applications to comply with Table 502.3 of 2009 IECC for U factor and SHGC
6. GL-6: Pyrolytic Low-E Coated Tinted Insulating Glass: Where glass of this designation is
indicated, primarily for exterior windows in the Administrative Bay, provide low-e coated
insulating glass unity complying with the following:
a. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch
b. Thickness of each Glass Lite: 1/4 inch
c. Outdoor Lite: Solargray, Fully Tempered Glass
d. Interspace Content: Air
e. Indoor Lite: Clear Fully tempered float glass. Pyrolytic Coated on third surface (3)
f. Performance Values
(1 Visible Light Transmission: 37%
(2 U-Value Winter and Summer: 0.35
(3 SHGC: 0.40
(4 Shading Coefficient: 0.47
(5 Outdoor Visible Light Reflectance: 8%
GLAZING
08800 - 9
g. Low-E Coating: Sungate 500 (Pyrolytic) by PPG Industries Inc. or approved equal
(1 Location: Third Surface (3)
h. Outdoor Appearance: Cool Gray Color, low-reflective glass product
END OF SECTION

GLAZING
08800 - 10
SECTION 09260
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 -
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2

to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.

1. Interior gypsum wallboard
2. Tile Backer Board
3. Non-load-bearing steel framing
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
1.3
Section 05400: Cold Formed Structural Metal Framing

Section 06440: Plastic Paneling
Section 07210: Building Insulation
Section 07260: Vapor Retarders
Section 08110: Steel Doors and Frames
Section 08305: Access doors
Section 09310: Ceramic Tile
Section 09511: Acoustical Panel Ceilings
Section 09900: Painting
Section 10800: Toilet and Bath Accessories
Section 13122: Metal Building Systems
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board
assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance

ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated


09260 - 1
according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6
A.
Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B.
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other
causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
PART 2 -
2.1
Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board

manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

B.

following:
1. Steel Framing and Furring:
a. Clark-Dietrich Steel Framing Systems
b. Consolidated Systems, Inc.
c. Dale Industries, Inc. - Dale/Incor
d. MarinoWare; Division of Ware Ind.
e. National Gypsum Company
f. Scafco Corporation
g. Unimast, Inc.
2. Gypsum Board and Related Products:
a. American Gypsum Co.
b. G-P Gypsum Corp.
c. National Gypsum Company
d. United States Gypsum Co.
2.2
STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING

A.
Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
B.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter
wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire.
C.
Hangers: As follows:


09260 - 2
1. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch
diameter.
2. Rod Hangers: ASTM A 510, mild carbon steel.
3. Flat Hangers: Commercial-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized
zinc coating.
D.
Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of

0.0538 inch, a minimum 1/2-inchwide flange, with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip
galvanized zinc coating.
E.
Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial-steel sheet with ASTM A 653/A 653M,
G40, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8
inch deep.
1. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
F.
Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of
main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation
c. USG Interiors, Inc.
2.3
STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING

A.
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.020 inch, 20 gauge with 50 ksi strength.
2. Depth: 3-5/8 inches unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
3. Depth: 2 1/2 inches at perimeter insulated walls and high, insulated curb in administrative
area
B.
Deep-Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges.
C.
Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
indicated.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.020 inch 20 gauge
2. Minimum Width: 4
D.
Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide
flange.
1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches.
2. Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.
E.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.02 inch 20 gauge.
2. Depth: 7/8 inch.


09260 - 3
F.
Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
G.
Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inchwide flange.
1. Depth: 3/4 inch.
2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare
steel thickness of 0.0312 inch.
3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter
wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire.
H.
Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or non-slotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall
attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth
required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
I.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,
and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
2.4
INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD

A.
Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in
each area and correspond with support system indicated.
B.
Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36.

1. 5/8 inch thick, Type X
2. See Section 06440 Plastic Paneling for detail on interior plywood wainscot.
2.5
TILE BACKER BOARD

A.
Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in
each area and correspond with support system indicated.
B.
Cement Tile Backer 5/8 inch thick.
2.6
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead: Use at all outside corners.
b. LC-Bead (J-Bead): Use at exposed panel edges and where gypsum board panels
abut other materials.
c. Expansion (Control) Joint: Where indicated.
2.7
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475.


09260 - 4
B.
Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper
2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer
C.
2.8
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering

gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
C.
Fastening Adhesive:
1. Steel: Adhesive recommended for attaching panels to steel framing.
D.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
E.
Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud
size.
2.9
SURFACE FINISHES
A.
Sand joints and screw holes to provide smooth finish.

1. Texture: Spatter knock-down.
PART 3 -
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
EXECUTION
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION


09260 - 5
A.
Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of

overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support
ceilings and that hangers will develop their full strength.
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devises indicated to other trades for installation in
advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
3.3
INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A.
Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing
installation.
B.
Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board

assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories,
furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's
"Gypsum Construction Handbook."
C.
Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of
loading imposed by structural movement.
1. Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure.
2. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install
slip-type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally
support assembly.
a. Use deep-leg deflection track where indicated.
D.
3.4
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members.
Frame both sides of joints independently.
INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING

A.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay
hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by
bracing, counters playing, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacing that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards.
3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,
and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4. Secure hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for


09260 - 6
5.
6.
7.
8.
structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or
otherwise fail.
Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place
hanger inserts that extend through forms.
Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
B.
Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members
for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each
member and transversely between parallel members.
C.
Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.
D.
Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system
meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each
other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
3.5
INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING

A.
Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum
board assemblies abut other construction.
1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install foam-gasket isolation strip
between studs and wall.
B.
Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces
vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing.
C.
Extend partition framing 4 inches above highest adjacent ceiling. Brace top of framed wall
every 6 feet in two directions to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings.
Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating
partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.
D.
Install steel studs and furring at the following spacing:

1. Single-Layer Construction: 16 inches on center, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Multilayer Construction: 16 inches on center, unless otherwise indicated.
3. At Column Cladding in administrative, 12 inches on center, maximum, or three studs per
clad face, minimum.
E.
Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each
panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
F.
Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's
applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at
jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at
head and secure to jamb studs.
1. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint.


09260 - 7
3. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof
structure above.
G.
Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless
otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above
door heads.
H.
Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: Install to comply with requirements specified in Division 7

Sections 07210 "Building Insulation and 07260 Vapor Retarders.
3.6
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A.
Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
B.
Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are
readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
C.
Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and
to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of
adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
D.
Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and
ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
E.
Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do
not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
F.
Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to
open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
G.
Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
H.
Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor
joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members using resilient channels, or
provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
I.
Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
J.
Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces
(above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m)
in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural
members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to
fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch(6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.


09260 - 8
K.
Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments and

perpendicular walls of dissimilar materials. Provide 1/4- wide spaces at these locations, and
trim edges with J-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints
between edges and abutting structural surfaces and perpendicular walls with acoustical
sealant.
L.
Sound Insulated Partitions: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion
joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install
acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply
with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and
closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including
sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. Provide minimum 3 inches, un-faced batt
insulation, minimum R-11, for inside wall cavity.
M.
Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and
finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations.
1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications.
N.
3.7
Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c.
PANEL APPLICATION METHODS

A.
Single-Layer Application:
1. On restroom ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the
greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally, perpendicular to framing, unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end
joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of
board. At stairwells and other high walls or where framing is more suitable, install
panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated
assembly. Panels may not be installed in both horizontal and vertical directions on
the same wall.
B.
Multilayer Application on Ceilings: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before
applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base
layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16
inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by
fire-resistance-rated assembly.
C.
Multilayer Application on Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and
face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints,
unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on
opposite sides of partitions.
D.
Z-Furring Members: Apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either
vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints
offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.


09260 - 9
E.
Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
F.
Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports
with screws.
G.
Tile Backing Panels:

1. Cement Tile Backing Board: Install at showers, tubs, sinks behind tile and where
indicated. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
3.8
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect for visual effect.
3.9
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board
surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
Refer to room finish legend on plans for gypsum board finish level.
B.
Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended
for tape.
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to
ASTM C 840, for locations indicated:
1. Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated,
unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and
sound-rated assemblies.
2. Embed tape and apply separate first and fill coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners,
and trim flanges.
3.10

A.
Above-Ceiling Observation: Architect will conduct an above-ceiling observation before

installing gypsum board ceilings and report deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not
proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have
been corrected.
1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of Project,
will be ready for above-ceiling observation.
2. Before notifying Architect, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum board
ceilings:


09260 - 10
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures, powered for operation

Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping systems
Installation of air-duct systems
Installation of air devices
Installation of mechanical system control-air tubing
Installation of ceiling support framing
END OF SECTION


09260 - 11


09260 - 12
SECTION 09310
CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2

to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.

1. 4-1/4 x 4-1/4 inch scheduled glazed wall tile
B.

1. Section 09260: Gypsum Board Assemblies - for water resistant cement backer board
installed in gypsum wallboard assemblies.
3. Section 08305: Access Doors
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of tile, mortar, grout, sealant and other products specified.
B.
Tile Samples: Furnish two (2) actual tiles or sections of tiles showing the color, texture and
pattern for each scheduled tile type and color indicated. Include samples of accessories
involving color selection.
C.
Grout Samples: Furnish two (2) sections of grout showing the color for each scheduled grout
type and color indicated.
D.
Mortar Samples: Furnish two (2) sections of mortar showing the color for each scheduled
mortar type and color indicated
E.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the products furnished comply
with requirements.
F.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed tile installations
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of
successful in-service performance.

CERAMIC TILE
09310 - 1
B.
Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of
tile from one source with resources to provide products from the same production run for
each contiguous area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without
delaying the Work.
C.
Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality
for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each
aggregate from one source or producer.
1.5

A.
Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels
intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile
packages.
B.
Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other
causes.
C.
Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces
from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of
tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with referenced
standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match
products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with
labels describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount
installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
PART 2 2.1
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in the

ceramic tile installation schedules at the end of this Section.
B.

1. Tile Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
American Olean Tile Company

Dal-Tile Corporation
Florida Tile Industries, Inc.
Mannington Ceramic Tile

CERAMIC TILE
09310 - 2
e. Monarch Tile, Inc.

f. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
g. United States Ceramic Tile Company
2. Tile-Setting and -Grouting Materials:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.2
American Olean Tile Company

Bostik
Dal-Tile Corporation
DAP, Inc.
Laticrete International, Inc.
Mapei Corporation
Summitville Tiles, Inc.
PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for
Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1. Provide tile complying with Standard Grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.
2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in
Part 1 "Definitions" Article.
B.
ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI
standards referenced in "Setting Materials" and "Grouting Materials" articles.
C.
Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for
tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and
other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the
following requirements:
1. Provide CDOT Architect selections from manufacturer's typical full range of colors,
textures, and patterns for products of type indicated.
2. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile.
D.
Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during
Sample submittals, blend tile in the factory and package so tile units taken from one package
show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved
Samples.
E.
Mounting: Where factory-mounted tile is required, provide back- or edge-mounted tile

assemblies as standard with manufacturer, unless another mounting method is indicated.
1. Where tile is indicated for installation in swimming pools, on exteriors, or in wet areas, do
not use back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in
writing that this type of mounting is suitable for these kinds of installations and has a
record of successful in-service performance.
2.3
TILE PRODUCTS
A.
Glazed Wall Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements:
1. Module Size: 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches.
2. Thickness: 5/16 inch.
3. Face: Plain with modified square edges or cushion edges.

CERAMIC TILE
09310 - 3
4. Mounting: Factory back-mounted.

B.
2.4
Trim Units: Provide tile trim units (bullnose, cove) to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile
and to comply with the following requirements:
1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where
applicable.
2. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
a. Base for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: 6 inch high cove base
b. Wainscot Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose.
c. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose.
d. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners, except with coved base and cap angle
pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes.
SETTING MATERIALS
A.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, composed as follows:

1. Mixture of Dry-Mortar Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of prepackaged dry-mortar mix
and liquid-latex additive complying with the following requirements:
a. Latex Additive: Acrylic resin.
b. For wall applications, provide no sagging, latex-Portland cement mortar complying
with ANSI A118.4 for mortar of this type defined in Section F-2.1.2.
2.5
GROUTING MATERIALS
A.
Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6 for materials described in Section H-2.4,
composed as follows:
1. Mixture of Dry-Grout Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of factory-prepared, dry-grout mix
and latex additive complying with the following requirements:
a. Unsanded Dry-Grout Mix (for walls): Dry-set grout complying with ANSI A118.6 for
materials described in Section H-2.3, for joints 1/8 inch and narrower.
b. Sanded Dry-Grout Mix (for floor): Commercial Portland cement grout complying with
ANSI A118.6 for materials described in Section H-2.1, for joints 1/8 inch and wider.
c. Latex Additive: Acrylic resin.
2.6
ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base

polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements of Division 7
Section 07920 "Joint Sealants."
B.
Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed
joints, unless otherwise indicated.
2.7
CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARDS

A.
Provide cementitious backer units complying with ANSI A118.9, of thickness and width
indicated below, and in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Width: Manufacturer's standard width, but not less than 32 inches.

CERAMIC TILE
09310 - 4
B.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cementitious backer units that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
C.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.8
Wonderboard Multi+Board; Custom Building Products.

DomCrete Cementitious Tile-Backer Board; Domtar Gypsum.
Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board; FinPan, Inc.
DUROCK Cement Board; United States Gypsum Co.
A.
Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified,

portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting
materials for installations indicated.
B.
Metal Edge Strips: White-zinc-alloy terrazzo strips, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) wide at top edge with
integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate, unless otherwise indicated.Tile
Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout
manufacturers.
2.9
MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A.
Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers' written instructions.
B.
Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C.
Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and
other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present,
for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free from oil, waxy films, and
curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108
series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before
installing tile.
3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if
not coordinated, adjust latter in consultation with CDOT Architect.
B.
3.2
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION

CERAMIC TILE
09310 - 5
A.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that contain soap, wax,
oil, or silicone and are incompatible with tile-setting materials by using a terrazzo or concrete
grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush.
B.
Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with dry-set or latex-portland cement
mortars that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile
installation standards for installations indicated.
1. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile-setting material manufacturer's
written instructions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions.
2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
C.
Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample
submittals, verify that tile has been blended in the factory and packaged so tile units taken
from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and
match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles
at Project site before installing.
D.
Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to
prevent adhesion or staining of exposed tile surfaces by grout, protect exposed surfaces of
tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of
temporary protective coating indicated below, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces:
1. Petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot.
2. Grout release.
3. Petroleum paraffin wax or grout release.
3.3
A.
ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 series of tile installation
standards in "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and
grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
B.
TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with
TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
C.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a
complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly
at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for
straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other
penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
E.
Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when
adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center
tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile
cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets the same width as joints
within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

CERAMIC TILE
09310 - 6
F.
Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
G.
Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials,
mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
H.
Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following tile installation standards:
1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement, dry-set, commercial portland cement, and
latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.
2. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6.
3. For chemical-resistant furan grouts, comply with ANSI A108.8.
I.
3.4
At showers, tubs, and where indicated, install cementitious backer units and treat joints to
comply with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application
indicated.
WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION
A.
Install waterproofing to comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to

produce a waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.
B.
Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to
determine that it is watertight.
3.5
WALL TILE INSTALLATION

A.
B.
Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the
Ceramic Tile Wall Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods
and ANSI setting-bed standards.
Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths:
1. Wall Tile: 1/16 inch.
C.
3.6
Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by complying
with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI A108 series
of tile installation standards
CLEANING, PROTECTING and SEALING TILE
A.
B.
Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they
are free of foreign matter.
1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout
manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Protect
metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning.
Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning.
Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken,
unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work.

CERAMIC TILE
09310 - 7
C.
Provide final protection (sealing) and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to

manufacturer and Installer, that ensures tile is without damage or deterioration at the time of
Substantial Completion.
1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of sealer (Miracle
Sealants 511 Impregnator. (Company info: Miracle Sealants Company (800) 350-1901)
to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other
heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is
completed.
D.
Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile
surfaces.
END OF SECTION

CERAMIC TILE
09310 - 8
SECTION 09511
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
section
B.
Related Sections
1.
1.2
Section 09260: Gypsum Board Assembly
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated
B.
Samples: For each exposed finish
C.
Product test reports
D.
Research/evaluation reports
E.
Maintenance data
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAPaccredited laboratory.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1.
Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings

identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
a.
2.
Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting

agency.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Acoustical panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for

Class A materials, when tested per ASTM E 84.
a.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.


09511 - 1
1.5
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 5 percent of quantity installed.

Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 5
percent of quantity installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL

A.
Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.

1.
B.
Recycled Content: Provide acoustical panels with recycled content such that
postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content
constitutes a minimum of 25 percent by weight.
Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.

1.
Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel sheet with average recycled
content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled
content is not less than 25 percent.
C.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
D.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1
zinc coating, soft temper.
1.
Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than
0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.
E.
Seismic perimeter stabilizer bars, seismic struts, and seismic clips.
F.
Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's
standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements;
formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of
suspension system runners.
2.2
ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING ACT-1

A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World

Industies, Inc.; Cortega Second Look II or a comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

BPB USA
Chicago Metallic Corporation
Ecophon CertainTeed, Inc.


09511 - 2
5.
6.
B.
Tectum Inc.
USG Interiors, Inc.
Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type and form as follows:
1.
Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted
C.
Color: White.
D.
LR: Not less than .82
E.
NRC: Not less than .55, Type E-400 mounting per ASTM E 795.
F.
CAC: Not less than 40.
G.
Edge/Joint Detail: Angled Tegular; for 15/16 grid
H.
Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm)
I.
Modular Size: 2x4 with 2x2 score
2.3
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING ACT-1

A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World

Industries, Inc product compatible with selected ACT ceiling panel or a comparable product by
one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.

BPB USA
Chicago Metallic Corporation
Ecophon CertainTeed, Inc.
USG Interiors, Inc.
Double-Web Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled
steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch(24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.

End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type.
Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold-rolled sheet.
Cap Finish: Painted white.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's
written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."


09511 - 3
B.
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders.
C.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with
insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required and, if
permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal
forces by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and
other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of
hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. When steel framing does not permit installation of
hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for
attachment of hanger wires.
1.
2.
Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into
concrete slabs.
Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs or to steel roof deck.
D.
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate at
intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from
ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in
3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
E.
Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one
another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F.
Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a
neat, precise fit.
END OF SECTION


09511 - 4
SECTION 09650
RESILIENT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2

to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.

1. Resilient wall base and accessories
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of
units showing the full range of colors and patterns available for each type of product
indicated. Refer to Project-Specific Submittal Log provided by Owner at Pre-Bid Meeting.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who
has specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and
with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of product specified from one
source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties without delaying the Work.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire-test-response

characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by
a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater when tested per ASTM E 648.
2. Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per
ASTM E 662.
1.5

A.
Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers,
each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and
handling instructions.

09650 - 1
B.
Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures
maintained between 50 and 90 deg F.
C.
Store tiles on flat surfaces.
D.
Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation,
unless longer conditioning period is recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F nor more than 95 deg F in spaces to
receive products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at least
48 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer
time periods. After post-installation period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F
nor more than 95 deg F.
B.
Install accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
C.
Do not install base over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond
with adhesive, as determined by flooring manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture
test.
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each
type, color, pattern, and size of resilient accessory installed.
2. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
PART 2 -
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for
each designation.
A.
B.
2.3
PRODUCTS
Rubber Wall Base:

Basis of Design: Roppe Pinnacle 4 inch Rubber Wall Base Standard Toe
1. Alternate Manufacturers: Armstrong and Johnsonite
2. Product to comply with ASTM F1861 Type TP-Rubber Thermoplastic, Style B-Cove, and
with requirements specified in the Finish Schedule.
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

09650 - 2
A.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and

substrate conditions indicated.
B.
Pre-molded outside and inside corners
PART 3 -
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur,
with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements. Verify that
substrates and conditions are satisfactory for resilient product installation and comply with
requirements specified.
B.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
3.3
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
A.
General: Comply with resilient product manufacturer's written installation instructions for
preparing substrates indicated to receive resilient products.
B.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
C.
Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation.
After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A.
General: Install resilient accessories according to manufacturer's written installation

instructions.
B.
Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces,
and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
1. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
2. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
3. Do not stretch base during installation.
4. On irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive filler material.
5. Install pre-molded outside and inside corners before installing straight pieces or score or
miter continuous base to maintain continuous contact on inside and outside corners.
C.
Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials and bond to substrates
with adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed.

09650 - 3
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A.
Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products:

1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient
product manufacturers.
2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
END OF SECTION

09650 - 4
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 -
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.

to this Section.
B.
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
Section 03300: Cast-in-Place Concrete

Section 06640: Plastic Paneling
Section 08110: Steel Doors and Frames
Section 13122: Metal Building System
Division 15 and 16: Painting of Mechanical and Electrical work is specified in Divisions 15
and 16, respectively
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following, colors as
scheduled:
1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces
2. Exposed interior items and surfaces
3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to
shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
4. Steel Bollards
5. Hollow Metal Door and Frames
6. Metal Building Structure in VSF
7. Exposed Steel trim
B.
Paint: As Specified or Architect approved equal. One coat primer on all surfaces and 2 finish
coats.
1. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or
material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not
specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar
adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules
do not indicate color or finish, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes
available.
a. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts
(including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, primed steel
structure, concrete building curb, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and
electrical equipment.
C.
Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts,
and labels.
1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:

PAINTING
09900 - 1
a. Pre-engineered metal building wall panels and trim

b. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment
c. Light fixtures
2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible
spaces:
a. Foundation spaces
b. Furred areas
c. Ceiling plenums
3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a. Anodized aluminum
b. Stainless steel
c. Chromium plate
d. Copper
e. Bronze and brass
4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a. Valve and damper operators
b. Linkages
c. Sensing devices
d. Motor and fan shafts
5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other
code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or
nomenclature plates.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.
1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each
material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify
each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label
analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material
proposed for use.
3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations
controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: Submit 4 samples of each color and each type of finish coat
material indicated.
C.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting

system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a
record of successful in-service performance.

PAINTING
09900 - 2
B.
1.5
Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating
system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

A.
Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and
containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Product name or title of material

Product description (generic classification or binder type)
Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture
Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents
Thinning instructions
Application instructions
Color name and number
VOC content
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition,
free of foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste
daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected
from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.
2. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based
materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
B.
Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85
percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet
surfaces.
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
PART 2 2.1
Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the
quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers
for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner.
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS

PAINTING
09900 - 3
A.

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in the paint
schedules.
B.
Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by
use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore).

Glidden Professional and Devoe Coatings from Akzo Nobel (Glidden)
Devoe Coatings from Akzo Nobel. (Devoe).
Kwal-Howell Paint (K-H)
PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG).
Pratt & Lambert, Inc. (P & L).
Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W).
Acceptable Manufacturer for High Performance Coatings for Metal Bollards:

1. Tnemec Company, Inc.
D.
Acceptable Manufacturer for High Performance Coatings for Metal at Wet areas (interior
structural steel and steel framing at wash bays)
1. Comex Group
2. Sherwin-Williams Co.
3. Or Approved Equal
2.2
PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

A.
Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials
that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service
and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B.
Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating
types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification
will not be acceptable.
1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors
or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the
exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material
data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
C.
2.3
Colors: Provide color selections as scheduled. If not scheduled, provide full range of
Manufacturers Standard Color Samples to Architect for selection.
MIXING AND TINTING
A.
Except where specifically noted in this section, all paint shall be ready-mixed and pre-tinted.
Agitate all paint prior to and during application to ensure uniform color, gloss, and
consistency.
B.
Thinner addition shall not exceed manufacturer's printed recommendations. Do not use
kerosene or other organic solvents to thin water-based paints.
C.
Where paint is to be sprayed, thin according to manufacturer's current guidelines.

PAINTING
09900 - 4
2.4
EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A.
Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish system over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not
required on shop-primed items, however confirm shop the primer on shop primed items is
compatible with the finish coat specified.
1. Urethane High Performance Coating: Provide 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer.
a. Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibitive, alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer, as
recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate to
achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm) or as
recommended by the manufacturer. Acceptable products include:
(1 Moore: Super Spec HP Alkyd Metal Primer P06
(2 Devoe: Devran 203 Waterborne Epoxy Primer
(3 PPG: 95-245 Series Pitt-Guard Rapid Coat DTR Polyamide Epoxy Mastic
Coating
(4 S-W: Kem Bond HS Primer B50N23
b. Finish Coats: Two coats of urethane high performance exterior enamel applied at
spreading rate to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 3.4 mils (0.086
mm) or as recommended by the manufacturer. Acceptable products include:
(1 Moore: Super Spec HP Urethane Alkyd Gloss Enamel P22.
(2 Devoe: Devthane 379 Acrylic Urethane Gloss
(3 PPG: 95-8800 Series Pitthane High Build Semi-Gloss Urethane Enamel
(4 S-W: Pro Industrial Urethane Alkyd Enamel B54-150 Series
B.
2.5
Bollards - High Performance Coating: Provide the following system:

1. Prime Coat:
Tnemec Series 27 FC Typoxy Primer, 4.0 dry film mills medium
2. Base Coat:
Tnemec 73 Endura-Shield, 4.0 dry film
3. Finish Coat:
Tnemec Series 1070 Fluoronar, 2.0-3.0 dry film mils
INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A.
Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces:
1. Semigloss, 100 % Acrylic Latex: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031
mm). Acceptable products include:
(1 Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Primer N534
(2 Glidden: Lifemaster No VOC Interior Primer 9116-1200.
(3 PPG: Speedhide Zero Interior Zero VOC Primer 6-4900.
(4 P & L: ProHide Green Interior Latex Primer Z9160/F9160
(5 S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer B28W2600.
b. First and Second Coats: Low Odor, Low VOC 100% Acrylic Interior Latex SemiGloss applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total
dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm). Acceptable products include:
(1 Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Semi-Gloss N539
(2 Glidden: Ultra-Hide No VOC Interior Semi-Gloss Paint 1415-XXXX
(3 PPG: Speedhide Zero Interior Zero VOC Latex Semi-Gloss 6-4510.

PAINTING
09900 - 5
(4 P & L: ProHide Green Interior Semi-Gloss Latex Z9300/F9300 Series

(5 S-W: ProMar 200 Latex Zero VOC Semi-Gloss B31-2600 Series.
B.
Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal (except at wash bay):
1. Semigloss, Latex Finish: Two finish coats over an alkyd based primer.
a. Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibitive, alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer, as
recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm) or as recommended by the manufacturer. Acceptable
products include:
(1 Moore: Super Spec HP Alkyd Metal Primer P06
(2 Devoe: 4160 Devguard Alkyd Primer
(3 PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Int/Ext Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer.
(4 P & L: Interior/Exterior Metal Waterborne Primer P2305.
(5 S-W: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66N310
b. Finish Coat: Low Odor, Quick Drying, Rust Inhibitive Waterborne Acrylic or Alkyd
Semi-Gloss applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve
a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils (0.036 mm) or as recommended by
the manufacturer. Acceptable products include:
(1 Moore: Super Spec HP DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss P29.
(2 Devoe: 4216 Devflex Acrylic Enamel Semi-Gloss
(3 PPG: 90-1210 Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Semi-Gloss DTM Industrial Enamel
(4 P & L: Acrylic Waterborne DTM Enamel Semi-Gloss Z6700 Series
(5 S-W: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic B66-650 Series
C.
Zinc-Coated or Galvanized Metal: Provide the following finish systems over zinc-coated
metal (except at wash bay):
1. Semigloss, Latex Finish: Two finish coats over an acrylic metal primer.
a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031
mm) or as recommended by the manufacturer. Acceptable products include:
(1 Moore: Super Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer P04
(2 Devoe: 4020 Devflex DTM Waterborne Primer
(3 PPG: 90-712 Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel.
(4 P & L: Interior/Exterior Metal Waterborne Primer P2305.
(5 S-W: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer B66N310
b. Finish Coat: Low Odor, Low VOC Waterborne Acrylic or Alkyd Semi-Gloss applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film
thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm) or as recommended by the
manufacturer. Acceptable products include:
(1 Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Semi-Gloss N539
(2 Devoe: 4216 Devflex Acrylic Enamel Semi-gloss.
(3 PPG: 90-1210 Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Semi-Gloss DTM Industrial Enamel
(4 P & L: Acrylic Waterborne DTM Enamel Semi-Gloss Z6700 Series.
(5 S-W: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic B-66-650 Series
D. High Performance Coating for Metal in Wet Areas (Interior structural steel and steel framing at
Wash Bay)
PAINTING
09900 - 6
1. Gloss, Epoxy: 1 finish coat or 2 finish coats over a primer

a. Primer: Primer applied at a spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to
achieve a total dry film thickness recommended by the manufacturer. Structural
Steel primer or finish and other metal primer or finish must be verified for
compatibility with system primer prior to application. Acceptable products include:
1) S-W: Factory Primed with Paintable Primer (factory primer must be verified)
2) Comex: E-59 Universal Metal Primer
b. First Coat: Applied at a spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve
a total dry film thickness recommended by the manufacturer. Acceptable products
include:
1) S-W: Water-Based Acrolon 100 Polyurethane Gloss, B65-700 Series, <100 g/L
VOC
2) Comex: E-10 or Comex E-100 very low VOC
c.
PART 3 3.1
Second Coat: Applied at a spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to

achieve a total dry film thickness recommended by the manufacturer. Acceptable
products include:
1) S-W: Water-Based Acrolon 100 Polyurethane Gloss, B65-700 Series, <100 g/L
VOC
2) Comex E-10 (no second coat required if using Comex E-100 very low VOC as a
first coat)
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting
will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements.
1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and
conditions within a particular area.
B.
Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over
substrates primed by others.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is
impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied
protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
workers skilled in the trades involved.

PAINTING
09900 - 7
B.
Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of
substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before
cleaning.
1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning
process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's

written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. Verify compatibility of primer or coating with paint system. Provide barrier coats over
incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and
mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence,
chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze.
If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of
surface preparation.
a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.
b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate
tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn,
correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture
content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
c. Clean surfaces to be painted to manufacturers specifications for surface preparation.
3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop
coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use
solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting
Council's (SSPC) recommendations.
a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and
according to requirements of SSPC-SP 10.
b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat
before priming.
c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged.
Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up
with the same primer as the shop coat.
4. Zinc Coated Metal (Galvanized Surfaces): Solvent clean with mineral spirits or other
acceptable solvent in accordance with SSPC-SP1 to remove all residue oil, grease or
other contamination. Prime as specified.
D.
Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface
film and strain material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

PAINTING
09900 - 8
E.
3.3
Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when
multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the
finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each
separate coat.
APPLICATION
A.
General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.
2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in
place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and
provide desired protection.
5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently
fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
6. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
7. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.
8. Finish interior of unfinished casework to match exterior.
9. At the request of CDOT or Architect, provide field test of any high performance coating
system.
B.
Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before
subsequent surface deterioration.
1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of
application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as
recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even
surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional
coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to
ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film
thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under
moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause
the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
C.
Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other
applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of
appropriate size for the surface or item being painted.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by
the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the
manufacturer for the material and texture required.

PAINTING
09900 - 9
D.
Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's

recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as
recommended by the manufacturer.
E.
Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items
exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.
F.
Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Exposed piping, pipe hangers, and supports.
2. Ductwork.
3. Ventilation Louvers in Wash Bays
G.
Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended
by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not
been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction
spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or
other defects due to insufficient sealing.
H.
Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a

smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness,
spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will
not be acceptable.
I.
Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,
refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.
3.4
CLEANING
A.
Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other
discarded paint materials from the site.
1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished
surfaces.
B.
Extra Stock
1. Extra Paint: At the completion of painting, deliver to the Owner any excess paint of each
paint color and type used along with the color number or formula for each type. Epoxy
and high performance coatings are not included.
3.5
PROTECTION
A.
Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
B.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective
wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.
1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
. END OF SECTION

PAINTING
09900 - 10
SECTION 10200
LOUVERS AND VENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Section.
B.
Provide all items, articles, materials, operations, or methods listed, mentioned, or scheduled on
drawings and/or herein specified, including all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals
necessary and required for their completion.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this
Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
B.
Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to
channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening.
1.4
A.
Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation
of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or
permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act
normal to the face of the building.
1.
B.
1.5
Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a uniform pressure of 20 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward
or outward.
Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as

demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length
and width according to AMCA 500-L.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.

LOUVERS AND VENTS

10200 - 1
1.
B.
1.6
For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing
specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7
SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal

Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before

fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.
B.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as
otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C.
Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 319.
D.
Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

1.
2.
3.
E.
2.2
Use tamper-resistant screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.
For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.
Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors,

made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to
4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
B.
Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances
made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter
sealant joints.
1.
C.
Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated.
Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

LOUVERS AND VENTS

10200 - 2
D.
Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than recommended by
manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less.
1.
Fully Recessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions fully recessed behind louver
blades. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate
with close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction.
E.
Provide subsills made of same material as louvers and extended sills for recessed louvers.
F.
Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from
view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between
frame members necessary.
2.3
FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS

A.
Horizontal Drainable Blade Louver:

1.

following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
2.4
Air Balance Inc.; a Mestek company.

American Warming and Ventilating, Inc.; a Mestek company.
Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Construction Specialties, Inc.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC.
Louver Depth: 4 inches

AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
LOUVER SCREENS
A.
General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.

1.
2.
Screen Location: Interior face.

Screening Type: Bird screening.
B.
Secure screen frames to louver frames with machine screws with heads finished to match
louver, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c.
C.
Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated.
1.
2.
2.5
Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are
attached.
Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

LOUVERS AND VENTS

10200 - 3
2.6
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Finish louvers after assembly.
B.
High-Performance Organic Finish: fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and
containing not less than 50 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.
Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
1.
Color and Gloss: Color shall match building exterior.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of
anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery
of such items to Project site.
INSTALLATION
A.
Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B.
Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws
where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C.
Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.
D.
Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as
indicated.
E.
Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no
evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the
factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
F.
Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses,
where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants"
for sealants applied during louver installation.
3.4

A.
Test operation of adjustable louvers and adjust as needed to produce fully functioning units that
comply with requirements.

LOUVERS AND VENTS

10200 - 4
B.
Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering, to
remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during
construction period.
C.
Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not
harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.
D.
Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence
remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by
Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.
1.
Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss
of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.
END OF SECTION

LOUVERS AND VENTS

10200 - 5

LOUVERS AND VENTS

10200 - 6
SECTION 10425
SIGNS
PART 1 -
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.

to this Section.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Division 1 Temporary Facilities - for temporary project identification signs.

Section 15010: General Mechanical Requirements
Section 16075: Electrical Identification
Section 16511: Interior/Exterior Lighting
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following types of signs:

1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Rest Room Signage

Dimensional letters and numbers
Handicapped Parking Signs
Occupancy Signage
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product data for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to
materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
B.
Panel Signs: Material and color sample chips from manufacturers full line for submitted
products.
C.
ADA signage: Color chart identifying approved color combinations.
D.
Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and
large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds,
layout, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.
1. Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details of wording and
lettering layout.
2. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed
as a unit of Work in other Sections.
E.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE

SIGNS
10425 - 1
A.
Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated
for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and sufficient production
capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the Work.
B.
Single-Source Responsibility: For each separate sign type required, obtain signs from one
source of a single manufacturer.
C.
ADA Accessibility Guidelines, Latest Edition
PART 2 -
2.1
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Manufacturers of Panel Signs:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Allenite
Andco Industries Corp.
ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
Best Manufacturing Company
Kroy Sign Systems
Romark
Seton Identification Products
Spanjer Brothers, Inc.
Vomar Products, Inc.
2. Manufacturers of Dimensional Letters:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.2
Andco Industries Corp.

A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing Company, Inc.
ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
Gemini
Metal Arts
Metallic Arts, Inc.
The Southwell Company
Spanjer Brothers, Inc.
Vomar Products, Inc.
MATERIALS
A.
Cast Acrylic Sheet: Provide cast (not extruded or continuous cast) methyl methacrylate
monomer plastic sheet, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, with a minimum flexural strength
of 16,000 psi when tested according to ASTM D 790, with a minimum allowable continuous
service temperature of 176 deg F (80 deg C), and of the following general types:
1. Opaque Sheet: Where sheet material is indicated as "opaque," provide colored opaque
acrylic sheet in colors and finishes as selected from the manufacturer's standards.
B.
Plastic Laminate: Provide high-pressure plastic laminate engraving stock with face and core

SIGNS
10425 - 2
plies in contrasting colors, in finishes and color combinations indicated or, if not indicated, as
selected from the manufacturer's standards.
C.
Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are not corrosive to the sign
material and mounting surface.
D.
Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for
exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or
lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be
set into concrete or masonry work.
2.3
SIGNAGE
A.
Unframed Panel Signs: Fabricate signs of plastic laminate, vinyl or acrylic sheets, with edges
mechanically and smoothly finished to conform with the following requirements:
1. Edge Condition: Square cut.
2. Edge Color for Plastic Laminate: Edge color same as copy.
3. Corner Condition: Corners rounded to radius indicated.
B.
Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with the requirements indicated
for size, style, spacing, content, position, material, finishes, and colors of letters, numbers,
and other graphic devices.
C.
Engraved Copy for signs not required to be ADA Compliant: Machine-engrave letters,
numbers, symbols, and other graphic devices into sign panel on the face indicated to produce
precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth. Use high-speed cutters mechanically linked
to master templates in a pantographic system or equivalent process capable of producing
characters of the style indicated with sharply formed edges.
1. Engraved Plastic Laminate: Engrave through the exposed face ply of the plastic laminate
sheet to expose the contrasting core ply.
2. Engraved Opaque Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved copy with enamel.
D.
Interior Identification signs shall be as follows:

1. Unisex Restroom:
a. Provide one 8 inch x 8 inch ADA compliant identification sign at each Unisex
restroom
b. Seton No. 44982 or approved equal.
c. Sign Material: Acrylic
2. Other Identification Graphics: Provide signs with written name, raised braille lettering,
graphic symbol, and contrasting color that is compliant with ADA requirements
E.
Exterior Identification Signs shall be as follows:

1. Parking Sign:
a. Size: 12 inch X 18 inch Van Accessible Handicap Parking Sign mounted on post at
Accessible parking space. Mounted a minimum of 60 above pavement.
b. Seton No. 35754 or approved equal

SIGNS
10425 - 3
c. CDOT M&S Standards S-614-1 and S-614-2

d. Sign Material: Aluminum metal sheet.
2.4
DIMENSIONAL LETTERS AND NUMBERS

A.
Fabricated Letters and Numbers: Fabricate letters and numbers to required sizes and styles,
using metals and thicknesses indicated. Form exposed faces and sides of characters to
produce surfaces free from warp and distortion. Include internal bracing for stability and
attachment of mounting accessories. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style,
and size.
1. Aluminum Sheet: Not less than 0.090 inch thick. Fabricate by the heliarc welding
process Into inch thick letter and number
2. Letter Height: 6 inches
3. Letter Style: Helvetica
4. Fabricated Sign: Provide exterior signage to indicate street address number of building,
assuming a maximum of five numbers.
PART 3 -
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the
type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from
distortion or other defects in appearance.
B.
Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the methods indicated
below:
1. Vinyl-Tape Mounting: Use double-sided foam tape to mount signs to smooth, nonporous
surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.
C.
Dimensional Letters and Numbers: Mount letters and numbers using standard fastening
methods recommended by the manufacturer for letter form, type of mounting, wall
construction, and condition of exposure indicated.
1. Projected Mounting: Mount letters projection from the wall surface using a bracket-type
of mounting to the exterior surface of the building.
3.2

A.
After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
SIGNS
10425 - 4
SECTION 10520
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.

to this Section. Note: Fire Alarm System is part of Section 16721.
B.
Related Sections
1. Section 16721: Fire Alarm and Detection System
1.2
SUMMARY
A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Portable fire extinguishers

Identification
Smoke/Carbon Monoxide Detectors
Knox Box
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes (including color) for fire-protection specialties.
1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification
2. Brackets: Include wall brackets
B.
1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Model number indicated is to establish a minimum standard of quality only.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers through one source from a single manufacturer.
C.
ANSI/UL Compliance: Comply with ANSI/UL 299 and 711.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Products of the following manufacturers are specified herein as the standard of quality for
the portable fire extinguishers:

FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

10520 - 1
a. Badger Fire Protection

944 Glenwood Station Lane
Charlottesville, VA 22901
Telephone: (800) 446-3857
www.badgerfire.com
b. Pyro-Chem
One Stanton Street
Marionette, WI 84143
Telephone: (800) 526-1079
www.pyrochem.com
c.
Tyco Fire Protection Products

One Stanton Street
Marinette, WI 54143-2542
Telephone: 1-(715) 735-7411
www.ansul.com
B. Features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Extinguisher Type: Dry chemical

Shell Type: Steel
Hose Length: 26.6 in.
Capacity: 10 lb.
Discharge Time: 19 sec.
Flow Rate: 0.59 lb./sec.
Effective Range: 16 ft or greater
Charged Weight: 17 lbs.
UL Rating: 60-B:C
C. Dimensions:
1. Height: 16.1 inches
2. Width: 8.3 inches
3. Depth: 5.3 inches
D.
MODELS
1.
2.
3.
E.
Badger Fire Protection Model B10BC

Pyro-Chem PC10BC-1
Tyco Sentry Model C10S
ACCESSORIES
1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, multipurpose bracket designed to
secure extinguisher.
2. Identification/Backing Panel: Provide an identification panel immediately above where
the portable fire extinguisher shall be mounted. The panel shall be a minimum of 6
inches wide and 4 inches high. The entire identification panel shall be painted red with
white block lettering which states, EXTINGUISHER depicted above the portable fire
extinguisher device. The panel shall be securely fastened to the wall on which it is
attached.
2.2
SMOKE AND CO DETECTORS


10520 - 2
A. Provide a battery-operated combination smoke and carbon monoxide detector at locations

indicated in drawings. Detector shall have the following:
1. Ceiling-mounted
2. Dual smoke and carbon monoxide detector technology
3. Battery-operated with alkaline or lithium batteries
4. Low battery warning alerts
5. Test/Reset Feature
6. 85dB alarm
7. Meets UL217 and UL2034 standards
B. Manufacturers: Acceptable Products include:
1. First Alert: SC05CN
2. Kidde: KN COSM XRT B
3. BRK: SC02LB
2.3
KNOX BOX - N/A
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine walls and partitions for suitable anchoring of identification/backing panel and
subsequent portable fire extinguisher unit.
B.
Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions, if any, have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing portable fire extinguisher device.
B.
Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Fasten painted, plywood identification/backing panel to wall, square and level.
2. Fasten mounting bracket(s) to plywood identification/backing panel.
3. Fasten portable fire extinguisher device to mounting bracket(s).
3.3
PROTECTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that knox box and portable fire
extinguisher device are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION


10520 - 3


10520 - 4
SECTION 10800
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.

to this Section.
B.
Related Sections
1. Section 15450: Plumbing Fixtures and Trim
1.2
SUMMARY
A.

1. Toilet and bath accessories.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses,

dimensions, profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for
each type of accessory specified.
B.
Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate
preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices.
C.
Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of
each accessory required. Use designations indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory
Schedule and room designations indicated on Drawings in product schedule.
D.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Source Limitations: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit
and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise approved by Architect or
Owner.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances
required for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning,
and servicing of accessories.


10800 - 1
B.
1.6
A.
Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent
delaying the Work.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer's Mirror Warranty: Written warranty, executed by mirror manufacturer agreeing
to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within minimum warranty period
indicated.
1. Minimum Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 -
2.1
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

accessories that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide accessories by one of the

following:
1. Toilet and Bath Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
2.2
American Specialties, Inc. (ASI)

Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
Bradley Corporation.
McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories Corp.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for
each designation in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule at the end of Part 3.
MATERIALS
A.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish (satin), in 0.0312-inch minimum
nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Brass: ASTM B 19, leaded and unleaded flat products; ASTM B 16, rods, shapes, forgings,
and flat products with finished edges; ASTM B 30, castings.
C.
Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold rolled, commercial quality, 0.0359-inch minimum
nominal thickness; surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish.
D.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60.
E.
Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service), nickel
plus chromium electrodeposited on base metal.
F.
Baked-Enamel Finish: Factory-applied, gloss-white, baked-acrylic-enamel coating.
G.
Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with
silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with
FS DD-M-411.


10800 - 2
H.
I.
2.3
Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and
theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Names or labels are not permitted on exposed faces of accessories. On interior
surface not exposed to view or on back surface of each accessory, provide printed,
waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model
number.
B.
Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight
seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with continuous
stainless-steel hinge. Provide concealed anchorage where possible.
C.
Recessed Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all-welded

construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors and access panels with full-length,
stainless-steel hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed.
D.
Framed Glass-Mirror Units: Fabricate frames for glass-mirror units to accommodate glass
edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that permits rigid,
tamper-resistant glass installation and prevents moisture accumulation.
1. Provide galvanized steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch and full mirror size, with
non-absorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler material.
E.
Mirror-Unit Hangers: Provide mirror-unit mounting system that permits rigid, tamper- and
theft-resistant installation, as follows:
1. One-piece, galvanized steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to
hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.
2. Heavy-duty wall brackets of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices
requiring a special tool to remove.
F.
PART 3 -
3.1
Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners

appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level,
plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B.
Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper-resistant manner with special hangers, toggle
bolts, or screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated, according to
manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated.
C.
Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested
according to method in ASTM F 446.


10800 - 3
D.
3.2
Provide grab bars per ICC/ANSI A117.1-2003 requirements

A.
Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function
properly. Replace damaged or defective items.
B.
Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C.
Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.3

Provide the following accessories where indicated on the drawings.
A.
Paper Towel Dispenser (PTD): Provide metal/plastic paper towel dispenser, one per Toilet
Room and one at janitor sink, complying with the following:
1. Surface-Mounted Type: Sized for Tork H1 Roll Towel without using special adapters;
with hinged front equipped with tumbler lockset; battery powered and with refill indicators
window on front.
2. Mounting Height: Mount dispenser such that access to the paper towels is between 44
inches 48 inches AFF.
3. Model: Tork Intuition Hand Towel Roll Dispenser, Product 309605
B.
Toilet Tissue Dispenser (TD): Provide toilet tissue dispenser, one per water closet, complying
with the following:
1. Type: Roll-in-reserve dispenser with hinged front secured with tumbler lockset,
Double-roll dispenser
2. Mounting: Surface mounted with concealed anchorage.
3. Mounting Height: Install top of unit at 29 inches AFF.
4. Material: Stainless steel
5. Model: ASI No. 0030 or approved equal
C.
Soap Dispenser (SD): Provide soap dispenser, one per lavatory and one at janitor sink,
1. Liquid Soap Dispenser, Vertical-Tank Type: Surface-mounted type, minimum 40-oz.
capacity tank with stainless-steel piston, springs, and internal parts designed to dispense
soap in measured quantity by pump action; and stainless-steel cover with unbreakable
window-type refill indicator.
2. Mounting Height: Mount over or adjacent to sink such that the soap valve or push button
is 8 inches above sink or 42 inches AFF.
3. Model: ASI NO. 0343 or approved equal.
D.
Grab Bars: Provide stainless-steel grab bars, two horizontal and one vertical per water closet,
1. Stainless-Steel Nominal Thickness: Minimum 0.05 inch
2. Mounting: Concealed with manufacturer's standard flanges and anchors.
3. Mounting height: Mount horizontal grab bars at 36 inches AFF and vertical bar at 40
inches AFF and as required per ANSI /A-117-2003 Chapter 6


10800 - 4
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
Gripping Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard slip-resistant texture

Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches
Size: Provide as indicated on drawings
Model: ASI No. 3200 series
Mirror Unit: Provide mirror unit, one per lavatory, complying with the following:
1. Stainless Steel, Framed Mirror: Fabricate frame from minimum nominal 0.05 inch thick
stainless steel angles, with square corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. Size:
18 inch x 36 inch
2. Mounting Height: Mount mirror a minimum of 4 inches above sink and such that the
bottom of the reflective surface of the mirror is no more than 40 inches AFF.
3. Model: ASI No. 0600 or approved equal
END OF SECTION


10800 - 5


10800 - 6
SECTION 11000
EQUIPMENT GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.

to this Section.
B.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere: The following items of work are specified in other
Sections of the Specifications. Each supplier and installer shall familiarize himself with these
items as they apply to his work, and he shall cooperate with other trades to facilitate the
execution of the work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
Earthwork - Division 2
Concrete - Division 3
Structural Steel - Division 5
Mechanical - Division 15
Electrical - Division 16
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1. The requirements of this Section shall apply to all other Sections of Division 11 and
related sections of Division 15.
2. Furnish and install where shown on the Contract Drawings all equipment, as specified,
complete and ready for safe operation. Each item shall be specifically designed for the
intended function. Provide necessary accessories, items of equipment, mechanical,
electrical and structural items, whether specified or not in order to provide properly
installed and functional equipment.
3. Equipment shall be suitable for installation in the space allocated on Contract Drawings
and operation on the available building utilities. Any modification or redesign to the
building structure or utilities because of an alternate equipment selection by the
Contractor shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Colorado
Department of Transportation (CDOT) and shall be as approved by the Engineer.
4. In all cases where a device or part of the equipment is referred to in the singular number,
it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many such devices as are required to
complete the installation.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
Verify that all references are correct and are the latest edition.
B.
Work shall conform to Federal, State and local governing rules and regulations and
ordinances, including OSHA and NFPA requirements, and shall pass inspection by the


11000 - 1
1. Work shall conform to referenced codes in Section 01095.

C.
1.4
Furnish all materials and labor above and beyond those required by these specifications in
order to meet these requirements and to obtain approvals of inspections and tests.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 Submittals and as
specified in the various Sections of Equipment Specifications.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Shop drawings
Product data
Samples
Installation Instructions
Operations and maintenance manuals
Sequence of Approval:
1. Tentative approval of Equipment: Before submittal of shop drawings, submit to the
Engineer for approval, drawings, specifications and lists of equipment to be incorporated
in the work. This list shall include catalog numbers, cuts, and such other descriptive data
as may be required to assure compliance with these specifications. No consideration will
be given to partial lists submitted from time to time. Approval of equipment will be
tentative subject to submission of complete shop drawings indicating compliance with the
Contract Documents.
2. Final Approval of Equipment: After receiving tentative approval of the equipment lists
submit shop drawings, product data and installation instructions for final approval.
C.
Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall consist of the following as applicable:

1. Layout drawings showing equipment layout, elevations, conduit runs, utility layout and
hook-ups, and all required dimensions
2. Fabrication drawings, including bill of materials
3. Detail drawings
4. Foundation and structural support drawings including anchor bolt plan and elevation.
5. Utility connection plan
6. Electrical control diagram
7. Electrical wiring diagram
8. Electrical equipment layout, with all motors, limit switches, solenoid valves, disconnects,
control panels, etc. located and labeled
9. Piping systems including pipe routing, sizing, valving, lubricators, regulators, pumps,
nozzles etc. fully noted and scheduled
D.
Product Data: Manufacturer's literature including catalog cuts, pamphlets, descriptive

literature, equipment specifications, performance and test data, and brochures which
adequately describe the piece of equipment or product. Chemical product data must include
Material Safety Data Sheet from manufacturer.
1. Equipment Data
2. Preventive Maintenance Schedule
3. Recommended Spare Parts
E.
Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's recommended installation instructions and


11000 - 2
manufacturer's installation drawings.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
General:
1. All articles, materials, fittings, equipment and machinery incorporated in the work shall be
new and unused, of recent manufacturer, free from defects and imperfections, and shall,
as far as practicable, be manufacturer's standard make and shall be of first grade
commercial quality, from reputable manufacturers, suitable for the purpose intended and
subject to approval of the Engineer.
2. When two or more items of equipment are required, they shall be products of a single
manufacturer.
3. All work shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner by workers skilled in their
respective trades, and all materials and equipment shall be installed as recommended by
the manufacturers and in accordance with specified codes and standards.
4. Touch-up or repaint to match original finishes, all factory finished or painted equipment
and materials which are scratched or marred during shipment or installation.
5. For purposes of designating type and quality of works under Divisions11, the Contract
Drawings and Specifications are based on products by manufacturers listed in Part 2 Products of each individual Section.
B.
Permits and Tests: The Contractor shall obtain all necessary construction and/or operating
permits from the State and other authorities having jurisdiction, make application and file all
drawings required for such permits, and pay for all permits. Arrange for inspections and tests
required by governing authorities and by CDOT, and pay all costs connected therewith.
Obtain and file with the CDOT written evidence that all the above requirements have been
met. All permits will be in place (acknowledged in writing) and all testing will be complete prior
to substantial completion.
C.
Certificates:
1. Furnish an affidavit certifying that all materials and workmanship comply with the
applicable code requirements.
2. Before final acceptance, furnish all required certificates of the authorities having
jurisdiction.
D.
Certificates of Compliance. Upon delivery of the equipment, submit certificates of compliance.

Each certificate shall be signed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer stating
that the equipment and its installation complies in all respects with the Contract requirements.
E.
Warranty: All equipment shall be warranted in accordance with the following provisions:
1. The Contractor warrants that the work performed, and all materials and equipment
furnished hereunder by Contractor or his subcontractors or suppliers will be free from
defects in design, material, workmanship and operation for a period of one year from the
date of substantial completion except for special warranties as may be specified in the
individual sections.
2. The Contractor shall remedy any such defect at his own expense.
3. The Contractor shall furnish written warranties, prior to final acceptance of the equipment
item, required by the respective sections of the Specifications for time stipulated therein.
These warranties shall be in writing, on the Contractor's or supplier's letterhead and shall
be included in the operations and maintenance manual(s) as specified in 1.04 of this


11000 - 3
section.
4. Major equipment components, (as required by the respective sections of the
specifications) specifically those manufactured by other than the primary equipment
supplier, shall be covered by their own respective warranties, which shall not be less than
the suppliers standard warranty. These warranties shall also be included in the
operations and maintenance manual(s).
5. Nothing in these requirements, conditions or specifications including CDOTs right to a
complete inspection shall constitute a disclaimer to or limit, negate, exclude or modify in
any way any warranty created hereunder.
1.6
TRAINING PROGRAM
A.
General Requirements: The Contractor is responsible for training as outlined in this section.
1. Maintenance management classes are to take place prior to substantial completion of the
facility.
2. Mechanics training will commence only after installation of machine is complete at the
facility.
3. Training shall be conducted at the new facility.
4. Hours for training are to be between 7:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. unless specifically permitted
otherwise.
B.
The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that the instructors teaching these training courses
are not only familiar with technical information, but able to utilize proper methods of
instruction, training aids, audiovisuals, etc. to ensure effective presentations.
C.
The Contractor is responsible for providing all training aids, audiovisual equipment and visual
aids for the conduct of these courses.
D.
All training materials are to become the property of the CDOT at the conclusion of training.
E.
Submission and Approval of Training Plans:

1. The Contractor is to meet with CDOT no later than three weeks prior to the start of formal
training, at that time, Contractor will submit lesson plans and an outline of his training
program, as well as to demonstrate any training aids involved. Handouts are also to be
presented for approval and provided later in a ratio of one per student. Each location
shall receive a complete set of prints and schematics.
2. The Contractor will describe his plans for meeting the specification training requirements.
CDOT will approve and then coordinate and schedule all training involved with CDOT.
F.
The Contractor will outline specific objectives for each of the courses that he is required to
present.
1. The course should include sessions in safety, machine operation, a comprehensive
seminar on learning basic skills/knowledge of each operation. The course should include
both classroom and practical exercise sessions and is to provide the maintenance staff
with the basic knowledge necessary to utilize all training materials. The Contractor will
provide a detailed schedule outlining the length and content of each of these sessions in
accordance with the guidelines established.
2. The training program shall include familiarization with safe equipment operation and
performance and detailed instruction in operation, maintenance and test procedures. The
minimum level of training shall be provided for each personnel category as follows:
a. Engineering and Management - 1 hour;


11000 - 4
b. Operating and Maintenance Personnel - 4 hours (based on following minimum

training times by Equipment Specification Number);
Specification Section
Section 11146
Section 11535
Section 15400
1.7
Description
Waste Oil System
Pressure Washer
Compressor
Training Hours
1/2
1/2
2
GENERAL DESIGN AND FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS

A.
Equipment shall be designed, fabricated, installed and adjusted to secure the best
commercially available results with respect to smooth, quiet, convenient and efficient
operation, durability, economy of maintenance and operation, and the highest standards of
safety.
B.
It is not the intent of these Specifications to detail the design and fabrication of the various
parts of the equipment, but is expected that the type, material, design, workmanship and
fabrication of each and every part shall be fully adequate for the service required, durable,
properly coordinated with all other parts, in accordance with the best commercial standards
and of the highest commercial efficiency. The components of electric circuits shall be of
ample and proper size, design and material to avoid injurious heating and arcing, and all other
objectionable effects which may reduce the efficiency of operation and economy of
maintenance and upkeep below the best commercially available results. Minimum
requirements are given herein for the certain parts of equipment. Equivalent requirements
approved by the Engineer shall apply to such parts as are of special design, construction or
material and to which the specified requirements are not directly applicable. These minimum
requirements as a whole shall also be considered as establishing proportionate general
minimum standards for all parts of the equipment.
C.
The Engineer may permit variations from the requirements of these Specifications to permit
the use of the manufacturer' standard equipment, provided that in his opinion such standard
equipment is in every way adequate for the intended use and meets the full intent of these
Specifications. All such variations proposed by the Contractor shall be called to the attention
of the Engineer in writing and shall be made only if approved in writing.
D.
Certain design limitations and tests are herein specified as a partial check on the adequacy of
design, fabrication, and materials. These requirements do not cover all features necessary to
insure satisfactory and approved operation of the equipment. Conformity with these
requirements shall, in no way, supersede the general requirements as to satisfactory and
efficient operation of the equipment.
1.8
NOISE AND VIBRATION ISOLATION

A.
Noise and vibration isolation pads shall be provided where required and shall be approved
type equipped with necessary bearing plates and bolts. They shall be specifically designed
for the weights, speeds and vibration characteristics of the equipment supported. The pads
shall provide proper distribution of weight to avoid distortion of the bed plates.
B.
Bolts and other fastenings in connection with these pads shall also be effectively isolated.
1.9
SHOP PAINTING
A.
Equipment shall be given one shop prime coat of approved rust-inhibitive paint containing at


11000 - 5
least 50 percent rust-inhibitive pigments and manufacture's standard finish coat system. Shop
drawings shall indicate brand and type of paint.
1.10
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Power supply for equipment shall be 208 volts, 3-phase, 60 hertz unless otherwise specified.
B.
Provide transformers for equipment as required to step down the specified supply voltage to
provide lower voltage for controls and accessories and to provide voltage compatible with
equipment as required.
C.
Wiring shall be provided for complete installation of all equipment and accessories and shall
be adequate for proper operation of equipment. Provide a disconnect switch for each
equipment item requiring electric power; disconnect switch shall meet requirements of the
respective equipment item manufacturer and Division 16. Permanently label each disconnect
switch to identify corresponding equipment item; labeling method shall be subject to approval
of the Engineer. Electrical Trade will bring power wiring to line side of disconnect switch.
Contractor/supplier shall make connection to secondary side of disconnect switch and provide
all wiring and conduit form this point, including wiring to controllers and starters. Provide 480
volt equipment with electric fusible disconnecting means, sized and fused as required for each
equipment item. All disconnect switches shall be fused with 200,000 amp limiter fuses.
Provide 120 volt equipment with electric thermal overload disconnect means sized as required
for each equipment item. Wire and cable for light, power and signal circuits shall conform to
those specified in the National Electrical Code. In no case shall maximum current carried
exceed that specified by National Electrical Code for type of conductor used. Provide conduit
where required; all wiring and conduit shall be in accordance with the requirements of Division
16. Verify power supply with Division 16.
D.
Motors:
1. Motors shall be high efficiency motors each bearing the UL label and constructed to
standard of NEMA, IEEE, ANSI, and AFBMA.
2. Motors shall be suitable for operation on the electrical service indicated.
3. Horsepower ratings and sizes shall be selected at 40C ambient temperature for open
motors, with a service factor for totally enclosed or drip-proof motors. Provide motors with
epoxy encapsulated insulation for severe usage in a corrosive atmosphere.
4. Motors rated one horsepower or greater shall have a full-load power factor of 85 percent
or higher. Motors rated 25 horsepower and over shall be designed for reduced voltage
starting.
E.
Drives:
1. Guards shall be provided for each coupling and belt drive in conformance with applicable
codes.
2. Belt drives shall have adjustable motor drive pulleys, and pulleys shall be replaced by the
Contractor if required to properly operate the equipment.
3. Provide sliding motor bases where adjustable motor drive pulleys are provided.
1.11
GASKETS AND FASTENERS

A.
Provide new gaskets wherever gasketed mating equipment items or pipe connections have
been dismantled. Gaskets shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.


11000 - 6
B.
Replace all assembly bolts, studs, nuts and fasteners of any kind which are bent, flattened,
corroded, or have their threads, heads or slots damaged.
C.
Furnish all bolts, studs, nuts and other fasteners for make-up of all connections to equipment
and replace any of these items damaged in storage, shipment or moving.
1.12
EQUIPMENT
A.
B.
C.
Equipment, machinery and materials shall be as specified in the various Sections of Divisions
11, 15, and 16.
Equipment shall be factory-finished with manufacturer's standard primer and finish coats of
paint.
Starters, controllers, disconnect switches and start-stop stations shall be provided for all
equipment. Correct sizing of starters and disconnect switches shall be the joint responsibility
of the Contractor and the equipment or apparatus manufacturer.
1. Electrical enclosures to be NEMA 12 for indoor units and NEMA 4 for outdoor units unless
otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings.
2. Starters shall be complete with two sets of auxiliary contacts; one set normally open; one
set normally closed.
3. For motors 2 HP and above, provide magnetic starters. For motors 25 HP or greater,
provide auto-transformer type reduced voltage starters.
D.
Control devices necessary for proper operation shall be provided and shall be located to
permit efficient operation of the equipment, and where possible shall be grouped in a factoryfabricated NEMA approved control panel.
E.
Switches, lights and control functions shall be identified with legend plates. The plates shall
be constructed of polyvinylchloride material of laminated multiple constructions, and rout
engraved with appropriate legends. The size of letters, colors and legend shall be submitted
for approval. The legend plates shall be mounted on the equipment in an approved manner.
No decals will be accepted.
F.
All piping, valves, fittings, conduits and wiring required for the equipment installation shall be
in accordance with the applicable portions of Divisions 15 and 16, except where specified by
the Equipment Specification.
1.13
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Furnish common and skilled labor, tools, rigging equipment, scaffolding, shims, dowels, and
other materials necessary to make complete installation of equipment specified and indicated
in the Contract Documents.
B.
Receive, unload, check and store equipment in suitable facilities. All equipment should be
kept clean, dry, and free from damage and be marked and tagged with equipment item
numbers.
C.
Examine equipment for concealed damage and report any damage.
D.
Be responsible for safety and protection from loss or damage of equipment received until work
is complete.


11000 - 7
E.
Pay demurrage charges and claims for damage resulting form unloading operations.
F.
Reassemble equipment items which were dismantled for shipment or moving. Assemble
items which are delivered knocked down, or disassembled.
G.
Coordinate the installation of equipment with other trades.
H.
Protect equipment during storage and prior to start-up, which shall include covering of
openings, protection against rust and other damage. Equipment may be stored outdoors only
with approval of the Engineer.
I.
Furnish and install grout, shim material and miscellaneous steel necessary for brackets,
anchors, or support required in installation of equipment.
Accomplish field machining that might be required to fit equipment together or to install
equipment.
J.
K.
Lubricate apparatus before start-up.
L.
Field check for clearance and interferences before fabrication or installation and relocate
material and equipment furnished as required to eliminate interferences.
M.
Storage tanks for all fluids are to be filled with appropriate fluids by CDOT.
N.
Details listed in these specifications are given for a better understanding of the work required
by the Contractor, and do not place a limitation on the amount of work to be done nor do they
relieve the Contractor of additional work that my be required for a complete installation.
O.
Perform mechanical and electrical work required to install the equipment in accordance with
the requirements of the jurisdictional authorities and the current applicable codes and
standards of practice employed by these trades.
1.14
HOLES, OPENINGS AND INSERTS

A.
Provide holes and openings in floors, walls, ceilings and roofs as required.
B.
Core drill holes in existing work using dustless method. Grout in holes in concrete walls, floor
and roof slabs after installation of equipment, and leave them in a completely neat and sealed
condition.
C.
Install concrete inserts and flashings as required.
1.15
1.16
SETTING AND ALIGNING EQUIPMENT

A.
Equipment shall be set and aligned in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations,

approved shop drawings and applicable standards of trade practice.
B.
Equipment shall be set true and level. Demonstrate adequate leveling of installed equipment.
C.
Retighten bolted connections after installation.


11000 - 8
A.
Clean fabricated assemblies and equipment items thoroughly before and after operating and
testing.
B.
Protect equipment from damage, deterioration, paint or coating spills or spots, corrosion, or
harm from any source.
C.
Immediately following completion of equipment installation, comply with manufacturers

recommended procedures for Extended Equipment Lay-Up. This requirement shall only be
waived upon written permission by the Engineer.
1.17
CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS
A.
B.
Provide concrete foundations for equipment as indicated on the Contract Drawings or as

specified herein.
Concrete and reinforcement shall conform to Division 3.
C.
Provide anchor bolts as required for equipment to be mounted.
D.
Provide grouting as necessary to stabilize equipment bases to concrete foundations.
1.18
EQUIPMENT TEST AND CHECK-OUT

A.
Before Substantial Completion, the Contractor-furnished equipment shall be tested in the

presence of the Engineer to this satisfaction and demonstrated to be correctly connected and
installed. Submit a testing schedule to the Engineer for approval prior to the start of the
equipment test and check-out.
B.
Testing and check-out procedures of the manufacturer shall be carried out completely.
C.
Equipment tests shall not only be performed to demonstrate that the equipment has been
properly installed and connected and operates properly but also to demonstrate that the
equipment performs the work for which it is intended.
D.
Tested equipment found to be defective or inoperable to any extent shall be reported to the
Engineer immediately.
E.
Any operating difficulty or defective item shall be repaired or replaced and put into proper
operation by the Contractor immediately, at no additional expense to CDOT.
F.
Protect equipment and surrounding areas from damage resulting from testing operations.
Clean-up spills or leakage from testing.
G.
The Contractor shall bear all expenses of all tests, including the furnishing of all necessary
instruments, lubricants, hydraulic fluid, supplies, data recorders, and operation personnel.
Provide and bear all expenses for fuel/power required to operate the equipment during tests.
1.19
MOTORS AND DRIVES

A.
Motors and drives shall be checked carefully for correct rotation and alignment before placing
equipment into operation.
B.
Couplings shall be disconnected and realigned before placing into service or testing.


11000 - 9
C.
1.20
Belt drives shall be adjusted and worn belts replaced in sets. Speed adjustment shall be
subject to approval of the Engineer.
OBSERVATIONS
A.
Architect or Engineer will conduct periodic site observation visits during the course of
construction.
B.
Provide for inspections by all others having jurisdiction over the Work.
1.21
FIELD PAINTING
A.
Field painting equipment, including touch-up painting, if any, is included under this Section of
Specifications. Normally, equipment shall be factory-finished as previously specified.
B.
Where factory finishes are provided on equipment and no additional field painting is specified,
all marred or damaged surfaces shall be touched up or refinished so as to leave a smooth,
uniform finish at the time of final inspection.
1.22
START-UP AND INSTRUCTIONS

A.
Unless otherwise specified in other Sections of these Specifications, all lubricants, cleaning
compounds, and similar operating materials will be furnished by the Contractor during
instruction of CDOT personnel.
B.
After all equipment and system shave been installed, connected and tested, proceed with the
simultaneous start-up and initial operation of the entire facility as well as the instruction of
CDOT personnel in the safe operation and maintenance of equipment. The Contractor shall
provide sufficient personnel to adequately complement personnel made available by CDOT.
C.
During this period, provide qualified representatives of equipment manufacturers of instruction

of the CDOT's personnel in safe operation and maintenance of the equipment.
D.
Comply with requirements of Article 1.5 herein.
PART 2 -
A.
PRODUCTS
The following Specification Sections and products will be covered by the requirements of this
Section.
Section 11146 Waste Oil System
Section 11535 Hot Water Pressure Washer
Section 15400 Compressor
PART 3 -
EXECUTION: Not Required.

END OF SECTION


11000 - 10
SECTION 13122
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
PART 1 -
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.

General 1 Requirements and applicable provisions elsewhere in the contract documents
apply to this Section.
B.
Related Sections:
1. Division 2: Foundation Preparation and Earthwork
2. Section 03300: Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete floor, foundations, installation of
anchor bolts, control joints and reinforcing
3. Section 05400: Cold Formed Structural Metal Framing including flashing
4. Section 06640: Plastic Paneling
5. Section 07210: Building Insulation
6. Section 07260: Vapor Retarders for thermal and moisture protection
8. Section 08110: Steel Doors, Windows and Frames
9. Section 08360: Section Overhead Doors
10. Section 08520: Aluminum Windows
11. Section 08710: Door Hardware
12. Section 09260: Gypsum Board Assembly
13. Section 09900: Painting including painting of metal building components
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes interior and exterior metal building system panels of the nominal length,
width and roof pitch indicated. Furnish all necessary structure, materials, labor and
equipment for the complete installation of the metal building panels.
1. Manufacturer's standard building components and accessories may be used, provided
components, accessories, and complete structure conform to design indicated and
specified requirements.
2. CDOT contracted engineer designs a foundation in accordance with site-specific
geotechnical report recommendations. Contractor to select a building system
manufacturer from CDOT-approved list on page 13122-7, 2.1A. If contractor
desires to propose a manufacturer that is not on this list, contractor must submit a
full submittal to CDOT before the question deadline of Addenda # 2 (date as
detailed in Addendum # 1 and announced at the pre-bid meeting.) CDOT retains
the right to deny specific system manufacturers based on past performance,
including inability to provide product in a timely manner.
B.
Work includes but is not limited to the following:

1. Prefinished metal liner, roof and wall panels.
2. End flashing, doors, windows, frames, overhead doors, and miscellaneous trim and
flashing.
3. Thermal insulation.


13122 - 1
4. Building sealants.
1.3
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A.
General: Engineer, N/A
B.
Design Loads: N/A

1. Dead Loads: N/A
2. Snow Loads: N/A
3. Roof Live Loads: N/A
4. Wind Loads: N/A
5. Earthquake Loads: N/A
6. Special Loads. N/A
7. Load Combinations for primary and secondary structural members: N/A
C.
Structural Design Practice Deflections. N/A
D.
Structural Framing and Roof and Siding Panels: N/A
E.
Building Accessories: Provide metal building system accessories that comply with the
following criteria:
1. Doors, Windows and Overhead Doors shall comply with Division 8 Specification
Sections.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and any
Division 1 Specification Sections.
1. Shop drawings for metal buildings roofing and siding panels and any other metal building
system components that are necessary to provide a fully functional system. Submit a
total of four (4) complete copies of the manufacturer shop drawings to the CDOT
Architect for review. Furnish also one electronic (PDF) set of shop drawings to the
Architect.
2. Building Accessory Components: Provide details of metal building accessory
components to clearly indicate methods of installation including the following:
a. Sheet Metal Accessories: Provide layouts and details of ventilators, louvers, gutters,
downspouts, flashings, and other sheet metal accessories showing profiles, methods
of joining, and anchorages.
b. Approved Equal Insulation system details: Details and Insulation system related to
building system framing that meet the alternate insulation requirements identified in
Section 07210 1.2 C and 2.1 A , and in compliance with the 2009 IECC Code for a
professionally tested and installed system.
3. Structural calculations, N/A
B.
C.
Production Data: Submit manufacturer's product information specifications, and installation

instructions for all building components, accessories, and flashing. Include certification


13122 - 2
verifying that metal roofing system has been tested and approved by Underwriter's
Laboratory as Class 90.
D.
Dealer Certification: Submit certification thirty (30) days after Notice to Apparent Low Bidder
that the pre-engineered metal building or metal roof system supplier is a manufacturer's
authorized and franchised dealer of the system to be furnished. Certification shall state date
on which authorization was granted.
E.
Installer Certification: Submit certificate thirty (30) days after Notice to Apparent Low Bidder
that the pre-engineered metal building or roof system installer has been regularly engaged in
the installation of pre-engineered metal building systems of the same or equal construction to
the system specified.
F.
Samples: Submit samples, two (2) each of the following. Samples will be used as basis for
evaluating quality of finished roof and wall systems.
1. Twelve inch long by actual width of roofing, and siding panels, with required finished and
standard color samples.
2. Fasteners for application of roofing and siding panels.
3. Flashing and closures.
G.
1.5
Manufacturer's Certification: Submit written Certification by the signed manufacturer date

stating that the pre-engineering metal roof system manufacturer will provide warranties
specified herein. Submit required warranties. Submit required certifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer to erect the metal building system
who has experience in the erection and installation of types of metal buildings systems similar
to that required for this project and who is certified in writing by the metal building system
manufacturer as qualified for erection of the manufacturer's products.
B.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide metal building systems manufactured by a firm

experienced in manufacturing metal buildings systems that are similar to those indicated for
this project and have a record of successful in-service performance. The metal building
system supplier shall be a member in good standing of the Metal Building Manufacturers
Association (MBMA). The supplier shall have been AIFC-MB certified prior to that programs
discontinuation and shall be actively pursuing the completion or have obtained International
Code Council Inspection Program for Manufacturers of Metal Building Systems (AC427) by
December 31, 2010.
C.
Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain the metal building system components, including

structural framing, wall and roof covering, and accessory components, from a single
manufacturer.
D.
Code Standards. Meet requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of

standards listed, latest edition.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
AISC
AISI
AWS D1.1
FS TT-P
MBMA
ASTM
Steel Construction Manual

Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual
Structural Welding Code
Federal Specification for Primer Coats. 664C
Metal Building Systems Code of Standard Practice
American Society for Testing and Materials


13122 - 3
E.
1.6
Conduct a pre-installation conference attended by representatives of the contractor, installer,

manufacturer, other work-related contractors and Owners representative.

A.
Deliver prefabricated components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so they will
not be damaged or deformed.
B.
Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting wall and roof covering panels to
prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C.
Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weather tight
ventilated covering. Store metal wall and roof panels so that water accumulations will drain
freely. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting
or other surface damage.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Roofing and Siding Panel Finish Warranty: Furnish the roofing and siding panel
manufacturer's written warranty, covering failure of the factory-applied exterior finish on metal
wall and roof panels within the warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to and not
a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract
Documents.
1. Painted Wall Panels
a. Will not chalk more that a #8 during years 1-20 when measured per ASTM D4214.
b. Will not change color more that 5 Hunter Units during years 1-20 per ASTM2244.
c. Will not noticeably crack, check or peel for a period of 20 years.
2. Painted Roof Panels.
a. Will not chalk more that a #8 during years 1-20 when measured per ASTM D4214.
b. Will not change color more that 5 Hunter Units during years 1-20 per ASTM2244.
c. Will not noticeably crack, check or peel for a period of 20 years.
1.8
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
PART 2 -
2.1
Maintenance Stock: Furnish at least 5 percent excess over required amount of nuts, bolts,
screws, washers, panels and other required fasteners. Pack in cartons labeled to identify the
contents and store on the site where directed by Owner's representative.
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

metal building systems that may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the
following:


13122 - 4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Alliance Steel Buildings

B & C Steel
Behlen Building Systems
Braemar Building Systems
Butler Manufacturing Co.
Ceco
Chief Metal Buildings Co.
Varco-Pruden Buildings
Refer to sheet A1.0 for pre-approved table of acceptable wall and roof profiles by
manufacturer. Any deviations from this table must be approved by CDOT prior to bid.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Hot-Rolled Structural Steel Shapes: Comply with ASTM A 36 or A 529.
B.
Steel Tubing or Pipe: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, ASTM A 501, or ASTM A 53.
C.
Steel Members Fabricated from Plate or Bar Stock: Provide 42,000 psi minimum yield
strength. Comply with ASTM A 529, ASTM A 570, or ASTM A 572.
D.
Steel Members Fabricated by Cold Forming: Comply with ASTM A 607, Grade 50.
E.
Cold-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet: Comply with requirements of ASTM A 366, ASTM A 568, or
A1011.
F.
Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet: Comply with requirements of ASTM A 568 or ASTM A 569.
G.
Structural Quality Aluminum Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Comply with

ASTM A 446 with G90 coating complying with ASTM A 525. Grade to suit manufacturer's
standards.
H.
Commercial Quality Aluminum Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Comply with

ASTM A 526 with G60 coating complying with ASTM A 525.
I.
Bolts for Structural Framing: Comply with ASTM A 307 or ASTM A 325 as necessary for
design loads and connection details.
J.
Thermal Insulation and Vapor Retarders: Refer to Section 07210 and 07260 for
requirements.
K.
Paint and Coating Materials: Comply with performance requirements of the federal
specifications indicated. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, compliance with
compositional requirements of federal specifications indicated is not required.
1. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead-free, universal primer, selected by the
manufacturer for resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish
paint systems, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats
despite prolonged exposure. Comply with FS TT-P-645 or FS TT-P-36.
2. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead-free, abrasion- resistant, rust-inhibitive
primer selected by the manufacturer for compatibility with substrates with types of alkyd
finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound foundation for fieldapplied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. Comply with FS TT-P-86, Types I, II, or III.


13122 - 5
3. Shop Primer for Galvanized Metal Surfaces: Zinc dust-zinc oxide primer selected by the
manufacturer for compatibility with substrate. Comply with FS TT-P-641.
2.3
STRUCTURAL FRAMING
A.
Rigid Frames: N/A
B.
Primary Endwall Framing: N/A
C.
Secondary Framing: N/A
D.
Wind Bracing: N/A
E.
Bolts: N/A
F.
Welding: N/A
G.
Shop Painting: N/A.
2.4
ROOFING, SIDING, AND LINER PANELS

A.
Lap-Seam Wall Panels: All buildings to have lap-seam wall panels. Fabricate from sheets to
an approved profile from 26-gauge (.0179-inch), structural quality, Grade C, aluminum-zinc
coated steel (per ASTM A792) or Galvalume sheets.
B.
Roof Panels: Enclosed buildings (insulated, and lined such as the Vehicle Storage Building)
to have standing seam roof panels. Fabricate standing seam roof panels from sheets to an
approved profile with a trapezoidal seam nest suitable for machine seaming or snap-lock
installation. (Refer to Sheet A0.1 for pre-approved table of acceptable wall/roof panels.)
C.
Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets, self-locking bolts, end-welded
studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.
1. Provide metal-backed neoprene washers under heads of fasteners bearing on weather
side of panels.
2. Locate and space fastenings in true vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools
to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of neoprene
washer.
3. Provide fasteners with heads matching color of roofing or siding sheets by means of
plastic caps or factory-applied coating.
4. Provide sufficient fasteners adjacent to windows and doors to create a flat panel with no
bowing at edge of siding.
D.
Trim, flashing and caps: Prefinished galvanized metal, 24 gauge minimum, matching the
exterior color of the roof and wall panel.
1. Pipe and Equipment Penetrations: Provide flashing with flange following profile of roof
panel and cone to 8 above the roof surface and strapped and sealed to pipe and/or
equipment.
2. Windows and Doors. Provide continuous flashing at all window and door penetrations
3. All flashings, ridges, trims closures and similar items shall be supplied by the
manufacturer of the roof and wall panels.
4. All neoprene closures shall match exactly the panel rib profile.


13122 - 6
5. Provide flashing at roof canopies.

E.
Accessories: Provide the following sheet metal accessories factory-formed of the same
material in the same finish as roof and wall panels:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Flashings
Closers
Fillers
Metal expansion joints
Fascias
Bracing for roof vent penetrations
Roof Canopies
F.
Flexible Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded cellular rubber, self-extinguishing flexible

closure strips. Cut or premold to match configuration of roofing and siding sheets. Provide
closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weather tight construction.
G.
Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive 100 percent solids gray polyisobutylene compound sealing
tape with release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining
tape 3 inches wide and 1/8 inch thick.
H.
Joint Sealant: One-part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone rubber sealant as

recommended by the building manufacturer.
I.
Liner Panels: Enclosed buildings (insulated, and lined such as the Vehicle Storage Building)
shall have a liner panel placed on the inside of the building at all walls and underside of the
roof up to the peak except where other materials are called out in the drawings. Fabricate
liner panels from sheets to an approved profile from 26-gauge (0.0179-inch), Grade C,
aluminum-zinc coated steel (per ASTM A792) or Galvalume sheets designed for direct
mechanical attachment of liner panels to roof purlins and wall girts using exposed fasteners.
The finish of the liner panels shall be a manufacturer's standard silicon polyester paint finish,
white.
J.
Fluoropolymer Finish (exterior panels and trim only): Provide shop-applied fluoropolymer
finish to aluminum-zinc coated or Galvalume steel roofing and siding panels and related trim
and accessory elements.
1. Clean aluminum zinc coated steel with an alkaline compound, then treat with a zinc
phosphate conversion coating and seal with a chromic acid rinse.
2. Apply a 2-coat fluoropolymer coating system to pretreated steel. Coating shall consist of
a specially formulated inhibitive primer applied to a dry film thickness of 0.15 mil to 0.25
mil and a fluorocarbon color coat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene
fluoride resin by weight applied to a dry film thickness of 0.80 mils to 1.3 mils.
a. Color: To be selected by the Architect or Owner from the manufacturer's standard
colors and installed as scheduled.
2.5
PERSONNEL DOORS AND WINDOWS

A.
2.6
Provide all necessary framing, anchors, and appurtenances as needed to accept personnel
doors and windows.
OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS


13122 - 7
A.
2.7
Provide all necessary framing, anchors, and appurtenances as needed to accept overhead
sectional doors.
SHEET METAL ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Provide coated steel sheet metal accessories with coated steel roofing and siding
panels.
B.
Provide all trim pieces necessary to achieve a finished appearance. Gable trim and eave trim
shall have a roll formed face to maintain uniformity.
C.
Provide trim at all corners of the building and for all sides of framed openings. Provide trim
for base of building if required.
D.
Wall Louvers: Provide all necessary framing, anchors, and appurtenances as need to accept
wall louvers.
2.8
FABRICATION
A.
General: Design prefabricated components and necessary field connections required for
erection to permit easy assembly.
1. Clearly and legibly mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with
previously prepared erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals.
PART 3 -
3.1
EXECUTION
PRIOR INSPECTION OF THE STRUCTURE

A.
3.2
Before beginning installation, examine all parts of the structure affecting the installation of the
work. Should any conditions be found which will prevent the proper execution of the work, do
not proceed with installation work until such conditions are corrected or adjusted.
ROOFING AND SIDING

A.
General: Arrange and nest sidelap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped
joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items
for neat and weather tight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line.
Protect factory finishes from damage.
1. Field cutting of exterior panels by torch is not permitted.
2. Provide weather seal under ridge cap. Flash and seal roof panels at eave and rake with
rubber, neoprene, or other closures to exclude weather.
B.
Roof Sheets: Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of ribbed or fluted roof sheets and
between roof sheets and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.
1. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to clean, dry surface of the weather side of
fastenings on end laps, and on side laps of corrugated nesting-type, ribbed, or fluted
panels and elsewhere as needed to make roof sheets weatherproof to driving rains.
C.
Standing-Seam or Snap-Lock Roof Panel System: Fasten roof panels to purlins with


13122 - 8
concealed clip in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

1. Install clips at each support with self-drilling fasteners.
2. At end laps of panels, install tape caulk between panels.
3. Install factory-caulked cleats at standing-seam joints. Machine-seam or snap-lock cleats
to the panels to provide a weather tight joint.
4. Wall Sheets: Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill
angle) and concrete and elsewhere as necessary for waterproofing. Handle and apply
sealant and backup in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's recommendations.
5. Align bottom of wall panels and fasten panels with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping
screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with selftapping screws. Fasten window and door frames with machine screws or bolts. When
building height requires two rows of panels at gable ends, align lap of gable panels over
wall panels at eave height.
6. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress
neoprene washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install
screws in predrilled holes.
7. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.
D.
Sheet Metal Accessories: Install gutters, downspouts, ventilators, louvers, and other sheet
metal accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for positive
anchorage to building and weather tight mounting. Adjust operating mechanism for precise
operation.
E.
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, Hollow Metal Window Frames, and Aluminum Windows:
Install doors and frames, window frames, and windows straight, plumb, and level. Securely
anchor frames to building structure. Set units with 1/8-inch maximum clearance between
door and frame at jambs and head and 3/4-inch maximum between door and floor. Adjust
hardware for proper operation.
F.
Overhead Sectional Doors: Set doors and operating equipment complete with necessary
hardware, jamb and head mold stops, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Adjust moving hardware for proper operation.
G.
Thermal Insulation: Install insulation concurrently with installation of roof panels in

accordance with manufacturer's directions
H.
Water Penetration Test Inspection:

1. At completion of erection of the structure and exterior envelope including roofing, siding,
and installation of windows and skylights and prior to the installation of interior finish
materials, the Contractor is to provide for a third party inspector to conduct a whole
building water penetration test. This test is to be conducted by a certified third party
inspector in accordance with ASTM standards for the testing of water penetration of the
exterior envelope and will determine and identify any locations of water penetration in the
building envelope. The third party inspector is to submit a report certifying absence of
water penetration or locations of leaks to CDOT Architect within 48 hours of testing and
prior to installation of interior finish materials.
I.
Cleaning and Touch-Up:

1. Clean, repair and touch up all structural steel, structural steel connections and all areas
damaged subsequent to shop painting prior to field finishing primary and secondary
members. Do not install wall, roof or ceiling panels until completion of field finishing
primary and secondary members scheduled to be field finished.


13122 - 9
2. Touch up field-cut edges of roofing and siding with manufacturer's coating compatible
with sheet finish.
3. Touch up damaged or stained areas of roofing, siding, and accessories with the
manufacturer's coating in accordance with manufacturer's current published instructions.
END OF SECTION


13122 - 10
SECTION 15010
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Section.
B.
In case of disagreement between drawings and specifications, or within either document itself
obtain written clarification from the Mechanical Engineer through the CDOT Architect. Failure to
obtain clarification prior to bid will result in the better quality and greater quantity being required
during the construction phase, without additional reimbursement.
1.2
SUMMARY OF WORK
A.
Work Included: Unless specified otherwise, provide all supervision, labor, materials,
transportation, equipment, hauling, and services necessary for completely finished and
operational mechanical systems. Provide all minor incidental items such as offsets, fittings, etc.
required as part of the work even though not specifically shown on contract drawings or
specifications. All work included by virtue of these specifications shall be free from all defects
which may be caused by computerized date features.
B.
The Contractor shall provide and install the number of items of equipment as indicated on the
architectural drawings, and as required for code-compliant systems.
C.
Description of Systems: The work of Division 15 includes but is not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
E.
Heating and Ventilating

Plumbing Systems
Temperature Control and Instrumentation
Testing, Adjusting & Balancing
General Requirements: Division 1 - All Sections

Mechanical: Division 15 - All Sections
Work Under Other Divisions:

1.
Fixed Concrete Bases and/or pads for Mechanical Equipment: Division 3 Concrete,
Base size and other required information furnished under Division 15, or as required by
applicable code or ordinance.
2.
Concrete for Inertia Bases for Mechanical Equipment: Division 3 - Concrete. Steel forms
provided under Division 15.
3.
Wall Openings and Chases: Under applicable Division according to information furnished
under Division 15.
DEBEQUE & RIFLE 10-FT ADDITIONS


15010 - 1
F.
4.
Painting (except Mechanical Identification System): Division 9 - Finishes.
5.
Power Wiring: Division 16 - Electrical.
6.
Disconnect switches which are not furnished as an integral part of mechanical

equipment: Division 16 - Electrical.
Inspection: GC to inspect work preceding or interfacing with work of Division 15 sections prior
to construction and report all known or observed defects that affect the mechanical design to
the Design/Build Engineer. Do not proceed with the construction work until defects are
corrected.
1.3
EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Material and equipment has been carefully selected for this project, and the Contractor is
expected to provide all items as closely as possible to the specifications.
B.
The mechanical drawings show the general arrangement of all piping, ductwork, mechanical
equipment, and appurtenances, and shall be followed as closely as actual building construction
and the work of their trades will permit.
C.
The architectural and structural drawings shall be considered part of the mechanical work
insofar as these drawings furnish this Division with information relating to design and
construction of the building.
D.
Because of the small scale of the mechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,
fittings and accessories which may be required. Investigate the structural and finish conditions
affecting the work and provide such fittings, valves and accessories as may be required to meet
such conditions.
E.
1.
Verify dimensions governing mechanical work at the building. Do not scale the
mechanical drawings for dimensions. Take dimensions, measurements, locations, levels,
etc. from the Architectural drawings and the approved shop drawings submitted on the
actual equipment to be furnished.
2.
No extra compensation shall be claimed or allowed on account of differences between

the actual dimensions and those indicated on the drawings.
3.
Examine all adjoining work on which the mechanical work is dependent for maximum
efficiency and report all design conflict which must be corrected prior to submitting bid.
No waiver of responsibility shall be claimed or allowed due to failure to report unfavorable
conditions affecting the mechanical work.
Submission of a bid constitutes acceptance of Drawings and Specifications as sufficiently

detailed and complete to provide a complete, properly-functioning installation in conformance
with applicable codes, standards and ordinances.


15010 - 2
F.
Omission of words or phrases such as "the Contractor shall", "in conformity therewith", "shall
be", "as noted on the drawings", "a", "an", "the", "all", etc. are intentional. Omitted words and
phrases shall be supplied by inference in the same manner as they are when a "note" appears
on the Drawings. "Provide" is intended to mean furnish and install.
G.
Order of Precedence: The precedence of mechanical construction documents is as follows:

1.
Addenda and modifications to the Drawings and Specifications take precedence over the
original Drawings and Specifications.
2.
Should there be a conflict within the Specifications or within Design/Build Drawings of the
same scale, the more stringent or higher quality requirements shall apply.
3.
In the Design/Build Drawings, the precedence shall be Drawings of larger scale over
those of smaller scale, figured dimensions over scaled dimensions and noted materials
over graphic indications.
4.
Should a conflict arise between the Drawings and the Specifications for products
indicated on the Drawings and the Specifications, the Specifications shall have
precedence.
1.4
EXAMINATION OF PROJECT SITE
A.
Examine site carefully to determine conditions to be encountered, work to be performed,

equipment, and materials to be transported, stored, furnished, other features applicable to
completion of the work.
B.
Study drawings and specifications, report inconsistencies, errors, omissions, conflicts with
codes and ordinances.
C.
Submittal of bid will indicate satisfactory field examinations made, applicable allowances
included in the bid.
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
The Contractor shall plan all of his work in advance, and shall inform the General Contractor or
Construction Manager of the proposed construction schedule and anticipated completion date
upon request. Contractor shall complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the
remaining building construction will permit.
B.
Location of pipes, ducts, switches, panels, equipment, and fixtures, shall be adjusted to
accommodate the work or interferences anticipated and encountered. Determine the exact
route and location of each pipe and duct prior to fabrication.
1.
Right of way: Lines which pitch shall have the right-of-way over those which do not pitch.
Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have right-of-way over lines whose
elevations can be changed.
2.
Offsets, Transitions, and Changes in Direction: Offsets, transitions and changes in

direction of pipes and ducts shall be made as required to maintain proper headroom and
pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the drawings.


15010 - 3
3.
Furnish and install all traps, air vents, sanitary vent, and devices as required to affect
these offsets, transitions, and changes in direction.
C.
Where major conflicts occur, contractor shall rely upon the Architect or Owner to make final
decision regarding priority of right of way. Contractor shall request written clarification from the
Architect or Owner prior to conflict reaching critical stage requiring removal of previously
installed equipment or system components either by himself or by other trades involved.
D.
When directed by the Architect or Owner, submit shop drawings showing interrelationship of
various portions of work and work of other trades. Failure to properly coordinate may result in
removal and relocation at no expense to the Owner.
E.
Locations of existing utilities are based on the best information available. Contractor to hire
independent locating company to verify exact locations of all utilities prior to fabrication and
erection of work to avoid all interferences. Verification shall be by site inspection, excavation, or
whatever means necessary to determine exact location of utilities. Interferences shall be
avoided at no extra cost. If hidden utilities are encountered after Contractors locating
companys investigation, it is at the Contractors cost to rectify hidden utility issues in a codecompliant manner. Contractor must notify Owner when a hidden utility is encountered. Utilities
(including services) shall mean items such as pipes, and associated items such as valves,
coating, and coverings. An item shall not be considered hidden if accessible, e.g. if above lay-in
ceilings, if behind access panels, or if in other similar locations.
1.6
FUTURE SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE ACCESSIBILITY
A.
Install all mechanical equipment so as to allow proper service access to equipment as

recommended by equipment manufacturer. Do not install any portion of the mechanical system
in such a manner as to eliminate or inhibit service access required on equipment installed by
another trade on the project.
B.
Install mechanical work to permit removal of heat exchanger bundles, filters, belt guards,
sheaves, drives, and other parts requiring periodic replacement or maintenance without damage
to or interference with other parts of equipment or structure. All mechanical equipment shall be
replaceable (dismantled) without requiring the removal of permanent building components.
Alert Engineer if such conditions do not exist.
C.
Arrange pipes, ducts, and equipment to permit ready access to valves, cocks, traps, starters,
motors, control components, and to clear the openings of swinging doors and access panels.
D.
If required for better accessibility, furnish access doors for the purpose. All changes shall be
approved by the Architect or Owner prior to making the change.
E.
This Contractor shall provide the General Contractor with the exact locations of access panels
for each concealed valve, control, damper or other device requiring service. Locations of these
panels shall be submitted for approval in sufficient time to be installed in the normal course of
work.
1.7
A.
UTILITY INTERRUPTIONS
Coordinate mechanical utility interruptions with the Owner and the Utility Company. Plan work
so that duration of the interruption is kept to a minimum. This contractor shall be responsible for
informing all adjacent tenants or building owners of a pending utility interruption. Contractor
shall coordinate the utility interruption in a practical manner which is most convenient to all
outside parties so affected.


15010 - 4
1.8
OPENINGS THROUGH BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
A.
This contractor shall cooperate with the General Contractor and all other Contractors whose
work is the same space, and shall advise General Contractor of his requirements. Such spaces
and clearances shall, however, be kept to the minimum size required.
B.
This Contractor shall see that all slots and openings through floors, walls, ceilings and roofs are
properly located and shall do all cutting and patching caused by neglecting to do so.
1.9
1.
Furnish sleeves, inserts, supports, and equipment that are to be installed by others in
sufficient time to be incorporated into construction as the work proceeds.
2.
It is the responsibility of this contractor to locate these items and see that they are
properly installed.
CODES, ORDINANCES, PERMITS AND FEES
A.
Execute work per underwriters, public utility, local, state codes, ordinances, and regulations
applicable. Contact city water and sewer agencies for verification of all requirements, permits,
state fees and inspections prior to submitting bid. Obtain and pay for required permits,
inspections, utility service connections, meters and certificates. Systems development fees and
similar charges are not to be included in the bid, as they will be paid directly to the utility agency
by the Owner upon notification. Notify Architect or Owner of items not meeting said
requirements.
B.
This Contractor shall include in the work, all labor, materials, services, apparatus and drawings,
in order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, whether or not
shown on drawings and /or specified.
C.
All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the National Fire Codes of the
National Fire Protection Association, with the requirements of local utility companies, and with
the requirements of all governmental departments having jurisdiction. In the event of a conflict,
applicable codes and ordinances shall take precedence over this specification or contract
drawings.
D.
All material and equipment for the electrical portion of the mechanical systems shall bear the
approval label of, or shall be listed by the Underwriter's Laboratories, Incorporated, and shall be
installed in compliance with the National Electric Code.
E.
Comply with all applicable codes and standards referenced in Section 1095.
The following approved building codes and standards have been adopted by State Buildings
Programs (SBP) as the minimum requirements to be applied to all state-owned buildings and
physical facilities including capital construction and controlled maintenance construction
projects.
The 2009 edition of the International Building Code (IBC)
(As adopted by the Colorado State Buildings and Real Estate Programs as follows: Chapters 235 and Appendices C and I)
The 2009 edition of the International Mechanical Code (IMC)
(As adopted by the Colorado State Buildings and Real Estate Programs as follows: Chapters 215 and Appendix A)
The 2009 edition of the International Energy Conservation Code (IECC)


15010 - 5
(As adopted by the Colorado State Buildings and Real Estate Programs)
Or
The 2011 edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC)
(National Fire Protection Association Standard 70) (As adopted by the Colorado State Electrical
Board)
The 2009 edition of the International Plumbing Code (IPC)
101.2,102, 105, 107 Chapters 2-13 and Appendices B, D, E, F and G)
The 2009 edition of the International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC)
101,102, 105, 107 Chapters 2-8 and Appendices A, B and C)
The National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA)
(as adopted by the Department of Public Safety/Division of Fire Safety as follows with editions
shown in parentheses: NFPA-1 (2006), 11 (2005), 12 (2005), 12A (2004), 13 (2002), 13D
(2002), 13R (2002), 14 (2003), 15 (2001), 16 (2003), 17 (2002), 17A (2002), 20 (2003), 22
(2003), 24 (2002), 25 (2002), 72 (2002), 409 (2004), 423 (2004), 750 (2003) and 2001 (2004))
The 2007 edition of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
(As adopted by the Department of Labor and Employment/Boiler Inspection Section as follows:
sections I, IV, VIII-Divisions 1 and 2 and 3, X and B31.1)
The 2007 edition of the National Boiler Inspection Code (NBIC)
The 2006 edition of the Controls and Safety Devices for Automatically Fired Boilers CSD1
The 2007 edition of the Boiler and Combustion Systems Hazards Code, NFPA 85
The current edition of the Rules and Regulations Governing the Sanitation of Food
Service Establishments
(As adopted by the Department of Public Health and Environment/Colorado State Board of
Health)
The 2003 edition of ICC/ANSI A117.1, Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities
(As adopted by the Colorado General Assembly as follows: CRS 9-5-101, as amended, for
accessible housing)
Sheet Metal and Conditioning Contractors National Assoc. Standards (SMACNA)
American Water Works Association (A.W.W.A.)
Local Utility Company Requirements
Local Governing Fire Department Requirements
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (N.E.M.A.)
Air Movement and Control Association (A.M.C.A.)

15010 - 6
Note: Additional codes, standards and appendices may be adopted by the state agencies and
institutions in addition to the minimum codes and standards herein adopted by State Buildings
Programs.
The 2009 edition of the IBC became effective on July 1, 2010. Consult the state electrical and
plumbing boards and the state boiler inspector and the Division of Fire Safety for adoption of
current editions and amendments to their codes.
Projects should be designed and plans and specifications should be reviewed based upon
the approved codes at the time of A/E contract execution. If an agency prefers to design to a
different code such as a newer edition of a code that State Buildings Programs has not yet
adopted, the agency must contact SBP for approval and then amend the A/E contract with a
revised Exhibit D, Approved State Building Codes. Please note that the state plumbing and
electrical boards enforce the editions of their codes that are in effect at the time of permitting
not design.
The states code review agents, or the State Buildings Programs approved agency building
official, shall review all documents for compliance with the codes stipulated herein. Note: The
Department of Public Health and Environment, Division of Consumer Protection will review
drawings for food service related projects.
This policy does not prohibit the application of various life safety codes as established by
each agency for specific building types and funding requirements. NFPA 101 and other
standards notwithstanding, approved codes will supersede where their minimum
requirements are the most restrictive in specific situations. If a conflict arises, contact CDOT
Representative for resolution.
It is anticipated that compliance with the federal Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility
Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) and Colorado Revised Statutes Section 9-5101 will be met by compliance with the 2009 International Building Code and ICC/ANSI
A117.1. However, each project may have unique aspects that may require individual
attention to these legislated mandates.
The 2009 edition of the International Building Code (IBC) is to be applied to factory-built
nonresidential structures as established by the Division of Housing within the Department of
Local Affairs.
Appendices
Appendices are provided to supplement the basic provisions of the codes.
Appendices are as follows:
Approved IBC
Mandatory:
IBC Appendix Chapter C - Agricultural Buildings
IBC Appendix Chapter I - Patio Covers
Optional:
Any non-mandatory appendix published in the International Building Code may be utilized at
the discretion of the agency. Use of an appendix shall be indicated in the project code approach.
Amendments
None
Referenced Codes


15010 - 7
While not adopted in entirety, portions of the following codes are referenced in the International Building
Code (IBC), the International Mechanical Code (IMC), the International Energy Conservation Code
(IECC) the International Plumbing Code (IPC), and the International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC). These
following codes would be applied as reference standards.
2009 International Fire Code (IFC)

2009 International Existing Building Code (IEBC)
Referenced Standards
The IBC, IMC, IECC, IPC and IFGC standards shall be utilized to provide specific, or
prescriptive, requirements on how to achieve the requirements established in the code.
These standards may be unique to the code or may be derived from other established
industry standards. Recognized standards may also be used to show compliance with the
standard of duty established by the code.
1.10
SUBMITTALS
A.
Within thirty days after award of the Contract submit to Architect or Owner complete catalog
data and/or shop drawings for each item of material and for every manufactured item of
equipment to be used in the work. Such data shall include specific performance data, material
description, rating, capacity, dimensions, and type for each item of material, each manufactured
item, and all component parts utilized in final operating mechanical system. Applicable data
shall be underlined and each applicable item identified in each catalog by the same
identification acronyms used on the Drawings.
B.
This Contractor shall submit to the Architect or Owner the number of copies required by the
Division 1 General Requirements and Section 1300.
C.
Each item submitted shall bear the Contractor's stamp, be dated and signed certifying that they
have reviewed and approved the submittal.
D.
The review comments of the Architect or Owner and/or code reviewer shall not relieve the
Contractor from responsibility for deviations or errors from the Design/Build Drawings or
Specifications.
1.11
REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION
A.
Contractors desiring to use alternate equipment or materials and manufacturers or suppliers

desiring to furnish alternate materials or equipment in lieu of those specified, shall submit
requests for approval to the Architect or Owner not less than the due date of questions for the
Second Addenda, which date will be delineated in Addendum # 1, so that answers can be
included in Addendum #2.
B.
Requests for approval shall be made in writing and shall include complete data sheets, and
catalogue cuts and shall identify all maintenance procedures deviating from that of the specified
equipment.
C.
Contractor shall be responsible for proper installation, complete in all respects, and operation of
all equipment or materials substituted as a result of approval of requests to substitute, including
all required modifications in work to be accomplished by the other trades involved.
D.
This contractor shall be responsible for the proper location, capacity, and quantity of all roughins and connections to substituted equipment by members of other trades involved.


15010 - 8
1.12
ELECTRIC WIRING AND SAFETY DEVICE WORK AND MATERIAL RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Furnish equipment requiring electrical connection to operate properly, deliver full capacity at
electrical service available.
B.
All control wiring to be in accord with manufacturer's recommendations, and all wiring shall be
color coded to facilitate checking.
C.
Unless otherwise indicated, all mechanical equipment motors and controls shall be furnished,
set in place, and wired in accordance with the following schedule: (MD = Mechanical Division;
ED = Electrical Division)
FURNISHED
UNDER
SET IN
PLACE OR
MOUNTED
UNDER
POWER
WIRED &
CONNECTED
UNDER
Equipment
Motors
MD
MD
ED
--
Magnetic Motor
Starters:
a. Automatically
controlled with or
without HOA switches
MD
MD
ED
MD
b. Manually
controlled
MD
MD
ED
MD
c. Manually
controlled and
furnished as part
of factory wired
equipment
MD
MD
ED
MD
MD
ED
ED
ED
ITEM
Line voltage thermostats, etc. not connected to

control panel systems

CONTROL
WIRED &
CONNECTED
UNDER

15010 - 9
FURNISHED
UNDER
SET IN
PLACE OR
MOUNTED
UNDER
POWER
WIRED &
CONNECTED
UNDER
CONTROL
WIRED &
CONNECTED
UNDER
Temperature control
panels and time switches
mounted on temperature
control panels
MD
MD
ED
MD
Motorized damper
motors
MD
MD
ED
MD
Control circuit feeders
ED
ED
ED
ED
Low voltage controls,

thermostats, etc.
MD
MD
ED
ED
Water
heater controls,
panels, internally
wired
MD
MD
ED
MD
Fused and unfused

disconnect switches,
thermal overload
switches, manual
operating switches
ED
ED
ED
--
Multi-speed
switches
MD
ED
ED
ED
Contactors
ED
ED
ED
ED
Control relays,
transformers
MD
ED
ED
ED
ITEM
D.
Make Connections to controls directly attached to ducts, piping and mechanical equipment with
flexible connections.
E.
All temperature control conduit and wiring will be furnished and installed under electrical
contract. All motorized damper wiring will be furnished and installed under temperature control
subcontract. In the event that temperature control is not under separate contract, Mechanical
Contractor shall assume all temperature control subcontract responsibilities.
F.
Division 16 shall furnish and install all conduit required for power wiring to all mechanical
equipment.
G.
Mechanical Contractor shall provide Electrical Contractor with a complete summary list of all
mechanical equipment requiring electric power within 30 days after award of contract. This list
shall summarize equipment power loads, quantities, and locations of equipment and connection
points.


15010 - 10
1.13
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Preparation: Base final installation of materials and equipment on actual dimensions and
conditions at the project site. Field measure for materials or equipment requiring exact fit.
B.
Workmanship: Perform work in a workmanlike manner. The good appearance of the finished
work shall be important.
C.
Supervision: Be responsible for and coordinate the work of all sub-contractors working under
Division 15.
D.
Installation Procedures: Confer and cooperate with other trades and coordinate the work in
proper relation with theirs. Coordinate wall/ceiling cavity space carefully with other trades, prior
to commencing installation of mechanical equipment.
E.
Properly locate anchors, chases, recesses and openings required for the proper installation of
the work. Arrange with the proper Contractors for the building of anchors, etc. and for the
leaving of the required chases, recesses and openings.
F.
Install equipment and materials in accordance with manufacturers; recommendations unless

specifically indicated otherwise, or where local codes or regulations take precedence.
G.
Protection:
1.
Close ends of pipe and ductwork during construction to prevent entry of foreign material.
Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage before, during and
after installation (prior to owner acceptance of jobs). Protect fixtures and equipment
against damage during mechanical work. Protect filters and coils from construction
debris at air handling equipment, including terminal units by wrapping equipment with
plastic.
2.
Pay for damage, injury or loss caused by negligence or errors of Division 15 Contractors.
Post effective danger signs warning against hazards created by work.
1.14
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
General: Comply with Division 1 General and Special Requirements.
B.
Protection: Make provisions for coordination with Owner and other Contractors for safe storage
of materials and equipment.
1.
Store materials and equipment off the ground and under cover, protected from damage.
C.
Large Items: Schedule delivery of large equipment requiring special openings, as required for
installation without delaying the work of other project trades.
D.
Acceptance: Check and sign for materials to be furnished by Division 15 and other trades for
installation under Division 15 upon delivery. Assume responsibility for the storage and
safekeeping of such materials from time of delivery until final acceptance.
1.15
SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING AND HOISTING


15010 - 11
A.
This Contractor shall furnish all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection
and delivery into the premises of all equipment and apparatus furnished. Remove same from
premises when no longer required.
1.16
A.
QUIET OPERATION AND VIBRATION

All work shall operate under all conditions of load without sound or vibration which is
objectionable in opinion of the Owner. In case of moving machinery, sound, or vibration
noticeable outside of room in which it is installed, or annoyingly noticeable inside its own room,
will be considered objectionable by the Architect and Owner, and shall be corrected in an
approved manner by this Contractor at his expense. Vibration control shall be by means of
approved vibration isolation devices as specified in Section 15160 - Vibration Isolation.
1.17
CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces of piping, hangers, ducts, and other exposed items of grease, dirt or
other foreign material. At the completion of the work, remove rubbish and debris resulting from
the construction operations and leave equipment and building spaces clean and ready for use.
B.
Provide and install new filters to all equipment utilizing throwaway filters prior to and at
completion of test and balancing of all air handling equipment. Clean all permanent filters.
1.18
TESTS AND SCHEDULE OF TESTING
A.
Demonstrate the proper operation of equipment installed under this project
B.
Equipment shall not be tested, or operated for any purpose until fully lubricated in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions and until connections to fully operative systems have been
accomplished.
C.
A schedule of testing shall be drawn up by the Mechanical Contractor in such a manner that it
will show areas tested, test pressure, length of test, date, time, ambient or surrounding air
temperature at beginning and conclusion of test, and signature of testing personnel.
D.
All testing must be performed in the presence of the General Contractor or authorized agent,
and his signature for verification of the test must appear on the schedule.
1.19
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
One set of contract drawings shall be kept current by the Contractor during construction to
indicate all deviations from the plans in the actual installation.
B.
Job site Documents: Maintain at the job site, one record copy of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Drawings
Specifications
Addenda
Reviewed Shop Drawings
Field Test Records


15010 - 12
C.
Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Maintain documents in clean legible
condition, apart from documents used for construction.
D.
Record Information: Label each document "Record Document". Mark information with
contrasting color using ink. Keep each record current. Do not permanently conceal any work
until required information is recorded.
1.
Record following information on Design/Build Drawings:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities

Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction
Field changes of dimension and detail
Changes by change order or field order
Details not on original contract drawings
Record following information on Specifications
Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product and item of
equipment actually installed
Changes by change order or field order
Other matters not originally specified
E.
Shop Drawings: Maintain Shop Drawings as record documents recording changes made after
review as specified for drawings above.
F.
Spec Box: As early as possible during construction process, Mechanical Contractor shall
provide and install a sheet metal spec box in a conspicuous mounting location within the
mechanical room where it will not interfere with ongoing construction or finished mechanical
room layout.
G.
1.20
A.
1.
As mechanical construction progresses, each mechanical equipment factory provided

owners manual and warranties shall be removed from original packing carton and
immediately placed in the spec box for future reference by Mechanical Contractor in
preparing operation and maintenance manual.
2.
At completion of construction, a copy of the operation and maintenance manual shall be

located here for future use.
3.
Spec box shall be constructed of sheet metal with hinged top and some form of latching
device. Label front of spec box "Operating and Maintenance Data". Spec box shall be
minimum 16 inch x 12 inch x 4 inch overall, secured to mechanical room wall in
permanent manner.
Submittal: At completion of project, deliver Project Record Documents to General Contractor

for delivery to Project Architect or Owner.

Submission: Initially prepare two copies of Operations and Maintenance manual. Submit one
copy to Engineer, Architect or Owner for review and approval a minimum of 30 days prior to
operation of mechanical equipment. Submit second copy of preliminary Operation and
Maintenance manual to the Test, Adjust and Balancing Contractor for use in balancing all
mechanical systems. Upon receipt of Operation and Maintenance manual with Architects and
Mechanical Engineers review comments, prepare for final submissions four (4) typed and
bound copies of the Operations and Maintenance manual incorporating all requested changes
and/or additional required information. Manual shall be 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch in size and shall be
bound in a stiff back three ring binders.


15010 - 13
B.
Required contents: Manuals shall have index tab dividers for each major equipment section to
facilitate locating information on specific piece of equipment. Identify date within each section
with drawing code numbers as they appear on Drawings and Specifications. Include as a
minimum the following data:
1.
Table of Contents.
2.
Alphabetical list of system components, with the name, address and 24 hour telephone
number of the company responsible for servicing and each item during the first year of
operation.
3.
Operating Instructions for Complete System Including:

a.
b.
4.
Maintenance Instructions Including:

a.
b.
c.
5.
1.21
A.
Valve tags and other identified equipment lists.

Proper lubricants and lubricating instructions for each piece of equipment.
Necessary cleaning, replacement and/or adjustment schedule.
Product data on each piece of equipment including:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
C.
Emergency procedures for fire or failure of major equipment.

Normal starting, operating and shutdown and long term shutdown procedures.
Installation instructions
Drawings and Specifications
Performance curves and rating data
Parts
Complete wiring and temperature control diagrams (as-built)
Marked or changed prints locating concealed parts and variations from the original
system design
6.
Schematic flow diagrams indicating component parts including valves of the system.
Number valves in accordance with the valve schedule as required above.
7.
Completed Test, Adjust, and Balance Report.
8.
Copy of original mechanical specification complete with all applicable addendums.
Completed and corrected Operation and Maintenance manuals shall be delivered to General
Contractor prior to final payment to Mechanical Contractor.
WARRANTIES
In accordance with Division 1, provide a written warranty to the Owner covering the entire
mechanical work to be free from defective materials, equipment and workmanship for a period
of one year after Date of Acceptance. During this period provide labor and materials as
required to repair or replace defects at no additional cost to the Owner. Provide certificates for
such items of equipment which have warranties in excess of one year. Submit to the General
Contractor.
All compressorized equipment, including but not limited to condensing units shall be provided
with minimum 5 year compressor warranty.


15010 - 14
1.22
CERTIFICATES AND KEYS
A.
Certificates: Upon completion of the work, deliver to the General Contractor one copy of
Certificate of Final Inspection.
B.
Keys: Upon completion of work, submit two (2) keys for mechanical equipment, panels, etc. to
the General Contractor. Clearly label key to equipment type.
1.23
SITE OBSERVATIONS
A.
From time to time, the Architect, CDOT Project Manager and/or Engineer shall make
observations of the construction progress and general quality of the construction.
B.
Engineer shall not be responsible for continuous or excessively detailed site observations to
verify the quality or quantity of construction work accomplished.
C.
Engineer shall not be responsible for Contractors failure to carry out construction work in
accordance with the Contract documents, and/or failure to maintain sound and safe construction
procedures or practices.
D.
Engineer shall provide Architect or Owner with a typed list of site observation comments or
"Punch List". It shall remain the responsibility of the General Contractor to see that all items
incorporated within the typewritten list of comments are accomplished by the Mechanical
Contractor.
E.
The failure of the Engineer to identify all construction procedures conflicting with the intent of
the Mechanical Construction Documents shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to
provide a complete, operable and efficiently installed mechanical system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A.
Not used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
Not used
END OF SECTION


15010 - 15


15010 - 16
SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Section
B.
Work Included in This Section:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
1.2
Pipe Hangers and supports

Sleeves
Dielectric Fittings
Plates and Escutcheons
Flashings and Seals
Expansion Compensation
Motors and Starters
Belt Drives
Belt Guards
Valves
Dielectric Connections
Copper Water Piping Joints
Welding
Access Doors
Freeze Protection Systems for Piping and Equipment
Excavating for Mechanical Work
Backfilling
Cutting and Patching
Heating System Used for Temporary Heat During Construction
Concrete Bases
Drip Pans
Piping Installation
Tests
Identification Materials for Piping and Equipment
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welder Qualifications: Welders shall be certified by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau
(NCPWB) for the type of work being performed. Operators' certificates shall be on file at the
site and shall be available to the Structural Engineer for examination.
B.
Superintendent: This Contractor shall furnish the services of an experienced superintendent.

Said superintendent shall have successfully completed a minimum of four (4) projects of similar
size and scope previous to the commencement of all work on this project. He shall be in
constant charge of all skilled workman, fitters, metal workers, welders, helpers, and labor
required to unload, transfer, erect, connect-up, adjust, start, operate, and test for each system
specified within this mechanical specification.


15050 - 1
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.4
American Water Works Association (AWWA)

ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping
National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau (NCPWB)
National Electric Code (NEC)
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA)
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit for the following in accordance with Section 15010.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Operating Instructions and Maintenance Data: Submit for the following in accordance with
section 15010.
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Valves
Access Panels
Pipe Hangers and Supports
Motors
Starters
Valves
Motors
Starters
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A.
Materials and apparatus required for the work is to be new, of first class quality, and is to be
furnished, delivered, erected, connected, and to be so selected and arranged so as to fit
properly into the building spaces. Where no specific kind or quality of material is given, a first
class standard article shall be furnished, as approved by Architect or Owner.
B.
All materials shall bear the Manufacturer's name and trade name. Equipment and materials of
the same general type shall, as much as is feasible, be of the same make throughout the work
to provide uniform appearance, operation, and maintenance.
C.
Unless otherwise specifically indicated, equipment and materials shall be installed in

accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes the performance of
such operational tests as recommended by the manufacturer.


15050 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS

A.
General:
1.
All work installed under Division 15 shall be supported plumb, rigid, and true to line.
2.
Adjustable pipe hangers shall be used on suspended pipe. Hangers shall be vertically
adjustable minimum (+/-) 1-1/2 inches after piping is erected.
3.
Chain or perforated strap hangers will not be permitted.
4.
Water Supply piping, where practical, shall be placed at the same elevation and
suspended with trapeze type hangers.
5.
Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping or tubing.
6.
Isolate hangers of dissimilar metals from coming in contact with bare piping with plastic
sheet lead or other suitable dielectric material securely held between hanger and pipe.
7.
Hangers and supports shall impede disengagement by movement of supported pipe.
B.
Each Contractor shall be responsible for all drilling required for the installation of his hangers.
C.
Concrete Inserts: Galvanized malleable iron shell and expander plug for threaded connection
with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods and lugs for attaching to forms or machine
bolt expansion anchors. Size inserts to match size of threaded hanger rods.
D.
Hanger Rods: Continuous threaded steel, sizes as specified in table below.

1.
Hangers:
a.
Hot Pipes:
1)
b.
inch through 1-1/2 inch: Adjustable Wrought Steel Ring
Cold Pipes:
1)
inch through 1-1/2 inch: Adjustable Wrought Steel Ring


15050 - 3
E.
Hanger Sizes and Spacing: Provide hangers with maximum spacing and hanger rods with
minimum sizes as follows:
Maximum
Minimum Hanger
Pipe Type
Pipe Size
Spacing
Rod Size
Steel Pipe
1/2" and under
6-'0"
3/8"
3/4" through 1-1/4"
8-'0"
3/8"
1-1/2" and 2"
10'-0"
3/8"
Copper Pipe
1-1/2" and smaller
6'-0"
3/8"
2" and larger
8'-0"
3/8"
Plastic Pipe
1-1/2" and under
4'-0"
3/8"
2" and above
4'-0"
1/2"
Cast Iron
2"
See Below
3/8"
3"
See Below
1/2"
4" and 5"
See Below
5/8"
F.
Cast Iron Soil Pipe: Support within 1'-0" of every hub, maximum 5'0" intervals.
G.
Buried Piping: Shall be laid on firm bed free of rocks and debris for its entire length.
H.
No Hub Cast Iron: Support within 1'-0" of each side of couplings for piping lengths 4'0" or
longer; one hanger at each coupling for piping lengths less than 4'-0"; one hanger at each
fitting.
I.
Insulated Piping Supports: All insulated piping shall have insulation continuous through
hangers, and shall be protected at points of support with thermal hanger shields. Thermal
hanger shields shall consist of a 360o insert of high density, waterproofed calcium silicate,
encased in a 360o sheet metal shield. Insert shall be same size of adjoining pipe insulation.
See table below for shield length and minimum sheet metal gauge. Calcium silicate insert shall
extend minimum one inch beyond sheet metal shield. If pipe hanger spacing exceeds 10'-0",
utilize double layer of sheet metal, gauge as shown below, on all bearing surfaces.
Pipe Size
Shield Length
Minimum Gauge
1/2" through 1-1/2"
2" through 6"
J.
26
20
Vertical Piping Support:

1.
Provide friction riser clamps, supported and braced.
2.
Isolate supports of dissimilar metals from coming in contact with bare piping with plastic
sheet or other suitable dielectric material securely held between support and pipe.
3.
Provide vertical piping support with maximum spacing as follows:
Pipe Type
Pipe Size
Steel Pipe
1-1/2" and under

2" and over
1-1/2" and under
2" and over
Copper Pipe
K.
4"
6"
Maximum Spacing
8'-0"
10'-0"
6'-0"
8'-0"
Cast Iron Soil Pipe: Minimum one support per story height and at its base. Where practical,
support vertical riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.


15050 - 4
L.
Plastic Pipe: Minimum one (1) support per story height and at its base. Provide intermediate
pipe guides at mid-story. Compensate for expansion at minimum 30 foot intervals.
M.
Floor Support For Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches and All Cold Water Pipe Sizes: Cast iron adjustable
pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange and concrete pier or steel support. ANSI/MSS-SP-69
Type 38.
N.
Acceptable Manufacturers: B-Line, Elcen, Fee and Mason, Grinnell, Michigan Inc., PHD
Manufacturing, Superstrut, Unistrut.
2.2
SLEEVES
A.
Sleeves shall be constructed of 24 gauge galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints for all
sleeves set in concrete floor slabs terminating flush with the floor. All other sleeves shall be
constructed of galvanized steel pipe unless otherwise indicted on the drawings. "Crete Sleeve"
plastic type sleeves are acceptable for concrete construction, as manufactured by Sperzel
Division, Shamrock Industries.
B.
Provide all cutting, patching of holes, opening, notches. Obtain written approval before
notching, boring, chipping, burning, drilling, and welding to structural members.
C.
This subcontractor shall provide and locate all sleeves and inserts required before the floors
and walls are built, or shall be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes
where sleeves and inserts were not installed, or where incorrectly located.
D.
Sleeves shall be provided for all mechanical piping passing through concrete floor slabs and
concrete, masonry, tile, and gypsum wall construction.
E.
Terminate sleeves flush with walls, partitions and ceiling.
F.
In areas where pipes are concealed, as in chases, terminate sleeves flush with floor.
G.
In all areas where pipes are exposed, extend sleeves inch above finished floor, except in
rooms having floor drains, where sleeves shall be extended 1 inch above floor.
H.
Fasten sleeves securely in floors, walls, so that they will not become displaced when concrete is
poured or when other construction is built around them. Take precautions to prevent concrete,
plaster, or other materials getting forced into the space between pipe and sleeve during
construction.
I.
Sleeve Sizing:
1.
Where pipe motion due to expansion and contraction will occur, make sleeves of
sufficient diameter to permit free movement of pipe.
2.
Oversized sleeves shall be provided where pipes penetrate exterior walls below grade to
prevent breakage.
3.
Insulated Piping Requiring Vapor Barrier: Insulated piping which shall normally or
periodically be subject to operating temperatures less than the surrounding dew point
shall have sleeves which are large enough to pass both piping and the continuous
insulation, and shall allow free movement of pipe and insulation.


15050 - 5
4.
2.3
Insulated Piping Not Requiring Vapor Barrier: Insulated piping which shall normally be
subject to operating temperatures above the surrounding dew point shall have sleeves
large enough to pass the piping only, allowing for free movement of pipe. Insulation shall
be made to butt up on both sides of sleeve.
PLATES AND ESCUTCHEONS

A.
Provide tight fitting cover plates on cleanout openings in walls, ceilings, and floors, chrome
plated in finished areas, galvanized cast iron in unfinished areas and mechanical rooms.
B.
Provide duct collars for ducts passing through walls, floors and ceilings, chrome plated in
finished areas, galvanized sheet metal in unfinished areas and mechanical rooms.
C.
Provide one piece type escutcheons on pipes passing through walls, floors and ceilings.
Escutcheons shall be chrome plated brass or chrome plated steel, one piece type with set
screw for fastening to pipes or sleeve in finished areas. Escutcheons shall be galvanized cast
iron in unfinished areas and mechanical rooms.
1.
Size: Use escutcheons that fit tight around pipes and insulation, cover openings around
pipes, and cover the entire pipe sleeve projection. Where pipe sleeve projects from wall
further than permissible with one piece type escutcheon, provide telescoping two piece
type escutcheon of size sufficient to cover wall opening, pipe and pipe sleeve.
2.
Minimum thickness:
a.
Floor escutcheons: 0.094" (3/32")
b.
Wall and ceiling escutcheons:

Pipe Size
Thickness
2-1/2" and under

3" and over
2.4
0.025"
0.035"
FLASHING AND SEALS

A.
Steel Flashing: 26 gauge galvanized sheet metal, to match roof contour.
B.
Flexible Neoprene Pipe Flashing: One piece, cone shaped, seamless, molded, 0.060 inch thick
uncured neoprene, water absorption maximum one percent (1%) by weight, tensile strength
minimum 1800 psi, elasticity minimum three hundred percent (300%) with full recovery without
set, match color of surrounding roofing.
C.
Sleeve Seal in Exterior Wall Below Grade: Pack annular space between pipe or conduit and
sleeve with oakum and lead and make completely watertight.
D.
Modular Mechanical Type Waterproof Seal: Interlocking synthetic rubber links, sized to fill
annulus between pipe or conduit and wall opening. Rubber links expanded to form watertight
seal with zinc coated bolts.
E.
Fire Barrier Sealant: Firestop type putty such as "Flameseal" manufactured by Nelson Co. shall
be packed within annular space surrounding pipe or duct by Mechanical Contractors on both
sides of wall or floor. UL classified as "Wall Opening Protective Device," non-toxic, non-


15050 - 6
allergenic before and after cure. Material must meet requirements of NEC (NFPA), Article 30021. Material must seal watertight, be of sufficient viscosity to withstand direct fire hose impact,
less than flame spread 25, fuel contributed 25, and ASTM E 814 shall not be exceeded. Other
acceptable manufacturers are 3M (Fire Barrier), IPC (Flamesafe) and Dow Corning (System
2000). Fire barrier sealant shall meet requirements of UL Standard 1479.
2.5
EXPANSION COMPENSATION
A.
Flexible Connections:
1.
2.6
inch through 1-1/2 inch: Wire and fabric reinforced flexible duty hose rated for 150 psi
at 240oF. Fittings shall be brass screw type attached by expansion or swedging method.
Overall lengths shall not exceed the following: 9" for 3/4"; 10" for 1"; 13" for 1-1/2"; 15"
for 1-1/2; hoses shall be Mason Industries Type RMM.
VALVES
A.
General:
1.
Provide valves where necessary for isolation of equipment and for proper operation and
maintenance. Locate valves for easy access and operation. When installed in concealed
location, provide access panels to insure required maintenance accessibility to all valves.
2.
All valves of a given type shall be of one manufacturer and shall be listed with the
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry.
3.
Ball valves, butterfly valves or eccentric valves shall be used in lieu of gate valves
wherever the pressure and temperature ratings are satisfactory for the intended service.
B.
Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size.
C.
Operators: Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter-turn.
Provide lever handle for quarter-turn valves, 6" and smaller, other than plug valves. Provide
one wrench for every 10 plug valves. Provide chain-operated sheaves and chains for overhead
valves as indicated.
1.
GLOBE VALVES
a.
Comply with the following standards:

1)
2)
3)
b.
Cast-Iron Valves: MSS SP-85

Bronze Valves:
MSS SP-80
Steel Valves:
ANSI B16.34
Acceptable Manufacturers
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Crane Co.
Hammond Valve Corp.
Jenkins Bros.
Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc.
Nibco, Inc.
Powell (Wm.) Co.
Stockham Valves


15050 - 7
8)
2.
DRAIN VALVES
a.

1)
b.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
2)
3)
Powell (The Wm.) Co.

Rockwell International; Flow Control Div. (Nordstrom)
Walworth Co.
BALL VALVES
a.

1)
2)
3)
b.
Cast-Iron Valves: MSS SP-72

Steel Valves:
ANSI B16.34
Bronze Valves:
MSS SP-80
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
D.
Conbraco
Hammond Valve Corp.
Nibco Inc.
Prier Brass Mfg. Co.
Red-White
PLUG VALVES
a.
4.
Water Heater Drain Valves: ASSE 1005
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
3.
Walworth Co.
Apollo
Hammond Valve Corp.
Jamesbury Corp.
Jenkins Bros.
Jomar International
Nibco, Inc.
Powell (The Wm.) Co.
Stockham Valves and Fittings, Inc.
Walworth Co.
VALVE FEATURES
1.
General: Provide valves with features indicated and, where not otherwise indicated,
provide proper valve features as determined by Installer for installation requirements.
Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping, and ASME B31.1 for power piping.
2.
Bypass: Comply with MSS SP-45, and except as otherwise indicated, provide
manufacturer's standard bypass piping and valving.
3.
Drain: Comply with MSS SP-45, and provide threaded pipe plugs.


15050 - 8
4.
Flanged: Valve flanges complying with ANSI B16.1 (cast iron), ANSI B16.5. (steel), or
ANSI B16.24 (bronze).
5.
Threaded: Valve ends complying with ANSI B2.1.
6.
Butt-Welding: Valve ends complying with ANSI B16.25.
7.
Socket-Welding: Valve ends complying with ANSI B16.11.
8.
Solder-Joint: Valve ends complying with ANSI B16.18.
9.
Flangeless: Valve bodies manufactured to fit between flanges complying with ANSI
B16.1 (cast iron, ANSI B16.5 (steel), or ANSI B16.24 (bronze).
10.
Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise indicated, select and
install valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:
11.
Tube Size 2 inch and Smaller: Soldered-joint valves.
12.
Pipe Size 2 inch and Smaller: One of the following, at Installer's option:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
E.
Threaded valves
Grooved-end valves
Butt-welding valves
Socket-welding valves
Flanged valves
Flangeless valves
Single flanged valves
13.
Valve Stem: Select and install valves with outside screw and yoke stems, except provide
inside screw non-rising stem valves where headroom prevents full opening of OS&Y
valves.
14.
Non-Metallic Disc: Limit selection and installation of valves with non-metallic discs to
locations indicated and where foreign material in piping system can be expected to
prevent tight shutoff of metal seated valves.
15.
Renewable Seats: Select and install valves with renewable seats, except where
otherwise indicated.
16.
Fluid Control: Except as otherwise indicated, install, ball valves to comply with ANSI
B31.9. Where throttling is indicated or recognized as principal reason for valve, install
globe or butterfly valves.
Provide the following valves for various valve types listed in Division 15 piping sections.
1.
GLOBE VALVES
a.
2 inch and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, screw-in bonnet, integral seat,
renewable disc.
Nibco:
Threaded
Ends
T-235
Solder
Ends
S-235
15050 - 9
b.
2 inch and Smaller: Class 125, bronze angle body, screw-in bonnet, integral seat,
renewable disc.
Threaded
Ends
T-311
Nibco:
2.
DRAIN VALVES
a.
Class 125: Bronze body, screw-in bonnet, rising stem, composition disc, inch
hose outlet.
Threaded
Ends
73
Nibco:
3.
Solder
Ends
72
PLUG VALVES
a.
2 inch and Smaller: 150 psi, bronze body, straightaway pattern, square head,
threaded ends.
1)
b.
Homestead: 611
2-1/2 inch and Larger: 175 psi, lubricated plug type, semi-steel body, single gland,
wrench operated, flanged ends.
1)
2)
3)
4.
Solder
Ends
S-311
Nordstrom: 143
Powell: 2201
Walworth: 1718F
BALL VALVES
a.
1 inch and Smaller: 150 psi, bronze body, full port, bronze trim, 2-piece
construction, TFE seats and seals.
Nibco:
b.
Solder
Ends
S-585
1-1/4 inch to 2 inches: 150 psi, bronze body, full port, 3-piece body, TFE seats
with bronze trim.
Apollo:
Nibco:
Powell:
Watts:
c.
Threaded
Ends
T-585
Threaded
Ends
82-100
T-595-Y
4201-R
B-6800
Solder
Ends
82-200
S-959-Y
4201-R
B-6801
Hose End: inch Apollo 78-100 or 78-200 (or equal). bronze body, chrome plated
2 piece construction, TFE seats & seals, hose outlet with dust cap.


15050 - 10
2.7
ACCESS TO MECHANICAL WORK

A.
Access Units Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where fire-resistance rating is indicated for construction
penetrated by access units, provide UL listed-and-labeled units. except for units which are
smaller than minimum size requiring ratings as recognized by governing authority.
B.
Provide access doors required for access to mechanical equipment, whether shown or not.
C.
Access Doors
1.
General: Where floors, walls and ceilings must be penetrated for access to mechanical
work, furnish types of access doors indicated, including floor doors if any. Furnish
adequate size for intended and necessary access. Furnish manufacturer's complete
units, of type recommended for application in indicated substrate construction, in each
case, complete with anchorages and hardware. Furnish doors to General Contractor for
installation.
2.
Access Door Construction: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate wall/ceiling door

units of welded steel construction with welds ground smooth; 16-gauge frames and 14gauge flush panel doors; 175 deg. swing with concealed spring hinges; flush screwdriver-operated cam locks; factory-applied rust-inhibitive prime-coat paint finish.
3.
Locks: Where indicated, provide 5-pin or 5-disc type cylinder locks, individually keyed
unless otherwise indicated, 2 keys.
a.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
D.
Karp Associates, Inc.

Meadowcraft, Inc.
Milcor Div; Inryco Inc.
Nystrom, Inc.
Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.
4.
Gasketed Construction: Where indicated as "Sealed", furnish manufacturer's gasketedtype door, with built-in protected cushion-type neoprene gasket, intended for reduction of
noise, air and moisture penetration.
5.
Drained Construction: Where indicated as "Drained", or where drainage pipe connection

is shown, furnish manufacturer's gutter-type or watertight-type unit, complete with
drainage slots or ports at floor surface, and with encompassing gutter with one, or more
drain pipe connections.
6.
Double-Leaf Construction: Where opening width exceeds 3 foot 0 inches, furnish

manufacturer's standard double-leaf unit construction.
7.
Removable Access Plates
Where valves, control devices, cleanouts and similar elements of mechanical work are located
within or behind wall, ceiling or floor construction or finishes, or below grade, and are not
(cannot be) provided with integral removable access plates as specified in other Division 15
sections, provide removable access plates of types and sizes needed for access requirements,
as indicated. Provide manufacturer's complete units with anchorages, fasteners and standard
factory-applied finishes.


15050 - 11
2.8
1.
Wall/Ceiling Unit Construction: Except as other wise indicated, and where adaptable to
substrate, provide manufacturer's standard frameless round formed stainless steel or
chrome-plated brass low profile plate cover, with single exposed flush screw anchor, with
bright polished finish.
2.
Painted Finish: Where substrate is indicated for painted finish, provide steel units with
prime-coat paint finish.
CONCRETE BASES
A.
Special inertia bases as detailed on the Mechanical Drawings shall be provided by Division 15
Mechanical with concrete work complying with provisions of Division 03 Concrete.
B.
Provide minimum 4 inch concrete pad (base) under base mounted pumps, boilers, water
heaters, air handling units, floor mounted expansion tanks, glycol tanks and other floor mounted
equipment.
C.
Establish the size and location of the various concrete bases required.
1.
D.
2.9
Water heaters, air compressors and other floor mounted equipment shall have a concrete
base at least 4 inches high which shall project 4 inches on all sides beyond the boiler.
Furnish necessary anchor bolts and templates to Division 03 for locating and casting into
concrete bases.
DRIP PANS
A.
2.10
A.
Provide aluminum sheet metal drip pans with inch drain lines below all piping crossing over
all electric equipment or control devices. inch drain lines should be run to indirect waste at
nearest floor drain or plumbing receptacle.
IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

Materials for identification shall be as follows:
1.
Metal Tags: Round brass discs, minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with edges ground
smooth. Each tag shall be punched and provided with brass chains for installation.
2.
Engraved Nameplates: Fabricate from plastic sheet stock of sufficient thickness to allow
engraved lettering in contrasting color.
3.
Painted Stencils: Of size and color per ANSI A13.1 using clean cut letters and oil base
paint. Paint materials shall be standard exterior type stenciling enamel, brush on or
spray can form.
4.
Aluminum Tape: inch wide aluminum tape, such as DYMO, banded in place around
pipe. Imprint only one side of tab.
a.


15050 - 12
1)
2)
3)
4)
Allen Systems, Inc.

Brady (W.H.) Co., Signmark Div.
Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.
Seton Name Plate Corp.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF VALVES
A.
3.2
General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following requirements:

1.
Install valves where required for proper operating of piping and equipment, including
valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as
to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary.
2.
Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case
with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable. Install valve
drains with hose-end adapter for each valve that must be installed with stem below
horizontal plane.
3.
Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and
bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
4.
Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, leadfree-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Insulation: Where insulation is indicated, install extended-stem valves, arranged in proper

manner to receive insulation.
C.
Mechanical Actuators: Install mechanical actuators with chain operators where indicated.
Extend chains to about 5' above floor and hook to clips to clear aisle passage.
D.
Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
E.
Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
F.
Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
G.
Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
H.
Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is
suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
I.
Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
FREEZE PROTECTION


15050 - 13
A.
3.3
Do not run lines in outside walls, ventilated attic or ceiling spaces, or locations where freezing
may occur. Piping next to outside walls shall be in furred spaces with insulation between the
piping and the outside wall. In attic or ceiling spaces, piping shall be on the warm side of
insulation batts. Insulation of piping shall not be considered freeze protection.
DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONS
A.
3.4
Wherever steel and copper pipe are joined in the plumbing or fire protection systems, provide
dielectric insulating type unions or flanges as manufactured by Epco Sales Co., or approved
equal.
COPPER WATER PIPING JOINTS

A.
3.5
Cut pipe square, remove burrs, and ream. Clean with medium grit emery cloth, flux pipe, fitting
with nokorode paste. Use only 95% tin - 5% silver solder.
WELDING
A.
Use only ASME certified experienced welders with current certificate. Joints between sections
of pipe, and between pipe and fittings, shall be fusion welded. Strength of finished welded joints
equal to strength of pipe. Width of finished weld shall be at least 2-1/2 times the thickness of
the part jointed. Thickness of weld at least 25% greater than the thickness of pipe or fittings.
All finished welded joints shall present a neat and workmanlike appearance.
B.
Make no direct welded connections to valves, strainers, apparatus, or related equipment. Make
connections to flanged valves or flanged connections with welded flanges.
C.
Radii of weld ells shall be 1-1/2 times nominal diameter of fittings. Fittings used for all branch
connections, whether full size or reducing shall be with interior surfaces smoothly contoured.
Wall thickness of welding fittings shall be equal to adjacent piping.
D.
Joints between sections of pipe and between pipe fittings, to be fusion welded. Strength of
finished weld joints equal to strength of pipe. Width of finished weld at least 2-1/2 times the
thickness of the part jointed. Thickness of weld at least 25 percent greater than the thickness of
pipe or fittings. Finished welded joints to present neat and workmanlike appearance.
3.6
EXCAVATING FOR MECHANICAL WORK

A.
General: Do not excavate for mechanical work until work is ready to proceed without delay, so
that total time lapse from excavation to completion of backfilling will be minimum.
B.
Piping run parallel to foundation wall shall be run above 45o plane downward from lowest
exterior point of building foundation.
C.
Excavation for Trenches: Dig trenches to uniform width required for particular item to be
installed, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. Provide 6 inches to 9 inches of
clearance on both sides of piping.
1.
Excavate trenches to depth required. Carry depth of trenches for piping to establish
indicated flow lines and invert elevations. Beyond building perimeter keep bottoms of
trenches sufficiently below finish grade to avoid freeze-ups.


15050 - 14
2.
Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6 inches below required elevation and
backfill with 6 inch layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe.
3.
For piping 5 inches or less in nominal size, do not excavate beyond indicated depths.
Hand excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations and support piping on undisturbed soil.
4.
For piping 6 inches and larger in nominal size, tanks, and other mechanical work
indicated to receive sub-base, excavate to sub-base depth indicated, or if not otherwise
indicated, to 6 inches below bottom of work to be supported.
5.
Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under piping couplings to provide solid
bearing for entire body of piping.
D.
Shape sub-bases and bottoms of excavations with recesses to receive pipe bells, flanged
connections, valves and similar enlargements in piping systems.
E.
Concrete Encasement: Where piping under roadways is less than 2 foot-6 inches below
surface of roadway, provide 4 inch base slab of concrete to support piping. After piping is
installed and tested, provide 4 inch thick encasement (sides and top) of concrete before
backfilling. Provide Class 2500 concrete for encasement and slab.
3.7
BACKFILLING
A.
3.8
Do not backfill until installed mechanical work has been tested and accepted, wherever testing
is indicated.
CUTTING AND PATCHING

A.
Openings in New Construction:

1.
B.
Cutting in New Construction:

1.
C.
The Division 15 contractor shall verify all openings required in the new construction in
connection with the work under Division 15 with the Architectural and Structural Drawings
and shall then meet with and verify same with the General Contractor/Construction
Manager who will assign the work to the appropriate contractor to provide all openings in
the new construction of the correct size and location in walls, floors or through roofs
required for the installation of the mechanical work.
Failure on the part of the Division 15 Contractor to make the above arrangements for
required openings shall cause the cost of cutting and patching for the necessary
openings or the installation of his work to be borne by him, either by having the cutting
done by the appropriate contractor as assigned by the General Contractor/Construction
Manager or in the form of performing the required cutting himself. In either case, all
patching shall be done by the appropriate finishing contractor as determined by the
General Contractor/Construction Manager, No cutting or drilling of holes shall be done
without approval of the Structural Engineer/Engineer.
Patching in New Construction:

1.
The appropriate finishing contractor as determined by the General

Contractor/Construction Manager shall patch all openings in the new structure. All
openings made in fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings, shall be patched and made tight to


15050 - 15
conform to the fire rating for the enclosure. All materials used in patching shall match the
materials specified in the Architectural Specifications and all patched areas shall be
restored to the specified finish surface to the satisfaction of the Structural Engineer.
D.
3.9
The Division 15 Contractor shall pay the appropriate Finishing Contractor as determined by the
General Contractor/Construction Manager for all patching resulting from cutting to
accommodate mechanical work.
HEATING SYSTEM USED FOR TEMPORARY HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION

A.
Permanent heating system shall not be used.
B.
If for any reason the heating system has been placed into operation, it shall not be shut down
except for moderate weather, and all heated areas shall be maintained at a minimum
temperature of 50oF 24 hours a day. Building must be totally enclosed (No temporary barriers).
C.
When air-handling equipment is used for temporary heat, the filters shall be installed and
maintained. Before building acceptance by Owner, these units shall be thoroughly cleaned
(including coils, heat exchangers and duct systems) and new or cleaned filters shall be
installed. This is over and above the set of filters to be provided the Owner as called for in the
specifications. Coils shall be cleaned if necessary, as determined by the Structural Engineer.
D.
All systems being used for temporary heat shall become the Contractor's responsibility to
maintain, and be put into first class working order before acceptance by the Owner.
E.
All guarantees that start with the use of equipment for temporary heat shall be personally
extended by the contracting firm holding the prime contract for construction, so that the Owner
will have his one-year guarantee from date of acceptance.
3.10
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping
systems.
B.
Materials and methods shall be per applicable portions of ASM, ASTM, ASA, AWS, and
applicable Plumbing Code.
C.
Provide proper grades, slopes, elevations with readily accessible drainage connections at low
points so entire systems may be completely drained. Allow for expansion and contraction to
avoid distortion, damage, improper operation. Make certain piping above and below grade is
not inadvertently anchored; if questionable, obtain clarification.
D.
Arrange, install piping approximately as indicated. Install straight, plumb, and as direct as
possible. Form right angles or parallel lines with building walls. Keep pipes as close to walls,
partitions, ceilings as possible. All piping to be concealed in building construction unless noted
or shown otherwise. Keep fixture branches concealed except for final connection.
E.
Interference with Other Trades: Before installing piping, check mechanical drawings with all
other drawings and arrive at mutual agreement with other trades where interferences may
occur. Obtain approval of proposed changes.
F.
Protect Open Piping: Keep piping free from scale and dirt. Protect open pipe ends whenever
work is suspended during construction.


15050 - 16
G.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
H.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
I.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
J.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
K.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
L.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
M.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
N.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
O.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
P.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
Q.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
3.11
A.
PIPING CONNECTIONS
Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.12
A.
Install unions, in piping NPS 2 inches and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 inches and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at
final connection to each piece of equipment.
Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated.


15050 - 17
B.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D.
Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.13
A.
3.14
CONCRETE BASES
Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's
written instructions.
1.
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 6 inches larger in
both directions than supported unit.
2.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.
3.
Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
5.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6.
Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7.
Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in

Division 3 Sections.
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
B.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.15
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building structure.
B.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space
attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion
joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed;
fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.


15050 - 18
C.
Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
D.
Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
F.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping systems, to permit
freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,
expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
G.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
H.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," are not exceeded.
I.
All Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold and hot piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.
2.
Apply insulation continuously through hangers.

a.
Piping 1-1/2 inches and below and operating below Ambient Air Temperature:
Apply insulation continuously through hangers. Protect insulated horizontal pipe at
point of support with 180 degree, 12 inch long sheet metal thermal-hanger shield.
No hanger shall penetrate or crush insulating material.
b.
Piping 1-1/2 inches and below and operating above Ambient Air Temperature:
1)
c.
3.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a.
3.16
At contractors option: Wrap pipe and hanger. Hangers sized for piping.
Clamp may project through insulation.
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
TESTS
A.
General: Provide test pump, gauge, meters, other instruments, materials, labor, in connection
with tests.
B.
Pressure Tests: Before testing piping systems, remove or otherwise protect from damage,
control devices, air vents, and other parts, which are not designed to stand pressures used in
testing piping.


15050 - 19
3.17
A.
PIPE IDENTIFICATION
General Installation Requirements
1.
All piping identification system shall be in full compliance with ASTM Standards.
2.
All piping is to be identified with initials and flow arrows. Labels are to be stenciled; stickon labels are not acceptable.
B.
Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting

or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install
identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation
of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.
C.
Piping System Identification
D.
1.
Aluminum Tape: Shall be utilized on piping systems inch diameter and less.
Imprinting shall be applied to one side of tape only, with lettering 3/16 inch high.
2.
Painted Stencils: Stenciled marking shall be neatly performed with no overspray, drips,
or other imperfections. Pipes and equipment to be stenciled shall first be wiped clean of
dirt, dust, rust, grease and moisture. Comply with Painting Specifications Section 09900.
Size of Legend and Letters for Stencils:

Insulation or
Pipe Diameter
3/4" to 1-1/4"
1-1/2" to 2"
Equipment
Length of
Color Field
8"
8"
NA
Size of
Letters
1/2"
3/4"
2-1/2"
E.
All pipe identification systems shall be visible from a normal observation position.
F.
Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied
spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums;
and exterior non-concealed locations as follows:.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
G.
Type
Near each valve and control device.

Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and non-accessible enclosures.
At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced markers.
Provide a directional flow arrow adjacent to all pipe identification.
Legend:
Medium

Symbol
Field
Color
Letter
Color

15050 - 20
Gas
Waste
Waste
Water
Water
Water
Natural Gas
Sanitary Sewer
Sanitary Vent
Domestic Cold Water
Domestic Hot Water
Heating Water Supply with Glycol
(Util. & Air Cond.)
Refrigerant Refrigerant Liquid
Refrigerant Refrigerant Suction
Air
Compressed Air
H.
Black
White
White
White
Black
Black
RL
RS
CA
Blue
Blue
Blue
White
White
Blue
General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping
system; exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shut-off
valves at plumbing fixtures, HVAC terminal devices and similar rough-in connections of
end-use fixtures and units. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping
system.
Equipment Identification
1.
J.
Yellow
Green
Green
Green
Yellow
Yellow
Valve Identification
1.
I.
NG
SAN
V
DCW
DHW
HWS/G
Provide equipment identification for each piece of motor driven mechanical equipment.
Identification shall indicate equipment tag and area served.
CLEANING
1.
After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters
and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
2.
Clean motors, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
END OF SECTION


15050 - 21


15050 - 22
SECTION 15060
PIPE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Section.
B.
Pipe Workmanship: Piping shown on drawings shall be installed complete, and shall be of the
size shown on the drawings.
C.
When a size is not indicated, the subcontractor shall request the pipe size from the Architect or
Owner through the General Contractor. All piping shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the
building construction. All piping shall be installed so as to allow for expansion.
D.
Piping Joints: All pipe shall be reamed to full pipe diameter before joining. Soldered joints shall
be made with 95%-5% tin-silver solder metal per ASTM B32-89, alloy Grade 95TS, Canfield
100% Watersafe (or approved equal). Screwed joints shall be made with standard pipe thread,
and an approved compound applied to the male thread only. Welded joints shall be made in
accord with the procedure outlined in the U.S.A. Piping Code, and each welder shall be certified
by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau, or by other reputable testing laboratory or agency.
Subcontractor shall use only "Threadolet" or "Weldolet" fittings for intersection welding of
branches to mains. Valves and specialties shall have screwed or flanged joints.
E.
Piping Supports: All pipe shall be supported from building structure in a neat and workmanlike
manner. Wherever possible, parallel runs of horizontal piping shall be grouped together on
trapeze type hangers. Vertical risers shall be supported at each floor line with steel pipe clamps.
The use of wire or perforated metal to support pipes will not be permitted.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Cast Iron Pipe

No Hub Couplings
Copper Pipe
Solder
Steel Pipe
Aluminum Air Piping Systems
PEX Pipe
PVC
CPVC


15060 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
STRAINERS
A.
Strainers in steel piping systems, 2 inches and smaller shall be McAlear style SG, semi-steel
body, screwed, Y-pattern ASTM A126-84, Class B, with a 20 mesh screen.
B.
Strainers in copper piping systems 2 inches and smaller shall be McAlear No. 539S, cast
bronze base stainless steel screen.
2.2
BALANCE COCKS
A.
2.3
All balance cocks to be eccentric type, suitable for 250oF continuous service and dead shut-off,
DeZurik Fig. 425 with adjustable balance stop, or equal by A.C.F. Industries, Bell & Gossett, or
Illinois Valve Co.
UNIONS
A.
(Screwed Piping) Malleable iron, ground joint, brass to iron seat, Grinnell Fig. 463 or Grabler.
B.
(Copper Tubing) Brass with soldered joints.
2.4
PIPE AND FITTINGS

A.
Shall be of material, weight, ASTM and ANSI Designation, and pressure ratings as follows
unless specifically excepted otherwise. All pipe shall be new, clean and free of all rust.
B.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT UNDERGROUND INSIDE BUILDING
C.
1.
Include 10'-0" plus or minus outside building wall.
2.
Pipe: Service weight cast iron soil pipe, Class B ASTM A74-87.
3.
Fittings: Cast iron soil pipe fittings shall correspond to pipe in material, class and ASTM
Designation.
4.
Joints: Elastomeric cast iron soil pipe joints conforming to ASTM C 564-88.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT UNDERGROUND FROM 10 FEET OUTSIDE BUILDING LINE
1.
Pipe: Extra strength vitrified clay, ASTM C-700-91.

a.
Fittings: Correspond to pipe in material, Class and ASTM Designation.
b.
Joints: Resilient joint with "O" ring seals, ASTM C-425-91, Type III.
1)
At Contractors option (and where allowed by code):

a)
2.
Pipe: Polyvinylchloride, ASTM D-2665-91b, SDR-35, Type PSM.


15060 - 2
3.
Joints: Compression, rubber gasketed; install in accordance with ASTM D2321.
4.
Where required and as indicated on the drawings:
5.
Pipe: Extra heavy cast iron soil pipe, ASTM A-74-87.
6.
7.
Joints: Elastomeric pipe joints conforming to ASTM C564-88.
D.
SANITARY SOIL, WASTE AND VENT, ABOVE GROUND INSIDE BUILDING

1.
Pipe: ASA Group 022 Type SV no hub cast iron pipe conforming to CISPI Standard 301,
latest edition, or standard weight galvanized steel pipe per ASTM A53-90b.
2.
Fittings: Cast iron no hub fittings shall be ASA Group 022 conforming to CISPI Standard
301, latest edition. Galvanized pipe fittings shall be tar coated iron recessed drainage
type, ANSI B 16.12-91.
3.
Joints: Hubless type using fittings, gaskets, clamp assembly complying with CISPI
Standard 301, latest edition.
4.
Galvanized steel pipe shall have screwed type joints using ribbon type joint compound.
E.
DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE OUTSIDE OF BUILDING

1.
3 inch and larger shall be Class 250, cement lined, cast iron mechanical joint or
American "Fastite" or equal joint.
2.
2-1/2 inch and smaller shall be Type "K" soft drawn copper, all joints to be silver
soldered.
F.
DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER UNDERGROUND INSIDE BUILDING

1.
Include 5'-0" plus or minus outside of building wall.
2.
2-1/2 inch and Under:

a.
b.
G.
Pipe: Copper water tube, heavy wall thickness, annealed temper; ASTM B 88-92,
Type K
No fittings or joints allowed underground, below floor slabs.
DOMESTIC COLD WATER AND HOT WATER ABOVE GROUND INSIDE BUILDING
1.
2-1/2 inch and Under:

a.
Pipe: Type L, seamless copper tubing ASTM B88-92 (hard drawn for all horizontal
and all vertical lines) or Code approved PEX piping
b.
Fittings: Wrought copper or bronze solder joint pressure type fittings per ANSI
B16.22-1989


15060 - 3
c.
H.
PEX TUBE AND FITTINGS

1.
I.
PEX Distribution System: ASTM F 877, SDR 9 tubing.

a.
Fittings for PEX Tube: ASTM F 1807, metal-insert type with copper or stainlesssteel crimp rings and matching PEX tube dimensions.
b.
Manifold: Multiple-outlet, plastic or corrosion-resistant-metal assembly complying

with ASTM F 877; with plastic or corrosion-resistant-metal valve for each outlet.
PEX-AL-PEX TUBE AND FITTINGS

1.
PEX-AL-PEX Distribution System: ASTM F 1281 tubing.

a.
J.
K.
Joints: 95%-5% tin-silver solder metal per ASTM B32-89, alloy Grade 95TS,
Canfield 100% Watersafe (or approved equal).
Fittings for PEX-AL-PEX Tube: ASTM F 1281, metal-insert type with copper or
stainless-steel crimp rings and matching PEX-AL-PEX tube dimensions.
PEX-AL-HDPE TUBE AND FITTINGS
a.
PEX-AL-HPDE Distribution System: ASTM F 1986 tubing.
b.
Fittings for PEX-AL-HDPE Tube: ASTM F 1986, metal-insert type with copper or
stainless-steel crimp ring and matching PEX-AL-HDPE tube dimensions
NATURAL GAS UNDERGROUND OR EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE:

1.
Pipe: Schedule 40, black seamless steel pipe per ASTM A53-90b, Type S, Grade B
with protective coating as hereinafter specified.
2.
Fittings: Schedule 40, standard radius, dimension per ASTM A234 Grade WPB.
3.
Joints: Butt-welded.
H.
NATURAL GAS, ABOVE GROUND INSIDE OR OUTSIDE BUILDING:

1.
Pipe: Schedule 80 for pipe sizes inch and under; Schedule 40 for pipe sizes over
inch, black welded or seamless steel pipe per ASTM A53-90b.
2.
Fittings:
a.
inch and Under: 300 pound malleable iron flat banded pattern screwed fittings
per ANSI B16.3-85.
b.
Over inch to 1-1/2 inches: Same as above except 150 pound class, screwed or
welding fittings per joints below.


15060 - 4
c.
3.
I.
Over 1-1/2 inches: Schedule 40, seamless carbon steel welding fittings, long
radius, 150 pound class, dimensions per ANSI B16.9-1986; ASTM A234, Grade
WPB.
Joints:
a.
2 inches and Under: Threaded using joint compound resistant to gas- air mixture,
such as "gasolia".
b.
2-1/2 inches to 4 inches: Butt-welded.
ALUMINUM AIR PIPING SYSTEMS
1.
2.
SYSTEM
a.
The air distribution system shall be of the instant to connect type (Manufacturer
Legris type Transair, no substitutions) and shall be manufactured to the quality
system of ISO 9001(1994), and be TV certified. It shall be recyclable.
b.
The system shall be full bore passage without diameter restriction for the fittings, in
order to avoid high pressure drop. Typical pipe size is 25mm O.D. Pipe Design
and Layout may be obtained from Bruce Wells, Thermatech @ 303-773-9129.
PIPE
a.
The pipe shall be rigid and manufactured in Aluminum 6063 T5 as defined in

ASTM B241. It shall be extruded and calibrated within the tolerances specifically
required by the manufacturer of the instant to connect fittings. The pipe shall have
been qualified, as defined by ISO9001, in order to warranty gripping and bubbletight performance of the system. The pipe shall be blue powder coated in RAL
5012 with Qualicoat in order to warranty mechanical, physical and chemical
properties. Supplied with a tracibility system, the pipe shall be available in the
following diameters :
Outside
16.5 mm
25 mm
40 mm
63 mm
b.
3.
Inside
13 mm
21 mm
37 mm
59 mm
The length from center to center of pipe to pipe connectors shall be available in 10
foot lengths for all diameters and also available in 20 foot lengths for diameter
25mm, 40mm and 63 mm o/d.
FITTINGS
a.
Connectors
1)
All 16.5 mm, 25 mm and 40 mm connectors shall be instant-toconnect using a gripping ring technology with a half turn release nut
mechanism. They shall incorporate a lateral dismantling feature for the rigid
pipe and the fittings. The connectors* shall be manufactured in engineering
grade plastic (PA 6.6 or PA 12 + 30% glass fiber reinforced) with gripping


15060 - 5
teeth manufactured in stainless steel Z10 CN 17-7E2 and with seals of

nitrile IRHD50.
b.
4.
2)
All 63 mm connectors shall be instant to connect using a double clamp

ring technology with an threaded release nut mechanism. They shall provide
a lateral dismantling feature for the rigid pipe. The connectors* shall be
manufactured in black cataphoresis aluminum AS9U3 with a clamp ring
manufactured in aluminum AS9U3 and with seals of nitrile IRHD70.
3)
Male stud couplings and wall brackets shall be brass, nickel-plated black.
Drop connectors; the brackets shall be patented and quick to install by drilling one
or two holes on the rigid pipe. Designed on a single body, the brackets shall
incorporate a compact swan neck water retention system, and with an outlet which
gives the 46 mm center to center required by the pipe. They shall be manufactured
in engineering grade plastic (PA 6.6 + 30% glass fiber reinforced).
FLEXIBLE HOSE
a.
Compressed air
Flexible hose shall consist of a nitrile inner and textile coating exterior. It shall be
compatible with compressor oils and shall be available in the following diameters :
Minimum bend radius

Length
Outside
Inside
38mm
25mm
4 in
19 ; 47 ; 6
51mm
38mm
16 in
36; 6; 92
79.5mm
63mm
12 in
43
79mm
63mm
26 in
92; 122
The flexible hose shall be supplied with crimped connections in aluminum. The flexible o.d 38
mm and 51 mm shall be equipped with a captive nut designed to be screwed on a junction
fitting.
5.
6.
SYSTEM INSTALLATION
a.
The system shall be installed using fixing clips manufactured in nylon 6.6 and in
sizes suitable for the pipe. Center to center dimension to the wall shall be 46 mm
(for 16.5 mm, 25 mm and 40 mm) and 90 mm (for 63 mm).
b.
The fixing clips shall allow an axial movement of the pipe to take into account
expansion and contraction.
c.
The clips shall be with a quick to close system without the use of a screw. They
shall be equipped with a in nut easy to release (for 16.5 mm, 25 mm and
40 mm) and 3/8 in (for 63 mm) for mounting under threaded rods or screw.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
a.
All the components of the system shall conform to:
b.
Working pressure: from 29.5 in Hg (vacuum) to 185 PSI, constant across the
temperature range of -4F to +140F.


15060 - 6
c.
Lubricant compatibility: compatible to all types of mineral and synthetic compressor

oils.
d.
Fire resistance: the fittings in PA 6.6 ( 40, 25 and 16.5 mm) shall conform to
UL94HB. The fixing clips shall conform to UL94V-2. The fire resistance of the
compressed air flexible hose shall conform to NFM82271 and the vacuum version
to EN12115 flame resistance section.
e.
Performance: For details of recommended maximum flow rates refer to the

addendum. Testing on the system shall have been conducted by CETIM using test
standards NF29-312 and NF29-313.
END OF SECTION


15060 - 7


15060 - 8
SECTION 15160
VIBRATION ISOLATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
A.
Section.
B.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.
SPECIFICATION - A
2.
SPECIFICATION - D
3.
SPECIFICATION - L
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Approved Manufacturers: Amber-Booth Inc., Mason Industries, Inc., Peabody Noise Control,
Inc., Vibration Mounting & Controls, Inc. or approved equals.
B.
The following specification numbers of Mason Industries, Inc. are used to set the quality of
isolators required.
2.2
SPECIFICATION - A
A.
Neoprene mounting shall be installed at complete interface between bottom of compressor and
concrete pad.
B.
Double deflection neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.35 inches.
C.
All metal surfaces shall be neoprene covered to avoid corrosion and have friction pads both top
and bottom so they need not be bolted to the floor.
D.
Bolt holes shall be provided for these areas where bolting is required.
E.
On equipment such as small vent sets and close coupled pumps, steel rail shall be used above
the mountings to compensate for the overhand.

VIBRATION ISOLATION
15160 - 1
F.
2.3
Mountings shall be type ND or rails Type DNR.

SPECIFICATION - D
A.
Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring and 0.3 inch deflection neoprene element in
series.
B.
The neoprene element shall be molded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through the
hanger box.
C.
Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger
rod to swing through a 30 degree arc before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring.
D.
Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection.
E.
Submittals shall include a scale drawing of the hanger showing the 30 degree capability.
F.
Hangers shall be Type 30N.
2.4
SPECIFICATION L
A.
Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel braid and carbon steel fittings.
B.
Sizes 3 inches and larger shall be flanged.
C.
Smaller sizes shall have male nipples.
D.
Live lengths shall be 12 inches long through 1-1/2 inch diameter, 18 inches through 4 inch
diameter, 24 inches through 8 inch diameter and 36 inches thereafter.
E.
Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the
shut-off valves horizontally and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever possible.
F.
Hoses shall be Type BSS.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES

A.
Install Vibration Isolation Devices in full compliance with manufacturer's recommendations.

Clarify all questions or conflicts with Engineer prior to starting work. Do not proceed until written
response is received from the Engineer/Architect.
B.
INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
1.
The following equipment shall receive vibration isolation treatment:

Item
COMPRESSOR
EXHAUST FANS

Specification
A&L
D
VIBRATION ISOLATION
15160 - 2
END OF SECTION

VIBRATION ISOLATION
15160 - 3
SECTION 15180
PIPE INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
A.
Section
B.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
1.
Domestic Water Pipe Insulation
2.
Underground Pipe Insulation
FIRE HAZARD RATINGS

A.
All insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket and adhesive used to adhere the jacket to
the insulation) fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested under procedure ASTM E 84, NFPA 255
and UL 723, not exceeding:
1.
Flame Spread: 25
2.
Smoke Development:
50
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
2.2
It is the contractors and manufacturers responsibility to assure themselves that the code
authority will approve any product to be installed on the project
A.
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Certainteed Corp.
Knauf Fiber Glass
Owens Corning Fiberglass Corp.
Pittsburgh Corning Corp.
Johns Manville Corporation (Schuller International)

PIPE INSULATION
15180 - 1
2.3
DOMESTIC HOT & COLD WATER PIPING
A.
Insulate domestic hot and cold water piping with U.L. approved, flame resistant, white vapor
barrier jacketed, glass fiber snap-on insulation. Insulate valves and fittings with glass fiber
blanket insulation and pre-molded PVC covers (covers to be U.L. 25/50 rated). It is the
contractors and manufacturers responsibility to assure themselves that the code authority will
approve any product to be installed on the project. Maximum k-value shall be 0.24 BTU-IN/HRSQ FT/Degrees.
B.
Thickness of piping and pipe fitting insulation shall be per the Table in Section 3.2.
2.4
UNDERGROUND OR OUTDOOR PIPING

A.
FoamGlas by Pittsburgh Corning or equal that is approved by the manufacturer for underground
and outdoor use. Sized per manufacturers recommendations for pipe size indicated in drawings
and specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
APPLICATION
1.
Pipe insulation shall be applied over clean, dry surfaces, with the pipe at approximately
room temperature. Adjoining sections of insulation shall be butted firmly together, and
the longitudinal seam of the jacket sealed with a flame retardant vapor barrier lap
cement. Longitudinal seam shall be located on the bottom half of the pipe. End joints
and perforation shall be sealed with factory furnished 4 inch vapor barrier strips applied
with same vapor barrier adhesive. Ends of pipe insulation shall be sealed off with vapor
seal adhesive at all fittings, flanges and valves and at intervals not exceeding 21 feet.
2.
Where exposed insulated piping pierces walls, floors or ceilings, provide 2 inch wide
stainless steel bands fitted snugly to the finished surface and held in place on the
insulation with sheet metal screws. Screws to be installed so as not to be visible when
viewing the pipe from a normal position.
3.
Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's

written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the
length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.
4.
Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either
wet or dry state.
5.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and
specialties.
6.
Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a
vapor retarder.
7.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
8.
Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

PIPE INSULATION
15180 - 2
9.
Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
10.
Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vaporretarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
11.
Hangers and Anchors: Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods" for insulation requirements at Pipe Hanger and Supports.
a.
Seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other

projections with vapor-retarder mastic.
b.
Piping 1-1/2 inches and smaller and operating below Ambient Air Temperature:
c.
Piping 1-1/2 inches and smaller and operating above Ambient Air Temperature:
1)
d.
At contractors option: Wrap pipe and hanger. Hangers sized for piping.
Clamp may project through insulation.
For insulation application, extend insulation on anchor legs at least 12 inches from
point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a
compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain
vapor retarder.
12.
Insulation Terminations: Taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound
recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
13.
Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.
14.
Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of
roof flashing.
a.
Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.
b.
Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
c.
Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches
below top of roof flashing.
d.
Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
15.
Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate

insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor-retarder
mastic.
16.
Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
floors.
17.
Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through

penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

PIPE INSULATION
15180 - 3
a.
18.
Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.

a.
3.2
Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section

"Firestopping."
For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic
where floor supports penetrate vapor retarder.
PIPING AND PIPE FITTING INSULATION THICKNESS

A.
Service Water Piping
Service Water
Temperatures
(oF)
140-160
100-130
Below 100
Non-circulating
Runouts Up to 1"
(In.)
0.5
0.5
0.5
(In.)
1.0
1.0
1.0
Insulation Thickness for Pipe Sizes1

Circulating Mains and Runouts
Up to 1-1/4" 1-1/2 to 2" Over 2"
(In.)
(In.)
1.0
1.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Nominal copper pipe and insulation thickness.
END OF SECTION

PIPE INSULATION
15180 - 4
SECTION 15190
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.

to this Section
B.
Provide all items, articles, materials, operations, or methods listed, mentioned, or scheduled
on drawings and/or herein specified, including all labor, materials, equipment, and
incidentals necessary and required for their completion.
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Identification for the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
PART 2
Piping
Valves
Equipment
Ductwork
PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify each piping system and indicate direction of flow with band-secured or snap-on printed
labels in mechanical room and other exposed areas and pressure sensitive, self-adhesive labels
in concealed areas. Apply markings after painting and cleaning of piping and insulation is
completed.
B.
Apply legend and flow arrows at valve locations, at points where piping enters or leaves valve or
meter box, at not less than every 30 feet-0 inches of run or at least once in every exposed
location. Locate markings for maximum visibility.
C.
Wherever two or more pipes run parallel, apply markings in same relative location on each.
D.
Wording/color combinations shall meet ANSI specifications unless colors are specified
otherwise.
E.
Sizes of lettering and flow arrows shall be as follows:

Outside Diameter
of Pipe or

Size of
Minimum Length
15190 - 1
3.2
Covering (inclusive)
Letter
5/8" to 2"
2-1/2" and larger
1/2"
1"
of Flow Arrow
2-1/2"
4"
DUCT IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.3
Where it will assist in identifying or correlating zone supply air ducts with temperature controls or
otherwise assist identification, mark ducts at equipment or in equipment rooms with decals,
stencils, or pressure-sensitive labels appropriate for surface of application and of size easily
read from floor level.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify equipment with laminated black plastic tag with engraved white core lettering. Tag shall
indicate equipment duty such as "Heating Pump", "Exhaust Fan", and equipment designation as
shown on drawings. Tags shall have minimum thickness of 1/16 inch, minimum size of 1-1/2
inches x 4 inch, with mounting holes. Secure tags to equipment by means of screws, bolts,
chain.
B.
Identify each thermostat and humidistat by means of gun tag indicating corresponding unit which
it controls. Locate tag inside the instrument cover.
3.4
VALVE IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.5
Identify each automatic temperature control valve and each manually operated valve by means
of a brass or aluminum tag, 1-1/2 inch round, with stamped numbers or letters 1/2 inch high,
filled with black paint. Number tags consecutively. Fasten with chain and brass "S" hooks.
CHARTS AND DIAGRAMS
A.
3.6
Provide 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch charts in each equipment room designating number, area served,
service or function, location of each tagged item. Frame charts and diagrams in metal frames
with clear glass and hang in locations as directed.
WARNING SIGNS
A.
3.7
Place warning signs on all machines driven by electric motors which are controlled by fully
automatic starters, per Article 3281, General Industry Safety Orders.
UNDERGROUND UTILITIES IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install underground tape system containing metallic element to allow location by magnetic
detector.
B.
Tape: 4 inch wide minimum, installed in trench above utility line at depth of 12 inches to 18
inches below finished grade or pavement subgrade level. Extend continuously along entire
length of buried utility lines. Conform to following:
Tape Color
Legend
Yellow
Caution - [Gas] Utility Below
Blue
Caution - Water Utility Below

15190 - 2
Green
C.
3.8
Caution - Sewer Utility Below
Provide 8 inch diameter x 18 inch deep pre-cast concrete box with concrete lid, located directly
over stub for future connection. Fill box with gravel, set top 1 inch above grade. Provide
engraved brass marker indicating size, utility, invert elevation. Attach permanently to cover with
bolt or special adhesive. (For example: 4 inch CW, 6222.5 ft.). Do not terminate any stub
under concrete paving, equipment, or other inaccessible location.
PREPARATION
A.
B.
Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
1.
Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished
spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and
plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Near each valve and control device.

Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal
units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of
concealed piping.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to
25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.
On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced
labels.
Pipe Label Color Schedule:

a.
Medium-Pressure, Compressed-Air Piping:

(1)
(2)
b.
Domestic Water Piping (Cold):

(1)
(2)
c.
Background Color: Blue.

Letter Color: Blue.
Background Color: Green.

Letter Color: White.
Domestic Water Piping (Hot):

(1)
(2)
Background Color: Yellow.

Letter Color: Black.

15190 - 3
d.
Sanitary Waste Piping:

(1)
(2)
Background Color: White.

e. Gas Piping Utility above ground

(1)
Background Color: Yellow.
(2)
C.
VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
1.
Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves;
valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience
and lawn-watering hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use
fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
a.
Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

(1)
(2)
(3)
b.
Valve-Tag Color:
(1)
(2)
(3)
c.
Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.

Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.
High-Pressure Compressed Air: 1-1/2 inches, round.
Cold Water: Natural.

Hot Water: Natural.
High-Pressure Compressed Air: Natural.
Letter Color:
(1)
(2)
(3)
Cold Water: Black.

Hot Water: Black.
High-Pressure Compressed Air: Black.
END OF SECTION

15190 - 4
SECTION 15400
PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
A.
Section
B.
1.2
A.
SUBMITTALS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Plumbing Fixtures
Water Heater
Plumbing Specialties
Air Compressor
Drinking Fountain (EWC)
Reverse Osmosis System
Section 15010.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Plumbing Fixtures
Water Heater
Plumbing Specialties
Air Compressor
Drinking Fountain (EWC)
Reverse Osmosis System
C.
Refer to project-specific Submittal Log provided at Pre-Bid Meeting.
D.
Contractor to arrange for tap connection to existing city water main. Owner will pay tap fees
directly to municipality outside of GC contract. System development fees and similar charges
shall be paid by the owner.
E.
Extend water service line into building. Provide curb box, meter, meter pit, valves as required
by water department.
F.
Piping shall have adequate anchoring at connection to the main and at all vertical and horizontal
bends. Provide concrete thrust blocks as required.
G.
Provide sleeve for water service entry through foundation wall, make entry watertight.
H.
Water service shall be a minimum of 5 ft.-0 in. below grade.

PLUMBING
15400 - 1
I.
Immediately install water service, provide temporary (frost proof) outlet with hose valve outside
building for construction purposes.
J.
Building Piping: Provide a complete piping system in building from valve on service to all
fixtures and equipment outlets requiring a cold and/or hot water supply. All branch mains and
connections to risers shall be valved and drip cocks provided so that entire system may be
drained. Provide swing or swivel joints on connections from mains to risers, from risers to
branches, with loops, bends, expansion joints, guides, anchors, as required to prevent noise or
shock. Provide fixture stops at all hose bibbs, wall hydrants, etc. so that entire system does not
need to be shut off when replacing washers.
K.
Damage by Leaks: Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for damages to the grounds,
walks, roads, buildings, piping systems, electrical systems or their equipment and contents
caused by leaks in the piping systems being installed or having been installed under this
contract. He shall repair at his expense all damage so caused as directed by the Architect. The
Owner reserves the right to make emergency repairs as required without voiding the
Contractor's guarantee bond, nor relieving the Contractor of his responsibilities during the
bonding period.
1.3
SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM
A.
Obtain permit from agency having jurisdiction, connect to sanitary sewer as shown, provide
building sewer, and connect to building drains as shown. System development fees and similar
charges, if any, shall be paid by owner.
B.
Provide a complete sanitary system, including all fixtures, traps, vents, waste piping, manholes,
rough-ins, and connections.
C.
Manholes: Provide manholes where shown, of the standard type of the governing sewer
district, complete with cast iron frames and covers.
D.
Abandon and/or reroute existing sewers as shown, plug abandoned sewers at both ends.
Entire installation of rerouted sewers to be in full accord with all requirements of governing
sewer district.
1.4
GAS PIPING SYSTEM
A.
Prior to starting work arrange with utility company to provide gas service to and including gas
meter prior to starting work. Consult with utility company as to extent of its work, costs, fees,
and permits involved. Pay all such costs and fees, and obtain permits.
B.
Provide dielectric fittings and lubricated plug valve on house side of meter.
C.
Provide all gas piping from gas meter to all gas outlets and equipment requiring gas connection.
Make all connections to such outlets and equipment and provide a full main size plug valve for
each. Gas pipe sizes 2 inch and smaller may be welded or threaded; 2-1/2 inch and larger to
be all welded. All gas piping from underground shall be welded.

PLUMBING
15400 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GAS VALVES
A.
Valves, NPS 2 inch and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads.
B.
Valves, NPS 2-1/2 inch and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges
and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.
C.
Gas Valves, NPS 2 inch and Smaller: ASME B16.33 and IAS-listed bronze body and 125-psig
pressure rating.
1.
Tamperproof Feature: Include design for locking.
D.
Gas Stops (at appliance only): Bronze body with AGA stamp, plug type with bronze plug and
flat or square head, ball type with chrome-plated brass ball and lever handle, or butterfly valve
with stainless-steel disc and fluorocarbon elastomer seal and lever handle; 2-psig minimum
pressure rating.
E.
Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 inch and Larger: ASME B16.38 and MSS SP-78 cast-iron, lubricated
plug valves, with 125-psig pressure rating.
1.
2.2
Tamperproof Feature: Include design for locking.
WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE
A.
Furnish and install a one or two stage pressure reducing station as required on cold water
supply main in the event that water is supplied from water company source at a pressure in
excess of 75 psi. Reducing station to be located at service entry where shown or directed.
Basic requirements are as follows:
B.
Reducing Valve: Conbraco, Fisher Co., Mueller Co., single seated regulation valve having a full
line size capacity to reduce from main pressure to 45 psig, pressure drop across valve not to
exceed 10 psi when valve is wide open.
C.
Provide a strainer and a three valve by-pass with a ball valve in the by-pass line and a Josam
No. 75000 shock absorber on the low pressure side.
D.
Install pressure gauge with cocks on both high and low pressure sides of the regulator.
2.3
REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER
A.
Approved Manufacturers: Conbraco, Febco, Watts, Wilkins.
B.
Provide full line size reduced pressure backflow preventer as shown on plans and detail.

PLUMBING
15400 - 3
C.
2.4
Backflow preventer shall consist of two independently operating, spring loaded "Y" pattern
check valves and one hydraulically dependent differential relief valve. The device shall
automatically maintain a 5 psi pressure difference in the "zone" between the check valves.
Valve body and caps shall be bronze. Check valve and relief valve components shall be
constructed so they may be serviced without moving the valve body from the line. Shutoff
valves and test cocks shall be rated to a minimum 175 psi water working pressure and water
temperature range from 32oF to 180oF. The device shall meet the requirements of ASSE
Standard 1013; AWWA Standard Code C506-78; and VSC foundation for cross connection
control and Hydraulic Research, Sixth Edition.
WATER METER
A.
Approved Manufacturers: Badger, Census, Hersey Co., Neptune.
B.
Displacement or compound type, to meet all requirements of water department.
2.5
CURB VALVE AND CURB BOX
A.
For cast iron water pipe, IBBM solid wedge gate, 200 psi working pressure, bell or mechanical
joints ends, AWWA specifications, non-rising stem.
B.
For copper water service, 1-1/2 inch and smaller, all bronze curb stop cock with combined cap
and tee.
C.
Access to curb valve to be cast iron, tar coated, adjustable valve box with flanged bell, cover
marked "water", set flush with sidewalk level. Furnish one extension key to fit valve, length as
required.
2.6
A.
2.7
A.
HYDRANTS AND SHOCK ABSORBERS

Approved Manufacturers: Josam, J.R. Smith, Woodford Co., Zurn.
1.
Wall Hydrants (Freeze proof Box Type): Woodford No. B-67 cast bronze non-freeze box
type, polished face, hinged locking cover, brass wall casing, nylon seat, brass operating
parts, vacuum breaker.
2.
Hose Bibbs (Equipment Rooms and Unfinished Areas): Chicago Faucet Co., No. 952,
inside sill faucet with vacuum breaker, inch threaded hose outlet, removable tee
handle.
3.
Shock Absorbers: Zurn Shoktrol Series Z-1700 stainless steel shell, stainless steel
bellows pressurized pneumatic cushion. Install where required to prevent shock or water
hammer in the piping systems.
THERMOMETERS
Approved manufacturers are Marsh, Moeller, Taylor, Trerice, U.S. Gage, and Weiss. Mercury
industrial type 7 inch scale, 30oF to 200oF red reading, inclined form brass case, separable
socket. Mount where easily readable from the floor.

PLUMBING
15400 - 4
2.8
A.
2.9
A.
2.10
A.
2.11
A.
2.12
PRESSURE GAUGES
Approved manufacturers are Ashcroft, March, Lonergan, Taylor, Trerice, U.S. Gage and Weiss.
4-1/2 inch size, cast aluminum case, phosphor bronze bourdon tube, monel rotary movement,
nylon gears, silver soldered joints with gauge cock and impulse dampener. Average operating
pressure shall fall approximately in the middle of the scale selected.
PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE GAUGE TEST PLUGS

Approved manufacturer is Peterson Equipment Co., Peterson plug #710. Test plug and cap to
be provided where thermometers and pressure gauges are shown on Drawings. Provide two
pressure gauge adapters and two testing thermometers, inch NPT, Nordel or EPDM core.
Approved equals: Sisco BNO-500, Hydro-Temp, MGP/T, deliver to Owner's representative.
TEMPERATURE-PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES

Approved manufacturers are McDonnel, Miller and Watts. Self-closing, all bronze, set at 100
psi, 210oF ASME approved. Provide copper drain pipe, full size of outlet, extend to floor drain.
DRAINAGE SPECIALTIES
Approved Manufacturers: Josam, J.R. Smith, Zurn and ACO or CDOT-approved-equals.
1.
4-inch Floor Drains
2.
Trench Drain
3.
Catch Basin
Zurn Z415 Body Assembly with Type B Strainer

See Architectural Floor Plan for location.
Zurn Z872 12 inch Flo-Thru Trench Drain System
ACO 3x3 Catch Basin 05710 w/ Grey Iron Frame 05713
CLEANOUTS
A.
Cleanout Plugs: Cast-bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1, countersunk head.
B.
Floor Cleanouts: Cast-iron body and frame; cleanout plug; adjustable round top as follows:
1.
Nickel-Bronze Top: Manufacturers standard cast unit of the pattern indicated:

a.
b.
c.
d.
Pattern:
finish.
Pattern:
finish.
Pattern:
Pattern:
Exposed rim type, with recess to receive 1/8 inch thick resilient floor
Exposed rim type, with recess to receive 1 inch thick terrazzo floor
Exposed finish type, standard mill finish.
Exposed flush type, standard non-slip scored or abrasive finish.

PLUMBING
15400 - 5
C.
Grade Cleanouts: Cast-iron body and frame; cleanout plug; adjustable round top as follows:
1.
Cast-iron Top: Manufacturers standard cast unit of the pattern indicated:

a.
b.
D.
2.13
A.
2.14
Pattern: Exposed flush type, standard mill finish.

Pattern: Exposed flush type, standard non-slip scored or abrasive finish
Wall Cleanouts: Cast-iron body adaptable to pipe with cast-bronze or brass cleanout plug;
stainless steel cover including screws.
VENTS THROUGH ROOF

Provide all vents with vandal-proof caps, cast iron, with vandal-proof hood and set screws,
Josam Series 26700 or equal by Stoneman Co.
DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS (GAS)
A.
Approved Manufacturers: Rinnai, Rheem, Ruud and Inc, Bradford White.
B.
Heaters to be gas-fired, direct-vent, tankless type with 10 year heat exchanger warranty and
three year Limited parts warranty, built-in electronic blower, digital display showing temperature
settings and maintenance codes, vents horizontally or vertically, third party GAMA certified, wall
mounted hardware, 199 MBH minimum gas input, 125 psi working pressure, ASME rated
temperature and pressure relief valve with full size drain piped to floor.
C.
Provide full size ball valve in cold and hot water inlet line to heater.
D.
Provide dielectric unions at heater inlet connections.
2.15
FIXTURES
A.
Approved Manufacturers: See Section 15450, 2.1 (Plumbing Fixtures and Trim).
B.
Fixtures shall be delivered to the job and the Architect or Owner notified in sufficient time so that
inspection before installation may be made without delaying the progress of the work. The
Contractor is fully responsible for protection of fixtures before and after inspection until final
acceptance of the entire building by the Owner. All damaged fixtures shall be immediately
replaced by this Contractor regardless of who caused the damage. All exposed brass pipe shall
be chrome plated.
C.
Fixture List: Refer to fixture list on drawings.
2.16
A.
REVERSE OSMOSIS SYSTEM

Manufacturers:
1.
Pro Series 6-Stage Reverse Osmosis Alkaline System
2.
Advanced Water Systems
3.
Max Water
4.
Kenmore

PLUMBING
15400 - 6
B.
Requirements:
1.
Six Stage Point of Use Reverse Osmosis System
2.
3 to 4 gallon tank
3.
Post Filter, RO Filter, Pre filter and Polishing filter
4.
Water lines, unions, deck mounted facet w/ water quality monitor
C.
Approved Product: Pro Series 6-Stage Reverse Osmosis Alkaline System

Six Stage Purification Process
System to include
a.
All Filters
b.
100 GPD TFC Membrane
c.
4 Gallon Tank
d.
Chrome Faucet
e.
All Tubing needed for installation
2.17
A.
SPECIAL EQUIPMENT
Sand, Oil Interceptor:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Class A Commercial unit with 1500 gallon capacity

Bottom slab shall be not less than 8 inch thick
Inlet and outlet shall be 4 inches (outlet pipe invert to be 2 inches lower than inlet)
Cleanout plugs shall be brass
HOLDING TANK, single compartment

1.
1500 gallon traffic rated holding tank

a.
b.
C.
Manhole cover on side with stub-outs

Submit stamped drawings for CDOT approval
AIR COMPRESSOR:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Oil-Lubricated Air Compressor

Manufacturer
a.
Ingersol Rand, Champion or CDOT-approved equal
Air Compressor Specifications
a.
Furnish and install Vertical mount, 120 gallon tank, multi-stage reciprocating air
compressor with automatic drain, dual control with a 230/1/60 electric motor.
Required Optional Features
a.
Vibration Isolator Pads
Wired by Contractor
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
SIZE OF FIXTURE CONNECTIONS

Branch connections to fixtures shall be as follows, unless shown otherwise:
Water closets, flush valve

CW
PLUMBING
15400 - 7
Water closets, tank type

Sinks, service sinks
Lavatories
Urinals
Drinking fountains & electric water coolers
Showers
Sinks
3.2
CW
H & CW
H & CW
CW
CW
H & CW
H & CW
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine roughing-in for water and for waste piping systems and supports to verify actual
locations and sizes of piping connections and that locations and types of supports match those
indicated, before plumbing fixture installation. Use manufacturer's roughing-in data if roughingin data are not indicated.
B.
Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
C.
3.3
FIXTURE INSTALLATION
A.
Assemble fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written
instructions.
B.
For wall-hanging fixtures, install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate.

1.
2.
3.
Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.
Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.
C.
Install back-outlet, wall-hanging fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.
D.
Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building

substrate.
E.
Install wall-hanging fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.
F.
Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.
G.
Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions and roughing-in
drawings.
H.
Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
1.
Exception: Use ball, or globe valve if stops are not specified with fixture.
I.
Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to
sanitary drainage system.
J.
Install toilet seats on water closets.

PLUMBING
15400 - 8
K.
Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are
not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
L.
Install water-supply, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop
valves.
M.
Install faucet, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if
faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
N.
Install traps on fixture outlets.

1.
2.
Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.

Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.
O.
Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for escutcheons.
P.
Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Refer to Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants" for sealant and installation requirements.
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Connect water supplies from water distribution piping to fixtures.
C.
Connect drain piping from fixtures to drainage piping.
D.
Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Connect fixtures with water supplies,
stops, risers, traps, and waste piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. Connect to
plumbing piping.
E.
Supply and Waste Connections to Fixtures and Equipment Specified in Other Sections:
Connect fixtures and equipment with water supplies, stops, risers, traps, and waste piping
specified. Use size fittings required to match fixtures and equipment. Connect to plumbing
piping.
F.
Ground equipment.
1.
3.5
A.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.
SHOCK ABSORBERS
Provide shock absorbers on all water lines servicing quick closing valves, such as flush valve
water closets, urinals, clothes washers and dishwashers. Install per manufacturer's
recommendations.

PLUMBING
15400 - 9
3.6
SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM
A.
Contractor to verify size, location and elevation of existing sanitary sewers before starting work.
B.
Line and Grades: Lay piping true to line and grade so that sewer will have smooth and uniform
invert throughout its length. Grade piping by measuring with rod from overhead grade line set
horizontal and set taut between grade bars to prevent sagging. Contractor to verify elevations
of existing sewers before starting work. Unless otherwise indicated or directed, maintain 30
inch minimum cover above piping. All drainage piping inside of building shall have a uniform
grade of not less than inch per foot in direction of flow as required by local building
department, unless otherwise noted.
C.
Flashings:
3.7
1.
Vents through roof shall terminate 12 inches above roof. Secure vents to roof to protect
from snow load or snow dump.
2.
Flash vents and roof drains with 4 lb. lead, extend vent flashing around pipe and over top
2 inches, beat down in pipe 1 inch.
3.
The base of the flashings shall be minimum 12 inches x 12 inches on the roof for 2 inch
and 3 inch vents; 18 inches x 18 inches for 4 inch vents; 24 inches x 24 inches for 6 inch
vents, 30 inches x 30 inches for roof drains.
4.
For each floor drain above grade, provide 24 inches square 4 lb. sheet lead flashing
clamped or soldered into flashing ring of drain.
GAS PIPING SYSTEM
A.
Gas piping shall be installed in strict accord with NFPA Pamphlet No. 54.
B.
All gas piping run outside and above grade shall be finished with a corrosion resistant enamel
paint, black color or color as directed by architect to match building color.
C.
All underground gas piping outside of building shall be machine wrapped with "Scotchrap" PVC
tape using 50% overlap wrap minimum. Fittings and all joints shall be double wrapped, and
fitting wrapping shall extend not less than 6" past the end of the fittings onto the pipe section.
All testing of pipe and fittings shall be done prior to wrapping the fittings. Pipe may be wrapped
prior to testing.
D.
All steel and iron pipe shall be coated with "Scotchrap" primer before wrapping.
E.
All pipe wrapping shall conform to the following schedule:

Scotchrap No.
Pipe Size
Tape Width
1/4" - 3/4"
1" - 1-1/2"
2" and larger
10 Mil
1"
2" or 4"
4"
Color Backing
20 Mil
50
50
50
51
51
51
Black
Black
Note: During application of wrap, if the ambient temperature is 40o or less, use only "Scotchrap"
No. 40 tape. If ambient temperature is 41oF or more, use only "Scotchrap" No. 50.
PLUMBING
15400 - 10
F.
Gas piping under floor slabs, inside of building, shall not be used.
G.
ASTM-A-106 welding fittings shall be used on all gas piping 2-1/2 inches and larger.
3.8
TESTS FOR PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
A.
Test all plumbing work as specified below and according to local code regulations. See
"Schedule of Testing" in "General Mechanical Requirements" of the specifications.
B.
Sectionalizing: Piping may be tested a section at a time in order to facilitate the construction.
C.
All hot and cold water lines shall be capped or plugged and tested with 100 lb. hydrostatic test,
and proved tight before all piping is covered or concealed in any part of the building
construction. Fill the section of pipe to be tested with water and bring the section up to pressure
with a test pump. Tests shall be conducted by the Mechanical Contractor in the presence of the
General Contractor. These tests shall be conducted before any insulation is installed, and all
insulation installed prior to these tests shall be removed. Gauges in the tests shall have been
recently calibrated with a dead weight tester. All tests shall apply full test pressure to the piping
for a minimum of 24 hours.
D.
Inability to Hold Pressure: When test pressure has fallen over 5% during the 24 hour test
period, the point of leakage shall be found, repaired, and the test repeated. This procedure
shall be followed until the piping system has been proven absolutely tight.
E.
All soil, waste, and vent piping within the building shall be tested to a 10 ft. hydrostatic test, and
all joints inspected while under pressure.
F.
All soil, waste, and vent piping outside the building shall be tested to a minimum 10 ft. of
pressure head. Each joint shall be watertight after 15 minutes.
G.
All gas piping shall be tested under, and proven tight, at an air pressure of 100 lbs. per square
inch gauge for a period of 2 hours. All gas pipe testing shall be performed in the presence of a
representative of the Mechanical Engineer or Owner.
H.
All piping shall be tested and proved to be tight before being concealed in the building
construction.
I.
Before final acceptance of the system as a whole, this Contractor shall make all adjustments as
required and place the entire plumbing system in perfect operating condition.
3.9
A.
3.10
A.
STOP VALVES
All fixtures, wall hydrants, yard hydrants, hose bibs, rough-ins, etc., to be supplied with stop
valve to prevent shutting down entire water system when replacing faucet washers.
VACUUM BREAKERS
Provide line size vacuum breaker on all branch lines to all outlets with threaded outlets where a
hose may be attached.

PLUMBING
15400 - 11
3.11
A.
WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM

Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1.
2.
Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before using.
Use purging and disinfecting procedures as described below:
a.
b.
Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1)
2)
c.
d.
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
B.
Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
C.
Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
3.12
A.
Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.
B.
Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.
C.
Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
D.
Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate
properly.
E.
Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
3.13
ADJUSTING
A.
Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures,
fittings, and controls.
B.
Operate and adjust disposers, water dispensers, and controls. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning units and controls.
C.
Adjust water pressure at faucets, shower valves, and flushometer valves to produce proper flow
and stream.
D.
Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

PLUMBING
15400 - 12
3.14
A.
CLEANING
Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods
and materials. Do the following:
1.
2.
3.15
Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers
and spouts.
Remove sediment and debris from drains.
PROTECTION
A.
Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B.
Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.
3.16
A.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
1.
Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap
fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe
diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or
under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.
2.
Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
B.
Install pressure regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance valve bypass. Install
pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
C.
Install strainers on supply side of each pressure regulator.
D.
Install trap seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of
1 percent and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
E.
Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 inch Use NPS 4 inch for larger drainage piping
unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2.
Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3.
Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet (30 m)
for larger piping.
4.
Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
F.
Install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleanouts for piping below
floors.
G.
Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished
wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping.

PLUMBING
15400 - 13
H.
Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through floors
with waterproof membrane.
I.
Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
J.
Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch (25-mm)
clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.
K.
Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
L.
1.
Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
2.
Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set
with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a.
Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4inch total depression.
b.
Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
c.
Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1inch total depression.
3.
Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
4.
Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
Install interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to authorities
having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing.
1.
Install cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having integral cleanout on
outlet.
2.
Coordinate oil-interceptor storage tank and gravity drain with Division 2 Section "Fuel-Oil
Distribution."
M.
Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building substrate if

supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is indicated.
N.
Fasten recessed-type plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.
O.
Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting and recessed-type plumbing specialties.
P.
Install individual shutoff valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, or globe
valve if specific valve is not indicated. Install shutoff valves in accessible locations. Refer to
Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty ball, butterfly, check, and globe valves.
Q.
Install air vents at piping high points. Include ball, or globe valve in inlet and drain piping from
outlet to floor drain.

PLUMBING
15400 - 14
R.
Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.
S.
Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding
pipe fittings.
T.
PLUMBING SPECIALTY CONNECTIONS

1.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
2.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
3.
Connect plumbing specialties to piping specified in other Division 15 Sections.
4.
Ground equipment.
5.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.
6.
Connect plumbing specialties and devices that require power according to Division 16
Sections.
7.
Interceptor Connections: Connect piping, flow-control fittings, and accessories.

a.
3.17
A.
B.
C.
Oil Interceptors: Connect inlet, outlet, vent, and gravity draw off piping to unit;
flow-control fitting and vent to unit inlet piping; and gravity draw off and suction
piping to oil storage tank.
FLASHING INSTALLATION
Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1.
Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6-lb/sq. ft, 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker.
Solder joints of lead sheets 4-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.
2.
Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors
and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1.
Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and
skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.
2.
Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around
sleeve.
3.
Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
around specialty.
Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

PLUMBING
15400 - 15
D.
Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E.
Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.
3.18
PROTECTION
A.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and
to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION

PLUMBING
15400 - 16
SECTION 15412
EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
1.2

to this Section.
The work specified in this Section consists of furnishing and installing combination
emergency shower and eye/face wash at the location indicated on the Drawings. Also see:
Section 15450 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Model number indicated is to establish a minimum standard of quality only.
B.
Fixture shall be certified by CSA to meet the ANSI Z358.1 Standards for Emergency
Eyewash and Shower Equipment when properly installed.
C.
Units with damaged or missing parts or components will be rejected.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following for approval the following:

1. Product Data:
a. Submit manufacturer's published details indicating:
(1
(2
(3
(4
(5
(6
(7
B.
1.4
Refer to Project-Specific Submittal Log provided by owner at Pre-Bid meeting.

PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Ship all equipment and accessories securely wrapped or packaged and labeled for safe
handling to avoid damage.
B.
Store in a dry area safe from damage.
PART 2 2.1
Model Number
Capacity
Material Composition and Color
Duration of flushing (minutes)
Rate of flushing (gpm)
Anchoring details
Statement attesting to conformance with ANSI Z358.1
PRODUCTS
COMBINATION EMERGENCY SHOWER & EYE/FACE WASH


15412 - 1
A.
1. Products of the following manufacturer are specified herein as the standard of quality for
the Combination Emergency Shower and Eye/Face Wash:
a. Haws Corporation or approved equal
1455 Kleppe Lane
P.O. Box 2070
Sparks, NV 89432-2070
Telephone: 1-775-359-4712
Fax 1-775-359-7424
e-mail: info@hawsco.com
www.hawsco.com
B.
Features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
Floor mounted
10 inch ABS Plastic Shower Head
Twin ABS plastic soft-flow eye wash heads and face spray ring
Stainless Steel Receptor
9102 Stainless Steel Dust Cover
Pull Rod activates shower
Push flag or foot treadle activates eye wash
Certified by CSA to meet the ANSI Z3581.1 Standard
Dimensions:
1. 22 inches high x 21 inches wide x 19 inches deep.
D.
PART 3 -
3.1
Combination Emergency Shower and Eye/Face Wash shall be Model No. 8300-8309 as
manufactured by Haws Corporation or approved equal with the above minimum
requirements. This fixture is not required to meet tepid flow requirements of ANSI Z3581.1;
the tempering valve only needs to ensure that the water at the fixture does not exceed 100
degrees F.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units securely to walls in accordance with the directions and recommendations of the
product manufacturers and local codes.
B.
Install units at locations as shown on drawings.
C.
Combination Emergency Shower/Eye Wash stations shall be installed to meet all code
requirements, unless otherwise noted.
END OF SECTION

15412 - 2
SECTION 15430
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
(COMPRESSED AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM)
PART 1 -
A.
1.2
GENERAL

to this Section.
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.3
The work specified in this Section consists of furnishing and installing Compressed Air
Distribution System at the locations indicated on the Contract Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Contractor may propose equal to CDOT for approval PRIOR to Bid Due Date.
B.
System and accessories with damaged or missing parts or components will be rejected.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following:

1. Product Data:
a. Submit manufacturer's published details indicating system requirements.
B.
1.5
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.
Ship all equipment and accessories securely wrapped or packaged and labeled for safe
handling to avoid damage.
B.
Store in a dry area safe from damage.
PART 2 -
2.1
PRODUCTS
COMPRESSED AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

A.
1. Transair Legeric Incorporated
7205 East Hampton Ave.
Mesa, AZ 85209

(COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM)
15430 - 1
Bruce Wells at THERMATECH SYSTEMS, Inc.

(303) 773-9129 or Fax (303) 773-9133
a. Complete TRANSAIR Compressed Air Distribution System including all distribution
piping, fittings, quick-assembly drops with shut-off valves and wall brackets for quickconnect fitting attachments with drain valves. Includes TRANSAIR Safety QuickConnect Couplers. Flex connector for attachment to compressor is provided with
shut-off valve. Pipe hangers with adapters for 3/8 inch threaded rod are provided
standard. Complete pipe cutting and drilling kit provided standard. TRANSAIR
materials are provided per attached materials sheet
2. Smartpipe System
Kaeser
PO Box 946
Fredericksberg, VA 22404
540-898-5500
PART 3 -
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
Install system in accordance with the directions and recommendations of the product
manufacturers and local codes.
B.
Install system at location shown on the Contract Drawings.
END OF SECTION

(COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM)
15430 - 2
SECTION 15450
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
PART 1 -
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.

to this Section
B.
Related Sections:
1. Section 15400 Plumbing
2. Section 15412 Emergency Plumbing Fixtures
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
PART 2 2.1
The work covered under this section consists of furnishing all fixtures and trim and all labor
necessary to make the installation of the plumbing fixtures, per the plans. It also includes
furnishing and hanging a combination emergency shower and face/eyewash.
PRODUCTS
PLUMBING FIXTURES
A.
Approved Manufacturers:
1. American Standard
2. Crane
3. Eljer
4. Fiat
5. Florestone (Service (utility) sink only)
6. Kohler
7. Oberon
8. Sterns-Williams
9. Toto
B.
All Fixtures and Trim shall be of the same Manufacturer, as close as possible.
C.
Trim Manufacturers (as specified for fixtures):

1. Chicago Faucet
2. Crane
3. Delta
4. Kohler
5. Moen
6. Speakman
D.
Seats (Seats shall be solid plastic type, with open front per code, color to match fixture):
1. Church
2. Olsonite
3. Beneke
4. Bemis


15450 - 1
E.
Stainless Steel (Sinks and Drinking Fountains)

1. Bradley
2. Dayton
3. Elkay
4. Haws
5. Just
6. Kohler
F.
Emergency Eyewash
1. Haws
2. Guardian
G.
All exposed pipes shall be chrome plated
H.
All exposed screws (faucets, valves, etc.) to be vandal-proof type.
I.
All fixtures shall be white unless otherwise noted.
J.
Refer to project-specific Submittal Log provided by owner at Pre-Bid Meeting.
2.2
PLUMBING FIXTURE LIST

A.
WC-1 Water Closets (ADA compliant with specified seat) Toto CST 744 SL, white vitreous
china elongated rim, low-consumption (1.6 gals/flush), siphon jet flushing action. Tank cover,
fittings and trip lever chrome-plated.( 16 inch high complete with backflow preventer. #K4670C Lustra seat for elongated bowl, open front less cover with stainless steel check hinge.
3/8 inch supply with l.k. stops.
B.
LAV-1 Lavatory (Handicapped) Toto LT 307 or American Standard 0355 19 inch x 20

inch white vitreous china wall hung lavatory. American Standard 8125 Centerset Lavatory
Faucet, non-metallic speed connect, pop-up drain. Lever Handles with polished chrome
finish.
C.
S-1 Toto LT307 or approved equal.
D.
S-2 Utility Sink, floor mounted Florestone Model SC or approved-equal, 22 inch x 18 inch
utility sink molded acrylic with metal cabinet. The sink shall meet ANSI S-124.6 standard.
Kohler #K-8907 faucet with pail hook, threaded hose connection and vacuum breaker.
#K6673 trap with floor stand, 3 inch outlet.
E.
S-3 Surface-Mounted Sink: Teka 257-413 or approved equal.
F.
ESEW Emergency Combination shower and eye/face wash, Haws Model 8300-8309 or
approved equal.
G.
UR-1 Urinal Highefficiency, 0.5 gallons/flush or less, wash-down flushing action; privacy
shields, integral trap, ADA-compliant. Wall-mounted Toto model UT447E, white vitreous
china.
H.
EWC-1: Drinking fountain to be stainless steel, barrier free, ADA Compliant, wall mounted,
with electric water cooler providing minimum of 8 gph chilled water. Elkay Model EMABF8 or
approved equal. Drinking fountain to have factory installed carafe / bottle filler. Mounting
height per ADA requirement.


15450 - 2
PART 3 -
EXECUTION
A.
The Contractor is fully responsible for protection of fixtures before and after inspection until
final acceptance of the entire building by Owner. Any damaged fixtures shall be immediately
replaced by this Contractor regardless of who caused the damage.
B.
All fixtures shall be securely mounted to walls and floors.
C.
Rough-in only hot and cold water, gas, waste, vent, soil, drainage piping to all fixtures and
equipment as well as fixtures and equipment furnished by General Contractor and/or Owner
as shown on drawings. Provide fixture stops and P traps as required for all plumbing
fixtures. Coordinate locations, sizes, etc. with equipment drawings and schedule.
D.
Contractor shall be responsible for all incidental parts for both new and existing equipment to
provide a complete operating system.
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all plumbing fixtures may be
installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the
referenced standards.
B.
Examine rough-in for potable water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of
piping connections prior to installing fixtures.
C.
Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
D.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturers written
instructions, rough-in drawings, and pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and
the referenced standards.
B.
Comply with the installation requirements of ANSI A117.1 and Uniform Building Codes with
respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped.
C.
Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to supports or building structure. Secure supplies behind
or within wall construction to provide rigid installation.
D.
Install a stop valve in an accessible location in the water connection to each fixture. Install
access panels in wall for access to conceal stop valves.
E.
Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations
and within cabinets and millwork.
F.
Seal fixtures to walls and floors using silicone sealant as specified in Section 07900. Match
sealant color to fixture color.


15450 - 3
3.4

A.
Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units
are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning units, then retest.
B.
Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged fixtures.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust water pressure at faucets and flush valves to provide proper flow and stream.
B.
Replace washers of leaking or dripping faucets and stops.
3.6
CLEANING
A.
3.7
Clean fixtures, trim, and strainers using manufacturers recommended cleaning methods and
materials.
PROTECTION
A.
Provide protective covering for installed fixtures, drinking fountains, and trim.
B.
Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless expressly approved in writing by
the Architect or Owner.
END OF SECTION


15450 - 4
SECTION 15543
FUEL-FIRED UNIT HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
A.
Section.
B.
Provide all items, materials, articles or methods listed or scheduled on drawings or herein
specified, including all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary and required for
their completion.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes gas-fired unit heaters.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of fuel-fired unit heater indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, and accessories.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel-fired unit heaters to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace heat exchanger of fuel-fired unit heater that fails in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.


15543 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS

A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product

indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Lennox Industries, Inc.

Modine Manufacturing Company.
Reznor/Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Sterling HVAC Products; Div. of Mestek Technology Inc.
Trane
B.
Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired, and complying with ANSI Z83.8/CSA 2.6.
C.
Fuel Type: Design burner for natural gas having characteristics same as those of gas available
at Project site.
D.
Sealed combustion type.
E.
Housing: Steel, with integral draft hood and inserts for suspension mounting rods.
1.
External Casings and Cabinets: Baked enamel over corrosion-resistant-treated surface.
F.
Heat Exchanger: Aluminized steel.
G.
Unit Fan: Steel, centrifugal fan dynamically balanced and resiliently mounted.
1.
Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features:
a.
b.
c.
2.
General requirements for motors:

a.
b.
c.
H.
Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball
bearings.
Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
Motors: Totally enclosed with internal thermal-overload protection.

Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven
load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are
specified in Division 16 Sections.
Controls: Regulated redundant gas valve containing pilot solenoid valve, electric gas valve,
pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff all in one body.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Gas Control Valve: Single stage.

Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark with flame sensor.
Fan Thermal Switch: Operates fan on heat-exchanger temperature.
Vent Flow Verification: Flame rollout switch.
Control transformer.
High Limit: Thermal switch or fuse to stop burner.
Thermostats: Unit mounted.


15543 - 2
I.
Discharge Louvers: Independently adjustable horizontal blades.
J.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Discharge Nozzle: Discharge at 60 degrees from horizontal.

Four-point suspension kit.
Summer fan switch.
Unit-mounted thermostat bracket.
Vertical concentric flue kit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install and connect gas-fired unit heaters and associated fuel and vent features and systems
according to NFPA 54, applicable local codes and regulations, and manufacturer's written
installation instructions.
B.
Suspended Units: Suspend from substrate using threaded rods, spring hangers, and building
attachments. Secure rods to unit hanger attachments. Adjust hangers so unit is level and
plumb.
3.2

A.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Tests and Inspections:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
Verify bearing lubrication.
Verify proper motor rotation.
Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
a.
b.
c.
C.
3.3
Test procedures used.

Test results that comply with requirements.
Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to
achieve compliance with requirements.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust initial temperature set points.
B.
Adjust burner and other unit components for optimum heating performance and efficiency.
END OF SECTION


15543 - 3
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.


15543 - 4
SECTION 15600
HEAT GENERATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
A.
Section.
B.
their completion.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals: Contractor to provide equipment submittals prior to installation for review by
engineer.
B.
Closeout Submittals: within thirty days after award of the contract submit to architect or owner
complete catalog data and/or shop drawings for each item of material and for every
manufactured item of equipment to be used in the work. Such data shall include specific
performance data, material description, rating, capacity, dimensions, and type for each item of
material, each manufactured item, and all component parts utilized in final operating mechanical
system. Applicable data shall be underlined and each applicable item identified in each catalog
by the same identification acronyms used on the drawings.
C.
Operating Instruction and Maintenance Data: Submit for the following:

1.
1.3
Electric Heaters
ELECTRIC HEAT
A.
All electric heating equipment specified herein to be furnished and installed by Mechanical
Contractor.
B.
Provide all contactors, relays, disconnects, terminal boxes, etc., integral with equipment.
C.
Provide all thermostats for electrical units and all wiring for thermostat and control. Power
supply to equipment will be furnished and installed by Electrical Contractor as shown on
electrical drawings.

HEAT GENERATION
15600 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ELECTRIC BASEBOARD HEATERS

A.
Steel enclosure, white polyester powder finish, electric resistance heating element with
aluminized fins, full length auto-reset thermal overload disconnect switch, junction boxes at both
ends of each section, wall mounted thermostat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF ELECTRIC HEATING UNITS

A.
Install heating terminal units as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturers written
instructions, and with recognized industry practices; complying with applicable installation
requirements of NEC and NECs Standard of Installation.
B.
Coordinate with other electrical work, including wiring/cabling work, as necessary to properly
interface installation of heating terminal units with other work.
C.
Clean dust and debris from each heating terminal as it is installed to ensure cleanliness.
D.
Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
manufacturers published torque tightening valves for equipment connectors. Where
manufacturers torqueing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to
comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A.
3.2
GROUNDING
A.
Electrical Contractor shall provide equipment grounding connections as indicated. Tighten

connections to comply with tightening torque values specified in UL Standard 486A to assure
permanent and effective ground.
END OF SECTION

HEAT GENERATION
15600 - 2
SECTION 15743
PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR-CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
A.
Provisions of the General Conditions of the Contract (Design/Bid/Build) and Division 1 General
Section.
B.
their completion.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes packaged terminal air conditioners and their accessories and controls, in the
following configurations:
1.
2.
1.3
Through-the-wall air conditioners

Cooling-only units
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, furnished specialties, electrical characteristics, and accessories.
B.
Color Samples: For unit cabinet, discharge grille, and exterior louver, and for each color and
texture specified.
1.4
A.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer

and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for packaged terminal air conditioners.
B.
Field quality-control reports.
C.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged terminal air conditioners to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


15743 - 1
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
COORDINATION
A.
1.8
Coordinate layout and installation of packaged terminal air conditioners and wall construction
with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of packaged terminal air conditioners that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
2.
Warranty Period for Sealed Refrigeration System: Manufacturer's standard, but not less
than one year from date of Substantial Completion, including components and labor.
Warranty Period for Nonsealed System Parts: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than
one year from date of Substantial Completion, including only components and excluding
labor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated

on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.2
Carrier Corporation; a United Technologies company

ClimateMaster, Inc.
Friedrich Air Conditioning Co.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Appliances
McQuay International
Suburban Manufacturing Company; a subsidiary of AIRXCEL, Inc.
Trane; a business of American Standard Companies
Amana
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
2.3
Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, self-contained, packaged terminal air conditioner

with room cabinet, electric refrigeration system, and temperature controls; fully charged with
refrigerant and filled with oil; with cord-connected chassis.
CHASSIS
A.
Cabinet: 0.052-inch-thick steel with removable front panel with concealed latches.


15743 - 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Mounting: Wall with wall sleeve.

Discharge Grille: Reversible polycarbonate discharge grille allowing upward and
horizontal airflow.
Louvers: Extruded aluminum with enamel finish; white color.
Finish: Baked enamel.
Access Door: Hinged door in top of cabinet for access to controls.
Refrigeration System: Direct-expansion indoor coil with capillary restrictor; and hermetically
sealed scroll compressor with vibration isolation and overload protection.
1.
2.
Indoor and Outdoor Coils: Seamless copper tubes mechanically expanded into
aluminum fins.
Charge: R-410A.
C.
Indoor Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal; with motor and positive-pressure ventilation damper
with electric operator.
D.
Filters: Washable polyurethane in molded plastic frame.
E.
Condensate Drain: Drain pan and piping to direct condensate to building waste and vent piping.
F.
Outdoor Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal type motor.

1.
Indoor and Outdoor Fan Motors: Two speed; comply with NEMA designation,
temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors.
a.
b.
c.
2.4
Fan Motors: Permanently lubricated split capacitor.

Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven
load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical
devices and connections specified in Division 16 Sections.
CONTROLS
A.
Control Module: Unit-mounted digital panel with touchpad temperature control and with
touchpad for heating, cooling, and fan operation. Include the following features:
1.
Low Ambient Lockout Control: Prevents cooling-cycle operation below 40 deg F outdoor
air temperature.
B.
Outdoor Air: Motorized intake damper. Open intake when unit indoor air fan runs.
C.
Outdoor Air: Manual intake damper.
2.5
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Sound-Power Level Ratings: Factory test to comply with ARI 300, "Sound Rating and Sound
Transmission Loss of Packaged Terminal Equipment."
B.
Unit Performance Ratings: Factory test to comply with ARI 310/380/CSA C744, "Packaged
Terminal Air-Conditioners and Heat Pumps."


15743 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances and
tolerances.
B.
Install wall sleeves in finished wall assembly; seal and weatherproof.
3.2

A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections:

1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.
After installing packaged terminal air conditioners and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Perform startup service.
B.
After installation, verify the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Unit is level on base and is flashed in exterior wall.

Unit casing has no visible damage.
Compressor, air-cooled condenser coil, and fans have no visible damage.
Labels are clearly visible.
Controls are connected and operable.
Shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps are removed.
Filters are installed and clean.
Drain pan and drain line are installed correctly.
Electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation
requirements in Division 16 Sections.
Installation. Perform startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions,
including the following:
a.
b.
C.
Lubricate bearings on fan.

Check fan-wheel rotation for correct direction without vibration and binding.
After startup service and performance test, change filters.


15743 - 4
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust initial temperature set points.
B.
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
END OF SECTION


15743 - 5


15743 - 6
SECTION 15800
AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
(EXHAUST AND CEILING FANS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
A.
Section.
B.
Set all equipment and make duct connections. Provide adequate access to controls, valves,
piping connections, filters motors, drives, etc. as necessary.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK

A.
1.3
Types of air distribution components in this section include the following

1.
Exhaust Fans
2.
Industrial Ceiling Fans
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Codes and Standards:

1.
SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards,

Metal and Flexible" for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.
2.
ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment Volume, Chapter 1,

"Duct Construction," for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.
3.
NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and NFPA 90B "Standard for the Installation of
Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B.
SUBMITTALS
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit scaled layout drawings of metal ductwork and fittings including, but not
limited to, duct sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor
penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between ductwork and
proximate equipment. Show modifications of indicated requirements, made to conform to local
shop practice, and how those modifications ensure that free area, materials, and rigidity are not
reduced. Submit for the following in accordance with Section 15010.
D.
PRODUCTS
1.
Garage exhaust fans
2.


(EXHAUST & CEILING FANS)
15800 - 1
E.
Section 15010.
1.
2.
Exhaust Fans
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EXHAUST FANS (WATER CLOSET) (EF-1)

A.
Approved manufacturers: Acme, Carnes, Cook, Greenheck, Pace, Penn.
B.
Type: Shall be of the centrifugal fan, integral grille and housing type, all completely selfcontained. Integral backdraft damper shall be located in fan outlet.
C.
Capacity
1.
Water Closet Fan: Capacity and model number of the unit shall be as shown on
drawings. Exhaust fan shall be sized to exhaust 50 cfm per water closet.
D.
Motor and Drive: Fan shall be of the direct drive type and motor shall be of the permanently
lubricated ball bearing type and shall be directly coupled to the fan. The motor and fan shall be
easily removable thru the in-take grille for service.
2.3
INDUSTRIAL CEILING FANS (GARAGE)

A.
Approved manufacturers: Air King, Dayton or Westinghouse.
B.
Type: Shall be an industrial ceiling fan with 24 inch blades, reversible, two speed manual
switching, with mounting hardware.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION:
A.
All equipment shall be installed complete with bases, supports, mounting frames,
piping connections, vents, etc., as required. Installation, shop drawings, etc., of all
equipment shall be coordinated with other trades.
B.
All air moving equipment is to be rated, selected and adjusted to deliver air quantities
shown at site elevation. Fan speeds are to be changed as required to deliver CFM
shown and new sheaves furnished and installed if necessary.
ELECTRICAL WIRING:
A.
All the wiring in connection with the automatic temperature control system, except
wiring carrying the full load current, shall be furnished under this section as required to
make a complete and operating temperature control system. All interlock wiring
specified under this Section shall also be provided. All electrical wiring shall be installed
in accordance with prevailing National and Local Codes (see Division 16 on Electrical
Work for Coordination required) and shall be stranded continuous wire run in conduit.


15800 - 2
B.
Items to be Controlled:
1.
2.
Exhaust Fans
END OF SECTION


15800 - 3


15800 - 4
SECTION 15838
HVAC FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Section
B.
1.2
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each fan.
Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
Certified fan sound-power ratings.
Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.
Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic
restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and
rails, and base weights.
A.
Coordination Drawings: Show fan room layout and relationships between components and
adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and
weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
B.
Field quality-control reports.

HVAC FANS
15838 - 1
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Operation and Maintenance Data: For centrifugal fans to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A.
Belts: One extra set for each belt-driven unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
AMCA Compliance:
1.
2.
B.
Service Conditions:
1.
2.
C.
2.2
Comply with AMCA performance requirements and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings
Seal.
Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
Altitude: 5,400 feet above sea level.

Ambient Temperature: 95 F.
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
MOTORS
A.
2.3
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements
for motors.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound
Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B.
Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation,
and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210/ASHRAE 51, "Laboratory
Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating."
C.
UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for
restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.
2.4
FANS
A.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or comparable product by

one of the following:

HVAC FANS
15838 - 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.5
Aerovent; a division of Twin City Fan Companies, Ltd.

Carnes Company.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
Loren Cook Company.
PennBarry.
Soler & Palau.
Canarm (ceiling type only)
CEILING-MOUNTED VENTILATORS
A.
Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation.
B.
Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan
wheel shall be removable for service.
C.
Grille: Aluminum, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan
housing.
D.
Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for
motor plug-in.
E.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.6
Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50
percent.
Motion Sensor: Motion detector with adjustable shutoff timer.
Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.
Manufacturer's standard wall cap, and transition fittings.
EXHAUST FAN (EF-2)

A.
Housing: Galvanized-steel fan panel with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with bakedenamel finish coat applied after assembly.
B.
Fan Blades: Replaceable, cast aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub; factory
set pitch angle of blades.
C.
Fan Drive: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of
fan housing.
D.
Fan Drive:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Resiliently mounted to housing.

Statically and dynamically balanced.
Selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower,
with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.
Extend grease fitting to accessible location outside of unit.
Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.4.
Galvanized Steel Drive Frame Assembly
Motor Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.

HVAC FANS
15838 - 3
E.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame; interlocked blades with nylon
bearings.
Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, complying with OSHA specifications,
removable for maintenance.
Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50
percent.
Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan
housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
Provide Carbon Monoxide (CO) sensor and CO detection control panel and interlock with
EF-2 as indicated on plans.
Provide auxiliary contact for wall switch. Refer to schedules for sequence of operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install centrifugal fans level and plumb.
B.
Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to the final location, according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
D.
Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.
E.
Equipment Mounting: Install continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers of size required
to support weight of fan.
1.
Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section "Hangers and
Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with
flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section "Air Duct Accessories."
B.
Install ducts adjacent to fans to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Ground equipment according to Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
D.
Connect wiring according to Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B.
Adjust belt tension.

HVAC FANS
15838 - 4
C.
Comply with requirements in Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing,
adjusting, and balancing procedures.
D.
Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.
E.
Lubricate bearings.
3.4

A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to
ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload
protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan
wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and
adjust belts, and install belt guards.
Adjust belt tension.
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
See Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing For HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and
balancing procedures.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Controls and equipment will be considered defective if
they do not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain fans.
END OF SECTION

HVAC FANS
15838 - 5

HVAC FANS
15838 - 6
SECTION 15890
DUCTWORK
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.

to this Section
B.
Provide all items, articles, materials, operations, or methods listed, mentioned, or scheduled
on drawings and/or herein specified, including all labor, materials, equipment, and
incidentals necessary and required for their completion.
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Ductwork (Metal, Flex, Fabric)
B.
Acoustical plenum
C.
Fasteners
D.
Sealants
E.
Duct cleaning
F.
Duct lining
G.
Testing for leakage
H.
Duct sealant
1.3
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
Fabricate per SMACNA and ASHRAE standards.
B.
Install ductwork per NFPA 90A standards.
C.
Fiberglass duct lining, sealants, adhesives shall have maximum flame spread rating of 25,
maximum smoke developed rating of 50.
1.4
DEFINITIONS
A.
Duct sizes: Clear inside dimensions.
B.
Duct pressure classification: Operating duct pressure for which ductwork shall be constructed.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish manufacturer's submittal data for:

DUCTWORK
15890 - 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
PART 2
2.1
Rectangular ductwork.
Round and oval ductwork and fittings.
Acoustical plenum.
Fiberglass duct lining.
Flexible duct and fittings.
Duct sealant.
PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acoustical Plenum
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Fiberglass Ductwork
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Knauf
Owens-Corning
Johns Manville
Duct Sealant
1.
2.
2.2
CertainTeed
Knauf
Owens-Corning
Johns Manville
Duct Lining
1.
2.
3.
D.
Aeroacoustics
DynaSonics
Environmental Air Products
Gale
Industrial Acoustics
Koppers
Semco
Air Seal #22.

Design Polymerics #DP1010
MATERIALS
A.
Galvanized steel ducts: Lock forming quality, zinc coating 0.9 ounces per square foot each side.
B.
Fabric duct: Polyethylene duct supported at 2 oclock and 10 oclock.
C.
Fasteners: Use rivets, screws, bolts throughout. Select to carry structural load.
D.
Sealant: Water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials.
E.
Flexible Air Duct

1.
Listed under UL-181 standards as Class I Air Duct material. Minimum operating pressure
6 inches w.c., minimum working velocity 4,000 FPM. Material shall be approved by

DUCTWORK
15890 - 2
authority having jurisdiction.

2.
E.
2.3
Insulated: Aluminum foil or aluminized mylar inner core, woven and coated fiberglass or
polymeric material bonded permanently to corrosion resistant coated spring steel wire or
aluminum wire helix, 1 inch thick, 3/4 lb. density fiberglass insulation (minimum "k" value
0.25), reinforced metallized mylar laminate (maximum vapor transmission rate
0.05 perms).
Spin-in fitting: Flared inlet; manual volume damper and regulator where noted.
FABRICATION
A.
Duct Pressure And Leakage Classifications

1.
Fabricate all ductwork per the requirements of the following pressure classifications table.
Ductwork
Minimum Duct Pressure

Classification (w.c.)
Minimum Leakage
Classification
Constant volume supply ductwork from

supply fan to air devices.
[ 2" ]
[12 ]
Return ductwork
[ -1" ]
[ 12 ]
From air devices to fan inlet.
[ -1" ]
[6]
From fan outlet to discharge

point.
[ 1/2" ]
[6]
Exhaust ductwork
2.
Minimum leakage classification is as defined in the latest edition of the ASHRAE

Fundamentals Handbook, Duct Design Chapter.
B.
Make equivalent duct size changes from ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round
ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission.
C.
Cross break or bead all ducts in excess of 18 inches.
D.
Lap metal ducts in direction of air flow. Hammer down edges and slips to leave smooth duct
interior. Provide corner closures.
E.
Branch connections in rectangular ductwork shall be 45 degree entry type with 4 inch minimum
connector length.
F.
Construct tees, bends, elbows with minimum center line radius 1-1/2 inch times width of duct.
Where not possible and where rectangular elbows used, provide turning vanes.
G.
Increase duct sizes maximum 15 degree divergence wherever possible. Maximum divergence:
20 degree upstream of equipment, 30 degree downstream.

DUCTWORK
15890 - 3
H.
Rigidly construct metal ducts with joints mechanically tight, airtight, braced and stiffened.
Static Pressure
Classification (w.c.)
Sealing Required
Greater Than 2
All transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct

wall penetrations
2" and less
Transverse and longitudinal joints
I.
Joints in rectangular ductwork may be made with Ductmate System, Nexus 4 Bolt Duct
Connection System, or TDC.
J.
Fabricate seams and joints in kitchen exhaust ducts liquid tight with continuous external welds.
K.
Fabricate plenums at wall louvers to drain through bottom of louver. Fabricate seams and joints
at bottom of plenum to be liquid tight. Omit duct lining at bottom of plenum.
2.4
ACOUSTICAL PLENUM
A.
Provide 3 inch high reinforced concrete curb for plenum walls and floor mounted casing. At
floor, rivet panels on 8 inch centers to angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, provide
18 gauge galvanized expanded metal mesh liner, turned up 12 inches at sides with sheet metal
shields.
B.
Reinforce door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum supporting angles.
Install hinged access doors where shown, specified, or required for access to equipment for
cleaning and inspection.
C.
Fabricate acoustic plenums of galvanized steel, 18 gauge back facing, 16 gauge internal
reinforcing and 22 gauge perforated front facing with 3/32 inch diameter holes on 5/32 inch
centers. Panels: 4 inches thick, packed with 4.5 lb. density fiberglass or mylar encapsulated
mineral wool. Plenum shall be custom designed and manufactured at the factory; no field
cutting of panels shall be required. Access doors: Double wall, insulated, size as noted on
drawings. Provide trim strips where non-square angles occur. Acoustical transmission loss data
shall be as follows:
DECIBELS RE 0.0002 MICROBAR
125
27
2.5
250
34
500
39
1000
51
2000
61
4000
66
PLENUM GAUGES
A.
Fan plenums and plenums downstream of fan: Per duct gauges.
B.
Plenums upstream of fan between apparatus: 16 gauge.
C.
Plenums upstream of filters: 18 gauge.
2.6
DUCT LINING
A.
Provide internal duct lining as follows:

DUCTWORK
15890 - 4
Thickness
1.
Supply Ductwork - Rectangular
[1"]
2.
Supply Ductwork - Round
[1"]
3.
Supply Ductwork Outdoors
[2"]
4.
Return Ductwork - Rectangular
[1"]
5.
Return Ductwork Round
[1"]
B.
Lining (Rectangular Duct): UL approved, [1-1/2] pound density fiberglass with smooth surface
black fire-resistant facing which will not support microbial growth and will not puncture or tear
from heavy finger tip pressure and is well adhered to the fiberglass to resist peeling.
C.
Lining (Round Duct): UL approved, duct board snap-in type or preformed type, k=0.23 BTUIN/HR-FT2-F, maximum service temperature not over 250 F, designed to resist microbial growth.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
Obtain manufacturer's inspection and acceptance of fabrication and installation of fiberglass

ductwork at beginning of installation.
B.
Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers.

Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with
spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated
ductwork, install insulation material inside metal ring.
C.
Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust or
clean with high power vacuum machines. Clean small portions of system at a time. Protect
equipment from excessive dirt with filters or bypass during cleaning.
D.
Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and
maintenance activities.
E.
Install ductwork to coordinate with other trades and maintain maximum headroom at all times.
F.
Conceal ductwork above ceiling where applicable unless otherwise noted.
G.
Set plenum doors 6 inches to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swings so that differential
pressure holds door in closed position.
H.
Connect supply air devices to low pressure ducts with 5 foot-0 inch maximum length flexible
duct. Hold in place with steel drawband with worm gear operator.
I.
Apply duct lining to sheet metal with Mon-Eco Industries MEI 22-68 water based, fire resistant
adhesive on 100% of duct surface, hold in place with mechanical fasteners on 12 inch centers.
Point interior joints to smooth surface and butter all edges upon assembly with same mastic.
Repair any damage to lining prior to or during fabrication and/or installation of ductwork.

DUCTWORK
15890 - 5
3.2
TESTING FOR LEAKAGE

A.
B.
C.
General
1.
Test 4 inch w.c. and higher pressure classification ductwork for leaks prior to insulation.
Test arbitrary sections of lower pressure classifications ductwork as selected by Architect.
2.
Ductwork pressure tests shall be approved by Architect or Owner prior to installation of

insulation.
Equipment
1.
Portable rotary type blower with control damper; sufficient capacity to properly test
reasonably large duct system section.
2.
Orifice assembly consisting of straightening vanes and calibrated orifice plate mounted in
straight tube with properly located pressure taps.
3.
U-tube manometers to measure pressure drop across calibrated orifice and measure
S.P. in duct being tested.
Testing Pressures and Maximum Permissible Leakage

1.
Initial testing pressure: 50% in excess of design duct pressure classification.
2.
Leak testing pressure: 25% in excess of design duct pressure classification.
3.
Maximum leakage rate shall comply with minimum leakage classification listed in Article
2.03, Fabrication.
END OF SECTION

DUCTWORK
15890 - 6
SECTION 15900
TEMPERATURE CONTROL (ELECTRIC)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
A.
Section.
B.
Approved Equipment Manufacturers: Honeywell, Johnson Service Co., Penn, Powers or

Robertshaw.
C.
Temperature control system shall be of the electric or electronic type, with electric or electronic
components to comprise a complete system, furnished and installed, by Mechanical Contractor,
connected by the Electrical Contractor, put into operation and adjusted under operating
conditions, and carefully coordinated with Mechanical and Electrical Contractors.
D.
System shall include all valves, thermostats, motorized dampers, damper motors, controllers
and other control devices shown on drawings or as specified. All control devices shall be
connected complete to perform the functions indicated, so as to operate in the required
sequence.
E.
All temperature control bulbs and thermometers sensing air temperature shall be properly
located to best compensate for possible stratification of air in the system.
F.
All automatic control dampers, unless otherwise specified, shall be furnished and installed by
Mechanical Contractor.
1.2
SUBMITTAL
A.
Submit for approval four (4) sets of brochures including descriptive literature, control wiring
diagrams, damper schedules.
B.
After approval, this Contractor shall furnish a sufficient quantity of drawings to all crafts involved
and shall make certain they are familiar with all work they must perform in conjunction with the
control system.
1.3
A.
GUARANTEE
The control system shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer for a period of one (1) year from
date of acceptance by the owner. During this period, the manufacturer shall furnish all labor
and material necessary to the satisfaction of the Owner, assuming such material and
workmanship is necessary because of original defects.


15900 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
CONTROL COMPONENTS
Controllers: Thermostats and other controllers shall be solid state devices providing full
proportional control, either direct or reverse action, or both as required for sequential control.
Control supply voltage shall normally be 24 volt, and control signal voltage 0-10 volt DC.
THERMOSTATS
A.
Thermostats shall be complete with automatic heating-cooling changeover, night set back
control, and "on-off" fan switch. U.L. Listed.
B.
Automatic changeover thermostats shall be Honeywell T7300A1005 with Q7300B1008 subbase, or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WIRING
A.
All control wiring and conduit shall be installed by the Electrical Contractor. All costs of controls,
wiring, conduit, and associated labor shall be included in electrical bid, except as otherwise
noted.
B.
Control wiring, conduit, fittings, etc. shall be furnished in accord with requirements of electrical
section of the specifications. All necessary control wiring and interlocks not shown on electrical
drawings to be provided by Electrical Contractor.
C.
All electric wiring shall be performed in accord with National Electrical Code and local
standards.
END OF SECTION


15900 - 2
SECTION 16010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4

General Requirements and applicable provisions elsewhere in the contract documents
SUMMARY
A.
The General Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions of the General Contract,
and requirements of other Divisions apply to work under this Division.
B.
Provide labor, materials, temporary facilities, equipment and services to install electrical
systems as indicated or required, which includes but is not limited to, masonry, excavation
and backfill, concrete, carpentry, painting, conduit sleeves and supports, anchors, vibration
and sound isolation, access doors, cutting and patching, and similar work.
C.
Provide temporary electricity for electrical work and the work of other trades.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The manufacturer's material or equipment listed first in the Specifications or on the Drawings
are types to be provided for establishment of size, capacity, grade and quality.
B.
Additional manufacturers materials or equipment listed are considered to be "other

acceptable" manufacturers, and the cost of changes in construction required by their use
shall be borne by this Contractor.
C.
Review of Submittals for equipment supplied is mandatory as a condition of acceptance of

work. Installation of equipment prior to review shall be at Contractor's risk.
INTENT AND INTERPRETATIONS

A.
It is the intent of these Drawings and Specifications to result in a complete electrical

installation in complete accordance with applicable codes and ordinances.
B.
Neither the professional activities of the Engineer nor the presence of the Engineer or its
employees and subconsultants at a construction/project site shall relieve the Contractor of its
obligations, duties, and responsibilities including, but not limited to, construction means,
methods, sequence, techniques, or procedures necessary for performing, superintending,
and coordinating the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
C.
Drawings are diagrammatic in character and do not necessarily indicate every required
junction box, pull box, ell, etc. Items not specifically mentioned in the specification or noted
on the Drawings, but which are obviously necessary to make a complete working installation,
shall be included.
D.
Drawings and Specifications are complementary. Whatever is called for in either is binding
as though called for in both. The more stringent requirements shall govern.


16010 - 1
E.
Drawings shall not be scaled for rough-in measurements or used as submittals. Where
drawings are required for these purposes or have to be made from field measurements, take
the necessary measurements and prepare the drawings.
F.
Symbols used on the Drawings are defined in the Electrical Legend on the Drawings.
Symbols indicated on the Legend may not necessarily be required for the Project.
G.
Prior to ordering equipment, determine that equipment shall adequately pass through
building openings and passage ways providing unobstructed access to final equipment
location. Equipment shall be manufactured and shipped in sections for assembly in final
equipment location when inadequate building openings and passage ways limit access.
Submittals shall indicate sectionalized manufacture of equipment.
H.
Before ordering equipment and before work is installed, determine that equipment shall
properly fit the space; that required clearances can be maintained and that electrical
equipment can be located without interferences between systems, with structural elements
or with the work of other trades.
I.
If conflicts are discovered in Contract Documents as work progresses, a set of prints marked
with red pencil showing recommended modifications shall be submitted to the Architect for
approval prior to installation.
J.
The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of circuits and outlets, locations of switches,
panelboards and other work. However, rearrangement and recircuiting shall not be
permitted without specific acceptance.
K.
Incidental equipment such as tools, scaffolding, consumable items, testing equipment,

appliances and the like shall be provided whether listed or not. Labor, fees, licenses, start-up
and checkout services shall also be provided.
L.
The terms "the Contractor" or "this Contractor" when used in this Division of specifications,
shall be construed to mean Contractor for electrical work.
M.
Instructions such as "provide the outlets..." shall mean the same as though the words "This
Contractor shall" preceded each instruction. "Provide" shall mean "furnish and install."
Where the words "accepted" or "acceptable" are used, such "accepted" or "acceptable"
action by the Engineer denotes that the work or equipment item is in conformance with the
design concept of the Project and, in general, complies with the pertinent information given in
the Contract Documents.
N.
In the event that discrepancies exist or required items or details have been omitted, notify the
Architect in writing of such discrepancy or omission at least five days prior to bid date.
Failure to do so shall be construed as willingness to supply necessary materials and labor
required for the proper completion of this work. For discrepancies which are not reported by
Contractor the most stringent requirement shall apply.
O.
In the event that additional information is required during construction, request such
information from the Architect in writing prior to performing related work. The request for
information shall include an explanation of the information required including references to
related portions of the Documents and Contractors recommendations.


16010 - 2
1.5
1.6
1.7
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
Examine the premises and become familiar with existing conditions prior to bidding. No
allowance shall subsequently be made for not following this procedure.
B.
Protect work, materials, and equipment against theft, injury, or damage until it has been
installed, tested, and accepted.
C.
Be responsible for damage to the property of the Owner or to the work of other trades due to
the electrical work during the construction and warranty period.
D.
Ascertain the scope of other trades' responsibilities and determine if the installation of
proposed equipment shall affect the operation or code compliance of equipment. Relocate,
modify or otherwise revise equipment as required to maintain operational integrity and code
compliance.
E.
Be responsible for the safety of the workers and others on the construction site.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Errors and omissions in the Contract Documents do not relieve the Contractor from providing
the work in accordance with regulatory requirements.
B.
Execute and inspect work in accordance with Underwriters, local and state codes, rules and
regulations applicable to the trade affected as a minimum, but if the plans or specifications
call for requirements that exceed these rules and regulations, the greater requirement shall
be followed. Follow requirements of IBC, UBC, NFPA, NEC, OSHA, NEMA, ANSI, UL,
EIA/TIA, and applicable state, local or federal specifications.
C.
Comply with standards in effect at the date of these Contract Documents, except where a
standard or specific date or edition is indicated.
D.
Conform to guidelines and requirements of local utility companies.
E.
The Owners Standards shall be considered part of these Construction Documents. Contact
the Architect for details regarding the acquisition of these Owner Standards.
PERMITS AND FEES

A.
Obtain permits required for the electrical work on this Project.
B.
Pay fees, including service installation and connection charges, and permit fees.
C.
No work shall be started prior to obtaining necessary permits and payment of required fees.
Work installed prior to obtaining proper permits shall, if required by permitting authority, be
redone in compliance with requirements.
D.
Notations made on permit or review documents shall be observed. Additional requirements

noted by jurisdictional authority shall be made part of the requirements for construction of the
Project. Additional costs for implementing jurisdictional authority's requirements, if any, shall
be submitted to the Architect prior to construction for review.


16010 - 3
1.8
1.8
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Material and equipment used in bids shall be as specified. Proposed substitutions shall be
reviewed after award of contract during submittal review. Proposed substitutes shall be
clearly labeled as a substitute. Submittals shall include data necessary for complete
evaluation of the proposed substitution. Substitution materials and equipment used in bids
shall be at Contractor's risk, and as such are subject to rejection during submittal review.
The Contractor shall be responsible for fees for re-design incurred by the Engineer resulting
from the use of substitution materials. Such extra fees shall be deducted from payment to
the Contractor.
B.
Where "other acceptable" manufacturers are named, their products may be used provided
they totally meet the Specifications and are dimensionally suitable and operationally identical
to the specified item. The decision as to whether or not such items are equal to the specified
items shall be made by the Architect during submittal review.
SUBMITTALS
A.
The purpose of Submittals is to ensure that Contractor understands design requirements and
demonstrates understanding by indicating and detailing intended materials, methods, and
proper installation practices. If discrepancies between Submittals and Contract Documents
are discovered either prior to or after Submittals are reviewed, requirements of Contract
Documents shall take precedence. Submittals which are submitted, but which are not
required by Contract Documents, shall be returned Not Reviewed.
B.
Review of Submittals and action recommended as result of review is a courtesy extended to

Contractor by Engineer. This review is intended to minimize delivery to job site and
installation of materials and equipment that do not meet intent of Construction Documents.
Submission of material for review does not alter Contractor's obligation to follow intent of
Construction Documents, nor Contractor's responsibility to comply therewith regardless of
action noted in Engineers review.
C.
Submit a schedule indicating items to be submitted with respective dates prior to submittals.
Submittals shall be submitted to allow the Engineer's possession of such for a minimum of
one weeks.
D.
Product data submittals shall include catalog cut-sheets, manufacturer's data sheets, written
descriptions, specification sheets detailing the associated product, item, assembly and
installation. Highlight characteristics and features within product data submittals with a
yellow highlighting marker to identify compliance with the Drawings and Specifications.
Indicate characteristics and features which are missing or vary from the Drawings and
Specifications.
E.
Submittals include details, installation drawings, assembly drawings, fabrication drawings,

diagrams, etc., which show adaptation or installation of Contractor-furnished products or
materials for overall Project. Electronic files, if required for preparation of Submittals, shall be
compatible with software and software version as decided by Architect at time of Submittal
production. Electronic files if required for preparation of Submittal may be obtained from
Architect at which time an indemnification form releasing the Architect and Engineer from
liability for the Contractors record drawing changes on such files shall be executed. Include
the following:
1.
Legend: Match Contract Documents.


16010 - 4
1.9
2.
Format: Sheet size to match Contract Documents with title block indicating Project
name, manufacturer's name and logo, date of submittal, content of sheet, and sheet
number.
3.
Wiring and Control Diagrams: System and equipment wiring diagrams and control
diagrams include multiple floor and building separation lines, sizes of conduits, size
and number of conductors in each conduit, wiring color code, and identification of
terminals and interconnections. Differentiate clearly between factory and field
installed wiring. Make diagrams specific to this Project.
4.
Floor Plans: Plan titles, scales, north arrows, column lines, and room names and
numbers shall match Contract Documents.
F.
Submit samples of equipment as indicated or requested.
G.
Prior to ordering equipment or beginning installation work, assemble, prepare, and submit
shop drawings required for Project. Submit Submittals as required by individual Sections of
Specifications. As a minimum, provide product data submittals for equipment indicated on
the Drawings whether mentioned in these Specifications or not.
H.
Contractor shall thoroughly check Subcontractors' or vendors' Submittals and, after

approving Submittals , provide Submittals for review. Partial or incomplete submittals will
not be reviewed by the Architect and will be returned Not Reviewed. Submittals that do not
bear Contractor's review stamp shall be returned Not Reviewed.
I.
Each set of Submittals submitted or re-submitted shall bear a unique Contractor's submittal
number. Submit a minimum of seven copies, two of which will be retained by the Engineer.
After review, Submittals shall be returned together with Submittal Review Sheet which
indicates comments on Submittals with specific actions such as: No Exception Taken; Make
Corrections Noted, Re-submittal Not Required; Make Corrections Noted, Re-submittal
Required; Rejected; Not Reviewed. Continue to re-submit Submittals until No Exception
Taken or Make Corrections Noted, Re-submittal Not Required action is indicated. Provide a
copy of the original submittal review comments for re-submitted items.
J.
The Contractor shall be responsible for extra fees incurred by the Engineer resulting from
subsequent review(s) of submittals which fail to meet the requirements herein. Such extra
fees shall be deducted from payment to the Contractor.
RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Keep in custody during entire period of construction, a current set of documents indicating
changes that have been made to the Contract Documents. Changes to be noted on the
documents shall include but shall not be limited to, panelboard, luminaire, equipment, and
other schedules; circuiting; equipment, luminaires, or conduit located more that 2 feet (0.61
meters) from where shown on Drawings; electrical equipment ratings; modifications to
Specifications. Incorporate Addenda, accepted Alternates, Change Orders, and other
Document revisions which occurred after the award of the General Contract or the start of
construction activities into the Record Documents. Notations and changes shall be done in
a neat and legible manner in accordance with Architect's instructions. Changes shall be
noted in red, deletions in green, and notes in blue.
B.
At the completion of the Project, mark equipment designations on the documents.


16010 - 5
Designations shall match the engraving on the tags installed as called for elsewhere in these
specifications.
C.
1.10
1.11
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS

A.
Make provisions for receiving and storing materials, including Owner furnished materials to
be installed under this Division. Carefully mark and store materials. Carefully check and
inspect materials furnished for installation, and furnish a receipt acknowledging acceptance
of delivery and condition of the materials received. Do not use received materials which
contain cracks, dents, abrasions, or other defects. Mark such materials rejected and remove
from site or return to supplier for replacement.
B.
Protect materials and equipment from physical damage, construction dirt, and the elements
from the time they are delivered until final acceptance. The Contractor installing the
equipment or materials shall be responsible for their protection.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
1.12
The Contract shall not be considered completed until these Record Documents have been
reviewed and accepted by the Architect.
Furnish extra materials, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with
labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner.
COORDINATION
A.
Schedule work to coordinate with that of other trades to minimize delays.
B.
Coordinate service installations requirements with the local serving utility companies.
C.
Coordinate with Owner and utility companies outages due to interfacing electrical equipment.
Outages must be scheduled at least five days in advance and shall be at a time and duration
acceptable to the Owner. Outages at a time other than normal working hours, shall not entitle
the Contractor to additional overtime or compensation beyond that in the bid.
D.
Locations of devices, outlets, etc., as shown on the Drawings are approximate unless
dimensioned or otherwise noted. Where locations of devices, outlets, etc., are dimensioned
or noted on the Drawings, verify location with Architect's representative or with equipment to
be supplied. Exact locations of devices, outlets, etc., shall be coordinated with field
conditions. Ensure that switches or other electrical devices are mounted such that they are
not "trapped" behind opened doors or otherwise rendered inaccessible, regardless of
locations indicated on Drawings.
E.
Where locations of devices and equipment are not specifically mentioned in the
specifications or indicated on the Drawings, verify locations with Architect or Owner prior to
rough-in.
F.
Prior to rough-in for service to equipment furnished or provided by others, coordinate with
other trades and Owner to verify rough-in locations, connection requirements, electrical
service to equipment size and characteristics, and obtain a schedule of equipment electrical
loads. Schedules shall be for verifying electrical services, controls, disconnects, fuses, and
overload protection. Coordinate with Architect, authority having jurisdiction, and other
appropriate Divisions as needed.


16010 - 6
1.13
1.14
G.
Verify the physical dimensions of each item of electrical equipment to fit the available space
and promptly notify the Architect prior to roughing-in if conflicts appear. Be responsible for
coordination of equipment to the available space and to the access routes through the
construction. Confer and cooperate with other trades and coordinate the work in proper
relation with theirs. Coordinate ceiling cavity space carefully with other trades.
H.
Refer to Section 15010 and the Mechanical and Electrical Coordination Schedule for
coordination of electrical and mechanical work.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A.
Make up the operating and maintenance manuals as specified and submit no later than 2
weeks prior to the completion of the Project.
B.
Information contained in the operating and maintenance manuals consist of submittal

materials reflecting equipment as supplied and installed, test reports, warranties, description
of required testing and testing methods, description of routine maintenance, cleaning,
adjustments, and service required, suggested frequency of testing and maintenance, and
recommended replacement parts with a list of names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
service organizations that carry stock of such replacement parts. Manuals shall be 8-1/2
inch x 11 inch (21.59 cm x 27.94 cm) in size. Catalog pages and data in manuals shall be
neat, clean copies. Larger drawings shall be accordion folded to above size. An index shall
be provided which shall list contents in an orderly manner. Each copy of the operating and
maintenance manual shall be bound in hard back or loose-leaf binder with hard cover, shall
be adequately labeled for identification, and shall include plastic tabs coordinated with Index.
Provide a separate tabbed section, with a list of testing required to maintain warranty for
products and systems provided as part of this project.
C.
Submit one copy of the manual to the Architect for review prior to preparation of final copies.
After review, make changes as noted and prepare 3 final copies of manual to be turned over
to the Owner.
D.
This contract shall not be considered completed nor shall final payment be made until
specified material, including test reports and warranties are received in this operating and
maintenance manual and the manual is approved by the Architect.
ABBREVIATIONS
A.
These specifications include conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning
of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions
are as follows:
1.
Abbreviated Language: Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.

Words implied, but not stated, shall be interpreted as the sense requires. Singular
words shall be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where
applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
2.
Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards
are frequently abbreviated. Where abbreviations and acronyms are used, they
mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-generating
organization, authorities having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context
of the text provision.


16010 - 7
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
STANDARDS
A.
Unless otherwise specified, materials and equipment shall be of domestic (USA)

manufacture.
B.
Unless otherwise specified, materials and equipment shall be the manufacturer's current
model and bear manufacturer's name and model number.
C.
All electrical equipment shall be listed and labeled with the Underwriters Laboratory tag or
other listing as approved by the local jurisdictional authority. Custom designed items shall be
fabricated of UL approved materials and UL listed as a complete assembly as required.
D.
Throughout Specifications, various materials, equipment, apparatus, etc., are specified by

manufacturer, brand name, type or catalog number. Such designations are to establish
standards of desired quality and construction and shall be the basis of the bid. Substitutions
shall be allowed only as specified herein.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
GENERAL
A.
Workmanship shall be first quality throughout and shall be in complete accordance with the
applicable codes. The appearance of the work shall be of equal importance to its operation.
Lack of quality workmanship shall be considered sufficient reason for rejection of a system in
part or in whole.
B.
All ground- or floor-mounted electrical distribution equipment, including switchboards,

distribution panels, motor control centers, transfer switches, generators, and transformers,
shall be installed and firmly anchored to a 4 inch high (10.16 cm) concrete housekeeping
pad. Pad shall extend no more than 2 inches beyond the equipment footprint.
SUPERVISION
A.
Supervise work so it shall proceed in proper sequence without delay to other trades. The
superintendent shall be on the Project site for the duration of the Project to ensure that
Contract Documents are being followed. A ratio of not less than 1:1 shall be maintained
between journeymen and apprentices.
B.
Submit resume of qualifications and experience of the superintendent for review by the
Architect. Superintendent shall have as a minimum five years of continuous experience on
projects of similar size. Resume shall include a listing of experience, projects, and
references. Superintendent for this Project may not be changed without approval.
C.
The Architect may have an observer on the site whose interpretations of the Contract
Documents shall be followed.
HOUSEKEEPING
A.
At the conclusion of each day's work, remove empty boxes, crates and rubbish and leave the
area where the work has been done broom clean.


16010 - 8
3.4
DEMOLITION
A.
Provide labor, materials, equipment, and services for existing electrical equipment which is to
be removed, abandoned, or relocated.
B.
Comply with State and Federal regulations for the removal, hauling and disposal of materials.
C.
Verify that feeders and branch circuits have been disconnected and safely capped from
equipment to be relocated, demolished or removed.
D.
Remove existing electrical equipment as noted on the drawings or as otherwise required.
E.
At the completion of remodel work or when directed by the Architect stored items not reused
or retained by the Owner shall be removed from the premises. Disposition of items not
reused shall be by the direction of the Architect.
F.
Lamps, ballasts, and other electrical equipment which contain hazardous materials shall be
properly removed and disposed. Pay fees for disposal.
G.
Report the existence of hazardous materials unrelated to electrical equipment to the

Architect immediately.
H.
The locations of existing equipment, circuiting, etc. shown on the drawings have been taken
from existing drawings and obtained from field surveys and are, therefore, only as accurate
as that information. Existing conditions shall be field verified with necessary adjustment
being made to the drawing information.
I.
Where core drilling or concrete demolition is required as work of this trade or other trades,
determine the location of existing encased or buried conduits and circuits in the area of the
work using metal detectors, circuit tracers and judgment prior to commencement of drilling or
demolition. Turn off all circuits which might feed through conduits and wiring in the area of
the work.
J.
Where items are indicated on the drawings to be removed, removal of the item shall include
removal of power circuits, control circuits, overcurrent devices, grounding, accessory
devices, raceway and hardware unless noted otherwise.
K.
Ensure that the continuity of feed through circuits is maintained.
L.
Ensure that no electrical boxes or equipment other than conduit and connectors are
rendered inaccessible by proposed construction. Relocate such equipment as required.
M.
Tag circuits remaining in junction boxes with Brady wire markers as to circuit number, panel,
or device feeder.
N.
Leave sufficient slack wire in junction boxes for future reconnection where required.
O.
Where circuits to be removed are exposed during construction, completely remove wire,
conduit, and supports as required. Where circuits to be removed are concealed or
embedded in concrete, remove wiring back to junction point.


16010 - 9
3.5
3.6
3.7
P.
Abandoned conduit, left in place, shall have pull tape installed and shall be labeled at each
end identifying origin, destination and abandonment. Labels shall be semi-permanent.
Q.
Where circuits which are not in conduit or raceway exist in future air plenum areas, verify that
insulation is properly rated for plenum application. Where such non-rated circuits exist,
notify the Architect immediately for instructions.
R.
Remove abandoned conduit, wire and electrical equipment.
S.
The record drawings shall reflect any existing electrical locations different from what is shown
on the drawings.
EQUIPMENT MODIFICATION
A.
Where existing equipment is to be modified, furnish materials and labor necessary to modify
or add to the equipment. Modifications shall be done neatly with factory parts and
assemblies approved for the application. Provide equipment supplier with information of
existing equipment, including serial number, date of manufacture, and special requirements.
Modification shall in no way jeopardize the compliance of existing equipment with governing
codes, underwriters listings or other regulations.
B.
Field verify existing equipment with submittals to ensure modifications are workable. Report
to the Architect discrepancies between designed requirements and existing conditions.
C.
Modifications that are not factory approved shall be submitted to the Architect for review prior
to modification.
D.
All new and modified electrical equipment, such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial
control panels, meter socket enclosures, and motor control centers, that are in other than
dwelling occupancies, and are likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or
maintenance while energized shall be field marked to warn qualified persons of potential
electric arc flash hazards. The marking shall be located so as to be clearly visible to
qualified persons before examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the
equipment per NEC 2008, article 110.16.
EXISTING EQUIPMENT
A.
Revised distribution equipment shall have new identification plates indicating new conditions.
B.
Panelboards which have circuits affected by work shall be completely circuit traced and the
panelboard directories updated with the room and load served (i.e., RCPT-B250 through
B260, LTG-A65-A75, COFFEE-C180, RCPT-ROOF, etc.).
C.
Revised panelboard schedules shall be neatly typed on new cards and installed in each
revised panelboard.
D.
Where remodeling interferes with existing circuits and equipment which is not to be removed,
such circuits and equipment shall be reworked and relocated as required to complete the
Project. Circuit integrity of equipment in adjacent areas shall be left intact.
CUTTING, PATCHING, OPENINGS, SLEEVES, INSERTS AND HANGERS

A.
Furnish and install sleeves and boxes required for openings in the structure for installation of


16010 - 10
electrical work. Be responsible for proper placement of sleeves and boxes.
3.8
B.
Provide inserts and hangers required to support conduit, cables, boxes, fixtures, etc.
Provide independent support for all electrical equipment.
C.
Properly size and locate holes and chases required for work under this Division as
construction progresses. Before beginning sleeving or installation work, carefully study
Contract Drawings and check conduit, boxes and equipment locations for interference with
other trades. If conflicts are discovered in Drawings or as work progresses, a set of prints
marked with red pencil showing recommended installation methods shall be submitted to the
Architect for review prior to installation. Cutting, repairing and required structural reinforcing
for installation of this work shall be done in conformance with the Architect's directions.
Cutting shall not be done without the Architect's approval.
D.
Cutting of concrete or other building materials shall be avoided where possible. Have a
workman qualified in the electrical trade present at the pouring of concrete or the building of
masonry containing electrical work to avoid cutting of concrete or other building material.
E.
Sleeves and chases are prohibited in structural members except where approved by the
Architect in writing. If openings necessary for this work are not installed at the time of
construction, or if an opening is required in existing construction, provide the opening.
F.
Patching in every instance consists of completing the work to match and blend in with the
adjoining existing work insofar as methods, materials and colors, and workmanship are
concerned. Patches which are not properly blended shall be rejected and ordered redone.
Execute patching in full compliance with the provision of the Specifications relating to the
type of work involved by craftsmen qualified and skilled in the particular type of work
involved.
G.
Openings for electrical work shall be carefully caulked or grouted as required. Spare
conduits shall be tightly capped.
H.
Holes and voids created to extend electrical systems through fire rated floors, walls, and
ceilings shall be sealed with an intumescent material.
I.
Costs of cutting and patching caused by improper coordination shall be paid for by the
Contractor regardless of the responsibilities set forth in these Contract Documents for new
work.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A.
Labels shall be etched lamacoid tags, white with black core. Lettering shall be 1/4 inch (0.64
cm) upper-case, unless otherwise noted. Attach label tags to equipment with sheet metal
screws. Emergency equipment labels shall be the same as above except tags shall be red
with white core.
B.
Power distribution equipment furnished under Division 16 including, but not limited to, engine
generator systems, transfer switches, transformers, switchgear, switchboards, panelboards,
motor control centers, and disconnects are labeled to include the following:
1.
Key name as indicated on Drawings with 1/2 inch (1.27 cm) lettering.
2.
Ampere, voltage, phase, conductor color coding and AIC ratings.


16010 - 11
3.
3.9
Other labeling as indicated or required.
C.
Main and Branch disconnects for switchboards, distribution panelboards, and motor control
centers shall be clearly identified as to service frame size, circuit breaker trip setting or fuse
size and type.
D.
Label junction, splice and terminal box interiors and covers. Labeling shall be by way of
permanent marking pen and include panel name and circuit number. Labels shall be located
on the back interior surface of boxes. In finished areas locate labels on the interior surface of
covers. On junction boxes above ceilings or in unfinished areas, locate labels on the exterior
surface of covers.
E.
Label outlet box interiors. Labeling shall be by way of permanent marking pen and include
panel name and circuit number. Locate labels on the back interior surface of outlet boxes.
F.
The exterior surface of fire alarm system junction, splice and terminal box covers shall be
painted red.
G.
Unless otherwise indicated, wires and cables of each communication system shall have
unique colors which follow a color coding documented within the head-end equipment of
each system.
H.
Wire and cable identification shall be installed at points of termination in distribution

equipment, junction boxes, splice boxes, terminal boxes, outlets boxes, and load
connections. Such identification shall be by means of cloth, split sleeve or tubing type labels.
Feeder labels shall include name of equipment from which feeder originates, name of
equipment which feeder serves, and gauge of conductor. Wire and cables for branch circuit
identification shall include circuit number, panelboard name, and gauge of conductor.
I.
For exterior underground power, signal, and communication lines, install continuous
underground plastic line marker tape located directly above such lines. Marker shall be
permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape not less than 4 mils thick by 6
inches wide (0.102 mm thick by 152 mm wide) with an embedded continuous metallic strip or
core. Marker printing indicates type of underground line. Locate 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200
mm) below finished grade, unless otherwise indicated. Where multiple lines installed in a
common trench or concrete encased do not exceed an overall width of 16 inches (400 mm),
use a single line marker with printing indicating the multiple lines.
SPECIAL PROJECT PROVISIONS

A.
Overhead or Underground Power Service: The power utility company shall provide the
primary conductors, service transformer, current transformers, meter and meter wiring.
Contractor shall provide transformer pad, meter base, and other secondary work. Install
secondary service conductors only after conduit has been thoroughly cleaned. Final service
terminations to transformer shall be by power utility company.
B.
Overhead or Underground Communication Services: Contractor shall provide service

entrance raceways for service cable supplied and installed by the communication utility
company. Service entrance conduit shall be rigid metallic or rigid non-metallic type as
directed by communication utility company and of the size indicated. Service entrance
conduit shall be spaced a minimum of 1 foot (0.305 m) from the electrical service. Conduit
shall have pull cord installed. Contractor shall also provide backboards for the utility


16010 - 12
company's use as indicated or required. Backboards shall be 4'-0" x 8'-0" x 3/4" (1.22 m x
2.44 m x 1.9 cm) plywood. Mount backboards with 8-0 (2.44m) dimension oriented
vertically on wall and top 8-0 (2.44m) above floor. Paint backboards with three coats of
gray enamel.
3.10
3.11
C.
Other Communications Systems Raceways and Cable Supports: Provide a complete system
of raceways, cable supports, and outlets for the future installation of a communications
systems. Wall outlets shall be standard double gang boxes with single gang trim rings and
cover plate of same design and finish as specified herein. Cable supports in quantity and
routing indicated shall be 2 inch (5.08 cm) diameter galvanized wide base CableCat J-hooks
as manufactured by Caddy. Provide cable support mounting accessories as required.
Communication system raceway and cable support routing shall maintain 18 inches (45.72
cm) of clearance from luminaires while crossing perpendicular to lighting circuitry, maintain
12 inches (30.48 cm) clearance from power feeders and branch circuits, and maintain 4 feet
(1.22 m) clearance from motors and transformers. Conduits shall be sized as indicated or
required with 3/4 inch (DN21) as a minimum and include a #200 nylon pull cord. Conduit
runs shall not have more than the equivalent of three 90 degree bends between outlets or
pull boxes. Conduits shall be bushed.
D.
Wiring for Equipment Furnished by Others: Provide electrical services to equipment

furnished by others. Provide final connections unless otherwise noted. Where final
connections are to be made by others, install outlet box and pull in conductors leaving 8 inch
(20.32 cm) pigtails for each conductor. Conductors shall be taped and appropriate cover
plate installed over box. Control and alarm wiring for such equipment shall be provided by
the equipment supplier or trade providing equipment unless otherwise noted.
E.
Unless otherwise noted, provide 120 volt wiring to nearest panelboard, including circuit
breaker, conduit, wire, and connections for magnetic door holders, fire smoke dampers, and
fire alarm system remote power supplies. Provide control circuitry from the fire alarm control
panel. Coordinate quantity and location of fire smoke dampers with Division 15.
F.
Provide three phase digital recording circuit analyzer on indicated panelboard feeder(s) for a
period of thirty days prior to the start of construction to verify existing load. Circuit analyzer
shall record voltage, amperage, kVA, and power factor for each phase and average of all
phases. Analyzer shall also record a per day maximum demand (measure of average power
demand over a 15 minute period). The contractor shall compile a summary report listing
maximum readings and submit the report and tape to the Architect. Analyzer shall have
been calibrated in previous 60 days. Submit documentation of calibration along with load
tapes to Architect.
PAINTING
A.
Scratched, chipped, or otherwise marred electrical equipment shall be repainted to match

original finish at no additional cost to the Owner.
B.
Equipment received from manufacturer with a prime coat of paint shall be cleaned, sanded
and furnished with a final coat of paint.
C.
Panelboards, disconnects, and boxes for life safety systems including emergency power and
fire alarm equipment shall be painted red.
INSTALLATION


16010 - 13
3.12
A.
Install equipment and materials in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations unless

local codes or regulations take precedence.
B.
Install so that equipment can be easily serviced. Maintain, as a minimum, code required
clearances.
C.
Place or replace equipment identification in locations where they can be seen and read
without difficulty.
D.
Perform work in accordance with good commercial practice. The appearance of the finished
work shall be of equal importance to its operation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Arrange and oversee inspections by governing authorities. Upon completion of the work,
deliver certificates of inspection and final approval to the Architect.
B.
Testing of electrical systems shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations and in accordance with applicable codes and standards for that system as
required and as referenced in this Specification.
C.
Testing of electrical systems involving compliance to specific standards, including but not
limited to UBC, UFC, ANSI, NFPA, ICEA, NEC, IEEE, LPI, NETA, and OSHA shall require
the submittal of a completed test report, certified by the installer, testing agency or
manufacturer. Test reports shall be complete and in accordance with the appropriate
standard.
D.
Project site testing of equipment prior to installation, where called for in the specifications,
shall include performance testing to establish the applicability of equipment for its intended
purpose. Where required, Installer shall:
1.
Establish required test procedures from required standard or manufacturer's

recommendation.
2.
Provide necessary test equipment, power, consumables to perform test.
3.
Notify Architect of test schedules at least one week in advance of testing.
4.
Perform tests.
5.
Provide necessary documentation to Architect.
E.
Installation of work shall be observed by the Architect. Work found to be in non-compliance

with the specifications shall be redone. The Architect shall be consulted for direction for
questions regarding suitability of the installed work. The Architect shall be notified at least
one week prior to the covering up of work so that observation of work may be scheduled.
Work shall not be covered up or enclosed until work has been tested by Contractor and has
been observed by proper authorities including State/local inspectors and Architect. Should
work be covered up or enclosed before such observation or test, it shall be uncovered,
tested and reviewed and shall be restored by Contractor to finished condition at Contractor's
own expense.
F.
Final testing and start-up of electrical systems shall include the testing and checkout of


16010 - 14
equipment and systems to establish their proper capacity, operation, maintenance and code
compliance. Where required, Installer shall:
3.13
3.14
1.
Provide the services of manufacturer's representative for systems to be tested and

started up.
2.
Establish required test procedures from required standard or manufacturer's

recommendation.
3.
Provide necessary test equipment, power, consumables to perform test.
4.
Notify Architect of test schedules at least one week in advance of testing.
5.
Perform tests and start-up functions.
6.
Provide necessary documentation of completed tests and fully functional systems to

Architect.
COMPLETION
A.
Test systems and place in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to Owner.
B.
Instruct Owner's representative(s) once, in the presence of the Architect, on the proper
operation, testing, and maintenance of the electrical systems. As a minimum, participants
shall include contractor and major equipment manufacturers' representatives. Not less than
a total of four hours shall be allowed for an instruction period. Use final version of operating
and maintenance manual as a training aid. Instruction dates and times shall be coordinated
with the Owner. Instruction shall as a minimum include items contained in the operating and
maintenance manual.
C.
After tests and adjustments have been made and systems pronounced satisfactory for
permanent operation, refinish damaged finish and leave everything in proper working order
and of the intended appearance at the final completion of the Contract.
D.
On completion of work, remove tools, scaffolding, debris, etc., from the grounds and leave
the premises perfectly clean. Equipment and facilities shall be thoroughly cleaned inside
and out and residue removed. Equipment shall be turned over to the Owner in perfect,
unblemished condition. Remove temporary labels and stickers.
E.
Reestablish original grades, landscaping, and other grade finishes.
F.
Load balance test the distribution system. Unbalance between phases shall not exceed 10%
with full lighting and mechanical loads. Correct unbalanced load conditions exceeding this
limit. Corrections shall be indicated on Record Drawings.
PROJECT CLOSE-OUT
A.
Upon written request from the Contractor certifying that the work is complete and ready for
inspection, the Architect shall prepare punchlist of items determined to be incomplete or
otherwise not in compliance with intent of Contract Documents.
B.
When required, subsequent visit to review completion of punchlist work shall be made after
receipt of written statement from Contractor indicating punchlist work is complete. Include


16010 - 15
copies of intermediate observation reports and final punchlists with individual items initialed
by Contractor to attest that individual work items are completed.
C.
3.15
Contractor shall pay Architect's costs at the billing rates in effect at the time the services are
performed for subsequent punchlist visits required due to lack of completion of prior
punchlist.
WARRANTY
A.
Warranty materials, workmanship and the successful operation of equipment installed for a
period of 1 year from the date of acceptance of the entire work. Guarantee to repair or
replace at Contractor's expense, work which may show defect during that time, provided
such defect is, in the opinion of the Architect, due to imperfect material or workmanship and
not due to the Owner's carelessness or improper use.
B.
Provide testing and maintenance of equipment and systems per manufacturers

requirements during warranty period to adhere to warranty requirements.
C.
Exceptions - Incandescent and Fluorescent lamps shall be warranted for a period of one
month from date of acceptance.
END OF SECTION


16010 - 16
SECTION 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
A.
Provide complete raceway systems for conductors unless otherwise specified.
B.
Provide complete system of conductors as required for raceway systems. Where quantities
of conductors are not specifically indicated, provide necessary number to maintain circuits
and function.
C.
Provide metal boxes for use as outlet boxes, pull boxes, or junction boxes. Boxes to include
pressed steel boxes, masonry boxes, and weatherproof cast steel or aluminum boxes.
D.
Provide support for conduit, wireway, junction boxes, pull boxes, and related equipment.
E.
Provide fire sealing of holes and voids through fire rated barriers.
DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY
A.
B.
1.4

Wire and cable sizes indicated are copper. Aluminum may be used for service and feeder
conductor sizes #2 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated. Should aluminum be used,
the Contractor is responsible for determining revised:
1.
Conductor sizes to achieve the same ampacity and voltage drop as copper sizes
indicated.
2.
Raceway, boxes and equipment sizes and locations.
3.
Short circuit current values and AIC ratings of equipment.
Resolve to the satisfaction of the Engineer problems that are a direct result of the use of
aluminum conductors in lieu of copper.
DEFINITIONS
A. DEFINITIONS
1.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
2.
FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
3.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


16050 - 1
1.5
4.
LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
5.
RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
1.7
Conduit, fittings, and supports.

Wires, cables, connectors and splices.
Boxes
Fire seals
B.
Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts of electricity-metering

equipment.
C.
Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
D.
Design Data: Should aluminum wire and cables be used, provide a revised one-line and
partial plans indicating revised:
1.
Conductor, raceway, box and equipment sizes and locations.
2.
Fault calculations.
3.
AIC ratings of equipment.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to

metallic and nonmetallic electrical raceway.
B.
UL labels: Provide electrical raceways, boxes, conductors, and connectors which have been
approved, listed and labeled by UL.
C.
ANSI/ASTM Compliance: Provide electrical raceways and conductors which comply with
applicable portions of ANSI/ASTM standards for construction of raceways and conductors.
D.
NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Provide conductors which comply with applicable portions of

NEMA/ICEA standards pertaining to material, construction, and testing of conductors.
E.
Federal Specification: Provide electrical raceways and conductors which meet applicable
portions of Federal Specification.
F.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
G.
COORDINATION


16050 - 2
A.
Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work
and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical
installations that follow.
1.
Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other
structural components as they are constructed.
B.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning
before closing in the building.
C.
Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies.

1.
2.
D.
Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead

utilities and services, including provision for electricity-metering components.
Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company
providing electrical power and other services.
Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by
finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access
Doors."
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A.
2.2
Manufacturer with at least 5 years experience in manufacturing product.
CONDUIT
A.
Rigid metal conduit shall be steel, galvanized inside and outside. Factory made threads shall
be full cut and galvanized after threading. The conduit shall be UL listed and shall meet the
requirements of UL 6 and ANSI C80.1.
B.
Electrical metallic tubing shall be hot-dipped galvanized or electro-galvanized steel with an

inner coating to protect cables and aid pulling. The conduit shall be UL listed and shall meet
the requirements of UL 797 and ANSI C80.3.
C.
Flexible metal conduit shall be composed of one spirally wound continuous strip of
interlocked galvanized steel. The conduit shall conform to Federal Specification WW-C566C and shall meet the requirements of UL 1.
D.
Liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall be galvanized steel with an oil and sunlight resistant
polyvinyl chloride jacket bonded or extruded onto the exterior. Liquid tight flexible metal
conduit shall be approved for grounding. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall meet UL
Standard For Safety, UL 360.
E.
Rigid nonmetallic conduit, unless otherwise noted, shall be Schedule [40] [80] rigid plastic,
PVC rated for use with 90 degree C wire and shall be UL listed and conform to UL 651 and
NEMA TC-2.


16050 - 3
F.
2.3
2.4
Rigid nonmetallic type EB-20 conduit shall be ETL listed, tested to UL-651-A, and meet the
requirements of NEMA TC-6 and ASTM F-512.
CONDUIT FITTINGS
A.
Fittings for rigid metal conduit shall be galvanized or cadmium plated. Fittings shall be
threaded. Couplings shall be of galvanized steel. Locknuts and bushings shall be steel or
malleable iron. Bushings shall have nylon insulated throat.
B.
Connectors, couplings and combination couplings for EMT shall be steel set screw or steel
compression type. Insulated throat connectors shall be used for sizes 1 inch (DN27) and
smaller. Uninsulated connectors with insulated bushing shall be used for sizes larger than 1
inch (DN27).
C.
Fittings for flexible metal conduit and liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall be of a type
specifically designed for the purpose.
D.
Fittings for rigid nonmetallic conduits shall be of same material and manufacturer as conduit.
Non-metallic fittings shall be UL listed and conform to UL 514.
E.
Expansion fittings across structural joints shall be of a design to compensate for expansion
and contraction and shall be sealed to prevent entrance of water or moisture. Expansion
fittings shall be approved for grounding duty.
F.
Adapters for joints between PVC and steel conduits shall be UL listed Carlon E942 and E943
series.
WIRE AND CABLE

A.
Conductors shall be new and unused. Wire and cable shall be copper single conductor type
with 600 V insulation, unless otherwise noted. Conductor shall be soft annealed Class B, per
ASTM B-3 for solid wire and ASTM B-8 for stranded wire. Conductors shall be minimum
98% conductive.
B.
Aluminum conductors shall be an aluminum alloy that is listed or labeled by UL as

"component aluminum-wire stock (conductor material)." Type EC/1350 aluminum is not
acceptable. Conductors shall be "Stabiloy" as manufactured by Alcan.
C.
Number 10 AWG and smaller wire except for motor circuits shall be solid with Type THHN,
or THWN insulation. Larger wire and motor circuit feeders shall be stranded with Type
THHN, or THWN insulation. Conductors for service entrance use or where used
underground shall be type XHHW only. Grounding conductors shall be copper.
D.
Insulation shall be flame retardant, heat resistant polyvinyl chloride (PVC), ethylene
propylene (EP) or polyethylene (PE) with minimum insulation thicknesses per table 310-13 of
the NEC. The insulation shall conform to the requirements of UL 83 ICEA S-68-516 for EP,
ICEA S-61-402 for PVC and PE.
E.
Type THWN or THHN wire and cable shall have a outer nylon jacket conforming to UL-83.
Cables shall be manufactured to meet the standards of Insulated Cable Engineer's
Association (ICEA).


16050 - 4
2.5
2.6
F.
MC Cable shall be UL listed, and consist of color-coded insulated conductors wrapped

surrounded with a moisture resistant tape and enclosed in a galvanized steel interlocked
cladding. Each cable shall contain a full sized ground wire.
G.
NM cable shall be UL listed, and consist of color-coded thermoplastic insulated conductors

enclosed in a polyvinylchloride plastic overall jacket. Each cable shall contain a full sized
ground wire.
H.
All homeruns shall be in EMT. Electrical contractor shall obtain written approval from
design engineer for the use of type MC and type AC cabling. Type MC and AC cable
shall be permitted for branch circuit wiring in approved locations only and installed per
the latest adopted edition of the National Electrical Code.
I.
Wire-pulling lubricant shall be equal to Ideal "Aqua Gel CW" or Dow Corning compound #7.
CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A.
For solid wire size #10 and smaller, "Scotchlok" insulated twist-on connectors or
compression type, 600 V insulated or acceptable substitution.
B.
For stranded wire, "Burndy Hydent" hydraulic compression type, taped to 600 V insulation
level.
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A.
2.7
2.8
Provide code gauge sheet metal boxes with suitable covers, trims, etc. Boxes to be sized,
per the NEC, by number and size of conduits and conductors, unless otherwise noted.
OUTLET BOXES
A.
Boxes shall be zinc or cadmium-plated code gauge pressed steel and of the knock-out type.
Depth may vary to suit requirements of location.
B.
Boxes shall accommodate devices to be installed and shall be sized as required by the NEC
for number and size of conduits and conductors entering and leaving. Round boxes shall not
be permitted, except where specifically called for.
C.
Special oversized outlet boxes shall be code gauge steel and of the knock-out type. Boxes
shall have screw mounted covers for surface or flush mounting. Boxes shall be sized as
indicated or as required by the National Electrical Code. Special outlet boxes shall
accommodate the equipment served.
D.
Weatherproof boxes shall be cast aluminum with threaded hubs. Boxes shall have screw
mounted, gasketed covers.
SUPPORTS
A.
Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction.
B.
Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.


16050 - 5
C.
Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch- (14mm-) diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches (50 mm) o.c., in webs.
1.
2.
2.9
2.10
Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.

Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports.
D.
Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps,
threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and springsteel clamps or click-type hangers.
E.
Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
F.
Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded

body and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits.
Plugs have number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual
risers. Body constructed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.
G.
Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
H.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
I.
Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel.
CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A.
Single Runs: Galvanized malleable-iron conduit straps for surface mounting or 3/8 inch (0.95
cm) threaded rod with steel one bolt conduit clamps for all suspended runs.
B.
Multiple Runs: Channel support for surface mounting or trapeze style hangers of 1-5/8
inches by 1-5/8 inches (4.13 cm by 4.13 cm) galvanized steel channels, supported by 3/8
inch (0.95 cm) threaded rod for all suspended runs. Size hangers to allow for 25 percent
additional conduits.
C.
Supports and hardware shall be galvanized steel, except that high carbon spring steel
supports may be used in steel stud walls to support horizontal and vertical conduit up to 3/4
inch (DN21).
D.
Perforated plumbing tape is not permitted in any support application
E.
Conductors, No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid or stranded copper.
F.
Conductors, Larger Than No. 10 AWG: Stranded copper.
G.
Insulation: Thermoplastic, rated at 75 deg C minimum.
H.
Wire Connectors and Splices: Units of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class
suitable for service indicated..
ANCHOR METHODS
A.
Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts or spider type expansion anchors.
B.
Solid Masonry (excluding concrete): Steel expansion bolts.


16050 - 6
2.11
C.
New Concrete: Preset inserts with machine screws and bolts. Existing Concrete: Steel
expansion bolts or explosive powder driven inserts.
D.
Wood Surfaces: Wood screws.
E.
Steel: Welded threaded studs or galvanized steel clamps.
F.
Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
FIRE SEALS
A.
2.12
Fire seals for walls and floors shall be an intumescent material capable of expanding to fill
voids when exposed to temperatures beginning at 250 degree F (121 degree C). The seal
system shall be U.L. classified and have ICBO, BOCA, and SBCC ratings to 3 hours. The
seal system fire rating shall equal or exceed the fire rating of the penetrated surface to
comply with NEC Section 300-21.
EQUIPMENT FOR UTILITY COMPANY'S ELECTRICITY METERING

A.
Current- Transformer Cabinets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility

company.
B.
Meter Sockets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company.

1.
2.13
2.14
Housing: NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure.
CONCRETE BASES
A.
Concrete Forms and Reinforcement Materials: As specified in Division 3 Section "Castin-Place Concrete."
B.
Concrete: 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive strength as specified in Division 3

Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
TOUCHUP PAINT
A.
Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in
Division 9 Section "Painting."
1.
Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish
coats to suit the degree of damage at each location.
2.
Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for
timing and application of successive coats.
3.
Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

recommended by manufacturer.
4.
For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed

equipment finish


16050 - 7
5.
Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
TYPES OF CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A.
Buried raceways, except where concrete encased, shall be rigid metal conduit or rigid
nonmetallic conduit.
B.
Raceways embedded in concrete slabs at or below grade level shall be rigid nonmetallic
conduit, except in classified hazardous areas.
C.
Where rigid nonmetallic conduit is used for buried or encased and buried conduit runs, use a
minimum of 5 feet (1.52 m) of rigid metallic conduit at foundation penetrations.
D.
Raceways embedded in concrete slabs above grade level shall be rigid metal conduit,
electrical metallic tubing, or rigid nonmetallic conduit.
E.
Hazardous areas raceways shall be rigid metal conduit only.
F.
Raceways outdoors, and in locations subject to mechanical injury shall be rigid metal
conduit.
G.
Motor, vibrating equipment, and rooftop mounted heating, ventilating, and air conditioning
equipment connections shall be made with PVC jacketed liquid tight flexible metallic conduit
for the last 2 feet (0.61 m) with liquid tight connectors. Similar equipment connections in
environmental air plenums shall be made with flexible metal conduit.
H.
Raceways in other areas shall be electrical metallic tubing unless otherwise noted.
CONDUIT SIZES
A.
Minimum size allowable for galvanized rigid metal conduit or EMT shall be 3/4 inch (DN21).
B.
Minimum size allowable for liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall be 3/4 inch (DN21).
C.
Minimum size allowable for flexible metal conduit shall be 3/4 inch (DN21) except for
luminaire and control wiring for which 3/8 inch shall be allowed.
CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A.
Unless noted as aluminum, conductor and conduit sizes shown on Drawings are based on
the use of copper conductors.
B.
Wire and cable shall be run in metal raceways, except where nonmetallic raceways have
been specifically approved.
C.
Conduit shall be run parallel to walls, ceilings, and building lines wherever possible.
D.
Conduit shall be installed in finished walls and above suspended ceilings. Conduit routed
above suspended ceilings shall be surface mounted to the structural ceiling. When above
suspended ceilings, route conduits above suspended lay-in ceiling instead of suspended
hard ceilings wherever possible. Coordinate the routing of all other conduit with the Architect


16050 - 8
prior to rough-in.
E.
Where flexible metal conduit is used for equipment connections or other special (approved)
situations, ground continuity shall be provided in accordance with the NEC. Liquid tight
flexible metal conduit shall be used for flexible equipment connections in damp and wet
areas except where installed in environmental air plenums where flexible metal conduit shall
be used.
F.
Do not cut, notch or drill structural framing members for the installation of conduit without the
Architect's approval in each case.
G.
Where rigid metal conduit enters a box, fitting or device through a knockout, double locknuts
and an insulated metallic bushing shall be used. EMT shall terminate at knockouts with an
insulated throat fitting and one locknut. Connectors shall be made up tight to ensure
electrical continuity of the raceway system. Provide grounding bushings at each junction
box, pull box, or enclosure as required by the NEC.
H.
Rigid metal conduit shall be reamed after threads are cut. Joints shall be cut square and
shall butt solidly into couplings. Running threads shall not be permitted. Cut ends of EMT
shall also be reamed.
I.
Bends in rigid metal conduit and EMT runs larger than 1-1/4 inches (DN35) shall be
factory-made elbows unless otherwise specifically approved. Bends in 1-1/4 inch (DN35)
and 1 inch (DN27) runs shall be made in an approved bending machine or factory made.
Hickey bends shall not be permitted in conduits larger than 3/4 inch (DN21). Field bends
shall be in accordance with the requirements of the NEC.
J.
Conduits run in masonry shall be placed at least 1 inch (DN27) from the surface.
K.
Install expansion fittings where conduit crosses an expansion joint in structure or is in an

environment where temperature changes combined with conduit run length produce
expansion or contraction stress on the installation. Ends of conduit shall be provided with
insulated grounding bushings. Copper ground rings or a flexible bonding jumper, equal to at
least three times the nominal width of the joint, shall be provided to insure a continuous
ground between conduit and fitting.
L.
Provide separate code-sized ground conductor for each run of conduit. Conduit shall be
sized to accommodate ground conductor.
M.
Install under floor conduit in floor slab
N.
Install buried or encased and buried conduits in accordance with Sections 300-5 of the NEC.
Where possible, exterior conduits shall be buried at minimum of 30 inches (76.2 cm) below
grade or as indicated on the Drawings. Contractor shall verify with Architect, prior to
installation, exterior buried conduits not buried a minimum of 30 inches (76.2 cm) below
grade. Slope conduit to drainage point at least 4 inches (10.16 cm) per 100 feet (30.48 m).
O.
Adjustments in line and grade for direct buried or encased and buried conduits shall be via
long sweeps with minimum of 48 inch (121.92 cm) radius. Route such conduits below
existing or new gas lines.
P.
Multiple runs of conduit below grade under slab shall be installed in trenches backfilled with
sand. Each layer of conduit shall be installed separately, backfilled with sand, and


16050 - 9
compacted to the depth needed to provide continuous support for the next layer of conduit.
Sand shall be spread evenly and compacted to grade level for coverage of the final layer of
conduit. Offset joints to maintain uniform spacing between conduit.
3.4
Q.
Direct buried or encased and buried conduits shall first be swabbed out and then shall be
capable of passing a rigid ball 1/4 inch (0.64 cm) smaller than the inside diameter of conduit.
Such conduits for future use shall be capped to prevent entry of dirt and debris.
R.
Provide roof jacks for waterproofing conduit penetrations of roof. Conduit routing and
mounting on roofs shall be coordinated with the Architect. Unless otherwise indicated or
required, conduit shall be mounted 12 inches (30.48 cm) above the finished surface of flat
roofs on redwood or treated wood standoffs. Conduits shall be permanently attached to
standoffs. Standoffs shall rest freely on roof without being anchored to roof surface.
S.
Joints for rigid nonmetallic conduit shall be solvent cemented in strict accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
T.
Elbows from below grade conduit to above grade shall be PVC jacketed rigid metal conduit
and shall extend 6 inches (15.24 cm) above grade or finished floor. PVC corrosion resistant
tape shall [not] be permitted.
U.
Conduit extending from below grade to above grade, or conduit stubbing out of floors, shall
be rigid metal conduit for a minimum of 12 inches (30.48 cm) above grade or finished floor.
V.
Wherever conduits enter structure through foundation below ground level, grout around
conduit with waterproof grout or install wall and floor entrance seals. Seals shall be
OZ/Gedney WS series for new construction and OZ/Gedney CSM series for existing
structures.
W.
Conduits which pierce air tight spaces or plenums shall be sealed to prevent leakage.
X.
Care shall be taken to avoid placing conduits where they shall be subjected to excessive
heat. Locate conduits a minimum of 12 inches (30.48 cm) from flues, steam lines, hot water
lines, etc.
Y.
Conduit ends shall be capped using standard capped bushings to prevent entrance of
foreign materials during and after construction. When conduit installation is not in progress
close open ends of conduit with temporary plugs or caps.
Z.
Clean conduits prior to installation of wires. Install a nylon pulling line in each conduits run
assembly or after completion of each conduit run assembly for installation of wires or for
future use.
AA.
Wire shall not be installed until work which might cause damage to conduit or wire has been
completed.
BB.
PVC-coated rigid metal conduit shall be installed by a manufacturer-certified installer.
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A.
Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible
headroom.


16050 - 10
3.5
B.
Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other
building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other
installations.
D.
Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION

A.
Minimum wire size for lighting and power circuits shall be #12. Signal and control circuits
may use #14 except as noted. Wiring shall be installed in conduit, unless otherwise noted.
B.
Unless otherwise indicated, the maximum number of branch circuits allowed in each conduit
shall be three. In such cases, the branch circuits shall also be of different phases.
C.
Unless otherwise indicated or required, the following schedule shall be adhered to for
conductor sizes:
CIRCUIT OVERCURRENT
DEVICE RATING
COPPER
CONDUCTOR SIZES
20 A or Less
30 A
40 A
50 A
60 A
70 A
80 A
90 A
100 A
#12 AWG
#10 AWG
# 8 AWG
# 6 AWG
# 4 AWG
# 4 AWG
# 3 AWG
# 2 AWG
# 1 AWG
D.
To limit voltage drop, 120 V branch circuits with length from panel to first outlet exceeding 75
feet (22.86 m) shall be #10 or larger. For 277 V branch circuits with length from panel to first
outlet exceeding 175 feet (53.34 m) shall be #10 or larger. Wire sizes for other branch
circuits shall be sized to limit voltage drop to 3 %.
E.
Conductors from outlet to incandescent luminaire sockets and where run in fluorescent
luminaire channels shall be type THHN or as approved by the NEC.
F.
Solid wire #10 and smaller shall be connected as specified herein and shall be made tight in
conformance with manufacturers recommendations.
G.
Stranded wire shall be connected as specified herein and thoroughly taped with "Scotch" #33
or acceptable substitution approved equal electrical tape.
H.
Provide equipment lugs compatible with wire sizes indicated. Lugs shall not be rated less
than equipment rating. Provide box sizes to accommodate wire bending radius
requirements. Revise feeders as needed, maintaining the ampere rating and fault current
values indicated, for compatibility with equipment lugs, UL listings, or manufacturer's
recommendations.


16050 - 11
I.
Install wiring after concrete, plastering, etc., work is complete. Carefully pull wire unspliced
between outlets. Use approved pulling lubricant as necessary to prevent insulation cutting or
nicking. Branch circuit and feeder wiring shall be color coded in accordance with NEC and in
accordance with the following schedule:
Conductor Color Coding
Conductor Insulation Color
Conductor
J.
3.5
3.6
240/120V,
1 Phase
208Y/120V,
3 Phase
480Y/277V,
3 Phase
Phase A
Black
Black
Brown
Phase B
Red
Red
Orange
Phase C
---
Blue
Yellow
Neutral
White
White
White
Ground
Green
Green
Green
Motor circuits and feeders shall utilize stranded conductors.
PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION

A.
Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above removable ceilings or in electrical room, utility
rooms, or storage areas.
B.
Pull and junction boxes shall be supported independently of the conduit system and shall be
plumb. Supports shall be noncombustible and corrosion resistant. Suspended pull and
junction boxes shall be supported with threaded rod hangers and galvanized steel clamps, or
trapeze hangers of Unistrut or Kindorf channel.
C.
Pull and junction boxes shall be accessible.
OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION

A.
Each lighting outlet, switch, convenience outlet, communication outlet, or other

miscellaneous device shall be provided with a suitable box.
B.
Convenience outlets and telephone and data outlets shall be provided with double gang
boxes and single device trim plates where single devices are indicated.
C.
Where two or more similar type devices occur adjacent to each other, they shall be in a gang
type box with a gang type cover. Where different type devices occur adjacent to each other,
space outlet boxes so that finish plates shall be spaced 1 inch (2.54 cm) apart.
D.
Install outlet boxes securely in place, plumb with building lines in accordance with NEC.
Recess outside edge and associated trim plates from finished surface in accordance with
NEC. Provide blank covers, which match device plates in area, for outlets not specified with
covers. Outlets in plastered, paneled, and furred finishes shall be equipped with trim plates
and extensions of such depths as to bring outlets flush with final surface finish.


16050 - 12
1.2
1.3
E.
Wall outlets in exposed block or masonry construction shall have extension and device
mounting straps as required to provide only such wall openings as may be covered by device
plates without the use of mortar or other filler material.
F.
Sectional boxes shall not be used where outlet boxes occur in concrete.
G.
Boxes shall be supported independently of the conduit system and shall be plumb. Supports
shall be noncombustible and corrosion resistant. Suspended boxes shall be supported with
threaded rod hangers and galvanized steel clamps, or trapeze hangers of Unistrut or Kindorf
channel. Where the suspended ceiling system is approved for the application, outlet boxes
may be supported with bar hangers attached to the ceiling channels.
H.
Install additional straps or cross-bracing to ensure complete rigid installation in steel stud
system, bracing prior to installation of wall finish material.
I.
"Back-to-Back" outlets in the same wall, or "thru-wall" type boxes shall not be permitted.
Provide 12 inch (30.48 cm) (minimum) long nipple to offset outlets shown on opposite sides
of a common wall to minimize sound transmission.
J.
Outlet boxes on opposite sides of fire rated walls and partitions shall be separated by a
horizontal distance of at least 24 inches (60.96 cm).
K.
Unused knockouts in boxes shall be left sealed.
L.
Provide luminaire outlets with 3/8 inch (0.95 cm) no bolt fixture stud where required.
M.
Telephone outlets shall be mounted at the same height as adjacent receptacle outlets unless
noted otherwise.
N.
Refer to architectural plans for heights of outlets.
O.
Mount outlets horizontally or vertically as directed by the Architect. Above counter outlets
shall be mounted horizontally, unless otherwise noted or directed.
WIRING METHODS FOR POWER, LIGHTING, AND CONTROL CIRCUITS

A.
Feeders: Type THHN/THWN insulated conductors in raceway.
B.
Underground Feeders and Branch Circuits: Type THWN or single-wire, Type UF insulated
conductors in raceway.
C.
Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN insulated conductors in raceway.
D.
Remote-Control Signaling and Power-Limited Circuits: Type THHN/THWN insulated

conductors in raceway for Classes 1, 2, and 3, unless otherwise indicated.
WIRING INSTALLATION


16050 - 13
A.
Install splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent
or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
B.
Install wiring at outlets with at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack conductor at each outlet.
C.
Connect outlet and component connections to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical
connectors and terminals, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If
manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.
1.4
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION

A.
Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system
components.
B.
Dry Locations: Steel materials.
C.
Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.
D.
Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at
least four; minimum of 200-lb (90-kg) design load.
1.5
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.
B.
Multiple runs of conduits on ceilings and walls shall be mounted on Unistrut or Kindorf channels.
Perforated plumbers tape shall not be used.
C.
Caddy clips with support wires using not less than No. 14 wire may be used only for single
suspended runs of EMT or rigid conduit up to 3/4 inches (DN21).
D.
Conduit and box support installation shall prevent displacement of conduit in any direction.
E.
In steel stud walls, high carbon steel spring clips may be used to support conduits up to 3/4 inch
(DN21), and boxes to metal studs.
F.
Supports, whether for single or multiple runs, regardless of type shall have strength adequate to
support at least four times the present load, a minimum of 200-lb (90 kg) design load.
G.
Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide
U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for
securing hanger rods and conduits.
H.
Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.
I.
Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent
minimum in the future.
J.
Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.


16050 - 14
K.
Install 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise
indicated.
L.
Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be
used instead of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving
lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to
slotted channel and angle supports.
M.
Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried
entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.
N.
Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.
O.
Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support.
Support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers
are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an
approved fastener not more than 24 inches (610 mm) from the box.
P.
Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control
enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are
mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.
Q.
Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless coredrilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and firerated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during
erection of concrete and masonry walls.
R.
Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise
indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are
indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.

Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry
units.
New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.
Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.
Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with
lock washers may be used in existing concrete.
Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.
a.
7.
8.
9.
1.6
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe
straps, or other items.
Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.
Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its
proof-test load.
UTILITY COMPANY ELECTRICITY-METERING EQUIPMENT

A.
Install equipment according to utility company's written requirements. Provide grounding and
empty conduits as required by utility company.


16050 - 15
1.7
FIRESTOPPING
A.
1.8
CONCRETE PADS
A.
1.9
3.5
3.6
Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to
achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly.
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger,
in both directions, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's anchorage
recommendations and setting templates for anchor-bolt and tie locations, unless otherwise
indicated. Use psi specified in Division 3. 28-day compressive-strength concrete and
reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
CUTTING AND PATCHING

A.
Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to
permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
B.
Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed
surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and
refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
FIRE SEAL INSTALLATION
A.
Fire seal installations shall be performed per manufacturer's recommendations and shall
conform to standard UL fire stop system details.
B.
All cables or conduits shall be firmly secured and cleaned where penetrating the fire rated
surface. Fire seals shall not act as supports.
C.
Where cables are required to maintain specific distances between each other they shall be
firmly secured to maintain this distance at penetrations.
TESTING
A.
Service entrance conductors and other feeder conductors #2 AWG and larger shall be tested
by an independent test agency. Testing shall occur after installation and prior to termination.
B.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1.
Compare cable data with Drawings and Specifications.
2.
Inspect exposed sections of cables for physical damage and correct connection in
accordance with one-line diagram.
3.
Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using the following
methods.
a.
Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
b.
Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated


16050 - 16
torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data.

c.
C.
D.
Perform thermographic survey.
4.
Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation.
5.
Verify cable color coding with applicable specifications and the NEC.
Electrical Tests: Test Owner's electricity-metering installation for proper operation,

accuracy, and usability of output data.
1.
Perform insulation resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and
adjacent conductors. Applied potential shall be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable
and 1,000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute.
2.
Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections with lowresistance ohmmeter.
3.
Perform continuity test to ensure correct cable connection.
4.
Connect a load of known kW rating, 1.5 kW minimum, to a circuit supplied by the

metered feeder.
5.
Turn off circuits supplied by the metered feeder and secure them in the "off"
condition.
6.
Run the test load continuously for eight hours, minimum, or longer to obtain a
measurable meter indication. Use a test load placement and setting that ensure
continuous, safe operation.
7.
Check and record meter reading at end of test period and compare with actual
electricity used based on test load rating, duration of test, and sample
measurements of supply voltage at the test load connection. Record test results.
8.
Repair or replace malfunctioning metering equipment or correct test setup; then

retest. Repeat for each meter in installation until proper operation of entire
system is verified.
Test Values
1.
Compare bolted connection resistance to values of similar connections.
2.
Bolt-torque levels should be as specified by the manufacturer.
3.
Microhm or millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal range
as indicated in the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's data is not
available, investigate any values that deviate from similar connections by more the
50 percent of the lowest value.
4.
Minimum insulation-resistance values should not be less than 50 megohms.
5.
Investigate deviations between adjacent phases.


16050 - 17
E.
Provide written test report for review. As a minimum, test report shall include insulation
resistance test and bolted connection torque test results.
F.
Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:
1.
Raceways
2.
Building wire and connectors
3.
Supporting devices for electrical components
4.
Electrical identification
5.
Electricity-metering components
6.
Concrete bases
7.
Cutting and patching for electrical contruction
8.
Touchup painting
END OF SECTION


16050 - 18
SECTION 16060
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements
specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in
other Sections.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: For the following:

1.
C.
Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Ground rods
Test procedures used

Test results that comply with requirements
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
intended use.
1.
Comply with UL 467.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS


16060 - 1
A.

1.
2.2
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A.
Material: Copper
B.
Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.
C.
Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow stripe. On
feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow tape to
provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow.
D.
Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable
E.
Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following:

1.
2.
3.
G.
2.
3.
4.
H.
2.3
Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3

Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8
Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33
Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows:

1.
2.4
Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods:

a.
Lyncole XIT Grounding
b.
O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group
c.
Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell
Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch (6.4
mm) in diameter.
Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor.
Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with
copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) thick.
Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated
with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) thick.
Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulators.
CONNECTOR PRODUCTS
A.
Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of
conductors and connected items.
B.
Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors, or compression type.
C.
Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's
written instructions.
GROUNDING ELECTRODES


16060 - 2
A.
Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel

1.
Size: 5/8 by 96 inches (16 by 2400 mm) in diameter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A.
Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact
with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.
B.
In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.
C.
Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground
connections, except those at test wells.
D.
Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps.
E.
Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
1.
2.
F.
3.2
Use insulated spacer; space 1 inch (25.4 mm) from wall and support from wall 6 inches
(150 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
At doors, route the bus up to the top of the door frame, across the top of the doorway,
and down to the specified height above the floor.
Underground Grounding Conductors: Use tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.
Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade or bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank
when installed as part of the duct bank.
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A.
Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding
conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70
are indicated.
B.
Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits.
C.
Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from the grounding
bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on
busway.
D.
Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor

connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate grounding conductor from raceway and
from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of
the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways

unless they are designated for telephone or data cables.


16060 - 3
F.
Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted

electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond
conductor to each unit and to air duct.
G.
Water Heater: Install a separate equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater.
Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
H.
Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other
communication systems, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in
raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring
closet, and central equipment location.
1.
2.
3.3
Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding
conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch (6.4-by-50-by-300-mm) grounding bus.
Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
COUNTERPOISE
A.
3.4
Ground the steel framework of the building with a driven ground rod at the base of every corner
column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet (18 m) apart.
Provide a grounding conductor (counterpoise), electrically connected to each ground rod and to
each steel column, extending around the perimeter of the building. Use tinned-copper
conductor not less than No. 2/0 AWG for counterpoise and for tap to building steel. Bury
counterpoise not less than 18 inches (450 mm) below grade and 24 inches (600 mm) from
building foundation.
INSTALLATION
A.
Ground Rods: Install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and
located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes.
1.
2.
Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade,
unless otherwise indicated.
Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds,
except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel
or damaging copper coating.
B.
Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise
indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to
strain, impact, or damage.
C.
Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation
hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded
connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a
bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any
adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.
D.
Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from
building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to
building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding clamp
connectors. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to


16060 - 4
street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each
end.
E.
Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters.
Connect to pipe with grounding clamp connectors.
F.
Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Use braided-type bonding
straps.
G.
Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system upstream from equipment shutoff valve.
H.
Install one test well for each service at the ground rod electrically closest to the service
entrance. Set top of well flush with finished grade or floor.
I.
Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70,

Paragraph 250-81(c), using a minimum of 20 feet (6 m) of bare copper conductor not smaller
than No. 4 AWG. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet (6 m) long, coil excess conductor
within the base of the foundation. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four
locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building
grounding grid or to a grounding electrode external to concrete.
3.5
CONNECTIONS
A.
General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select

connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct
contact will be galvanically compatible.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make

contact points closer to order of galvanic series.
Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical
clamps.
Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and
mechanical clamps.
Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future
penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
B.
Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that

are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.
C.
Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type
grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged
pressure-type connectors.
D.
Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings

without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a
grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding
bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits with
grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Connections at Test Wells: Use compression-type connectors on conductors and make boltedand clamped-type connections between conductors and ground rods.


16060 - 5
F.
Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.
G.
Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct

circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by
connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a
visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.
H.
Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or

grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of
insulation and cable.
3.6
UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GROUNDING

A.
3.7
Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and counterpoise circling
pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with
substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Use tinnedcopper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for counterpoise and for taps to equipment ground
pad. Bury counterpoise not less than 18 inches (450 mm) below grade and 6 inches (150 mm)
from the foundation.

A.
Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

1.
2.
3.
After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance
level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test
wells. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after the last trace of
precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural
drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing
natural ground resistance. Perform tests, by the fall-of-potential method according to
IEEE 81.
Provide drawings locating each ground rod and ground rod assembly and other
grounding electrodes, identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record
of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each
location and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test
results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms

Equipment Rated 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms
Equipment Rated More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms
Substations and Pad-Mounted Switching Equipment: 5 ohms
Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms
Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify

Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.


16060 - 6
3.8
GRADING AND PLANTING

A.
Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by Work of this Section.
Reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. If sod has been removed, replace it as
soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of
dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition. Include application of topsoil,
fertilizer, lime, seed, sod, sprig, and mulch. Maintain restored surfaces. Restore disturbed
paving as indicated.
END OF SECTION


16060 - 7


16060 - 8
SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 -
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2

to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes electrical identification materials and devices required to comply with
ANSI C2, NFPA 70, OSHA standards, and authorities having jurisdiction.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with ANSI C2.
B.
C.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 and NFPA 70 for color-coding.
PART 2 -
2.1
PRODUCTS
RACEWAY AND CABLE LABELS

A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum
length of color field for each raceway and cable size.
1. Color: Black letters on orange field.
2. Legend: Indicates voltage and service.
B.
Pre-tensioned, Wraparound Plastic Sleeves: Flexible, preprinted, color-coded, acrylic band

sized to suit the diameter of the line it identifies and arranged to stay in place by pretensioned gripping action when placed in position.
C.
Underground-Line Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape.

1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick (152 mm wide by 0.102 mm thick).
2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.
3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.

16075 - 1
4. Printed legend indicating type of underground line.

D.
Aluminum, Wraparound Marker Bands: Bands cut from 0.014-inch- (0.4-mm-) thick
aluminum sheet, with stamped or embossed legend, and fitted with slots or ears for
permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors.
E.
Plasticized Card-Stock Tags: Vinyl cloth with preprinted and field-printed legends. Orange
background, unless otherwise indicated, with eyelet for fastener.
F.
Aluminum-Faced, Card-Stock Tags: Weather-resistant, 18-point minimum card stock faced

on both sides with embossable aluminum sheet, 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) thick, laminated with
moisture-resistant acrylic adhesive, punched for fasteners, and preprinted with legends to suit
each application.
G.
Brass or Aluminum Tags: 2 by 2 by 0.05-inch (51 by 51 by 1.3-mm) metal tags with stamped
legend, punched for fastener.
2.2
NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS

A.
Safety Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145.
B.
Engraved Plastic Nameplates and Signs: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate,
minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2
mm) thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
C.
Baked-Enamel Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for
fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for the application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm)
grommets in corners for mounting.
D.
Exterior, Metal-Backed, Butyrate Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, celluloseacetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors,
legend, and size required for the application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for
mounting.
E.
Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32,
stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
2.3
MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A.
Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable
ties.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm)
2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb (22.3 kg) minimum
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C)
4. Color: According to color-coding
B.
Paint: Formulated for the type of surface and intended use.

16075 - 2
1. Primer for Galvanized Metal: Single-component acrylic vehicle formulated for galvanized
surfaces.
2. Primer for Concrete Masonry Units: Heavy-duty-resin block filler.
3. Primer for Concrete: Clear, alkali-resistant, binder-type sealer.
4. Enamel: Silicone-alkyd or alkyd urethane as recommended by primer manufacturer.
PART 3 -
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
Identification Materials and Devices: Install at locations for most convenient viewing without
interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
B.
Lettering, Colors, and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other
designations with corresponding designations in the Contract Documents or with those
required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
C.
Sequence of Work: If identification is applied to surfaces that require finish, install

identification after completing finish work.
D.
Install painted identification according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before painting.
2. Prime surfaces using type of primer specified for surface.
3. Apply one intermediate and one finish coat of enamel.
E.
Color Banding Raceways and Exposed Cables: Band exposed and accessible raceways of
the systems listed below:
1. Bands: Pre-tensioned, wraparound plastic sleeves; colored adhesive tape; or a
combination of both. Make each color band 2 inches (51 mm) wide, completely encircling
conduit, and place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side.
2. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot
(15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in
congested areas.
3. Apply the following colors to the systems listed below:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Fire Alarm System: Red

Fire-Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow
Combined Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and blue
Security System: Blue and yellow
Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue
Telecommunication System: Green and yellow
F.
Caution Labels for Indoor Boxes and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Install pressuresensitive, self-adhesive labels identifying system voltage with black letters on orange
background. Install on exterior of door or cover.
G.
Circuit Identification Labels on Boxes: Install labels externally.

1. Exposed Boxes: Pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive plastic label on cover.

16075 - 3
2. Concealed Boxes: Plasticized card-stock tags.

3. Labeling Legend: Permanent, waterproof listing of panel and circuit number or
equivalent.
H.
Paths of Underground Electrical Lines: During trench backfilling, for exterior underground
power, control, signal, and communication lines, install continuous underground plastic line
marker located directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade.
Where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not
exceed 16 inches (400 mm) overall, use a single line marker. Install line marker for
underground wiring, both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.
I.
Color-Coding of Secondary Phase Conductors: Use the following colors for service, feeder,
and branch-circuit phase conductors:
1. 208/120-V Conductors:
a. Phase A: Black
b. Phase B: Red
c. Phase C: Blue
2. 480/277-V Conductors:
a. Phase A: Brown
b. Phase B: Orange
c. Phase C: Yellow
3. Factory apply color the entire length of conductors, except the following field-applied,
color-coding methods may be used instead of factory-coded wire for sizes larger than
No. 10 AWG:
a. Colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distance of 6 inches
(150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply
last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1-inch- (25mm-) wide tape in colors specified. Adjust tape bands to avoid obscuring cable
identification markings.
b. Colored cable ties applied in groups of three ties of specified color to each wire at
each terminal or splice point starting 3 inches (76 mm) from the terminal and spaced
3 inches (76 mm) apart. Apply with a special tool or pliers, tighten to a snug fit, and
cut off excess length.
J.
Power-Circuit Identification: Metal tags or aluminum, wraparound marker bands for cables,
feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and switchboard
rooms.
1. Legend: 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) steel letter and number stamping or embossing with legend
corresponding to indicated circuit designations.
2. Tag Fasteners: Nylon cable ties
3. Band Fasteners: Integral ears
K.
Apply identification to conductors as follows:

1. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Indicate source and circuit numbers.

16075 - 4
2. Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor with
source, voltage, circuit number, and phase. Use color-coding to identify circuits' voltage
and phase.
3. Multiple Control and Communication Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify each
conductor by its system and circuit designation. Use a consistent system of tags, colorcoding, or cable marking tape.
L.
Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs as follows:

1. Warnings, Cautions, and Instructions: Install to ensure safe operation and maintenance
of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plasticlaminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for
system or equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.
2. Emergency Operation: Install engraved laminated signs with white legend on red
background with minimum 3/8-inch- (9-mm-) high lettering for emergency instructions on
power transfer, load shedding, and other emergency operations.
M.
Equipment Identification Labels: Engraved plastic laminate. Install on each unit of

equipment, including central or master unit of each system. This includes power, lighting,
communication, signal, and alarm systems, unless units are specified with their own selfexplanatory identification. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2inch- (13-mm-) high lettering on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are
required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. Use white lettering on black field. Apply labels
for each unit of the following categories of equipment using mechanical fasteners:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures

Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items
Electrical switchgear and switchboards
Emergency system boxes and enclosures
Disconnect switches
Enclosed circuit breakers
Motor starters
Push-button stations
Contactors
Control devices
Transformers
Telephone switching equipment
Fire alarm master station or control panel
END OF SECTION

16075 - 5

16075 - 6
SECTION 16121
COMMUNICATION CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
A.
1.3

Provide a complete system of cables for the telephone service the building.
SHOP DRAWINGS AND DESCRIPTIVE DATA

A.
Shop drawings and descriptive data shall be submitted in accordance with Section 16010
and shall include, as a minimum, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Manufacturer's descriptive catalog data.

Termination data.
Testing data.
Maximum cable pulling tensions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
BUILDING TELEPHONE CABLE

A.
Cable from phone closets to telephone outlets shall be three pair, 22 AWG phone cable,
color coded and plenum rated having smoke characteristic in accordance with NEC
800-3(d). Strand insulation and outer jacket shall be "Kynar" (PVDF,) "Halon" (ECTFE,) or
"Teflon" (FEP).
B.
Cable from building service terminal board to building phone closets shall be polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) insulated No. 22 AWG singles in cabled multi-pair construction. Conductors
shall be copper. Outer jacket shall be polyvinyl chloride. Individual pairs shall be color
coded with industry standard colors.
C.
The cable shall meet applicable flammability criteria and local codes for the installed
environment.
D.
Building telephone cable shall be type Cat5e.
E.
Building data cable shall be type Cat6e.

16121 - 1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
GENERAL
A.
The maximum allowed pulling tension to the cable must not exceed the pulling tension
specified by manufacturer. Monitor the cable pull strength at all times by using a remote
sensing puller, strain gauge, or running line tensiometer.
B.
Observe minimum cable bending radius requirements as determined by the cable

manufacturer.
C.
Run cable continuously from terminating point to terminating point without splices. No
splices or cable tape shall be permitted.
D.
Support the cable on stands at all times when unreeling or pulling cable. Do not uncoil cable
from sides of stationary reels. Provide protection at all times when using pulling loops.
E.
Use a pulling lubricant to minimize friction between the cables and the conduit walls when
the installation requires multiple bends. Lubricants should only be used for difficult pulls.
F.
Where communication cables pass through termination closets, provide a coiled loop of
length sufficient to terminate both ends of cable at any location within the closet. Do not cut
cables. Termination of cables shall be done by others.
BUILDING TELEPHONE CABLES

A.
3.3
3.4
MULTI-PAIR TERMINAL BOARD INTERCONNECTING CABLE

A.
Install multi-pair telephone cable between building main service entrance and building
telephone closets.
B.
Building terminal board interconnecting cables shall be in accordance with the drawings and
shall be run in conduit except where supported on telephone closet backboards.
C.
Avoid locating telephone cables and telephone raceways close to steam pipes or other heat
generating equipment. Do not support from existing piping or conduit.
D.
Leave sufficient cable length at each end or run for future termination. Dress cable ends to
prevent entrance of moisture.
TAGGING
A.
3.5
Install building branch telephone cables in accessible ceilings and in raceways designated
for the purpose. Run cables in bundles, neatly tied together and to building supports with
plenum rated ties. Do not lay cables on top of suspended ceiling structure. Provide
necessary cable supports to festoon cable bundles in ceiling. Where plenum rated cables
are run above inaccessible ceilings, they shall be run in conduit.
Tag all telephone cables at each junction box, outlet box, and termination point with indelible
tags indicating origination and destination along with function of cable. Submit cable
numbering scheme and tagging system to Architect for review.
TERMINATION

16121 - 2
A.
Termination of all telephone cables shall be done by others. Where conductors are cut and
shall be subsequently exposed to moisture, they shall be protected by applying protective
tape.
END OF SECTION

16121 - 3

16121 - 4
SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Provisions of The General Contract (Design/Bid/Build) and Division 1 General Requirements

and applicable provisions elsewhere in the contract documents apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
B.

1.
2.
1.3
Section 16050 "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for supports, anchors, and
identification products.
Section 16140 "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor-box service
fittings.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing
B.
FMC: Flexible metal conduit
C.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit
D.
LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit
E.
LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit
F.
RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
intended use.
B.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

16130 - 1
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and suspension
system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light
fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1.
2.2
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A.
Available Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Grinnell Co./Tyco International; Allied Tube and Conduit Div.

LTV Steel Tubular Products Company.
Wheatland Tube Co.
B.
Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C.
IMC: ANSI C80.6.
D.
Plastic-Coated Steel Conduit and Fittings: NEMA RN 1.
E.
Plastic-Coated IMC and Fittings: NEMA RN 1.
F.
EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.

1.
Fittings: Set-screw type.
G.
FMC: Zinc-coated steel.
H.
LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
I.
Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials.
2.3
NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING

A.
1.
2.
3.
Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group

Carlon Products
Thomas & Betts Corporation

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

16130 - 2
B.
Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC): NEMA TC 2 and UL 651, Schedule 40 or 80 PVC.
C.
RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
2.4
METAL WIREWAYS
A.
1.
2.
B.
Material and Construction: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 3R.
C.
Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, holddown straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
D.
Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to
comply with NFPA 70.
E.
Wireway Covers: Hinged type.
F.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.5
BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.

Hoffman
Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.
RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.
B.
Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
C.
Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
D.
Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
E.
Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch.
1.
F.
2.6
Hoffman
Square D
Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 3R, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and
removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in
front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include
metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet
where required for freestanding equipment.
FACTORY FINISHES

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

16130 - 3
A.
Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard

prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RACEWAY APPLICATION
A.
Outdoors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Exposed: Rigid steel or IMC

Concealed: Rigid steel or IMC
Underground, Single Run: RNC
Underground, Grouped: RNC
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R
Indoors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Exposed: EMT
Concealed: EMT
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations
Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows:
a.
Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic.
C.
Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size (DN 21).
D.
Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1.
2.
3.2
Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise
indicated.
PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings approved for use with that
material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits.
INSTALLATION
A.
Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hotwater pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
B.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
C.
Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
D.
Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.
E.
Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved
portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

16130 - 4
F.
Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep
straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
H.
Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical and leave
at least 2 inches (50 mm) of concrete cover.
1.
2.
3.
4.
I.
Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete

placement.
Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete.
Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size (DN 27) parallel or at right angles to main
reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab
support.
Change from nonmetallic tubing to Schedule 80 nonmetallic conduit, rigid steel conduit,
or IMC before rising above the floor.
Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members
and follow surface contours as much as possible.
1.
2.
J.
Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance,
considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.
Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports.

Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows
can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways.
Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight.
1.
Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.
K.
Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools.
L.
Terminations:
1.
2.
Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter
squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside
and one outside box.
Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly
into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used,
align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are
exposed.
M.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each
end of pull wire.
N.
Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size (DN 53) and Smaller: In addition
to above requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet (45 m) and with a
maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes
where necessary to comply with these requirements.
O.
Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding
equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with
finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

16130 - 5
6 inches (150 mm) above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated, threaded plugs flush with floor
for future equipment connections.
P.
Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed
and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or
movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Install separate ground
conductor across flexible connections.
Q.
Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box
supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals.
R.
Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.
3.3
PROTECTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1.
2.
3.4
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.
Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
CLEANING
A.
After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and boxes, inspect exposed
finishes and repair damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

16130 - 6
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
A.
Provide wiring devices and accessories in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications.
B.
This section includes the following:

Single and double-duplex receptacles, ground-fault circuit interrupters.
2.
Single and double pole snap switches and dimmer switches.
3.
Device wall plates.
4.
Pin and sleeve connectors and receptacles.

DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
1.5
1.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.4

1,2:Single-Pole and Double-Pole, respectively

3,4: Three-Way and Four-Way, respectively
GFCI: Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter
IG: Isolated Ground
K: Key-Operated
P: Pilot Light - Load On
PO: Pilot Light - Load Off
TR: Tamper Resistant
TVSS: Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor
V: Variable Speed
EMI: Electromagnetic interference
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride
RFI: Radio-frequency interference
UTP: Unshielded twisted pair
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product specified.
B.
Samples: As requested.

WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 1
1.6
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Wiring Devices and accessories shall be of the same manufacturer insofar as possible.
B.
Device plates and accessories shall match corresponding wiring devices.
C.
Devices shall comply with UL 943 (Safety for Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters) published in
the November 1, 2001, bulletin, effective January 1, 2003.
D.

E.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
TVSS Receptacles: 1 for each 8 installed, but not less than 2 receptacles.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
A.
Wiring Devices and Device Plates:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Weatherproof Enclosure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc.

Hubbell Incorporated: Wiring Device-Kellems
Leviton Mfg. Company Inc
Bryant Electric, Inc./Hubbell Subsidiary
Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div.
Hubbell
Taymac
Thomas and Betts
Raco
RECEPTACLES
A.
Straight-Blade: Standard, IG, TVSS, IG with TVSS, and GFCI types shall be Hubbell 5362
series, heavy-duty, specification grade, 20A, unless otherwise indicated or required.
B.
Straight-Blade: Hubbell CBRF20 Commercial series, general-duty, specification grade, 20A,

unless otherwise indicated or required.
C.
Straight-Blade: Standard, IG, TVSS, IG with TVSS, GFCI, and TR types shall be Hubbell
8300 series, heavy-duty, hospital grade, 20A, unless otherwise indicated or required.

WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 2
2.3
D.
Straight- Blade-Type Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, DSCC W-C596G, and UL 498.
E.
Straight- Blade and Locking Receptacles: Heavy-Duty grade.
F.
Special Purpose Outlets: Heavy-duty grade of NEMA configuration indicated or required.

Special purpose outlets shall be receptacles other than single-plex or duplex, 125V, and 15A
or 20A non-locking type.
G.
GFCI Receptacles: Straight blade, feed-through type, Hospital grade, with integral
NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle; complying with UL 498 and
UL 943. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) deep outlet box without an
adapter.
H.
Industrial Heavy-Duty Pin and Sleeve Devices: Comply with IEC 309-1.
SWITCHES
A.
General: 1, 2, 3, 4, K, P (red polycarbonate lighted handle), PO (clear polycarbonate lighted

handle) types shall be Hubbell HBL1221 series, heavy-duty, specification grade, 20A, unless
otherwise indicated or required.
B.
General: 1, 2, 3, and 4 types shall be Hubbell CSB320 series, general-duty, specification

grade, 20A, unless otherwise indicated or required.
C.
30A Type: 1, 2, and 3 types shall be Hubbell HBL3031 series, heavy-duty, specification
grade, unless otherwise indicated or required.
D.
Body Color: 15A, blue. 20A, red. 30A, green.
E.
Momentary Contact Type: Three position, two circuit, center off type shall be Hubbell
HBL1557 series, heavy-duty, specification grade, 20A, with toggle or key as indicated.
F.
Maintained Contact Type: Three position, two circuit, center off type shall be Hubbell
HBL1385 series, heavy-duty, specification grade, 20A, with toggle or key as indicated.
Single or double pole as indicated.
G.
V Type: Hubbell ASF6 series, single pole slide AC type, with white device color.
H.
Single- and Double-Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-C-896F and UL 20.
I.
Snap Switches: Heavy-Duty grade, quiet type.
J.
Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on/off switches
and audible frequency and EMI/RFI filters.
1.
2.
Control: Continuously adjustable rotary knob; with single-pole or three-way

switching to suit connections.
Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular, 120 V, 60 Hz with continuously
adjustable rotary knob, toggle switch, or slider; single pole with soft tap or other
quiet switch; EMI/RFI filter to eliminate interference; and 5-inch (130-mm) wire
connecting leads.

WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 3
3.
2.4
WIRING DEVICE COLOR

A.
Single combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.

Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- (1-mm-) thick, satin-finished stainless
steel.
Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
Material for Wet Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and
listed and labeled for use in "wet locations."
Special condition colors:

1.
2.
3.
2.5
Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts;

trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination
capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full
brightness.
Emergency red.
IG receptacles, orange.
TVSS receptacles, blue.
DEVICE PLATES
A.
Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1.
Securing Screws: Metal with head color match device plate finish.
2.
Nylon: Ivory unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Stainless steel: 0.04-inch-thick (1-mm-thick) type 302 stainless steel.
4.
Brass: 0.04-inch-thick (1-mm-thick) brass (70% copper, 10% zinc), smooth satin
finish (without lines) appearance
5.
Aluminum: 0.05-inch-thick (1.3-mm-thick) aluminum, smooth clear anodized satin

finish (without lines) appearance.
6.
Brass plated Steel: 0.03-inch-thick (.8-mm-thick) brass plated steel, smooth satin
finish (without lines) appearance, coated to inhibit oxidation.
7.
Chrome plated Steel: 0.03-inch-thick (.8-mm-thick) chrome plated steel, smooth

satin finish (without lines) appearance, coated to inhibit oxidation.
8.
Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- (1-mm-) thick, satin-finished stainless

steel
9.
Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel
10.
Material for Wet Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed
and labeled for use in "wet locations."

WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 4
2.6
FINISHES
A.
Color:
1.
2.7
Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory, unless otherwise

indicated or required by NFPA 70
WEATHERPROOF ENCLOSURES
A.
NEMA 3R rating while in use when used with manufacturers recommended outlet box.
Gaskets are closed-cell foam. Meets OSHA lockout and tagout requirements. Enclosures
shall have latching covers and cord openings. UL listed and CSA certified with clearly
marked logos. Covers include gasket and mounting screws. Lids have gasketless design.
Holes for padlocks are 1/4 inch (0.635 cm).
B.
Metallic type shall be die cast alloy 360 copper-free aluminum with standard gray baked
aluminum lacquer finish. Coordinate color with Architect prior to submittals.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Receptacles over-counter shall be mounted horizontally, and vertically mounted elsewhere,

unless otherwise indicated. Mount horizontal receptacles with neutral blade slot up, and
mount vertical receptacles with ground prong hole up.
B.
Where receptacles are installed within one stud spacing width from a switch, the
convenience outlet and switch shall align vertically.
C.
Switches shall be located as indicated on drawings, arranged singular or in gangs and

within 18 inches (45.72 cm) of door jamb on the strike side of the door openings. Group
adjacent switches under single multi-gang wall plate. Verify the door swings with the
Architectural drawings prior to rough-in.
D.
Match receptacles and special purpose outlets to Owner-furnished equipment, unless

E.
Switch and receptacle combinations shall be as above in a 2-gang box where both are of
the same voltage. Provide separate boxes where different voltages are present.
F.
Install device plates as required for all device boxes and blanked outlet boxes.
G.
Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines..
H.
Device plates shall be marked on the inside indicating panelboard and circuit number to
which the device is connected.
I.
Device plates for two or more switches indicated at the same location shall be marked on
the outside to identify the load and location of load which each switch controls.
J.
Device plates for P type toggle switches shall be marked on the outside of each switch to
identify the load and location of load which the switch controls.

WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 5
3.2
K.
Device plates for special purpose outlets shall be marked on the outside to identify the load
and NEMA configuration of the receptacle.
L.
Devices indicated as weatherproof shall have a weatherproof enclosure unless otherwise

noted. Weatherproof enclosures for receptacles shall be marked on the outside
"SUITABLE FOR WET LOCATION WHILE IN USE."
M.
All 15 ampere and 20 ampere, 125 volt and 250 volt, non-locking receptacles installed in
damp or wet locations shall be listed as weather resistant.
N.
Labeling of device plates on the inside shall be by way of adhesive labels. Labeling of
device plates on the outside shall be by way of factory engraved labels.
O.
Adhesive labels shall be of clear or white Kroy, Brother, or Brady tape with black 1/4 inch
(0.635 cm) minimum height upper-case letters.
P.
Factory engraved labels shall be of black 1/4 inch (0.635 cm) minimum height recessed
upper-case letters
Q.
Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging according to
R.
Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to
S.
Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches
under single, multigang wall plates.
T.
Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting.

A.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
Protect wiring devices and assemblies during painting. Install device plates when
painting is complete.
2.
Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained,
damaged, or defective components.
3.
Test receptacles for proper polarity and ground continuity. Operate each
receptacle at least six times and replace receptacles which are damaged or
defective.
4.
Operate each switch at least six times and replace switches which are damaged or
defective.
5.
After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
test for proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements.
6.
Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to

WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 6

B.
3.3
Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Comply with Division 16 Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

1.
3.4
Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use
hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of
plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes
CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
B.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
END OF SECTION

WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 7

WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 8
SECTION 16170
MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
1.3

WORK INCLUDED
A.
Provide motor and circuit disconnects as scheduled and indicated on drawings.
B.
Motor and circuit disconnects are not always shown symbolically on the drawings. Refer to
plans and equipment schedule for quantities and types to be provided.
SHOP DRAWINGS AND DESCRIPTIVE DATA

A.
Shop drawings and descriptive data shall be submitted in accordance with Section 16010
and shall, as a minimum, include the following:
1.
2.
Manufacturer's descriptive catalog data.

Short circuit ratings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Motor and circuit disconnects shall be as manufactured by:

1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corp
General Electric
Siemens Energy & Automation
Square D

A.
Motor and circuit disconnects shall be NEMA standard Type heavy-duty, "HD," 100 percent
duty rated. Motor and circuit disconnects shall have quick-make, quick-break, visible blade
operating mechanisms with full cover interlock and facilities for padlocking in the "OFF" or
"OPEN" position. Motor and circuit disconnects shall be enclosed, UL listed, and horsepower
rated for the loads served. Motor and circuit disconnects shall have copper current carrying
parts and removable arc suppressors. Disconnect shall include front accessible provisions
for defeating the cover interlock.
B.
UL (NEMA) 1 enclosures shall be used in indoor and dry locations, UL (NEMA) 3R

enclosures shall be used in exterior or wet locations. UL (NEMA) 12 or 12x enclosures shall
be utilized where required. Hazardous location enclosures shall be rated for Class and
Division. Refer to drawings for hazardous locations.


16170 - 1
C.
Motor and circuit disconnects shall be fusible or non-fusible as indicated on the drawings or
as required and shall be of same or larger ampere rating as the circuit protective device, 30
ampere minimum. Disconnects, when fusible, shall be equipped with Class R, fuse rejection
clips.
D.
Motor and circuit disconnects shall include equipment ground lug.
E.
Motor and circuit disconnects shall include solid neutrals in 4-wire applications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Furnish and install motor and circuit disconnects for permanently connected motors larger
than 1/8 HP unless the connected device is complete with an approved disconnecting
means.
B.
Install motor and circuit disconnect immediately adjacent to its associated motor and within
sight of motor and drive equipment. Provide mounting hardware, unistrut rack, fuses, fuse
clips, and accessories as required for the application.
C.
In utility areas, mount motor and circuit disconnects on adjacent walls maintaining NEC
required access. Where required, due to access requirements, mount motor and circuit
disconnects on free standing unistrut stands adjacent to equipment.
D.
On roofs, or other exterior locations, mount motor and circuit disconnects on equipment or
provide free standing unistrut stand adjacent to equipment.
E.
Furnish and install labels in accordance with Section 16010.
F.
Provide fuses, including spare fuses, as indicated on the drawings and as indicated in
Section 16475.
END OF SECTION


16170 - 2
SECTION 16470
PANEL BOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
1.4

Provide panelboards in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For panelboard and overcurrent protection device types and necessary
accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each panelboard, include:

1.
Schedules indicating individual components and ratings. As a minimum, include

ampere, voltage, phase, and AIC ratings.
2.
Drawings shall contain overall panelboard dimensions, interior mounting

dimensions, and wiring gutter dimensions, conduit entrance sizes and locations,
arrangement of overcurrent protection, and installation details indicating mounting.
3.
Scaled plans and elevations for installed space of panelboard indicating clearances
and service space relative to adjacent surfaces.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Panelboards and switchboards throughout the project shall be of the same manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.2
Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corp
General Electric
Square D
INTERIORS
A.
Panelboard AIC ratings as indicated or required are established by the lowest rated
component of each panelboard. Series rating is not permitted unless otherwise noted. Each
panelboard shall be certified by the manufacturer as having been tested as a complete unit
under fault conditions to withstand the AIC rating indicated or required. Standard tests per
UL standards.

PANEL BOARDS
16470 - 1
2.3
B.
Panelboards shall have 100 percent rated aluminum buses for each phase and neutral.
Ground buses shall have rating and number and size of circuit connections per UL
requirements for connection to equipment grounding system. Provide 100 percent rated
copper ground bus for panelboards rated 225 amperes and less. Panelboards shall be
suitable for use as service equipment where indicated.
C.
Interior trim shall be of dead-front construction.
D.
Nameplate information shall include catalog number or factory order number, date of
manufacturing, UL Listed label, ampere, voltage, phase, and AIC ratings.
E.
Main overcurrent protection and main lug interiors shall be field convertible for top or bottom
incoming feed. Interior leveling provisions shall be provided for flush mounted applications.
F.
Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 type unless NEMA types 3R, 3S, 5, and 12 are indicated or
required. Enclosures shall have ANSI 49 gray enamel electrodeposited over cleaned
phosphatized steel.
G.
Doors shall have cylindrical tumbler type locks with catch and spring-loaded stainless steel
door pull. All lock assemblies shall be keyed alike. Provide 2 keys with each lock.
H.
A circuit directory frame and card with clear plastic covering shall be mounted on the inside
of door.
BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A.
Column-width type panelboards, and panelboards 14 inches (35.56 cm) wide and smaller,
are not permitted unless otherwise indicated. Provide auxiliary wiring gutters adequately
sized for wiring connections.
B.
UL Listed panelboards with 200 percent rated solid neutral shall be plated copper for nonlinear load applications. Panelboards shall be marked for non-linear load applications.
C.
Fronts shall be hinged 1-piece with door. Mounting shall be flush or surface as indicated on
Drawings.
D.
Fronts shall be flat with concealed door hinges and trim screws. Front shall not be
removable with the door locked.
E.
Each section of a multiple section panelboard shall be the same size. For two section
panelboards, the left side shall be "left hinged" and right side shall be "right hinged" unless
hinging restricts code egress clearances.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Mount panelboards with top of trim 6.5 feet (1.98 m) above the finish floor, unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
The fire rated integrity of walls in which flush mounted panelboards are installed shall be
maintained.

PANEL BOARDS
16470 - 2
3.2
C.
Field check phase loading and reconnect circuits as necessary for phase balance.
D.
Prior to energizing, retighten all field connections to manufacturer's torque specifications,

check that all grounding connections are proper, exercise devices to make certain that they
operate properly.
E.
A separate neutral conductor shall be installed with each branch circuit fed from panelboards
having a double or 200% neutral bus, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
A separate neutral conductor shall be installed with each branch circuit protected by an arcfault circuit interrupter circuit breaker.
G.
Provide facilities for future connection of additional loads. Two 1 inch spare conduits shall be
stubbed out above ceiling or run to an accessible location from each flush mounted branch
circuit panelboard. Two 2 inch spare conduits shall be stubbed out above ceiling or run to an
accessible location from each flush mounted distribution panelboard.
H.
Directory cards shall be completely filled out with all circuits adequately marked and shall be
typewritten. Room numbers shall be confirmed prior to completion. Spares shall be marked
"SPARE" in pencil. Spaces shall be marked "SPACE" in pencil.

A.
B.
C.
Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1.
Test insulation resistance for each panel board bus, component, connecting
supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Testing: After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1.
Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test
indicated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for moldedcase circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Balancing Loads: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes as follows:
1.
Measure as directed during period of normal system loading
2.
Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working

schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour
services such as fax machines and on-line data-processing, computing,
transmitting, and receiving equipment.
3.
After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load
readings before and after changes and submit test records.

PANEL BOARDS
16470 - 3
4.
D.
ADJUSTING
1.
E.
Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panel

board, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this
minimum requirement.
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
CLEANING
1.
On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards.

Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use
compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original
finish.
END OF SECTION

PANEL BOARDS
16470 - 4
SECTION 16475
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
A.
Provide fuses of type, size and manufacturer in accordance with the Drawings and
Specifications.
B.
Provide circuit breakers of type, size and manufacturer in accordance with the Drawings and
Specifications.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
1.5

Project Data: Include the following for each product specified:

1.
Coordination curves for each fuse type and size.
2.
Coordination curves for each circuit breaker type protecting motors and feeders.
3.
Coordination study comparing all fuses and circuit breakers protecting motors and
feeders. Include settings for electronic trip circuit breakers.
4.
If other than Bussmann fuses are provided, submit let-through values based upon
the available short circuit current values indicated on the one-line diagram.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Obtain fuses from one source and by a single manufacturer.
B.
Obtain circuit breakers from one source and by a single manufacturer which is the same
manufacturer as panelboard, switchboard, disconnecting device, etc.
C.
Provide overcurrent protection which is selectively coordinated to properly localize a fault

condition by restricting outages to the equipment affected.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Spare Fuses: Furnish quantity equal to 20 percent of each fuse type and size installed, but
not less than 2 sets of 3 of each type and size.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1


16475 - 1
A.
Circuit Breakers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Fuses:
1.
2.
2.2
2.3
2.4
Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corp.
General Electric
Square D
Bussmann
Shawmut
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
Circuit breakers shall be molded case, thermal-magnetic, quick-make, quick-break, trip-free

and trip indicating unless otherwise noted. Multi-pole breakers shall be common trip, use of
tie bars or pins is not acceptable.
B.
Minimum interrupting rating shall be 10,000 amperes or as required to maintain the

panelboard integrated short circuit rating in accordance with Drawings and Specification.
C.
Application listing shall be appropriate for application, including switching fluorescent lighting
loads or heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.
FUSES
A.
Fuse types shall be as indicated on the drawings and equipment schedules.
B.
Provide Class "J" time delay for mechanical equipment supplied with IEC rated disconnects,
starters, or combination starter.
SPARE FUSE CABINET

A.
Cabinet: Wall-mounted, 0.05-inch- (1.27-mm-) thick steel unit with full-length, recessed
piano-hinged door with key-coded cam lock and pull.
1.
Size: Adequate for orderly storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare
capacity minimum.
2.
Finish: Gray, baked enamel.
3.
Identification: Stencil legend "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) letters on

door.
4.
Fuse Pullers: For each size fuse.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Verify mechanical equipment overcurrent protective device size and type with name plate
data and starter data.


16475 - 2
3.2
B.
Install typewritten labels on inside door of each fused switch to indicate fuse replacement
information.
C.
Install spare fuse cabinet near the main service equipment, unless otherwise noted, with
neatly stored boxes of spare fuses within.

A.
B.
3.3
Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1.
Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch, circuit breaker, component,
and control circuit.
2.
Test continuity of each line- and load-side circuit.
Testing: After installing enclosed switches and circuit breakers and after electrical
circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with
requirements.
1.
Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test
indicated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for moldedcase circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
CLEANING
A.
On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint

splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
END OF SECTION


16475 - 3


16475 - 4
SECTION 16515
LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Section. Comply with all 2009 IECC requirements and provide supporting Comcheck.
SUMMARY
A.
This section includes the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3
Interior lighting fixtures with lamps and ballasts

Lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces
Emergency lighting units
Exit signs
Daylight Sensors
Occupancy sensors
Lighting Control Panel
B.
Provide luminaires, lamps, ballasts, and accessories in accordance with the Drawings and
Specifications.
C.
Luminaires requiring caps, mounting spaces, hold-down clips or other accessory items shall
be furnished complete with same whether the descriptions, catalog numbers, and notes on
the Drawings include such items or not.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture scheduled, arranged in order of fixture
designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Physical description of fixture, including dimensions and verification of indicated

parameters
Emergency lighting unit battery and charger
Fluorescent and high-intensity-discharge ballasts
Lamps
B.
Photometric reports performed by independent testing laboratory.
C.
Point-by-point computer generated calculations for area(s) and criteria indicated on

Drawings.
D.
Samples: As requested.
E.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
F.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in

LIGHTING
16515 - 1
Division 1 Section "Project Closeout " include the following:

1.
1.4
1.5
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Lamps: 10 lamps for every 100 of each type installed, but not less than 1.
B.
Ballasts: 1 for every 100 of each type installed, but not less than 1.
C.
Lenses: 1 for every 100 of each type installed, but not less than 1.
D.
Guards: 1 for every 20 of each type installed, but not less than 1.
DEFINITIONS
A.
BF: Ballast factor. Ratio of light output of a given lamp(s) operated by the subject ballast
to the light output of the same lamp(s) when operated on an ANSI reference circuit.
B.
CRI: Color rendering index
C.
CU: Coefficient of utilization
D.
LER: Luminaire efficiency rating, which is calculated according to NEMA LE 5. This

value can be estimated from photometric data using the following formula:
1.
E.
1.6
1.7
Catalog data for each fixture. Include the diffuser, ballast, and lamps installed in
that fixture.
LER is equal to the product of total rated lamp lumens times BF times luminaire
efficiency, divided by input watts.
RCR: Room cavity ratio.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

B.
Comply with NFPA 70
C.
NFPA 101 Compliance: Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit signs
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment,
fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Luminaires shall have manufacturers standard finish unless otherwise noted. Provide

LIGHTING
16515 - 2
"Damp Location" label where indicated or required.
2.2
B.
Recessed or semi-recessed luminaires shall be designed to be compatible with ceiling as

installed. Furnish and install frames where required for proper installation. Supply with trim
that is compatible with ceiling system in which it shall be installed.
C.
Luminaires shall have integral ballasts unless otherwise noted. Ballasts for recessed
luminaires shall be fully accessible through ceiling opening of luminaire unless otherwise
noted.
D.
Luminaires shall be of the prewired type with integral junction box.
E.
Luminaires shall be labeled with acceptable lamping. Labeling shall be in a location that is
visible during relamping.
MANUFACTURERS
A.

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
B.
Luminaires shall be of manufacturer and type as indicated or scheduled on the Drawings.
C.
Lamps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Fluorescent Ballasts:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Advance
Lutron
Osram/Sylvania (Excluded for Compact Fluorescent)
Universal (Excluded for Compact Fluorescent)
Battery Pack Assemblies:

1.
2.
3.
2.3
Advance
Osram/Sylvania
Universal
Fluorescent Dimming Ballasts:

1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
General Electric
Osram/Sylvania
Philips
Venture (for metal halide products)
Bodine
Lightolier
Lithonia
FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL

A.
Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

LIGHTING
16515 - 3
B.
Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed
fixtures.
C.
Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5A.
D.
Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
E.
HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5B.
F.
Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
G.
Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to
prevent warping and sagging.
H.
Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage
under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools.
Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling
accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
I.
Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise

indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
J.
White Surfaces: 85 percent.

Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.
Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:

1.
Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
a.
b.
2.
K.
Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless

different thickness is scheduled.
UV stabilized.
Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.
Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output except for
emergency lamps powered by in-fixture battery-packs.
2.
Electronic ballasts for linear lamps shall include the following features, unless
otherwise indicated:
a.
Comply with NEMA C82.11.
b.
Sound Rating: A.
c.
Total harmonic distortion rating of less than 20 percent according to
NEMA C82.11.
d.
Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A.

LIGHTING
16515 - 4
e.
L.
M.
2.4
Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full

light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.
Fluorescent Lamps
1.
Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with Federal toxic characteristic leaching

procedure test, and yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter, when tested
according to NEMA LL 1.
2.
T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, 2800 initial lumens

(minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500K, and average rated
life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated
3.
T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 35 W maximum, 1600 initial lumens

(minimum), CRI of 84 (minimum), color temperature of 2800k, and average rated
life of 10,000 hours
4.
T5 High Output rapid-start low mercury lamps, rated 54 W, 5000 initial lumens,
CRI of 85 (minimum), color temperature of3500K, and average rated life of
20,000 hours
Fixture Support Components

1.
Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for
channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
2.
Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy
designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture
EXIT SIGNS
A.
B.
XI: LED EXIT SIGNS: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors and lettering size, comply with
1.
X1: LED Emergency Exit Sign, universal mount.
a.
Product : Dual-Lite LXUGBE
2.
Internally Lighted Signs:

a.
Lamps for AC Operation: 2 for each fixture, 20,000 hours of rated lamp
life.
3.
Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Self-contained, modular, batteryinverter unit with heater, factory mounted within fixture body.
a.
Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type with special
warranty.
b.
Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.
c.
Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit
voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal
voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is
automatically recharged and floated on charger.
XIA: LED EXIT SIGNS: Comply with UL 924 Wet location listed/UL Type 504X rated;
for sign colors and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

LIGHTING
16515 - 5
1.
X1A: LED Emergency Exit Sign at wet location, universal mount.

a.
Product: Dual-Lite LN4XRW
2.
Internally lighted signs:

a.
Lamps for AC operation: 2 for each fixture, 20,000 hours of rated lamp
life.
3.
2.5
EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A.
B.
EM1: Emergency Lighting, wall-mount.

1.
Acceptable Products:
a.
Lightolier EN-1-18L-T12-W-SD2
b.
Lightolier ER1-T6-WG
2.
Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type with minimum 10-year

nominal life and special warranty.
3.
4.
Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage
drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically
disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When
normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is
5.
Wire Guard: Where indicated, heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp

heads or fixtures.
6.
Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval when power is
restored after an outage; time delay permits high-intensity-discharge lamps to
restrike and develop adequate output.
EM2: Exterior Emergency Lighting Unit, wall mount

1.
Product: Dual-Lite PGZ-HTR
2.
2.6
Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter

unit with heater, factory mounted within fixture body.
b.
Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type with special
warranty.
c.
d.
Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit
voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal
voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is
Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit with heater, factory

mounted within fixture body. Comply with UL 924.
FLUORESCENT HIGH BAY LUMINAIRES

LIGHTING
16515 - 6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
A.
F1: Fluorescent High Bay Luminaires with (6) 32 T8 bulbs, with wire guards, pendent
mounted from threaded rods to be located over the aisles of each bay (beneath the Bent
Frames).
1.
Product: Columbia Lighting VersaBay LHV4-632-M4RST
B.
F1A: Fluorescent High Bay Luminaires for wet locations; WL enclosed, gasketed
luminaire (waterproof) for wash bay.
Product: Columbia Lighting Severe Fiberglass High Bay XFSW4-632-CP-GWU
INTERIOR STRIP FLUORESCENT FIXTURE

A.
F5: wall mount interior 4 foot strip with wire guard.

1.
Product: Columbia Lighting K4-232
B.
F5A: for wet conditions: wall mount interior 4 foot strip with polycarb lens.
1.
Product: Columbia Lighting LUN4-232
INTERIOR OFFICE FIXTURES

A.
F4: Interior Office Fixture: 2 ft x 4 ft recessed parabolic reflector

1.
Product: Pinnacle Parabolic Reflector ADEO AD24A-2T8-S-UNV-2C-W
B.
F9: Wall-mount interior fixture, 2 foot long surface fixture

1.
Product: Columbia Lighting WPM2-217
C.
F3: Recessed can down light, 6 inch diameter recessed can.

1.
Product: Prescolite CFT632EB
D.
S1: Wall mount interior 4 foot fluorescent wrap.

1.
Product: Columbia Lighting R04-232-EU
EXTERIOR (Mounted on Building)

A.
F7: Photocell-controlled Dark Sky Compliant surface mounted CFL flood light
1.
Product: Hubbell LMC-30LU-4K-3
B.
F8: Photocell-controlled Dark Sky Compliant surface mounted CFL light at exterior door.
1.
Product: Hubbell NRG-1143-B
FINISHES
A.
Fixtures: Manufacturers' standard, unless otherwise indicated.

1.
2.
2.11
Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer, free of

defects.
Metallic Finish: Corrosion resistant.
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A.
Provide occupancy sensors in offices, bathrooms, storage rooms, and open admin area
in compliance with the 2009 IECC.
B.
Products: Sensor Switch WSD Series or approved equal

LIGHTING
16515 - 7
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
DAYLIGHT HARVESTING SENSORS AND CONTROLS

A.
Provide daylight harvesting sensors with overrides on all vehicle storage bay fixtures.
Sensors to be connected to lighting control panel appropriate for daylight harvesting.
Daylight harvesting to be based on foot candle requirements determined by Design Build
MEP and approved by CDOT
B.
Products
1.
Daylight Sensor at VSF

a.
Sensor Switch CM-PC Series
2.
Lighting Control Panel : Acceptable Products and Manufacturers:

a.
Hubbel Building Automation CX Lighting Control Panel
www.hubbel-automation.com
b.
Lighting Control & Design
www.lightingcontrols.com
FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES
A.
Luminaires may be connected with factory supplied whips of six foot lengths or less.
B.
Luminaires shall have metallic surfaces protected with rust-inhibiting white baked enamel.
Reflective surfaces shall have minimum 85 percent reflectance, white enamel, high
temperature baked. Provide all wiring channels, internal barriers, socket wiring covers, end
caps, reflectors, etc.
C.
Acrylic diffuser type lenses shall be virgin acrylic, 0.125 inches (0.3175 cm) thick minimum.
D.
Doors shall be capable of hinging from either side and gasketed to prevent leakage of light
around door frame edges.
LAMPS
A.
Incandescent lamps shall be rated 130 volts, and of the inside frost type unless otherwise
noted.
B.
Fluorescent lamps shall utilize rare earth triphosphor technology.
C.
Fluorescent T-8 and compact fluorescent lamps shall be 4000 K color temperature and Color
Rendering Index of 82 or greater.
ELECTRONIC FLUORESCENT BALLASTS

A.
Unless otherwise noted, linear or U-tube lamp ballasts shall be fully electronic, integrated
circuit, solid-state, programmed start, full-light-output, energy-efficient type. The ballast shall
be physically interchangeable with a standard core and coil electromagnetic ballast.
1.
Ballast shall operate lamps at a frequency of 40 Khz or higher without visible flicker.
2.
Audible Noise Rating: Sound rating better than A.

LIGHTING
16515 - 8
B.
3.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 10 percent.
4.
Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.
5.
Ballast Factor: 0.88 or higher.
6.
Crest Factor: 1.6 or less.
7.
Certification by Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) or internally certified laboratory to

ensure ballast meets ANSI specifications.
8.
Conform to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and regulations, Part

18, for non-consumer equipment.
9.
Conform to ANSI C82.11 standards regarding harmonic distortion.
10.
Conform to ANSI C62.41 Cat. A for transient protection.
11.
UL listed Class P.
12.
Minimum starting temperature of 0 degrees F (-18 degrees C) for exterior fixtures.
Compact fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be fully electronic, integrated circuit, solid-state,
programmed rapid start, full-light-output, energy-efficient type. The ballast shall be physically
interchangeable with a standard core and coil electromagnetic ballast.
1.
Ballast shall operate lamps at a frequency of 40 Khz or higher without visible flicker.
2.
Audible Noise Rating: Sound rating better than A.
3.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 10 percent.
4.
Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.
5.
Ballast Factor: 0.95 or higher.
6.
Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
7.
Certification by Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) or internally certified laboratory to

ensure ballast meets ANSI specifications.
8.
Conform to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and regulations, Part

18, for non-consumer equipment.
9.
Conform to ANSI C82.11 standards regarding harmonic distortion.
10.
Conform to ANSI C62.41 Cat. A for transient protection.
11.
UL listed Class P.
12.
Minimum starting temperature of -5 degrees F (-21 degrees C).

LIGHTING
16515 - 9
2.16
C.
Manufacturer shall provide a five year warranty beginning at the time of Substantial
Completion. The manufacturer shall replace any and all failed ballasts within 48 hours of
notification. Manufacturer shall provide labor for warranty replacements, phone number, and
fax number to report outages.
D.
Compact fluorescent type shall have circuitry designed to shut down the system reliably and
safely when lamps have reached their end-of-life to protect against overheated bases and
sockets, as well as cracking of the lamp glass wall.
ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
Battery Pack Assemblies: Fluorescent luminaires indicated to include battery packs shall
contain a battery pack assembly consisting of a battery, charger, inverter, and electronic
circuitry enclosed in one compact red case. Battery packs shall operate two lamps to
produce a minimum of 1100 lumens unless otherwise noted. Luminaire shall have valid UL
label with battery pack installed at luminaire manufacturer's factory.
1.
Test Switch and LED Indicator Light: Charging indicator light to monitor the charger
and battery with test switch and hardware. Visible and accessible without opening
fixture or entering ceiling space, and integral to luminaire unless otherwise noted.
2.
Battery: High-temperature, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type with minimum

10-year nominal life. Capable of operating lamp for a minimum of 90 minutes.
3.
Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type.
4.
Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when supply circuit voltage drops to
80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Relay disconnects lamp and battery and
automatically recharges when normal voltage is restored.
5.
Self-testing and Self-diagnostic: Continually monitors charging current and battery

voltage, and automatically performs a minimum 30 second test and diagnostic
routine at least once every 30 days and once a year for 90 minutes. Unit indicates
failure by a status indicator light and audible alarm.
Poles, bracket arms, appurtenances, and anchorage material shall be of matching color.
Same shall be sufficient to support effective projected areas of luminaires and pole supplied
without failure, permanent deflection, or damage to lamp filaments against steady winds of
100 mi/hr (160 km/hr) with a gust factor of 1.3.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Confirm compatibility and interface of other materials with luminaire and ceiling system. In
the event of any discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. Do not proceed with
installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been resolved.
B.
Coordinate the installation of luminaires with the schedule of work of other trades to prevent
unnecessary delays in the total work.

LIGHTING
16515 - 10
C.
Where luminaires are shown in conflict with locations of structural members, mechanical or
other equipment, furnish and install all required supports and wiring to clear the
encroachment.
D.
Luminaires shall be installed as indicated and/or noted and in accordance with the NEC and
the manufacturer's recommendations. Where mounting dimensions are not shown, refer to
Architectural drawings for installation details.
E.
Luminaires shall be located in accordance with architectural reflected ceiling plans unless
otherwise indicated. Luminaire locations shall be exactly moduled with ceiling tile where
same occurs.
F.
Recessed luminaires shall be complete with all required hardware and accessories in each
case. Where "lay-in" luminaires cannot be used in suspended ceilings, recessed luminaires
shall be installed complete with bar hangers and shall be supported from the ceiling
suspension system.
G.
In areas with "lay-in" ceilings, support wires shall be used to connect recessed, surface, or
pendant mounted luminaires to the structure above. Recessed and surface mounted
luminaires shall also be positively attached to the suspension system of the "lay-in" ceiling
assembly.
H.
Surface-mounted luminaires shall be supported from outlet box fixture studs, mounting
brackets or mounting straps or shall be secured directly to the structural system. Outlet
boxes and mounting brackets (or straps) shall be secured to a joist or similar structural unit or
to an approved metal support which is secured to such a structural unit. The use of toggle
bolts for luminaire support shall not be permitted.
I.
Wall-mounted luminaires shall be supported by wall brackets secured to luminaire studs in

the outlet boxes or to outlet box "ears."
J.
Pendant mounted luminaires shall hang even regardless of uneven or sloping ceilings.
Maximum pendant spacing shall be 4 feet where luminaires having 4 foot channels are used.
"Twin" stem assemblies shall not be permitted.
K.
Installation of luminaires in mechanical rooms shall be coordinated with the ductwork and
other obstructions. Provide special hangers as required.
L.
Luminaires shall be provided with new lamps prior to final acceptance of the project. Any
lamps used for more than ninety (90) days as temporary lighting shall be replaced by the
contractor.
M.
Poles are to be set on concrete base provided by General Contractor. Concrete 24 inch
extended bases shall be provided only where within confined parking areas. All other pole
bases shall be adjusted to grade level. Contractor shall deliver anchor bolts and templates
furnished with poles to General Contractor for setting in concrete base. Provide conduit
sleeves in bases for conductors and grounds. Verify locations and type of base, extended or
flush, with Architect prior to installation.
N.
Ballasts shall be integrally mounted in all luminaires unless otherwise noted.
O.
All new fluorescent luminaires that utilize double-ended lamps and contain ballast(s) that
can be serviced in place shall have a disconnecting means either internal or external to

LIGHTING
16515 - 11
each luminaire per 2008 NEC, article 410.130 G(1).
3.2
P.
Photocells shall be mounted in a protected area facing north and shall be shielded to prevent
influence from other night lighting sources. Set relay contact closure at approximately 2
footcandles (20 lux).
Q.
Clean all luminaires of construction dirt and paint prior to project close out. Use methods and
materials recommended by manufacturer.
INSTALLATION
A.
Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each
fixture.
B.
Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid for support
1.
2.
3.
3.3
C.
Suspended Fixture Support: As follows

1.
Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit
swinging
2.
Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
3.
Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod
for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
D.
Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities
CONNECTIONS
A.
3.4
Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture.
Locate not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from fixture corners.
Support Clips: Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each
fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.
Fixutres of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling
plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at
least two 3/4-inch (20-mm) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486.

A.
Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B.
Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation
C.
Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.
Verify normal transfer to battery power source and retransfer to normal
D.
Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating

and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to
demonstrate compliance with standards.
E.
Corroded Fixtures: During warranty period, replace fixtures that show any signs of

LIGHTING
16515 - 12
corrosion
END OF SECTION

LIGHTING
16515 - 13

LIGHTING
16515 - 14

1 Specifications PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1 Specifications PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

STATE OF COLORADO

DE BEQUE + RIFLE 10-FT ADDITIONS

SAP #18942 (RIFLE)

August 28, 2013

Additional Project Information:

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Provisions of The General Conditions of the Contract (Design/Bid/Build) and Division 1

WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

The Project Information and Contacts are:

DE BEQUE & RIFLE 10-FT ADDITIONS

Colorado Department of Transportation

Colorado Department of Transportation

CDOT Project Manager:

Anne Feeser- Olesen

Chris Jahn, AIA

Richard Weingardt Consultants, Inc.

DE BEQUE & RIFLE 10-FT ADDITIONS

Geotechnical Report: Reference

CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES

Allow for Owner occupancy and use.

DE BEQUE & RIFLE 10-FT ADDITIONS

State Electrical and State Plumbing permits

Owner pays the following fees:

State contracted code review, inspection fees

PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

DE BEQUE & RIFLE 10-FT ADDITIONS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DE BEQUE & RIFLE 10-FT ADDITIONS

Related Documents: Provisions of The General Conditions of the Contract (Design/Bid/Build)

Indicated refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, paragraphs or

Testing Agency is an independent entity, or Geotechnical Company of Record, engaged to

DE BEQUE & RIFLE 10-FT ADDITIONS

Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications is abbreviated. Implied words and

CODES, ORDINANCES, PERMITS AND FEES

DE BEQUE & RIFLE 10-FT ADDITIONS

The 2009 edition of the International Building Code (IBC)

DE BEQUE & RIFLE 10-FT ADDITIONS

Sheet Metal and Conditioning Contractors National Assoc. Standards (SMACNA)

DE BEQUE & RIFLE 10-FT ADDITIONS

PRODUCTS (Not Applicable):

EXECUTION (Not Applicable):

DE BEQUE & RIFLE 10-FT ADDITIONS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DE BEQUE & RIFLE 10-FT ADDITIONS

Provisions of The General Conditions of the Contract (Design/Bid/Build) and Division 1

Preconstruction Conference: Contractor shall attend a preconstruction conference, to be

Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Sub-Consultants

DE BEQUE & RIFLE 10-FT ADDITIONS

PRODUCTS (Not Applicable):

EXECUTION (Not Applicable):

Provisions of The General Conditions of the Contract (Design/Bid/Build) and Division 1

Summary: This Section specifies requirements for handling submittals.

General Procedures: Coordinate submittal preparation with performance of construction

CDOT Project Name and Project Number

Submittal Transmittal: Package submittals appropriately for transmittal and handling.

Project-Specific Submittal Log: Owner will provide a project-specific Submittal Log to

Contractor's Construction Schedule: The Contractor shall submit a written/electronic detailed

Weekly Construction Reports: Contractor shall prepare a weekly construction report

General weather conditions, if applicable.

Manufacturer's Operations Manuals/Instructions: Prepare written or published information

Manufacturers Maintenance Manuals/Instructions: Prepare written or published information

DE BEQUE & RIFLE 10-FT ADDITIONS

Dimensions, elevations, heights, etc.